MX2014011776A

MX2014011776A - Movable member for use with a tissue thickness compensator.

Info

Publication number: MX2014011776A
Application number: MX2014011776A
Authority: MX
Inventors: Joshua R Uth; Jeffrey S Swayze; Frederick E Shelton Iv; Richard L Leimbach; John L Stammen; Samuel P Tidwell
Original assignee: Ethicon Endo Surgery Inc
Priority date: 2012-03-28
Filing date: 2013-03-27
Publication date: 2015-05-11
Also published as: JP6258292B2; CN104394780A; RU2627629C2; JP2015513965A; RU2014143273A; BR112014024305B1; CN104394780B; BR112014024305A2; MX351607B

Abstract

A cutting blade for a surgical cutting and stapling instrument is disclosed therein. The cutting blade can include one or more features to direct or displace substances released from within the tissue thickness compensators used with the surgical instrument. The cutting blade may include a textured surface that can cause substances from the tissue thickness compensator to spread across the blade surface.

Description

MOBILE MEMBER TO BE USED WITH A COMPENSATOR TISSUE THICKNESS BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in various embodiments, to surgical cutting and stapling instruments and staple cartridges for these that are designed for cutting and stapling of tissues.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The following is a non-exhaustive list of the embodiments of the present invention that can be claimed or claimed. 1. A disposable loading unit for a surgical stapler, the surgical stapler comprises an anvil, the disposable loading unit comprising: a housing unit; a staple cartridge unit, wherein the staple cartridge unit comprises a staple cartridge body defining a staple cover and a slot, wherein the staple cartridge unit further comprises a tissue thickness compensator. arranged adjacent to the staple cover, and wherein the tissue thickness compensator comprises a substance thereon; a knife unit positioned within the housing unit and arranged to move relative to the staple cartridge unit along the slot, the knife unit comprises: a cutting surface configured to cut the fabric thickness compensator captured between the staple cartridge unit and an anvil of the surgical stapler when the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit; Y an interacting surface disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the interaction surface is configured to direct at least a portion of said substance within the tissue thickness compensator as the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit. 2. The disposable loading unit of mode 1, wherein the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second surface opposite the blade. first surface, and wherein the first surface comprises the interaction surface. 3. The disposable loading unit of mode 2, wherein the interaction surface comprises a raised ridge on the first surface of the blade. 4. The disposable loading unit of mode 2 or mode 3, wherein the interaction surface comprises a channel in the first surface of the blade. 5. The disposable loading unit of any mode 2-4, wherein the interaction surface is a first interaction surface; wherein the second surface of the blade unit further comprises a second interaction surface disposed relative to the cutting surface, the second interaction surface being configured to direct at least a portion of said substance within the compensator of fabric thickness when the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit. 6. The disposable loading unit of mode 5, wherein the second interaction surface comprises a raised ridge on the second surface of the blade. 7. The disposable loading unit of mode 5 or mode 6, wherein the second interaction surface comprises a channel in the second surface of the blade. 8. The disposable loading unit of any embodiment 1-4, wherein the tissue thickness compensator is a first tissue thickness compensator, wherein said substance is a first substance, and wherein the interaction surface is a first surface of interaction, and wherein the disposable load unit comprises, in addition: a second tissue thickness compensator configured to be disposed adjacent the anvil of the surgical stapler, wherein the second tissue thickness compensator comprises a second substance therein; Y a second interaction surface disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the second interaction surface is configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance within the second tissue thickness compensator when the knife unit moves with respect to to the cartridge unit. 9. The disposable loading unit of the embodiment 8, wherein the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the blade comprises the cutting surface, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second surface opposite the first surface , wherein the first and second interaction surfaces are arranged on the first surface of the blade, and wherein the second surface comprises: a third interaction surface disposed relative to the cutting surface and configured to direct at least a portion of the first substance within the first tissue thickness compensator when the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit; Y a fourth interaction surface disposed relative to the cutting surface and configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance within the second tissue thickness compensator when the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit. 10. The disposable loading unit of mode 8 or mode 9, where the first substance is different from the second substance. 11. The disposable loading unit of any previous embodiment, wherein the knife unit further comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, and wherein the blade comprises a textured surface. 12. A surgical stapler, comprising: a handle; a trigger configured to move between a non-driven position and a driven position; a staple cartridge operatively connected to the trigger, wherein the staple cartridge defines a staple cover and a slot; an anvil operatively connected to the handle, wherein the anvil comprises at least one staple forming surface; a fabric thickness compensator disposed relative to the staple cover and the anvil, the tissue thickness compensator comprises a substance within; Y a knife unit and arranged to move relative to the staple cartridge along the slot, the knife unit comprises a cutting surface configured to cut the thickness compensator of tissue disposed relative to the staple cartridge and the anvil, the knife unit further comprises a guide disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the guide is configured to direct at least a portion of said substance within the compensator of fabric thickness when the blade unit moves relative to the staple cartridge. 13. The surgical stapler of the embodiment 12, wherein the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second surface opposite the first surface , and where the first surface comprises the guide. 14. The surgical stapler of mode 13, wherein the guide comprises a raised ridge on the first surface of the blade. 15. The surgical stapler of mode 13 or mode 14, wherein the guide comprises a channel on the first surface of the blade. 16. The surgical stapler of any mode 13-15, wherein the guide is a first guide, and wherein the second surface of the knife unit comprises, in addition: a second guide disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the second guide is configured to direct at least a portion of said substance within the tissue thickness compensator when the blade unit moves relative to the cartridge unit . 17. The surgical stapler of mode 16, wherein the second guide comprises a raised ridge on the second surface of the blade. 18. The surgical stapler of mode 16 or modality 17, wherein the second guide comprises a channel on the second surface of the blade. 19. The surgical stapler of any embodiment 12-15, wherein the tissue thickness compensator is a first tissue thickness compensator disposed relative to the staple cover, wherein said substance is a first substance, wherein the guide is a first guide, the surgical stapler further comprises a second tissue thickness compensator disposed relative to the anvil, the second tissue thickness compensator comprises a second substance therein, and wherein the knife unit further comprises a second guide arranged in relation to the cutting surface, wherein the second guide is configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance into the second tissue thickness compensator. 20. The surgical stapler of the modality 19, wherein the blade unit comprises, in addition: a blade, wherein the blade defines the cutting surface, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second surface opposite the first surface, and wherein the first surface comprises the first guide and the second guide, and where the second surface comprises: a third guide disposed relative to the cutting surface and configured to direct at least a portion of the first substance within the first tissue thickness compensator when the knife unit moves relative to the staple cartridge; Y a fourth guide disposed relative to the cutting surface and configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance into the second tissue thickness compensator when the knife unit moves relative to the staple cartridge. 21. The surgical stapler of mode 19 or modality 20, where the first substance is different from the second substance. 22. The surgical stapler of any of the modes 12-21, wherein the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, and wherein the blade comprises a textured surface.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES The characteristics and advantages of the present invention, as well as the way to obtain them, will be more evident and the invention itself will be will better understand with reference to the following description of embodiments of the invention taken in conjunction with the accompanying figures, wherein: Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional view of one embodiment of a surgical instrument; FIG. 1A is a perspective view of one embodiment of an implantable staple cartridge; Figs. 1 B to 1 E illustrate portions of an end effector that holds and staples a tissue with an implantable staple cartridge; FIG. 2 is a side view in partial cross section of another end effector coupled to a portion of a surgical instrument with the end effector supporting a surgical staple cartridge and with the anvil thereof in an open position; Fig. 3 is another side view in partial cross section of the end effector of Fig. 2 in a closed position; Fig. 4 is another side view in partial cross-section of the end effector of Figs. 2 and 3 when the blade bar begins to advance through the end effector; Fig. 5 is another side view in partial cross section of the end effector of Figs. 2 to 4 with the blade bar partially advanced through it; Fig. 6 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the staple cartridge installed in a surgical stapling and cutting device; Fig. 7 is a top view of the surgical staple cartridge and the elongated channel of the device shown in Fig. 6; Fig. 8 is a top view of another embodiment of the surgical staple cartridge installed in an elongated channel of an end effector; Fig. 9 is a bottom view of an anvil; Fig. 10 is a partial perspective view of a plurality of staples forming a portion of a line of staples; Fig. 11 is another partial perspective view of the staple line of Fig. 10 with staples thereof after being formed upon contact with the anvil of the surgical stapling and cutting device; Fig. 12 is a partial perspective view of the alternative staples forming a portion of another line of staples; Fig. 13 is a partial perspective view of the alternative staples forming a portion of another staple line; Fig. 14 is a partial perspective view of the alternative staples forming a portion of another embodiment of a line of staples; Fig. 15 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector supporting a staple cartridge; Fig. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the elongated channel portion of the end effector of Fig. 15 after the body portion of the implantable staple cartridge and staples have been removed therefrom; FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector supporting another staple cartridge; Figs. 18A to 18D graphically depict the deformation of a surgical staple positioned within a body of a staple staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 19A is a diagram illustrating a staple positioned in a body of a collapsible staple cartridge; Fig. 19B is a diagram illustrating the collapsible staple cartridge body of Fig. 19A being crushed by an anvil; Fig. 19C is a diagram illustrating the collapsible staple cartridge body of Fig. 19A which is further crushed by the anvil; Fig. 19D is a diagram illustrating the clip of Fig. 19A in a fully formed configuration and the collapsible staple cartridge of Fig. 19A in a fully collapsed condition; Fig. 20 is a diagram showing a staple positioned against a staple cartridge support surface and illustrating the potential relative movement between them; Fig. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a supporting surface of the staple cartridge comprising a slot, or channel, configured to stabilize the staple base of Fig. 20; Fig. 22 is a cross-sectional view of a staple comprising an overmolded crown and a slot, or channel, configured to receive a portion of the crown according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 23 is a top view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising staples incorporated in a body of the staple cartridge staple; Fig. 24 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 23; Fig. 25 is an elevational view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising a protective layer surrounding the staples positioned within a body of the staple staple cartridge; Fig. 26 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig.25 taken along line 26-26 in Fig. 25; Fig. 27 is an elevation view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising the staples that extend at least partially outside a body of the staple cartridge and a protective layer surrounding the body of the cartridge. of staples; Fig. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 27 taken along line 28-28 in Fig. 27; Fig. 29 is a partial fragmentary view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising staples at least partially incorporated into a body of the staple staple cartridge, the staples being positioned at least partially in a vacuum of the staple pocket in the body of the staple cartridge; Fig. 30 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 29 taken along line 30-30 in Fig. 29; Fig. 31 is a partial fractional view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 32 is a partial fractional view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising staples at least partially incorporated within a body of the staple staple cartridge and an alignment die connecting the staples and aligning staples. staples with respect to each other; Fig. 33 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 32 taken along line 33-33 in Fig. 32; Fig. 34 is a partial sectional view of an inner layer of a compressible staple cartridge body; Fig. 35 is a diagram illustrating the inner layer of Fig. 34 compressed between a transfer plate and a support plate; Fig. 36 is a diagram illustrating staples that are inserted into the compressed inner layer of Fig. 35; Fig. 37 is a diagram of the support plate of Fig. 35 that is removed from the inner layer; Fig. 38 is a diagram of a subassembly comprising the inner layer of Fig. 34 and the staples of Fig. 36 that are inserted into an outer layer; Fig. 39 is a diagram illustrating the outer layer of Fig. 38 which is sealed to form a sealed staple cartridge; Fig. 40 is a cross-sectional view of the sealed staple cartridge of Fig. 39; Fig. 41 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge and the staple cartridge channel according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 42 is a diagram illustrating a portion of the staple cartridge of Fig. 41 in a deformed state; Fig. 43 is an elevation view of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising an anvil in an open position and a staple cartridge positioned within a channel of the staple cartridge; Fig. 44 is an elevational view of the end effector of Fig. 43 illustrating the anvil in a closed position and the staple cartridge compressed between the anvil and the staple cartridge channel; Fig. 45 is an elevational view of the end effector of Fig. 43 illustrating the staple cartridge of Fig. 43 positioned within the staple cartridge channel in an alternative manner; Fig. 46 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a compressible staple cartridge positioned within a staple cartridge channel and a piece of base material coupled to an anvil; Fig. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 46 illustrating the anvil in a closed position; Fig. 48 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising an impermeable layer; Fig. 49 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler; Fig. 50 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a stepped anvil and a staple cartridge comprising a stepped cartridge body; FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler; Fig. 52 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising inclined tissue contacting surfaces; Fig. 53 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising inclined tissue contacting surfaces; Fig. 54 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a support piece configured to support a staple cartridge; Fig. 55 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a plurality of compressible layers; Fig. 56 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a stepped compressible cartridge body; Fig. 57 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a stepped compressible cartridge body; Fig. 58 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a contact surface with the curved tissue; FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge having a contact surface with the tissue tilted; Fig. 60 is a cross-sectional view of a compressible staple cartridge comprising the staples and at least one medicament stored thereon; Fig. 61 is a diagram illustrating the compressible staple cartridge of Fig. 60 after it has been compressed and the staples contained therein have been deformed; Fig. 62 is a partial sectional view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig.62; Fig. 64 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge implanted in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the implanted staple cartridge of Fig.64; Fig. 66 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising deformable members extending from an outer layer of the staple cartridge; Fig. 67 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising an outer layer of the staple cartridge that is assembled to an inner layer; Fig. 68 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising a plurality of staples, a compressible layer, and a napkin layer; Fig. 69 is a perspective view of the compress layer of Fig.68; Fig. 70 is a perspective view of a napkin individualized from the napkin layer of Fig. 68 and a staple aligned with a slot in the napkin; Fig. 71 is a perspective view of two sanitary napkins connected from the napkin layer of Fig. 68; Fig. 72 is a perspective view of a napkin support frame of the napkin layer of Fig. 68 that is removed from the individual napkins; Fig. 73 is a diagrammatic perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a compressible staple cartridge comprising staples therein and a system for urging the staples against an anvil; Fig. 73A is a partial sectional view of an alternative embodiment of the staple cartridge of Fig. 73; Fig. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 73; Fig. 75 is an elevation view of a slider configured to traverse the staple cartridge of Fig. 73 and move the staples towards the anvil; Fig. 76 is a diagram of a staple driver that can be raised toward the anvil by the slider of Fig. 75; FIG. 77 is a fragmentary view of a staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising the staples positioned within the staple drivers; Fig. 78 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 77 positioned within a channel of the staple cartridge; Fig. 79 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 77, illustrating an anvil moved to a closed position and staples contained within the staple cartridge deformed by the anvil; Fig. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 77 illustrating staples moved upward toward the anvil; Fig. 81 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising belts connecting the flexible sides of the staple cartridge; Fig. 82 is a perspective view of a slider and an assembly of the cutting member; Fig. 83 is a diagram of the slider and the assembly of the cutting member of Fig. 82 that is used to lift the staples of the staple cartridge of Fig. 77; Fig. 84 is a diagram illustrating a slider configured to engage and raise the staples toward an anvil and a locking system configured to selectively allow the slider to move distally; Figs. 85A to 85C illustrate the progression of a staple that is inserted within a crown of the staple; Fig. 86 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a support tray or retainer; Fig.87 is a partial cross-sectional view of a compressible staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 88 is a diagram illustrating the staple cartridge of Fig. 87 in an implanted condition; Fig. 89 is a partial sectional view of a compressible staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 90 is a partial cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 89; Fig. 91 is a diagram illustrating the staple cartridge of Fig. 89 in an implanted condition; Fig.92 is a partial cross-sectional view of a collapsible staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 93 is a partial sectional view of a foldable staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising a plurality of collapsible elements; Fig. 94 is a perspective view of a foldable element of Fig. 93 in an unfolded state; Fig. 95 is a perspective view of the foldable element of Fig. 94 in a folded state; FIG. 96A is a partial cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a clamp, a staple cartridge channel positioned opposite the clamp, and a staple cartridge positioned within the staple cartridge. staple cartridge channel, wherein the clamp comprises a retainer die coupled thereto; Fig. 96B is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 96A illustrating the clamp moving towards the staple cartridge channel, the staple cartridge being compressed by the anvil and the retainer matrix , and a staple extending at least partially through the tissue positioned intermediate the retention die and the staple cartridge; Fig. 96C is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 96A, illustrating the clamp in a final position and the retainer die coupled with the staple of Fig. 96B; Fig. 96D is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 96A illustrating the clamp and staple cartridge channel moving away from the implanted staple cartridge and the retainer die; Fig. 97 is a perspective view of a retaining opening of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of retaining members configured to engage a gripper leg extending therethrough; Fig. 98 is a perspective view of a retaining opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising six retention members; Fig. 99 is a perspective view of a retention opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising eight retention members; Fig. 100 is a perspective view of a retaining opening of a retaining mat according to at least one alternative embodiment, comprising a plurality of retaining members configured to engage a grasping leg extending therethrough; Fig. 101 is a perspective view of a retaining opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising six retention members; Fig. 102 is a perspective view of a retaining opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising eight retention members; Fig. 103 is a perspective view of a retention opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of retention members that have been stamped from a sheet of metal; Fig. 104 is a perspective view of a retention opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of openings extending around the perimeter of the retention opening; Fig. 105 is a top view of a retention opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 106 is a top view of a retaining opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 107 is a top view of a retaining opening of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 108 is a top view of a retention aperture of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 109 is a top view of a retention aperture of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 110 is a top view of a retaining opening of a retention die comprising a retention tab extending toward the retention opening according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 111 is a top view of a retaining opening of a retention die comprising a retention tab extending toward the retention opening according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 112 is a perspective view of a fastening system comprising a plurality of staples, a retaining die coupled with the staples, and an alignment die configured to align the staples; Fig. 113 is a perspective view of the retention die of Fig. 112; Fig. 114 is a perspective view of the alignment matrix of Fig. 112; Fig. 115 is a partial top view of the retaining die of Fig. 112 coupled with the staples of Fig. 112; Fig. 116 is a partial bottom view of the retaining die of Fig. 112 coupled with the staples of Fig. 112; Fig. 117 is a partial elevation view of the fastening system of Fig. 112; Fig. 118 is a partial perspective view of the fastening system of Fig. 112; Fig. 119 is a partial cross-sectional view of the retaining die of Fig. 112 coupled with the staples of Fig. 112; Fig. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view of the fastening system of Fig. 112; Fig. 121 is a perspective view of the fastening system of Fig. 112 which further comprises protective caps assembled to the legs of the staples; Fig. 122 is a bottom perspective view of the arrangement of the fastening system of Fig. 121; Fig. 123 is a partial perspective view of the arrangement of the fastening system of Fig. 121; Fig. 124 is a partial cross-sectional view of the arrangement of the fastening system of Fig. 121; Fig. 125 is an elevation view of an end effector according to at least one embodiment comprising a clamp in an open position, a holding matrix and a plurality of protective caps positioned in the clamp, and a staple cartridge positioned in a channel of the staple cartridge; Fig. 126 is an elevation view of the end effector of Fig. 125 in a closed position; Fig. 127 is an elevation view of the end effector of Fig. 125 in a fired position; Fig. 128 is an elevation view of the retention die and the protective caps of Fig. 125 assembled to the staple cartridge of Fig. 125; Fig. 129 is a detailed view of the arrangement of Fig. 128; Fig. 130 is an elevational view of the end effector of Fig. 125 illustrating the clamp in an open position with the thinner tissue positioned between the retainer die and the staple cartridge; Fig. 131 is an elevation view of the end effector of Fig. 125 illustrating the clamp in a closed position against the thinner tissue of Fig. 130; Fig. 132 is an elevational view of the end effector of Fig. 125 illustrating the clamp in a fired position to capture the thinner tissue of Fig. 130 between the retainer die and the staple cartridge; Fig. 133 is an elevation view of the retention die and protective caps of Fig. 125 assembled to the staple cartridge of Fig. 125 with the thin tissue of Fig. 130 positioned therebetween; Fig. 134 is a detailed view of the arrangement of Fig. 133; Fig. 135 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap positioned at the tip of a leg of the clip according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 136 is a perspective view of a plurality of protective caps incorporated within a sheet of material; Fig. 137 is a perspective view of a clamp comprising a plurality of recesses configured to receive a plurality of protective caps thereon; Fig. 138 is a detailed view of a portion of a clamp comprising a sheet covering the protective caps positioned within the clamp of Fig. 137; Fig. 139 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap positioned on a tip of a leg of the staple according to at least one alternative embodiment, wherein the protective cap comprises an interior shaping surface; Fig. 140 is another cross-sectional view of the protective cap of Fig. 139 illustrating the leg of the staple that deforms against the shaping surface; Fig. 141 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of elements of the array connected; Fig. 142 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of connected array elements; Fig. 143 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of elements of the array connected; Fig. 144 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a set of holding matrices comprising a plurality of connected array elements; Fig. 145 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of connected array elements; Fig. 146 is a partial diagrammatic view of a bracket comprising a retainer die including a compressible liner; Fig. 147 is a detailed view of the retention matrix of the Fig. 146; Fig. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fastening system comprising a retention matrix including a compressible layer and a plurality of cells encapsulating one or more medicaments; Fig. 149 is a diagram illustrating the legs of the staples that have pierced the cells of Fig. 148 when they engage the holding matrix; Fig. 150 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fastening system comprising a retention die including a compressible layer; Fig. 151 is an elevation view of an insertion unit of the fastener cartridge comprising a fastener, a first fastener cartridge, and a second fastener cartridge; Fig. 152 is an elevation view of an end effector of a surgical stapler comprising a first clamp and a second clamp, the second clamp being illustrated in an open configuration; Fig. 153 is an elevation view of the end effector of Fig. 152 illustrating the second clamp in a closed configuration and the insertion unit of the fastener cartridge of Fig. 151 which is used to load the first clamp with the first cartridge and the second clamp with the second cartridge; Fig. 154 is an elevation view of the loaded end effector of Fig. 153 illustrating the insertion unit of the cartridge removed from the end effector, the second clamp in an open configuration once again, and the tissue positioned intermediate to the first clamp and the second clamp; Fig. 155 is an elevation view of the charged end effector of Fig. 154 in a fired configuration; Fig. 156 is an elevation view of the first cartridge and the second cartridge in an implanted condition; Fig. 157 is an elevation view of the end effector of the Fig. 152 illustrating a portion of the first cartridge still engaged with the first clamp according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 158 is an elevation view of an alternative embodiment of a fastener cartridge insertion unit comprising a fastener, a first fastener cartridge, and a second fastener cartridge; Fig. 159 is an elevation view of the insertion unit of the fastener cartridge of Fig. 158 which is used to load a first clamp of an end effector with the first cartridge and a second clamp with the second cartridge; Fig. 160 is a cross-sectional view of the charged end effector of Fig. 159; Fig. 161 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler comprising a lower clamp and an upper clamp according to at least one embodiment illustrated with portions of the surgical stapler removed; Fig. 162 is a perspective view of the surgical stapler of Fig. 161 with the upper clamp removed; Fig. 163 is a perspective view of a slidable anvil system of the upper clamp of the surgical stapler of Fig. 161 comprising a first slidable anvil and a second slidable anvil; Fig. 164 is a terminal view of the slidable anvil system of Fig. 163; Fig. 165 is a top view of the slidable anvil system of Fig. 163; Fig. 166 is a diagram illustrating the slidable anvil system of Fig. 163 in an untriggered condition; Fig. 167 is a diagram illustrating the first slidable anvil of the slidable anvil system of Fig. 163 in an untriggered position and the staples positioned within the lower bracket in an undeployed position; Fig. 168 is a diagram illustrating the staples in the lower clamp in an unfolded configuration and the first sliding anvil in Fig. 167 that is pulled proximally to deform a first group of staple legs of the staples; Fig. 169 is a diagram illustrating the first group of staples of Fig. 168 deformed to a fully deformed state; Fig. 170 is a diagram illustrating the second slidable anvil of the slide anvil system of Fig. 163 that is pushed distally to deform a second group of staple legs; Fig. 171 is a partial perspective view of an anvil comprising a plurality of shaping cavities in at least one embodiment; Fig. 172 is a cross sectional end view of the anvil of Fig. 171; Fig. 173 is a diagram illustrating a first step in the manufacture of the shaping cavities of Fig. 171; Fig. 174 is a diagram illustrating a second step in the manufacture of the shaping cavities of Fig. 171; Fig. 175 is a top view of the arrangement of anvil shaping cavities of Fig. 171; Fig. 176 is a diagram illustrating a first step of a manufacturing process for producing an anvil; Fig. 177 is a diagram illustrating a second step in the manufacturing process of Fig. 176; Fig. 178 is a diagram illustrating a third step in the manufacturing process of Fig. 176; Fig. 179 is a left front perspective view of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument with a handle portion including a fired automatic retraction joint and a manual ratchet retraction mechanism; Fig. 180 is a right rear perspective view of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Fig. 179 with a portion of an elongated shank cut off and a right half of a housing of the handle removed to expose an automatic trip end movement retraction mechanism and a manual tripping retraction mechanism; Fig. 181 is a right rear disassembled perspective view of the handle portion and an elongate shank of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Fig. 179; Fig. 182 is a right rear perspective view of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Fig. 31 with a right half and outer portions of the removal implement portion to expose the closing and firing mechanisms in an initial state; Fig. 183 is a right side elevational view of the partially disassembled surgical cutting and stapling instrument of Fig. 182; Fig. 184 is a right rear perspective view of the partially disassembled surgical cutting and stapling instrument of Fig. 182 with a closed and fastened locking mechanism and the lateral ratchet firing mechanism completing a first displacement and with a mechanism manual retraction removed to expose a distal union of the joint zipper that triggers the automatic retraction of the firing mechanism; Fig. 185 is a right rear perspective view of the partially disassembled surgical cutting and stapling instrument of Fig. 183 with the uncoupled side ratchet firing mechanism and the distal joint approaching automatic retraction; Fig. 186 is a side elevation view of the partially disassembled surgical cutting and stapling instrument of Fig. 183 in an initial state of the open end effector and an attached anti-return mechanism; Fig. 187 is a left side detailed view of the right half and an anti-reverse release lever of the handle portion of Fig. 186; Fig. 188 is a detailed left lateral elevation view of the surgical cutting and stapling instrument disassembled from Fig. 179 with the closing trigger held, the trigger activating a final displacement and the distal union positioned to drive the retraction automatic Fig. 189 is a left side detail in elevation of the cutting instrument and stapled surgical disassembled in FIG. 188 immediately after the distal linkage is actuated and locked forward the release lever backstop allowing zipper retreats; Fig. 190 is a disassembled right perspective view of the intermediate and rear gears and the manual retraction lever and the ratchet of a manual retraction mechanism of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Fig. 179; Fig. 191 is a right perspective view of the manual retraction mechanism of Fig. 190 with the manual retraction lever partially cut to expose a smaller diameter ratchet gear in the rear gear engaging the pawl; Fig. 192 is a left side view partly disassembled in elevation from a surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Fig. 179 with the backstop mechanism coupled to a fully fired link rack that is disconnected from a tension / compression combination spring before the activation of the manual retraction lever of Fig. 190; Fig. 193 is a left side view partially disassembled in elevation of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Fig. 192 with the hidden portions of the anti-kickback release lever, the rear gear, and the manual release release lever shown in the spectrum; Fig. 194 is a left side view partially disassembled in elevation of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Fig. 193 after activation of the manual release release lever has manually retracted the joint rack; Fig. 195 is a left side view partly disassembled in elevation of the surgical cutting and stapling instrument of Fig. 194 with the joint zipper omitted representing the manual release release lever that decouples the backstop mechanism; Fig. 196 is a left side detailed view of an alternative anti-reverse release lever and a handle housing for the surgical staple and cut instrument of Fig. 179; Fig. 197 is a disassembled left perspective view of the reciprocating backstop release lever, the rear gear shaft, and the automatic retraction cam wheel of Fig. 196; Fig. 198 is a right side elevation view of the alternative backstop release mechanism of Fig. 196 with the joint rack in a retracted position and the backstop release lever positioned proximally with the backstop plate attached to the rod shooting; Fig. 198A is a detailed right side view in elevation of the rear gear, the auto-retract cam wheel and the most distal junction of Fig. 198; Fig. 199 is a right side elevation view of the backstop release mechanism of Fig. 198 after a first trip displacement; Fig. 199A is a detailed right side view in rear gear elevation, the auto-retract cam wheel and a second joint in Fig. 199; Fig. 200 is a right side elevational view of the backstop release mechanism of Fig. 199 after a second trip displacement; Fig. 200A is a detailed right side view in rear gear elevation, the auto-retract cam wheel and a third joint in Fig. 200; Fig. 201 is a detailed right side elevational view of the backstop release mechanism of Fig. 200 after a third and final firing displacement; Fig. 201A is a detailed right side view in rear gear elevation, the auto-retract cam wheel and a fourth more proximal joint in Fig. 201; Fig. 202 is a right side elevational view of the automatic release mechanism of Fig. 201 after an additional trip movement causes the self-retracting cam wheel to slide distally and lock the anti-backslash release lever, that uncouples the backstop mechanism; Fig. 203 is a left front perspective view of an open staple application unit with one half of the right portion of a replaceable staple cartridge included in a staple channel; Fig. 204 is a diagrammatic perspective view of the staple application unit of Fig. 203 with a complete replaceable staple cartridge and a non-articulated stem configuration; Fig. 205 is a perspective view of a two-piece ("E-beam") shot and blade bar of the staple application unit of Fig. 203; Fig. 206 is a perspective view of a wedge slider of a staple cartridge of a staple application unit; Fig. 207 is a left side elevation view taken in longitudinal cross section along a center line 207-207 of the staple application unit of Fig. 203; Fig. 208 is a perspective view of the open staple application unit of Fig. 203 without the replaceable staple cartridge, a portion of the staple channel close to an intermediate pin of the firing bar and two-piece knife , and without a distal portion of a staple channel; Fig. 209 is a front elevational view taken in cross section along line 209-209 of the staple application unit of Fig. 203 depicting the internal staple drivers of the staple cartridge and portions of the staple cartridge. the firing bar and two-piece blade; Fig. 210 is a left-up elevation view taken generally along the longitudinal axis of line 207-207 of a closed staple application unit of Fig. 203 to include central contact points between the two-piece blade and the wedge slider but, in addition, laterally displaced to show the staples and impellers of the staples within the staple cartridge; Fig. 211 is a side elevational detail view of the staple application unit of Fig. 210 with the two-piece knife folded back slightly more than is typical for staple cartridge replacement; Fig. 212 is a side elevation detail view of the staple application unit of Fig. 211 with the two-piece knife starting to shoot, corresponding to the configuration shown in Fig. 210; Fig. 213 is a side elevation cross-sectional view in elevation of the closed staple application unit of Fig.210 after the firing bar and two-piece blade has been fired distally; Fig. 214 is a side elevation cross-sectional view in elevation of the closed staple application unit of Fig. 213 after firing of the staple cartridge and retraction of the two-piece blade; Fig. 215 is a detailed side elevation cross-sectional view of the staple application unit of Fig. 214 with the two-piece knife approved to fall into a locked position; Fig. 216 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator for use with a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment of the invention; Fig. 217 is a diagrammatic view partially of the staple cartridge of Fig. 216; Fig. 218 is a diagrammatic view completely of the staple cartridge of Fig. 216; Fig. 219 is another diagrammatic view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 216 without a wrap covering the fabric thickness compensator; Fig. 220 is a perspective view of a cartridge body, or support portion, of the staple cartridge of Fig. 216; Fig. 221 is a top perspective view of a movable slider within the staple cartridge of Fig. 216 for deploying the staples from the staple cartridge; Fig. 222 is a bottom perspective view of the slider of Fig. 221; Fig.223 is an elevation view of the slider of Fig.221; Fig. 224 is a top perspective view of an impeller configured to support one or more staples and to be lifted upwardly by the slider of Fig. 221 to eject the staples from the staple cartridge; Fig. 225 is a bottom perspective view of the impeller of Fig. 224; Fig. 226 is a shell configured to at least partially encircle a thickness compensator of the compressible tissue of a staple cartridge; Fig. 227 is a partial sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrated with staples moving from an untriggered position to a triggered position during a first sequence; Fig. 228 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge of Fig.227; Fig. 229 is a detailed elevation view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 227; Fig. 230 is a cross-sectional end view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 227; Fig. 231 is a bottom view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 227; Fig. 232 is a detailed bottom view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 227; Fig. 233 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of an anvil in a closed position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible thickness thickness compensator illustrated with the staples moving from an untriggered position to a triggered position during a first sequence; Fig. 234 is another cross-sectional view of the anvil and the staple cartridge of Fig. 233 illustrating the anvil in an open position after the firing sequence has been completed; Fig. 235 is a partial detail view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 233 illustrating the staples in an untriggered position; Fig. 236 is a cross-sectional elevational view of a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator which illustrates the staples in an untriggered position; Fig. 237 is a detailed view of the staple cartridge of the Fig.236; Fig. 238 is an elevational view of an anvil in an open position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrating the staples in an untriggered position; Fig. 239 is an elevation view of an anvil in a closed position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrating the staples in an untriggered position and the tissue captured between the anvil and the thickness compensator of the tissue; Fig. 240 is a detailed view of the anvil and the staple cartridge of Fig. 239; Fig. 241 is an elevational view of an anvil in a closed position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrating the staples in an unexpired position illustrating the tissue further thick positioned between the anvil and the staple cartridge; Fig. 242 is a detailed view of the anvil and the staple cartridge of Fig. 241; Fig. 243 is an elevation view of the anvil and the staple cartridge of Fig. 241 illustrating tissue having different thicknesses positioned between the anvil and the staple cartridge; Fig. 244 is a detailed view of the anvil and the staple cartridge of Fig. 241 as illustrated in Fig. 243; Fig. 245 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator, which is compensated for different thicknesses of tissue captured within different staples; Fig. 246 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator that applies a compressive pressure to one or more vessels that have been sectioned by a line of staples; Fig. 247 is a diagram illustrating a circumstance, wherein one or more staples have been improperly formed; Fig. 248 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator that could compensate for inappropriately formed staples; Fig. 249 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator positioned in a tissue region in which multiple lines of staples intersect; Fig. 250 is a diagram illustrating the tissue captured within a staple; Fig. 251 is a diagram illustrating tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured within a staple; Fig. 252 is a diagram illustrating the tissue captured within a staple; Fig. 253 is a diagram illustrating the coarse weave and a thickness compensator of the tissue captured within a staple; Fig. 254 is a diagram illustrating the tissue and a thickness compensator of the tissue captured within a staple; Fig. 255 is a diagram illustrating tissue having an intermediate thickness and tissue thickness compensator captured within a staple; Fig. 256 is a diagram illustrating the fabric having another intermediate thickness and a tissue thickness compensator captured within a staple; Fig. 257 is a diagram illustrating the coarse weave and a tissue thickness compensator captured within a staple; Fig. 258 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument illustrating a firing bar and a staple firing slide in a retracted non-fired position; Fig. 259 is another partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 258 illustrating the firing bar and staple firing slide in a partially advanced position; Fig. 260 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 258 illustrating the firing bar in a fully advanced or fired position; Fig. 261 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 258 which illustrates the firing bar in a retracted position after being fired and the staple firing slide is in its fully fired position; Fig. 262 is a detailed view of the firing bar in the retracted position of Fig. 261; Fig. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument including a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator and staples at least partially positioned thereon; Fig.264 is another partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 263 illustrating staples at least partially moved and / or rotated relative to an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge; Fig. 265 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 266 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end effector according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 267 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end effector according to another alternative embodiment; Fig.268 is a perspective view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 269 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 268 illustrated in a flexed condition; Fig. 270 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 269 in a released condition; Fig. 271 is a perspective view of an end effector comprising a tissue thickness compensating means; Fig. 272 is a posterior perspective of the tissue thickness compensating mean in Fig. 271; Fig. 273 is a perspective view of an end effector comprising a plurality of rails extending from a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator having a longitudinal cavity defined therein; Fig. 274 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 273; Fig. 275 is a perspective view of an end effector comprising a plurality of teeth extending from a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator coupled therewith; Fig. 276 is a perspective view of an anvil comprising a set of cavities according to at least one embodiment; Fig.277 is a partial detailed view of the anvil of Fig.276; Fig. 278 is a partial longitudinal cross-sectional view of the anvil of Fig. 276; Fig. 279 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil of Fig. 276; Fig. 280 is an elevation view of a fired staple comprising a substantially B-shaped configuration; Fig. 281 is an elevation view of a triggered staple comprising an inwardly deformed leg and an outwardly deformed leg; Fig. 282 is an elevation view of a fired staple comprising both legs formed outwardly; Fig. 283 is a partial perspective view of a support portion of a staple cartridge comprising removable and / or movable staple leg guides; Fig. 284 is a partial cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 283 illustrating staples deploying from the staple cartridge; Fig. 285 is a detailed view of the cross-sectional view of Fig.284 after the staple cartridge has been fired; Fig. 286 is a diagrammatic view of a staple cartridge including a tissue thickness compensator comprising voids defined therein; Fig. 287 is a diagram illustrating the thickness compensator of the tissue of Fig. 286 implanted against the tissue; Fig. 288 is another diagram illustrating the thickness compensator of the fabric of Fig. 286 implanted against the tissue; Fig. 289 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising lateral retention members extending from a staple support portion configured to maintain a tissue thickness compensator in position; Fig. 290 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig.289 that is used to staple tissue; Fig. 291 is another cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 289 illustrating the support portion separating from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue; Fig. 292 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising lateral retention members configured to maintain a tissue thickness compensator in a support portion; Fig. 293 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 292 that is used to staple the tissue; Fig. 294 is another cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 292 illustrating the support portion separating from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue; Fig. 295 is a detailed cross-sectional view of a retainer which maintains a tissue thickness compensator in a support portion of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 296 is a partial sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising the staple drivers having different heights according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 296A is a diagram illustrating the impellers of the staples of Fig. 296 and the staples having different non-fired heights supported thereon; Fig. 297 is a diagram illustrating a fabric thickness compensator comprising a variable thickness, the impellers of the staples having different heights, and the staples having different unformed heights; Fig. 298 is a diagram illustrating the staples and thickness compensator of the tissue of Fig. 297 implanted into the tissue; Fig. 299 is a partial cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator comprising a thickness variable according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 300 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument in an open configuration; Fig. 301 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 300 illustrated in a partially fired configuration; Fig. 302 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig.300 illustrated in a newly opened configuration; Fig. 303 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising the staple drivers having different heights and a contoured cover surface according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 304 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising the staple drivers having different heights and a stepped covered surface according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 305 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge being loaded into an effector of a surgical stapling instrument using a staple cartridge applicator; Fig. 306 is a bottom perspective view of the staple cartridge applicator of Fig. 305; Fig. 307 is a side view of the staple cartridge applicator of Fig. 305 assembled to a staple cartridge; Fig. 308 is a cross-sectional view of the unit of Fig. 307; Fig. 309 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge applicator unit including, in addition, a thickness compensator of the upper fabric positioned on the upper surface of the staple cartridge applicator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 310 is a diagrammatic view of the upper fabric thickness compensator and the staple cartridge applicator of Fig. 309; Fig. 310A is a diagrammatic view of the staple cartridge applicator unit comprising a pull member configured to separate a thickness compensator from the upper tissue attached to the staple cartridge applicator; Fig.311 is a partial diagrammatic view of the staple cartridge applicator unit according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 312 is a perspective view of the staple cartridge applicator unit comprising a tissue thickness compensator top including a plurality of retaining features extending therefrom and a staple cartridge comprising a lower fabric thickness compensator; Fig. 313 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge applicator unit of Fig. 312 positioned within a staple cartridge channel and an anvil that closes on the staple cartridge applicator unit; Fig. 314 is an elevation view of the anvil of Fig. 313 in a newly opened position and the staple cartridge applicator of Fig. 312 that is removed from the end effector; Fig. 314A is a cross-sectional view of the fabric positioned intermediate the upper fabric thickness compensator and the lower fabric thickness compensator of Fig. 312; Fig. 314B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the thickness compensator of the upper fabric and the thickness compensator of the lower fabric stapled to the fabric and cut by a cutting member; Fig. 315 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator that is inserted into an anvil according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 316 is a cross-sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 315; Fig.317 is a diagrammatic view of a tissue thickness compensator and an anvil according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 318 is a perspective view of the staple cartridge applicator unit comprising an upper tissue thickness compensator configured to engage an anvil according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 319 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge applicator unit of Fig. 318 positioned within a staple cartridge channel and an anvil moving towards the thickness compensator of the upper tissue; Fig. 320 illustrates the staple cartridge applicator of Fig. 318 that is removed from the end effector after the thickness compensator of the upper fabric has engaged with the anvil; Fig. 321 is an end view in cross section of the anvil moving toward the thickness compensator of the upper fabric of Fig.318; Fig. 322 is an end view in cross section of the anvil coupled with the thickness compensator of the upper fabric; Fig. 323 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge including a segmented tissue thickness compensator coupled to a staple cartridge support portion by a plurality of staple holders. fasteners; Fig. 324 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 323 illustrating a firing member in a partially fired position; Fig. 325 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 323 illustrating the support portion separating from the thickness compensator of the partially implanted tissue; Fig. 326 is a partial perspective view of the support portion of Fig. 323; Fig. 327 is a perspective view of a staple deployment slider according to at least one embodiment; Fig.328 is an elevation view of the slider of Fig.327; Fig. 329 is a perspective view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge including a tissue thickness compensator and a plurality of staple guides positioned in the tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 330 is a partial cross-sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator and the staple guides of Fig. 329 in a non-fired configuration; Fig. 331 is a partial cross-sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator and staple guides of Fig. 329 in a fired configuration; Fig. 332 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator and a support portion according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 333 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in an untriggered position; Fig. 334 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 335 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 336 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 337 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 338 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 339 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 340 is a detailed view of a region surrounding a tip of the staple of Fig. 339; Fig. 341 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 342 is a detailed view of a region surrounding a tip of the staple of Fig. 341; Fig. 343 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-triggered position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 344 is a perspective view of a staple guide layer and a plurality of staples in a non-fired position according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 345 is a terminal view of a tissue thickness compensator configured for use with a circular surgical stapler; Fig. 346 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator and the circular surgical stapler of Fig. 345; Fig. 347 is a terminal view of a tissue thickness compensator configured to be used with a circular surgical stapler according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 348 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator and the circular surgical stapler of Fig. 347; Fig. 349 is a terminal view of a tissue thickness compensator configured to be used with a circular surgical stapler; Fig. 350 is a terminal view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 349 in a partially expanded configuration; Fig. 351 is an elevation view of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 352 is a terminal view of the surgical stapling instrument of Fig. 351 positioned relative to the tissue; Fig. 353 is a terminal view of the surgical stapling instrument of Fig. 351 further comprising a tissue thickness compensator positioned between the staple cartridge and the tissue; Fig. 354 is a partial perspective view of the staples deployed within the tissue from the surgical stapling instrument of Fig. 351 without a tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 355 is a partial perspective view of the staples deployed within the tissue from the surgical stapling instrument of Fig. 351 with a tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 356 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of the surgical stapling instrument of Fig. 351 comprising an anvil plate in a first position; Fig. 357 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end effector of the surgical stapling instrument of Fig. 351 illustrating the anvil plate of Fig. 356 in a second position; Fig. 358 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge including an aperture adjustment member; Fig. 359 is a perspective view illustrating a firing member cutting the aperture fitting member of Fig. 358 at the end of the firing displacement of the firing member; Fig. 360 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge including a flexible tip; Fig. 361 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 360 illustrating the tip in a flexed configuration; Fig. 362 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge including a slidable portion; Fig. 363 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 362 illustrating the sliding portion that slides distally; Fig. 364 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a support portion comprising an inclined cover surface and a tissue thickness compensator comprising a variable thickness; Fig. 365 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a support portion comprising an inclined cover surface and a tissue thickness compensator comprising a uniform thickness; Fig. 366 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator having a variable thickness; Fig. 367 is a terminal view of the staple cartridge of the Fig. 366; Fig. 368 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising longitudinal layers; Fig. 369 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a plurality of layers according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 370 is a perspective view of a disposable loading unit comprising retaining members configured to removably hold a thickness compensator of the fabric thereto; Fig. 371 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator including retaining members configured to removably hold the fabric thickness compensator to a disposable loading unit; Fig. 372 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 371 coupled to a disposable loading unit; Fig. 373 is a terminal view of the disposable loading unit of Fig.372; Fig. 374 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator including retaining members configured to removably hold the tissue thickness compensator to a disposable loading unit; Fig. 375 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 374 coupled to a disposable loading unit; Fig. 376 is a terminal view of the disposable loading unit of Fig. 375; Fig. 377 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator including a retaining member configured to removably hold the tissue thickness compensator to a disposable loading unit; Fig. 378 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 377 coupled to a disposable loading unit; Fig. 379 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator positioned within an effector of a disposable loading unit; Fig. 380 is a top perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator applicator of Fig. 379; Fig. 381 is a bottom perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator applicator of Fig. 379; Fig. 382 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator positioned within an effector of a disposable loading unit according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 383 is a top perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator applicator of Fig. 382; Fig. 384 is a bottom perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator applicator of Fig. 382; Fig. 385 is an elevation view of a disposable loading unit including a rotatable clamp configured to support a staple cartridge; Fig. 386 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator coupled to a staple cartridge support portion according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 387 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator coupled to a staple cartridge support portion according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 388 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator coupled to a staple cartridge support portion according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 389 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 387; Fig. 390 is a cross-sectional perspective view of one embodiment of a cutting blade that is advanced distally within an end effector of a surgical instrument for cutting tissue; Fig. 391 is a cross-sectional side view illustrating the characteristics of the cutting blade of Fig. 390 configured to direct a substance within a tissue thickness compensator to the tissue; Fig. 392 is a perspective cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a cutting blade that is advanced distally within an end effector of a surgical instrument for cutting tissue; Fig. 393 is a perspective cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of a cutting blade that is advanced distally within an end effector of a surgical instrument for cutting tissue; Fig. 394 is a cross-sectional side view illustrating the characteristics of the cutting blade of Fig. 393 configured to mix a substance within a first tissue thickness compensator with a substance of a second tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 395 is a front view illustrating the characteristics of the cutting blade of Fig. 393 configured to mix a substance within a first tissue thickness compensator with a substance of a second tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 396 is a top cross-sectional view illustrating the characteristics of the cutting blade of Fig. 393 configured to mix a substance within a first tissue thickness compensator with a substance of a second tissue thickness compensator.; Fig. 397 is a perspective cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of a cutting blade that is advanced distally within an end effector of a surgical instrument for cutting tissue; Fig. 398 is a cross-sectional side view illustrating the characteristics of the cutting blade of Fig. 397 configured to propagate a substance contained within a tissue thickness compensator; Y Fig. 399 is a cross-sectional side view of the cutting blade of Fig. 397, which propagates the substance.

Fig. 400 is a perspective view in partial section of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 401 illustrates a medicament that is loaded into a tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 402 is a cross-sectional end view of a tube positioned within the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 400 comprising a medicament contained therein; Fig. 403 illustrates the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 400 which is positioned and compressed against the tissue of a patient; Fig. 404 is a cross-sectional end view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument illustrating staples that are fired through the tissue thickness compensator of Fig.400; Fig. 405 is a graph depicting the dissolution of a capsule contained within a tissue thickness compensator, wherein the capsule comprises a plurality of drug layers; Fig. 406 illustrates a first or outer layer of the capsule of the Fig.405 that dissolves; Fig. 407 illustrates a second layer of the capsule of Fig. 405 dissolving; Fig. 408 illustrates a third layer of the capsule of Fig. 405 that dissolves; Fig. 409 illustrates a fourth or inner layer of the capsule of Fig. 405 that dissolves; Fig.410 is a partial sectional view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising a tissue thickness compensator that includes a plurality of vertical capsules; Fig. 411 is a perspective view of a vertical capsule of Fig. 410; Fig. 412 is a partial sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 410 illustrating staples contained therein in a non-fired position; Fig. 413 is a cross-sectional side view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 410 illustrating the staples of Fig. 412 moving from an untriggered position to a fired position; Fig. 414 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising the vertical capsules positioned therein according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 415 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a plurality of capsules having openings defined therein; Fig. 416 is a cross-sectional end view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a plurality of staples in an un-fired position and a plurality of piercing members configured to break the capsules or tubes contained within a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 417 is an elevation view of a staple of Fig. 416 in a non-fired configuration; Fig. 418 is an elevation view of the staple of Fig. 417 in a fired configuration; Fig. 419 is an elevation view of a piercing member of Fig.416; Fig. 420 is a cross-sectional end view of the end effector of Fig. 416 illustrating staples and piercing members in a fired position; Fig. 441 is a cross-sectional side view of the end effector of Fig. 416 illustrating staples and piercing members that move from an un-fired position to a fired position; Fig. 422 is a top section view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment including a tissue thickness compensator comprising a plurality of capsules positioned thereon; Fig. 423 is a detailed view of the staple cartridge of the Fig.422; Fig. 244 is a cross-sectional end view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 422 positioned within an end effector illustrating the staples contained within the staple cartridge in a fired position; Fig. 425 is a cross-sectional end view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 422 in the end effector of Fig. 424 illustrating a cutting member that is advanced through the capsules in the thickness compensator of tissue; Fig. 426 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a longitudinal member according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 427 is a cross-sectional view of a mold configured to produce the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 426; Fig. 428 is a cross-sectional end view of the mold of Fig. 427 illustrating the longitudinal member of Fig. 426 positioned thereon; Fig. 429 is a cross-sectional end view of the mold of Fig. 427 illustrating the material of the fabric thickness compensator that is poured into the mold of Fig.427; Fig. 430 is a sectional perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 431 is a perspective view of a support member configured to be incorporated in a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 432 is a sectional perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 433 is a cross-sectional end view illustrating a mold for manufacturing the fabric thickness compensator of Fig.432; Fig. 434 is a cross-sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig.432; Fig. 435 is a cross-sectional side view of the mold of Fig. 433; Fig. 436 is a terminal cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 437 is a cross sectional end view of another tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 438 is a detailed view of a frame material for a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 439 is a detailed view of a tissue thickness compensator in an unexpanded state according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 440 is a detailed view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 439 in an expanded state; Fig. 441 is a sectional perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 442 is a perspective view in partial section of a fabric thickness compensator that is manufactured in a mold according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 443 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 444 is a cross-sectional end view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 445 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 446 is an elevation view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 447 is a diagrammatic view of the fabric thickness compensator of Fig. 446, wherein the fabric thickness compensator comprises a plurality of layers; Fig. 448 is a cross-sectional view of a layer of a tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 449 is a cross-sectional view of another layer of a tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 450 is a cross-sectional elevational view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig.446 positioned between an anvil and a staple cartridge of the surgical stapling instrument; Fig. 451 is another cross-sectional elevational view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 446 captured within a staple expelled from the staple cartridge and deformed by the anvil of the surgical stapling instrument; Fig. 452 is another cross-sectional elevational view of the fabric thickness compensator of Fig. 446 coupled to the fabric by the staple of Fig.451; Fig. 453 is a perspective view of a layer of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 454 is a perspective view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a tissue thickness compensator that includes the layer of Fig.453; Fig. 455 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 456 is a perspective view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 455; Fig. 457 is a perspective view of a plurality of coated fibers; Fig. 458 is a perspective view illustrating an extrusion process for producing a coated fiber and / or a coated strand that can be dissected into coated fibers; Fig. 459 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a coated fiber; Fig. 460 is a perspective view illustrating a coating process by using a reservoir configured of carrier fluid in a material on and / or within a fiber; Fig. 461 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge including a tissue thickness compensator comprising the fibers of Fig. 577; Fig. 462 is a perspective view in partial section of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig.463 is a cross-sectional view of a medicament coated with a hydrophilic material according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 464 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 462 positioned within an end effector of a surgical instrument; Fig. 465 is a partially sectioned perspective view of the medicament of Fig. 463 which is exposed to a liquid so that the medicament can drain out of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 422; Fig. 466 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 467 is a partial perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 466 after it has been exposed to a liquid; Fig. 468 is a perspective view of an end effector including the tissue thickness compensator of Fig.466 coupled to an anvil; Fig. 469 is a perspective view in partial section of a tissue thickness compensator comprising the medicament of Fig. 463 and the fibers of Fig. 577; Fig. 470 is a partial perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator that includes a plurality of capsules; Fig. 471 is a side view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 470; Fig. 472 illustrates the capsules of Fig. 470 that are placed in a mold; Fig. 473 illustrates the capsules of Fig. 470 which sit on the bottom of the mold of Fig. 472; Fig.474 illustrates a material of the body of the compensator that is poured on the capsules of Fig.470; Fig.475 illustrates an embodiment in which the capsules of Fig. 470 are denser than the material of the compensator body and remain in the lower part of the mold of Fig.472; Fig. 476 illustrates an embodiment in which the capsules of Fig. 470 are less dense than the material of the compensator body and can float towards the upper part of the mold of Fig. 478; Fig. 477 illustrates an alternative embodiment of a mold including a plurality of recesses or dimples configured to receive the capsules of Fig.470; FIG. 478 is a cross-sectional end view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a tissue thickness compensator positioned on a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 479 is a terminal cross-sectional view of the end effector of Fig. 478 illustrating the staples fired from the staple cartridge and extending through the tissue thickness compensator of Fig.478; Fig. 480 illustrates a mold and a plurality of medicament capsules positioned within the mold; Fig. 481 is a terminal cross-sectional view of the mold illustrating a material of the compensator body that is poured into the mold to form a tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 482 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 481 coupled to an anvil of a surgical stapling instrument; Fig. 483 is a cross-sectional view of a mold configured to form the tissue thickness compensator of Fig. 486 illustrating a first layer that is poured into the mold; FIG. 484 is a cross-sectional view of the mold of FIG. 483 illustrating a capsule positioned in the first layer; Fig. 485 is a cross-sectional view of the mold of Fig. 483 illustrating a second layer that is poured over the capsule; Fig. 486 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 487 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Fig.486 positioned within an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument; Fig. 488 is a perspective view of a body of the tissue thickness compensator compensator of Fig. 491; Fig. 489 is a perspective view of a longitudinal opening defined in the body of the compensator of Fig.488; Fig. 490 is a diagram illustrating a capsule that is positioned within the longitudinal opening of Fig. 489; Fig. 491 is a perspective view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument that includes a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 492 is a perspective view of a body of the compensator of the fabric thickness compensator of Fig. 495; Fig. 493 is a perspective view of a plurality of transverse openings defined in the body of the compensator of Fig.492; Fig. 494 is a diagram illustrating the capsules that are positioned within the transverse openings of Fig. 493; Fig. 495 is a perspective view of an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument that includes a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 496 is a perspective view of a vertical mold configured to manufacture a tissue thickness compensator; Fig. 497 is a perspective view of a capsule that is positioned within the mold of Fig. 496; Fig. 498 is a perspective view of the capsule of Fig. 497 positioned within the mold of Fig. 496; Fig. 499 is a perspective view of a cover placed against the mold of Fig. 496 and a material of the compensator body that is positioned within the mold; Fig. 500 is a perspective view of the mold of Fig. 496 illustrated with the cover of Fig. 499 removed; Fig. 501 illustrates a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator and a tissue thickness compensator pad according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 502 is a partial bottom perspective view of the pad of the fabric thickness compensator of Fig. 501; Fig. 503 is a partial top perspective view of the cushion of the fabric thickness compensator of Fig. 501; Fig. 504 is a partial cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 501 that is triggered by a firing member, wherein the staple cartridge is illustrated without the tissue thickness compensator positioned thereon; Fig. 505 is a top view of the tissue thickness compensator pad of Fig. 501 which is cut by a cutting member coupled with the firing member of Fig. 504, wherein the staple cartridge is illustrated without the fabric thickness compensator positioned on it; Fig.506 is a top view of the tissue thickness compensator pad of Fig. 501 which is cut by a cutting member coupled with the firing member of Fig. 504, wherein the staple cartridge is illustrated with the fabric thickness compensator positioned on it; Fig. 507 is a plan view of a circular staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising a cushion pad of circular weave thickness; Fig. 508 illustrates a mold comprising a plurality of the cavities configured to form the tissue thickness compensators in a plurality of bodies of the staple cartridge simultaneously; Fig. 509 illustrates the staple cartridge bodies positioned within the cavities of Fig. 508 and one or more sheets that are placed on the cartridge bodies; Fig. 510 illustrates the sheets of Fig. 509 secured in place within the mold of Fig. 508; Fig. 511 illustrates an elongated tube member wound around a plurality of end supports within the mold of Fig.508; Fig. 512 illustrates the sheets of Fig. 509 secured in place on the bodies of the staple cartridge of Fig. 508; Fig. 513 illustrates the tube members of Fig. 511 in position on the sheets of Fig. 509; Fig. 514 illustrates a material of the compensator body that is poured into the mold of Fig. 508; Fig. 515 illustrates a cutting die positioned on the mold of Fig. 508; Fig. 516 illustrates the cutting die moved down to cut the material of the compensator body of Fig. 514 and the sheets of Fig. 509; Fig. 517 illustrates the cutting die moved up away from the mold of Fig. 508; Fig. 518 is a cross-sectional end view of a fabric thickness compensator that is produced by the manufacturing process outlined in Figs. 508 to 517 according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 519 is a top view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 520 is a perspective view of the staple cartridge of Fig. 519; Fig. 521 is an illustration showing the fabrication of the tissue thickness compensator of the staple cartridge of Fig. 519; Fig. 522 is an illustration of rollers that flatten a tube of material to form a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment; Fig. 523 is an illustration of the rollers forming a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment; Fig. 524 is a partial perspective view of a staple cartridge including the tissue thickness compensators produced by the process illustrated in Fig. 523; Fig. 525 is a cross-sectional elevational view of staples deployed from the staple cartridge of Fig. 524; and Fig. 526 is a terminal cross-sectional view of the staples deployed from the staple cartridge of Fig.524.

The corresponding reference characters indicate corresponding parts in the different views. The examples mentioned in the present description illustrate certain embodiments of the invention, in one form, and these examples are not to be construed, in any way, as limiting the scope of the invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The applicant of the present application is, furthermore, the owner of the United States patent applications identified below, which are each incorporated in the present description for reference in their respective totality: the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,311, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH RECONFIGURABLE SHAFT SEGMENTS (file No. END6734USNP / 100058); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,340, entitled SURGICAL STAPLE CARTRIDGES SUPPORTING NON-LINEARLY ARRANGED STAPLES AND SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH COMMON STAPLE-FORMING POCKETS (file number END6735USNP / 100059); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,327, entitled JAW CLOSURE ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS (file number END6736USNP / 100060); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,351, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENTS WITH SEPARATE AND DISTINCT FASTENER DEPLOYMENT AND TISSUE CUTTING SYSTEMS (File No. END6839USNP / 100524); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,338, entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE HAVING TO NON-UNIFORM ARRANGEMENT (file number END6840USNP / 100525); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,369, entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A SUPPORT RETAINER (file number END6841USNP / 100526); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,312, entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE COMPRISING MULTIPLE LAYERS (file number END6842USNP / 100527); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,377, entitled SELECTIVELY ORIENTABLE IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE (File No. END6843USNP / 100528); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,339, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH COMPACT ARTICULATED CONTROL ARRANGEMENT (file No. END6847USNP / 100532); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,360, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH A VARIABLE STAPLE FORMING SYSTEM (file number END6848USNP / 100533); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,322, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH INTERCHANGEABLE STAPLE CARTRIDGE ARRANGEMENTS (File No. END6849USNP / 100534); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,350, entitled SURGICAL STAPLE CARTRIDGES WITH DETACHABLE SUPPORT STRUCTURES AND SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH SYSTEMS FOR PREVENTING ACTUATION MOTIONS WHEN A CARTRIDGE IS NOT PRESENT (File No. END6855USNP / 100540); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,383, entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE COMPRISING BIOABSORBABLE LAYERS (file number END6856USNP / 100541); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,389, entitled COMPRESSIBLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE (file number END6857USNP / 100542); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,345, entitled FASTENERS SUPPORTED BY A FASTENER CARTRIDGE SUPPORT (file number END6858USNP / 100543); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,306, entitled COLLAPSIBLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE (file No. END6859USNP / 100544); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,318, entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF CONNECTED RETENTION MATRIX ELEMENTS (file number END6860USNP / 100546); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,330, entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX AND AN ALIGNMENT MATRIX (file number END6861USNP / 100547); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,361, entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX (file number END6862USNP / 100548); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,367, entitled FASTENING INSTRUMENT FOR DEPLOYING A FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX (file number END6863USNP / 100549); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,388, entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX AND A COVER (file No. END6864USNP / 1 00550); the US patent application UU with serial number 12 / 894,376, entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF FASTENER CARTRIDGES (file number END6865USNP / 00551); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,865, entitled SURGICAL STAPLER ANVIL COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF FORMING POCKETS (file no.

END6735USCIP1 / 100059CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,936, titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR FOR A SURGICAL STAPLER (file number END6736USCIP1 / 100060CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,954, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A VARIABLE THICKNESS COMPRESSIBLE PORTION (file No. END6840USCIP1 / 100525CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,856, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING STAPLES POSITIONED WITHIN A COMPRESSIBLE PORTION THEREOF (file No. END6841USCIP1 / 100526CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,928, entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING DETACHABLE PORTIONS (file number END6842USCIP1 / 100527CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,891, entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR FOR A SURGICAL STAPLER COMPRISING AN ADJUSTABLE ANVIL (file number END6843USCIP1 / 100528CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,948, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING AN ADJUSTABLE DISTAL PORTION (file number END6847USCIP1 / 100532CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,907, entitled COMPRESSIBLE STAPLE CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY (file number END6848USCIP1 / 100533CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,861, entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING PORTIONS HAVING DIFFERENT PROPERTIES (file number END6849USCIP1 / 100534CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,869, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE LOADING ASSEMBLY (file number END6855USCIP1 / 100540CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,917, entitled COMPRESSIBLE STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING ALIGNMENT MEMBERS (file No. END6856USCIP1 / 100541 CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,873, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A RELEASABLE PORTION (file No. END6857USCIP1 / 100542CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,938, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING COMPRESSIBLE DISTORTION RESISTANT COMPONENTS (file number END6858USCIP1 / 100543CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 097,924, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR (file number END6859USCIP1 / 100544CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 242,029, entitled SURGICAL STAPLER WITH FLOATING ANVIL (file number END6841USCIP2 / 100526CIP2); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 242,066, entitled CURVED END EFFECTOR FOR A STAPLING INSTRUMENT (file number END6841 USCIP3 / 100526CIP3); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 242,086, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE INCLUDING COLLAPSIBLE DECK (file no.

END7020USNP / 1 10374); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 241,912, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE INCLUDING COLLAPSIBLE DECK ARRANGEMENT (file number END7019USNP / 1 10375); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 241,922, entitled SURGICAL STAPLER WITH STATIONARY STAPLE DRIVERS (File No. END7013USNP / 110377); the US patent application UU with serial number 13 / 241,637, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH TRIGGER ASSEMBLY FOR GENERATING MULTIPLE ACTUATION MOTIONS (file number END6888USNP3 / 110378); and the US patent application. UU with serial number 13 / 241,629, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH SELECTIVELY ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR (file number END6888USNP2 / 110379).

The applicant of the present application is, furthermore, the owner of the US patent applications identified below, which were filed on the same date as the present one and which are each incorporated in the present description as reference in their respective totality: the US patent application UU with serial number _, titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF CAPSULES (file No. END6864USCIP1 / 100550CIP1); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF LAYERS (file number END6864USCIP2 / 100550CIP2); the US patent application UU with serial number titled EXPANDABLE TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR (file number END6843USCIP2 / 100528CIP2); the US patent application UU with serial number _ entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A RESERVOIR (file number END6843USCIP3 / 100528CIP3); the US patent application UU with serial number _, entitled RETAINER ASSEMBLY INCLUDING A TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR (file number END6843USCIP4 / 100528CIP4); the US patent application UU with serial number _, titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING AT LEAST ONE MEDICATOR (file number END6843USCIP5 / 100528CIP5); the US patent application UU with serial number _, titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING CONTROLLED RELEASE AND EXPANSION (file No. END6843USCIP6 / 100528CIP6); the US patent application UU with serial number , titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING FIBERS TO PRODUCE A RESILIENT LOAD (file no.

END6843USCIP7 / 100528CIP7); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING STRUCTURE TO PRODUCE A RESILIENT LOAD (file no.

END6843USCIP8 / 100528CIP8); the US patent application UU with serial number _, titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING RESILIENT MEMBERS (file number END6843USCIP9 / 100528CIP9); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled METHODS FOR FORMING TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL STAPLERS (file number END6843USCIP10 / 100528CP10); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATORS (file no.

END6843USCIP1 1 / 100528CP11); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled LAYERED TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR (file no.

END6843USCIP12 / 100528CP12); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATORS FOR CIRCULAR SURGICAL STAPLERS (file No. END6843USCIP13 / 100528CP13); the United States patent application with serial number _ titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING CAPSULES DEFINING A LOW PRESSURE ENVIRONMENT (File No. END7100USNP / 1 10601); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISED OF A PLURALITY OF MATERIALS (file No. END7101 USNP / 110602); the US patent application UU with serial number _, entitled MOVABLE MEMBER FOR USE WITH A TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR (file No. END7107USNP / 110603); the US patent application UU with serial number _ titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF MEDICAMENTS (File No. END7102USNP / 110604); the US patent application UU with serial number titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR AND METHOD FOR MAKIG THE SAME (file No. END7103USNP / 110605); the US patent application UU with serial number _, entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING CHANNELS (file no.

END7104USNP / 110606); the US patent application UU with serial number _, titled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING TISSUE INGROWTH FEATURES (file number END7105USNP / 110607); and the US patent application. UU with serial number _, entitled DEVICES AND METHODS FOR ATTACHING TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATING MATERIALS TO SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS (file number END7106USNP / 110608).

In the following, certain illustrative modalities will be described to achieve a general understanding of the principles of structure, function, elaboration and use of the instruments and methods described in the present description. In the attached figures one or more examples of said modalities are illustrated. Those skilled in the art will understand that the devices and methods specifically described in the present description and illustrated in the appended figures are illustrative non-limiting modalities. The features illustrated or described with reference to an illustrative embodiment may combine with the characteristics of other modalities. Said modifications and variations are included within the scope of the present invention.

Any of the methods described or claimed in the present description for manufacturing, shaping or otherwise producing an article or product, may be employed to manufacture, shape or otherwise produce all or part of the article or product in question, and wherein such method is employed to manufacture, shape or otherwise produce part of the article or product in question, the remainder of the article or product may be produced in any manner, which includes employing any of the other methods described and claimed. in the present description for manufacturing, shaping or otherwise producing the article or product, and the various parts thus produced may be combined in any way. Similarly, any article or product that is described or claimed in the present description may exist alone, or in combination with, or as an integral part of any other article or product likewise described with which it is compatible. Thus, the elements, structures, or particular features illustrated or described in relation to an article, product or method may be combined, in whole or in part, with the elements, structures, or characteristics of one or more other articles, products or methods. compatible without limitation. Said modifications and variations are included within the scope of the present invention.

Where it is described in the present description, whether in reference to a particular Fig. Or in any other way, that a If the particular mode of the invention or a particular article, product or method can comprise certain structures, characteristics or elements, it will be understood by the reader that this means that those structures, characteristics or elements can be incorporated in the article, product or method in question in any compatible combination. Particularly, such a description of a number of structures, features or optional elements should be understood, furthermore, that describes all those structures, features or elements in combination, except in the case of structures, characteristics or elements that are described as alternative to others. Where such structures, characteristics or elements are described as alternative to others, they should be understood to describe those alternatives as substitutions for each other.

The terms "proximal" and "distal" are used, in the present description, with reference to a clinician who manipulates the handle portion of a surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the portion that is closest to the clinician, and the term "distal" refers to the portion that is far from the clinician. Furthermore, it will be appreciated that, for reasons of convenience and clarity, spatial terms such as "vertical", "horizontal", "up" and "down" can be used in the present description with respect to the figures. However, surgical instruments are used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting or absolute.

Several illustrative devices and methods are provided for performing laparoscopic procedures and minimally invasive surgical procedures. However, the reader will readily appreciate that the various methods and devices described in the present description can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications including those related to open surgical procedures. As the present detailed description proceeds, the reader will further appreciate that the various instruments described in the present description can be inserted into a body in any manner, such as through a natural orifice, through an incision or perforation hole that is formed in the tissue, etc. The working portions or portions of the end effector of the instruments can be inserted directly into the body of a patient or can be inserted through an access device having a working channel through which the end effector can be advanced. and the elongated shank of a surgical instrument.

Referring now to the drawings in which similar numbers denote similar components throughout the various views, FIG. 1 describes a surgical instrument 10 that is capable of implementing the unique benefits. The surgical stapling instrument 10 is designed to manipulate and / or activate various shapes and sizes of the end effectors 12 which are operatively coupled thereto. In Figs. 1 to 1 E, for example, the end effector 12 includes an elongated channel 14 that forms a lower clamp 13 of the end effector 12. The elongated channel 14 is configured to support a cartridge "implantable" staples 30 and, furthermore, movably support an anvil 20 that functions as an upper clamp 15 of the end effector 12.

The elongate channel 14 can be manufactured from, for example, stainless steel 300 series & 400, 17-4 & 17-7, titanium, etc. and can be formed with separate side walls 16. The anvil 20 can be manufactured from, for example, stainless steel 300 series & 400, 17-4 & 17-7, titanium, etc. and has an inner staple forming surface, generally labeled 22 having a plurality of staple forming cavities 23 formed therein. See Figs. 1B to 1E. Additionally, the anvil 20 has a bifurcated ramp unit 24 projecting proximally therefrom. An anvil pin 26 protrudes from each side side of the ramp unit 24 to be received within a corresponding slot or opening 18 in the side walls 16 of the elongated channel 14 to facilitate its mobile or rotatable attachment thereto.

Various forms of implantable clip cartridges can be employed with the surgical instruments described in the present disclosure. The configurations and specific constructions of the staple cartridge will be discussed in more detail below. However, in Fig. 1A, an implantable staple cartridge 30 is shown. The staple cartridge 30 has a portion of the body 31 consisting of a compressible hemostatic material such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose ("ORC") or a bioabsorbable foam in which the lines of the unformed metal staples are supported 32. In order to avoid affecting the staple and hemostatic material is activated during the insertion and positioning process, the entire cartridge can be coated or wrapped with a biodegradable film 38 such as a polydioxanone film marketed under the trademark PDS® or with a polyglycerol sebacate film (PGS ) or other biodegradable films formed of PGA (polyglycolic acid, marketed under the Vicryl trademark), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polygallecapronate 25, sold under the trademark of Monocryl) or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS that could be impervious to rupture. The body 31 of the staple cartridge 30 is dimensioned to be removably supported within the elongated channel 14 as shown, such that each staple 32 therein is aligned with the corresponding staple forming cavities 23 in the anvil when the anvil 20 is urged toward the forming contact with the staple cartridge 30.

In use, once the end effector 12 has been positioned adjacent to the target tissue, the end effector 12 is manipulated to capture or hold the target tissue between an upper face 36 of the staple cartridge 30 and the staple forming surface. 22 of the anvil 20. The staples 32 are formed by the movement of the anvil 20 in a path that is substantially parallel to the elongate channel 14 to bring the staple forming surface 22 and, more particularly, the staple forming cavities 23 in this towards the contact substantially simultaneous with the upper face 36 of the staple cartridge 30. As the anvil 20 continues its movement in the staple cartridge 30, the legs 34 of the staples 32 come into contact with a corresponding staple-forming cavity 23 in the anvil 20 which serves to bend the staple legs 34 and shape the staples 32 into a "B-shape". Further movement of the anvil 20 towards the elongate channel 14 can further compress and shape the staples 32 to a desired final shaped height "FF".

The staple forming process described above is generally depicted in Figs. 1B to 1E. For example, Fig. 1B illustrates the end effector 12 with the target tissue "T" between the anvil 20 and the top face 36 of the implantable staple cartridge 30. Fig. 1C illustrates the initial clamping position of the anvil 20, wherein the anvil 20 has been closed on the target tissue "T" to hold the target tissue "T" between the anvil 20 and the top face 36 of the staple cartridge 30. FIG. 1D illustrates the formation of the initial staple, wherein the anvil 20 has begun to compress the staple cartridge 30, such that the legs 34 of the staples 32 begin to be formed by the staple forming cavities 23 in the anvil 20. FIG. 1E illustrates the staple 32 in its final formed condition through the objective tissue "T" with the anvil 20 removed for clarity purposes. Once the staples 32 have been formed and secured to the target tissue "T", the surgeon will move the anvil 20 to the open position to allow the cartridge body 31 and the staples 32 to remain fixed to the target tissue while the end effector 12 It is removed from the patient. The end effector 12 forms all the staples simultaneously when the two clamps 13, 15 are clamped together. The remaining "squashed" body materials 31 act as a hemostatic (the ORC) and a staple line reinforcement (PGA, PDS or any of the other film compositions mentioned above 38). In addition, because the staples 32 never have to leave the body of the cartridge 31 during forming, the possibility of the staples 32 of malforming during forming is minimized. As used herein, the term "implantable" means that, in addition to the staples, the materials of the cartridge body that support the staples will also remain in the patient and could eventually be absorbed by the patient's body. Such implantable staple cartridges are distinguishable from arrays of prior cartridges that remain positioned within the end effector in its entirety after they have been fired.

In various implementations, the end effector 12 is configured to engage an elongated stem unit 40 projecting from a handle unit 100. The end effector 12 (when closed) and the elongated stem unit 40 can have shapes of similar cross section and be dimensioned to pass operatively through a trocar tube or working channel in another form of the access instrument. As used in the present description, the term "operatively pass" means that the end effector and at least a portion of the elongated stem unit can be inserted through or pass through the opening of the tube or channel and can be manipulated. in this as necessary to complete the surgical stapling procedure. When in a closed position, clamps 13 and 15 of end effector 12 can provide the end effector with an approximately circular cross-sectional shape that facilitates its passage through a circular passage / opening. However, the end effectors of the present invention, as well as the elongated stem units, could conceivably be provided with other cross-sectional shapes that could otherwise pass through the access passages and openings having sectional shapes. cross not circular. Thus, a full size of a cross-section of a closed end effector will be related to the size of the passage or the opening through which it intends to pass. Thus, an end effector, for example, can be termed as an end effector of "5 mm", which means that it can be operatively passed through an opening that is at least about 5 mm in diameter.

The elongate shaft unit 40 can have an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the end effector 12 when in a closed position. For example, a 5 mm end effector can be coupled to an elongated stem unit 40 having a cross-section diameter of 5 mm. However, as the present detailed description proceeds, it will be apparent that the present invention can be used effectively in connection with different sizes of the end effectors. For example, a 10 mm end effector can be attached to an elongated stem having diameter of the 5 mm cross section. In contrast, for applications where a passageway or access opening of 10 mm or greater is provided, the elongate shaft unit 40 may have a cross-sectional diameter of 10 mm (or greater) but, in addition, may be able to operate an end effector of 5 mm or 10 mm. Accordingly, the outer stem 40 can have an outer diameter that is the same or different from the outer diameter of a closed end effector 12 coupled thereto.

As shown the elongate shaft unit 40 extends distally from the handle unit 100 in a generally straight line to define a longitudinal axis A-A. For example, the elongated stem unit 40 can be approximately 229-406 mm (9-16 inches) long. Nevertheless, the elongated stem unit 40 may be provided in other lengths and may have connections therein or otherwise configured to facilitate articulation of the end effector 12 relative to other portions of the stem or handle unit as will be discussed in greater detail. detail later. The elongated shaft unit 40 includes a central tubular member 50 that extends from the handle unit 100 to the end effector 12. The proximal end of the elongate channel 14 of the end effector 12 has a pair of retaining stumps 17 that protrude of this which are dimensioned to be received within the corresponding openings of the trunnions or bases 52 that are provided at a distal end of the central tubular member 50 to allow the end effector 12 to be removably coupled to the elongated stem unit 40. The central tubular member 50 can be made of, for example, aluminum 6061 or 7075, stainless steel, titanium, etc.

The handle unit 100 comprises a handle-like housing that can be manufactured in two or more pieces for assembly purposes. For example, the handle unit 100 as shown comprises a right hand cover member 102 and a left hand cover member (not shown) that are molded or otherwise fabricated from a polymer or plastic material and are designed to Couple together. Such housing members may be coupled together by pressure features, plugs and plugs molded or otherwise formed therein and / or by adhesive, screws, etc. The central tubular member 50 has a proximal end 54 having a projection 56 formed therein. The protrusion 56 is configured to be supported rotatably within a slot 106 formed by paired ribs 108 projecting inwardly from each of the cover members 102, 104. Such an arrangement facilitates the attachment of the central tubular member 50 to the unit. of handle 100 while allowing the central tubular member 50 to rotate relative to the handle unit 100 about the longitudinal axis AA in a 360 ° path.

As can be seen further in Fig. 1, the central tubular member 50 passes through and is supported by a mounting bushing 60 which is rotatably secured to the handle unit 100. The mounting collar 60 has a proximal projection 62 and a distal projection 64 defining a rotating slot 65 that is configured to rotatably receive a tip portion 101 of the handle unit 100 between these. Such an arrangement allows the mounting bushing 60 to rotate about the longitudinal axis AA relative to the handle unit 100. The central tubular member 50 is non-rotatably secured to the mounting bushing 60 by a pin of the central tubular portion 66. In addition. , a rotation knob 70 engages the mounting bushing 60. For example, the rotation knob 70 has a hollow mounting projection portion 72 that is dimensioned to receive a portion of the mounting bushing 60 therein. The rotation knob 70 can be manufactured from, for example, glass or carbon filled with nylon, polycarbonate, Ultem®, etc. and is likewise fixed to the mounting bushing 60 by the central member pin 66. Additionally, an inward projecting retaining projection 74 is formed in the mounting boss portion 72 and is configured to extend within a radial slot 68 formed in the mounting sleeve 60. Thus, the surgeon can rotate the central tubular member 50 (and the end effector 12 coupled thereto) about the longitudinal axis AA in a 360 ° path that grips the rotation knob 70 and makes it rotate relative to the handle unit 100.

The anvil 20 is retained in an open position by an anvil spring 21 and / or another pressure arrangement. The anvil 20 moves selectively from the open position to various closed positions or clamping and firing by a firing system, generally designated 109. The firing system 109 includes a "firing member" 110 comprising a hollow firing tube 110. The hollow firing tube 110 moves axially in the central tubular member 50 and thus form the outer portion of the elongated stem unit 40. The firing tube 110 can be made of a polymer or other suitable material and has a proximal end that engages a firing bearing 114 of the system 109. For example, the firing bearing 114 may be overmoulded to the proximal end of the firing tube 110. However, other fixture arrangements may be employed.

As can be seen in Fig. 1, the firing bearing 114 can be rotatably supported within a support collar 120 which is configured to move axially within the handle unit 100. The support collar 120 has a pair of fins laterally extending which are dimensioned to be slidably received within the fin slots formed in the right and left cover members. A) Yes, the support collar 120 can slide axially within the housing of the handle 100 while allowing the firing bearing 114 and firing tube 110 to rotate relative to it about the longitudinal axis A-A. According to the invention, a longitudinal groove is provided through the firing tube 110 to allow the pin of the central tubular portion 66 to extend therethrough within the central tubular member 50 while facilitating axial displacement of the firing tube 110 in the central tubular member 50.

The trigger system 109 further comprises a trigger 130 which serves to control the axial displacement of the firing tube 110 in the central tubular member 50. See Fig. 1. Such axial movement in the distal direction of the firing tube 110 in the shooting interaction with the anvil 20 it is referred to in the present description as "firing movement". As can be seen in Fig. 1, the trigger 130 is movably or rotatably coupled to the handle unit 100 by a pivot pin 132. A torsion spring 135 is employed to press the firing trigger 130 away from the handle portion 107 of the handle unit 100 to a non-driven start or open position. As can be seen in Fig. 1, the firing trigger 130 has an upper portion 134 which movably engages (with pin) the firing links 136 which are movably (pinned) coupled to the support collar 120 Thus, movement of the firing trigger 130 from the starting position (Fig. 1) to a final position adjacent to the handle portion 107 of the handle unit 100 will cause the firing bearing 114 and the firing tube 110 move in the distal direction "DD". The movement of the firing trigger 130 away from the handle portion 107 of the handle unit 100 (under the pressure of the torsion spring 135) can cause the firing bearing 114 and firing tube 110 to move in the proximal direction "PD" in the central tubular member 50.

The present invention can be used with different sizes and configurations of staple cartridge cartridges. For example, surgical instrument 10, when used in connection with a first trigger adapter 140, can be used with a 5 mm end effector 12 that is approximately 20 mm long (or in other lengths) that supports a cartridge. stapling 30. Such size of end effector can be particularly well suited, for example, to complete vascular transactions and relatively fine dissections. However, as will be described in greater detail below, the surgical instrument 10 can also be employed, for example, other sizes of the end effectors and the staple cartridges by replacing the first trigger adapter 140 with a second adapter Shooting. As a further alternative, the elongated stem unit 40 can be configured to be coupled to a single shape or size of the end effector.

A method of removably coupling end effector 12 to central tubular member 50 will be explained below. The coupling process is initiated by inserting the retaining stumps 17 into the elongated channel 14 into the base of the trunnions 52 in the central tubular member 50. After that, the surgeon advances the trigger 130 toward the handle 107 of the housing assembly 100 for distally advancing the firing tube 110 and the first firing adapter 140 over a proximal end portion 47 of the elongated channel 14 so as to retain the trunnions 17 in their respective bases 52. Such a position of the first adapter 140 on the trunnions 17 is referred to in the present description as the "coupled position". The present invention may further have an end effector blocking unit for locking the firing trigger 130 in its position after an end effector 12 has engaged the central tubular member 50.

More specifically, an embodiment of the end effector lock assembly 160 includes a latch pin 162 that is movably supported in the upper portion 134 of the trigger 130. As discussed above, the trigger tube 110 must initially be made advancing distally to the engaged position, wherein the first trigger adapter 140 retains the retention stumps 17 of the end effector 12 in the bases of the trunnions 52 in the central tubular member 50. The surgeon advances the trigger adapter 140 distally towards the position engaged by pulling the trigger activator 130 from the home position to the handle 107. When the trigger 130 is initially actuated, the retaining pin 162 moves distally until the firing tube 110 has advanced the first firing adapter 140 towards the engaged position at which the retaining pin 162 is pressed into a locking cavity 164 formed in the member covering. Optionally, when the latch pin 162 enters the lock cavity 164, the pin 162 can make an audible "click" or other sound, as well as provide a tactile indication to the surgeon that the end effector 12 has been " Additionally, the surgeon can not inadvertently continue to operate trigger trigger 130 to begin to form staples 32 in end effector 12 without intentionally pressing retaining pin 162 out of the locking cavity. 164. Similarly, if the surgeon releases the firing trigger 130 when in the engaged position, it is held in that position by the firing pin. latch 162 to prevent the trigger 30 from returning to the starting position and thereby releasing the end effector 12 from the central tubular member 50.

The present invention may further include a lock button of the firing system 137 which is rotatably coupled to the handle unit 100. In one form, the firing button of the firing system 137 has a lock 138 formed in a distal end thereof, which is oriented to engage the firing bearing 114 when the firing release button is in a first closed position. As can be seen in Fig. 1, a closing spring 139 serves to press the locking button of the firing system 137 in the first closing position. In various circumstances, the closure 138 serves to engage the firing bearing 114 at a point where the position of the firing bearing 114 in the central tubular member 50 corresponds to a point where the first firing adapter 140 is about to advance distally up the holding ramp 28 on the anvil 20. It should be understood that, as the first trigger adapter 140 advances axially up the holding ramp 28, the anvil 20 will move in a path, such that its The staple forming surface portion 22 is substantially parallel to the upper face 36 of the staple cartridge 30.

After the end effector 12 has been coupled to the central tubular member 50, the staple forming process is first initiated by pressing the locking button of the firing system 137 to allow the firing bearing 114 to move, moreover, distally in the central tubular member 50 and, finally, compress the anvil 20 inside the staple cartridge 30. After pressing the locking button of the firing system 137, the surgeon continues to actuate the firing trigger 130 towards the handle 107 to actuate thus the first staple collar 140 above the corresponding staple forming ramp 29 for forcing the anvil 20 into the forming contact with the staples 32 in the staple cartridge 30. The locking button of the firing system 137 prevents formation Inadvertent staples 32 until the surgeon is ready to begin that process. In this embodiment, the surgeon must press the lock button of the firing system 137 before the firing trigger 130 can be operated, further, to begin the staple forming process.

The surgical instrument 10 can be used only as a tissue stapling device if desired. However, the present invention may further include a fabric cutting system, generally designated 170. In at least one form, the fabric cutting system 170 comprises a blade member 172 that can be selectively advanced from a non-driven position adjacent to the proximal end of the end effector 12 to an actuated position to activate a trigger to advance the blade 200. The blade member 172 is moy supported within the central tubular member 50 and engages or otherwise protrudes from a cutting rod 180. The blade member 172 may be manufactured from, for example, 420 or 440 stainless steel with a hardness greater than 38HRC (Rockwell hardness C scale) and has a fabric cutting edge 176 formed at the distal end 174 thereof and may be configured to extend slidably through a groove in the anvil 20 and a centrally disposed groove 33 in the staple cartridge 30 to cut through the tissue that is clamped in the end effector. end 12. Cutting rod 180 extends through central tubular member 50 and has a proximal end portion that interacts and drives a cutting transmission that operatively engages the trigger to advance blade 200. The trigger to advance the blade 200 is coupled to a pivoting pin 132, in such a way that it can be rotated or otherwise activated without triggering the firing trigger 130. According to the invention, a first cutting engagement 192 is coupled, in addition, to the pivot pin 132 in such a way that the activation of the trigger to advance the blade 200 further rotates the first cutting engagement 192. A firing return spring 202 engages between the first cutting engagement 192 and the handle housing 100 to press the trigger to advance the blade 200 toward an inactive or starting position.

The cutting transmission further includes a second cutting gear 194 which is rotatably supported on a second gear spindle and on a gear coupling with the first cutting gear 192. The second cutting gear 194 is in gear coupling 194. gear with a third cutting gear 196 which is supported on a third gear spindle. In addition, supported on the third engagement spindle 195, there is a fourth cutting gear 198. The fourth cutting gear 198 is adapted to couple with drive a series of annular meshing teeth or rings in a proximal end of the cutting rod 180. Thus, such an arrangement allows the fourth cutting gear 198 to axially drive the cutting rod 180 in the distal direction "DD" or the proximal direction "PD" at the same time that it allows the rod shot 180 rotates about the longitudinal axis AA with respect to the fourth cutting gear 198. Accordingly, the surgeon can axially advance the firing rod 180 and, finally, the blade member 172 distally by pulling the trigger to advance the blade 200 towards the handle 107 of the handle unit 100.

The present invention further includes a cutting lock system 210 which prevents advancement of the blade member 172 unless the firing trigger 130 has been pulled to the fully fired position. Such a feature will, therefore, prevent the activation of the cutting advance system 170 unless the staples have first been fired or formed within the tissue. As can be seen in Fig. 1, several implementations of the cutting lock system 210 comprise a blade locking bar 211 that is rotatably supported within the handle portion 107 of the handle unit 100. The bar The blade lock 211 has an activation end 212 that is adapted to be engaged by the firing trigger 130 when the firing trigger 130 is in the fully fired position. Additionally, the blade locking bar 211 has a retaining hook 214 at its other end that is adapted to hook a hook 216 in the first cutting engagement 192. A cut-off spring 218 is provided in the form of a hook. used to press the blade locking bar 211 in a "locked" position, wherein the retaining hook 214 is retained in engagement with the locking rod 216 so as to prevent activation of the trigger to advance the blade 200 unless the firing trigger 130 is in the fully fired position.

After the staples have been "fired" (formed) into the target tissue, the surgeon can press the firing trigger release button 167 to allow firing trigger 130 to return to the start position under spring pressure. torsion 135, which allows the anvil 20 to be pressed in an open position under the pressure of the spring 21. When in the open position, the surgeon can remove the end effector 12 by leaving the implantable staple cartridge 30 and the staples 32 behind. In applications where the end effector was inserted through a passage, working channel, etc. the surgeon will return the anvil 20 to the closed position by actuating the trigger 130 to allow the end effector 12 to be removed out through the working passage or channel. If, however, the surgeon wishes to cut the target tissue after firing the staples, the surgeon activates the trigger to advance the blade 200 in the manner described above to operate the knife bar 172 through the target tissue to the end of the effector. of end. After that, the surgeon can release the trigger to advance the blade 200 to allow the return spring of the shot 202 to cause the transmission of the shot to return the blade bar 172 to the start (not actuated) position. Once the knife bar 172 has been returned to In the starting position, the surgeon can open the clamps of the end effector 13, 15 to release the implantable cartridge 30 within the patient and then remove the end effector 12 from the patient. Thus, such surgical instruments facilitate the use of small implantable staple cartridges that can be inserted through relatively smaller passages and work channels, while providing the surgeon with the option to shoot the staples without cutting tissue or if desired, in addition , cut the tissue after the staples have been fired.

Several novel and unique embodiments of the present invention employ a compressible staple cartridge that supports the staples in a substantially stationary position for the forming contact by the anvil. The anvil is driven into the unformed staples where, for example, the degree of staple formation achieved depends on how far the anvil is driven within the staples. Such an arrangement provides the surgeon with the ability to adjust the amount of firing or forming pressure applied to the staples and thus alter the final formed height of the staples. In other embodiments of the present invention, surgical stapling arrangements can employ staple driving elements that can elevate staples toward the anvil. These are described in more detail later.

Optionally, with respect to the foregoing, the amount of firing movement that is applied to the moving anvil depends on the degree of activation of the firing trigger. For example, if the surgeon wishes to achieve only partially formed staples, then the trigger activates only partial pressure is pressed into the handle 107. In order to achieve the formation of more staples, the surgeon simply compresses the firing trigger even more resulting in the anvil being driven further towards the forming contact with the staples . As used in the present description, the term "forming contact" means that the staple forming surface or the staple forming cavities have come into contact with the ends of the staple legs and have begun to form or bend the legs in a formed position. The degree of staple formation refers to the extent to which the legs of the staples have been bent and, finally, refers to the staple formation height as mentioned above. Those skilled in the art will further understand that, since the anvil 20 moves in a substantially parallel relationship with respect to the staple cartridge when the firing motions are applied to it, the staples are formed substantially simultaneously with substantially the same heights formed.

Figs. 2 and 3 illustrate an alternative end effector 12"which is similar to the end effector 12 'described above, except with the following differences which are configured to accommodate a knife bar 172'. The knife bar 172 'engages or protrudes from a cutting rod 180 and is operated in another manner in the manner described above with respect to the knife bar 172. However, in this embodiment, the knife bar 172' is long enough to traverse the full length of the end effector 12"and, therefore, a separate distal blade member it is not used in the end effector 12". The cutter bar 172 'has an upper transverse member 173' and a lower transverse member 175 'formed therein. The upper transverse member 173 'is transversely slidable transversely to a corresponding elongated slot 250 in the anvil 20"and the lower transverse member 175' is oriented to traverse an elongated slot 252 in the elongated channel 14" of the end effector 12" A decoupling slot (not shown) is further provided on the anvil 20"such that when the knife bar 172 'has been urged into a final position with the fine end effector 12", the upper transverse member 173 'is dropped through the corresponding slot to allow the anvil 20"move to the open position to uncouple the cut and stapled tissue. The anvil 20"may otherwise be identical to the anvil 20 described above and the elongated channel 14" may otherwise be identical to the elongated channel 14 described above.

In these embodiments, the anvil 20"is pressed in a fully open position (Fig. 2) by a spring or other opening arrangement (not shown). The anvil 20"moves between the positions fully clamped and opened by the axial displacement of the firing adapter 150 in the manner described above. Once the firing adapter 150 has advanced to the fully clamped position (Fig. 3), the surgeon can then advance the blade bar 172"distally in the manner described above. If the surgeon wishes to use the end effector as a grasping device to manipulate the tissue, the trigger adapter may moving proximally to allow the anvil 20 to "move out of the elongated channel 14" as shown in FIG. 4 in dashed lines. In this embodiment, when the knife bar 172"moves distally, the upper transverse member 173 'and the lower transverse member 175' pull out the anvil 20" and the elongated channel 14"together to achieve the desired staple formation when the blade bar 172"is advanced distally through end effector 12". See Fig. 5. Thus, in this embodiment, the staple formation occurs simultaneously with the tissue cut, but the staples themselves can be formed sequentially when the knife bar 172"is driven distally.

The novel and unique features of the various surgical staple cartridges and surgical instruments of the present invention allow the staples in those cartridges to be arranged in one or more linear or non-linear lines. A plurality of such staple lines may be provided on each side of an elongated slot that is centrally disposed within the staple cartridge to receive the tissue cutting member therethrough. In an arrangement, for example, the staples in a line may be substantially parallel with the adjacent staples (s) of staples, but displaced from them. As a further alternative, one or more staple lines may be non-linear in nature. That is, the base of at least one staple in a staple line may extend along an axis that is substantially transverse to the bases of other staples in the same staple line. For example, as will be discussed in more detail below, alternatively, the lines of Staples on each side of the elongated slot can have a zigzag appearance. Such non-linear staple arrays can achieve better tissue holding results with fewer staples than several arrays of linear staples used in previous staple cartridges.

FIG. 6 illustrates the use of a surgical staple cartridge embodiment 900 in an end effector mode 612 '. As can be seen in Figs. 6 and 7, one embodiment of the surgical staple cartridge 900 has a cartridge body 902 having a centrally disposed elongated slot 904 extending through a proximal end 903 to an area adjacent a distal end 905. The elongated slot 904 is configured to allow a cutting body to move axially therethrough during a tissue cutting operation in the manner described above. The cartridge body 902 consists of a compressible hemostatic material such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose ("ORC") or a bioabsorbable foam made of, for example, PGA (polyglycolic acid, sold under the trademark Vicryl), PCL ( polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PDS (polydioxanone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polygallecapronate 25, sold under the trademark Monocryl) or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA and PDS in which the lines 920, 930 of the unformed staples 922. However, the cartridge body 902 can be made of other materials that serve to support the unformed staples 922 in a desired orientation such that they can be compressed when the anvil 910 ' get in touch with these. He Staple cartridge 900 is implantable and left attached to the stapled tissue after the stapling procedure has been completed. In order to prevent the staples 922 from being affected and the hemostatic material being activated during the insertion and positioning process, the entire cartridge 900 can be coated or wrapped in a biodegradable film 906 such as a polydioxanone film sold under the registered trademark PDS ® or with a film of polyglycerol sebacate (PGS) or other biodegradable films made of, for example, PGA (polyglycolic acid, marketed under the trademark Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA ( polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polygallecapronate 25, sold under the trademark Monocryl) or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS that would be impermeable to rupture. The cartridge body 902 of the staple cartridge 900 is dimensioned to be removably supported within the elongated channel of the end effector 612 '.

In Figs. 6, 10, and 11, the surgical staple cartridge 900 operatively supports a first line 920 of the staples 922 on one side side 907 of the elongated slot 904 and a second line 930 of the staples 922 on the other side side 909 of the staple. elongated slot 904. Staples 922 can be made of a metallic material such as, for example, titanium, titanium alloys (eg, Titanium 6AI-4V, Titanium 3AI-2.5V), stainless steel, etc. and may have a staple base 924 and two straight staple legs 926 projecting therefrom. Each staple leg 926 may have a tissue piercing tip 928 formed therein. In the first line 920 of the staples 922, the staple base 924 of at least one staple 922 is superimposed on the staple base of another staple 922. Preferably, the staple base 924 of each staple 922 is superimposed on staple bases 924 of two. adjacent staples 922, except for the base 924 of the last staple 922 at each end of the first staple line 920. See FIG. 10. Thus, the first staple line 920 has a substantially non-linear shape. More particularly, when viewed from above, the first line of staples 920 has a substantially zigzag appearance.

As can be seen in Fig. 9, the anvil 90 has two sequential longitudinal staple forming cavities 912 which each have a substantial zigzag shape corresponding to the shape of the first line 920 of the staples 922 in such a way that, when the anvil 910 is put into the contact formation with the staples 922, the legs 926 thereof are formed as shown in Fig. 11. Thus, the distal leg of a staple shares the same cavity as the proximal leg of the staple. next staple longitudinally. Such an arrangement allows a denser cavity pattern, even at a point where the staples themselves interact (for example, they bend over each other). In prior staple cavity arrangements, generally, there must be between 0.005 and 0.015 inches (between 0.13 and 0.38 mm) of metal / distance from one set of cavities to the next. This embodiment of the present invention, however, has a separation arrangement of 0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.02 inches) of interference / overlap (essentially 0.5 mm (-0.020")) because, for example, a staple is coupled with the next staple. Such arrangements allow for 15-30% more staples in the same space. In addition, when the staples are interlocked, there is less need for multiple side rows of staples. The above arrangements commonly use three rows on each side of the tissue cutting line to avoid the existence of an open passage through which blood can pass. Interlocking staple lines are less likely to leave passages through which blood can pass. Another distinct advantage provided by the various interlocking staple arrangements of the present invention relates to the improved "burst strength" which refers to the amount of force required to tear open an open staple line.

Another arrangement of staple-forming cavities may comprise a common staple-forming cavity. As used in the present description, the term "common staple forming cavity" means that a forming cavity can form all the staples in a single line of staples as opposed to previous anvil designs, wherein a cavity of discrete formation it is provided for each leg of each staple that is formed.

FIG. 12 illustrates yet another staple embodiment 922 ', wherein the base 924' has a displaced portion 929 to facilitate a tighter superposition of the bases 924 '. As indicated above, the staple cartridge 900 has a second line 930 of the staples 922 supported on a second side side 909 of the elongated slot 904. The second line 930 of the staples 922 is substantially identical to the first line 920 of the staples. staples 922. Thus, the anvil 910 has a second common staple forming cavity 912 corresponding to the second staple line 930 for the forming contact with these. Alternatively, however, the second line 930 of the staples 922 may differ from the first line 920 of staples in the shape and, perhaps, in the number of staples.

FIG. 8 illustrates a surgical staple cartridge 900 'that is substantially identical to staple cartridge 900 described above, with the exception of lines 920', 930 'of staples 922 supported therein. For example, in this embodiment, the line 920 'of the staples 922 is disposed relative to one another, such that a base axis SS of at least one staple base 924 is substantially transverse to the base axis SS of the staple base 924 of at least one other adjacent staple 922. Such a predetermined pattern of staples, when viewed from above, comprises a substantially zigzag array. In Fig. 13, the respective bases 924 of the staples 922 may additionally have a base support member 927 overmolded thereon as shown. The base support member 927 can be made of, for example, non-absorbable plastic such as polyether ether ketone "PEEK" or absorbable plastic such as, for example, polyglycolic acid "PGA", polylactic acid "PLA" or "PLLA", polydioxanone "PDS", PCL (polycaprolactone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polygallecapronate 25, sold under the trademark Monocryl) or various mixtures of compounds if PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA, and PCL. The base support members 927 facilitate interlocking between the staples without causing the staples themselves to overlap.

Thus, such arrangements could form staples with "B" shapes or inverted "W" shapes without the legs of the staples themselves overlapping. However, the crowns are connected by the base support members to act as staples that overlap. Such arrangements allow the combined cavities to have two discrete passages for each leg.

FIG. 14 employs a line of staples 920", wherein legs 926 of adjacent staples 922 are coupled together by a coupling portion 929 molded or otherwise coupled thereto. Each coupler portion 929 can be made of, for example, polyether ether ketone "PEEK" or absorbable plastic such as, for example, polyglycolic acid "PGA", polylactic acid "PLA" or "PLLA", polydioxanone "PDS", PCL (polycaprolactone ), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polygallecapronate 25, sold under the trademark Monocryl) or various mixtures of compounds if PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA, and PCL. Such a staple line 920"has substantial zigzag appearance when viewed from the top While the various embodiments of the surgical staple cartridge 900, 900 'have been explained with reference to use with the end effector 612', it should be understood that the 900, 900 'staple cartridges can be effectively employed with the various other end effectors and surgical instruments described in the present description above, with arrangements of appropriate staple-forming cavities that are provided in the anvils of those instruments for the purpose of achieve the desired amount of staple formation after the movement of the anvils towards the forming contact with the staples.

Figs. 15 and 16 illustrate another embodiment of surgical staple cartridge 940 supported in an elongated channel 14 of a surgical instrument 10. The surgical staple cartridge 940 includes a cartridge body 942 having a centrally disposed elongated slot 944 extending at least partially through this. The elongated slot 944 is configured to allow a cutting body of the surgical instrument 10 to move axially therethrough during a tissue cutting operation in the manner described above. The cartridge body 942 consists of a compressible hemostatic material such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose ("ORC") or a bioabsorbable foam of the types described above or below in which lines 946, 948, 950 are supported, 952 of the unformed staples 922. In order to prevent the staples 922 from being affected and the hemostatic material being activated during the insertion and positioning process, the complete cartridge 940 can be coated or wrapped in a biodegradable film 954 such as a film. of polydioxanone sold under the trademark PDS® or with a polyglycerol sebacate film (PGS) or other biodegradable films made of, for example, PGA (polyglycolic acid, marketed under the trademark Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polygallecapronate 25, sold under the trademark Monocryl) or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS that would be waterproof until the break.

In Fig. 15, the cartridge 940 further includes a cartridge support member 960 which is coupled to the cartridge body 942. The cartridge support member 960 may be made of a rigid material such as, for example, titanium, stainless steel, aluminum, any alloy of the above, etc. and can be partially incorporated into the cartridge body 942. The cartridge holder member 960 can be held in place, for example, by the film 954. Alternatively, where limited binding is desired, the sporadic use of cyanoacrylate could be used for " Paste "the two components together. As a further alternative, the cartridge body 942 can be heated and "welded" or "fused" to the cartridge support member 960. The cartridge support member 960 forms at least a portion of the lower surface of the cartridge body 942 for coupling with the elongate channel 14. The cartridge support member 960 has one or more pressure features 962 protruding therefrom to removably couple the cartridge support member 960 to the elongated channel 14. Other forms of fastener / feature arrangements of pressure can be used to removably couple the cartridge support member 960 to the elongate channel 14.

The cartridge support member 960 has a series of support frames 964, 966, 968, 970, 972, 974, 976 formed therein to provide some lateral support to the bases 924 of the staples 922 in the staple lines 946, 948, 950, 952, as shown in Fig. 15. Thus, the support frames are substantially coextensive with the staple lines. Fig. 17 illustrates an alternative embodiment of the staple cartridge 940 'which is substantially identical to the cartridge 940, except for the inclusion of the straight fin portions 978, 979, 980, 981, 982, 983 protruding from the support frames 964, 966, 968, 970, 972, 976, respectively, to provide additional side support to the staples 922. The fin portions can be integrally formed with the cartridge support member 960 and have a height that is about 1/2 or less of the height of the cartridge. Thus, for example, any erect feature supporting the foam can not extend above the maximum compression height of the foam. Thus, if the cartridge is designed, for example, to be compressed to 1/3 of its original height when fired, the fins would be between 66% of the uncompressed height, all the way up to 10% of the uncompressed height .

In use, once the staples 922 have been formed through contact with the anvil 20 in the manner described above, the anvil 20 is opened and the end effector 12 is pulled out of the stapled tissue. When the end effector 12 is pulled out of the stapled tissue, the cartridge body 942 remains attached to the stapled tissue and is then separated from the cartridge support member 960 which remains attached to the elongate channel 14. The cartridge support member 960 is provides a color different from the color of the material comprising the cartridge body 942 as well as the color of the elongate channel 14. Such an arrangement provides the surgeon with an easily recognizable indication that no staple cartridge is present within the end effector. Thus, the surgeon will not inadvertently attempt to reinsert / use the end effector without first installing a new cartridge. staples in this. For this, the surgeon simply disconnects the pressure characteristics of the cartridge holder member 960 from the elongate channel 14 to allow the cartridge holder member 960 of a new staple cartridge 940 to be placed therein. While staple cartridges 940, 940 'have been explained with reference to surgical instrument 10, it should be understood that those cartridges can be effectively employed with many of the other surgical instruments described in the present description without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. .

According to the invention, a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body and a plurality of staples stored within the cartridge body. In use, the staple cartridge can be inserted into a surgical site and positioned on one side of the tissue being treated. Additionally, a staple forming anvil can be positioned on the side opposite the fabric. The anvil can be moved by a first clamp and the staple cartridge can be moved by a second clamp, wherein the first clamp and / or the second clamp can move towards the other. Once the staple cartridge and the anvil have been positioned relative to the tissue, the staples can be ejected from the body of the staple cartridge, such that the staples can pierce the tissue and come in contact with the staple forming anvil . Once the staples have been unfolded from the body of the staple cartridge, the body of the staple cartridge can then be removed from the surgical site. The staple cartridge, or at least a portion of a staple cartridge can implant with the staples. For example, as described in greater detail below, a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body that can be compressed, crushed, and / or folded by the anvil when the anvil moves from an open position to a closed position. When the cartridge body is compressed, crushed, and / or folded, the staples positioned within the cartridge body can be deformed by the anvil. Alternatively, the clamp supporting the staple cartridge can move toward the anvil in a closed position. In any case, the staples may deform while at least partially positioned within the body of the cartridge. In some cases, the staples may not be ejected from the staple cartridge while, in other cases, the staples may be ejected from the staple cartridge along with a portion of the cartridge body.

With reference now to Figs. 18A to 18D, a compressible staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1000, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 1010 and, additionally, a plurality of staples 1020 positioned in the compressible cartridge body 1010, but only a staple 1020 is shown in Figs. 18A to 18D. FIG. 18A illustrates the staple cartridge 1000 supported by a staple cartridge holder, or staple cartridge channel, 1030, wherein the staple cartridge 1000 is illustrated in an uncompressed condition. In such an uncompressed condition, the anvil 1040 may or may not be in contact with the tissue T. In use, the anvil 1040 may move from an open position toward contact with the tissue T as illustrated in FIG. 18B and position the T tissue against the cartridge body 1010. Even though the anvil 1040 can position the tissue T against a tissue contacting surface 1019 of the staple cartridge body 1010, with reference again to FIG. 18B, the body of the staple cartridge 1010 can undergo little, if any, compressive force or pressure at such a point and staples 1020 may remain in an untriggered or unformed condition. As illustrated in Figs. 18A and 18B, the staple cartridge body 1010 may comprise one or more layers and the staple legs 1021 of the staples 1020 may extend upwardly through these layers. The cartridge body 1010 may comprise a first layer 1011, a second layer 1012, a third layer 1013, wherein the second layer 1012 can be positioned between the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013, and a fourth layer 1014, wherein the third layer 1013 can be positioned between the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014. The bases 1022 of the staples 1020 can be positioned within the cavities 1015 in the fourth layer 1014 and the staple legs 1021 can extend upwards from the bases 1022 and through the fourth layer 1014, the third layer 1013, and the second layer 1012, for example . Optionally, each deformable leg 1021 may comprise a tip, such as the sharp tip 1023, for example, which may be positioned in the second layer 1012, for example, when the staple cartridge 1000 is in an uncompressed state. For example, the tips 1023 may not extend into and / or through the first layer 1011, where the tips 1023 may not protrude through the tissue contacting surface 1019 when the staple cartridge 1000 is in a non-compressed state. The sharp tips 1023 can be positioned in the third layer 1013, and / or in any other suitable layer when the staple cartridge is in an uncompressed state. Alternatively, a cartridge body of a staple cartridge can have any suitable number of layers such as less than four layers or more than four layers, for example.

Optionally, as described in greater detail below, the first layer 1011 may comprise a reinforcing material and / or plastic material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example, and the second layer 1012 it may comprise a bioabsorbable foam material and / or a compressible hemostatic material, such as oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. Optionally, one or more of the first layer 1011, the second layer 1012, the third layer 1013, and the fourth layer 1014 can hold the staples 1020 within the staple cartridge body 1010 and, additionally, hold the staples 1020 in alignment between yes. The third layer 1013 may comprise a reinforcing material, or an almost incompressible or inelastic material, which may be configured to hold the staple legs 1021 of the staples 1020 in their mutual relative position. In addition, the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014, which are positioned on opposite sides of the third layer 1013, can stabilize, or reduce the movement of, the staples 1020 even when the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 can comprise an elastic or compressible foam material. The staple tips 1023 of the staple legs 1021 can be embedded at least partially in the first layer 1011. For example, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 can be configured to cooperatively and firmly hold the staple legs 1021 in their positions. Each of the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 can be comprised of a bioabsorbable plastic sheet, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA) which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS) ), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polygallecapronate 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example, and each of the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 may comprise at least one material or hemostatic agent.

Although the first layer 1011 may be compressible, the second layer 1012 may be substantially more compressible than the first layer 1011. For example, the second layer 1012 may be approximately two times more compressible, approximately three times more compressible, approximately four times more compressible , approximately five times more compressible, and / or approximately ten times more compressible, for example, than the first layer 1011. Indicated otherwise, the second layer 1012 may be compressed approximately twice, approximately three times, approximately four times, approximately five times. times, and / or about ten times more than the first layer 1011, for a given force. The second layer 1012 can be between about twice as compressible and about ten times as compressible, for example, as the first layer 1011. The second layer 1012 may comprise a plurality of voids with air defined therein, wherein the amount and / or size of voids with air in second layer 1012 may be controlled in order to provide a desired compressibility of second layer 1012. Similar to the above, although the third layer 1013 may be compressible, the fourth layer 1014 may be substantially more compressible than the third layer 1013. For example, the fourth layer 1014 may be approximately twice as compressible, approximately three times more compressible, approximately four times more compressible, approximately five times more compressible, and / or approximately ten times more compressible, for example, than third layer 1013. Stated otherwise, fourth layer 1014 may be compressed approximately twice, approximately three times, approximately four times times, approximately five times, and / or approximately ten times more than the third layer 1013, for a force Dadaist. The fourth layer 1014 may be between approximately twice as compressible and approximately ten times more compressible, for example, than the third layer 1013. The fourth layer 1014 may comprise a plurality of air voids defined therein, wherein the amount y / or size of the air voids in the fourth layer 1014 can be controlled for the purpose of providing a desired compression capability of the fourth layer 1014. In various circumstances, the compressibility of a cartridge body, or cartridge body layer , can be expressed in terms of a compression index, that is, a distance in which a layer is compressed for a given amount of force. For example, a layer having a high compression ratio will compress a greater distance for a given amount of compression force applied to the layer compared to a layer having a lower compression ratio. That said, the second layer 1012 may have a higher compression ratio than the first layer 1011 and, similarly, the fourth layer 1014 may have a higher compression ratio than the third layer 1013. The second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 may comprise the same material and may comprise the same compression ratio. The second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 may comprise materials having different compression rates. Similarly, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may comprise the same material and may comprise the same compression index. The first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may comprise materials having different compression rates.

When the anvil 1040 moves towards its closed position, the anvil 1040 can come into contact with the tissue T and apply a compressive force to the tissue T and the staple cartridge 1000, as illustrated in FIG. 18C. In such circumstances, the anvil 1040 may push the upper surface, or tissue contacting surface 1019, of the cartridge body 1010 downwardly of the staple cartridge holder 1030. The staple cartridge holder 1030 may comprise a supporting surface of the cartridge 1031, which can be configured to support the staple cartridge 1000 when the staple cartridge 1000 is compressed between the cartridge support surface 1031 and the contact surface with the tissue 1041 of the anvil 1040. Due to the pressure applied by the anvil 1040, the body of the cartridge 1010 can be compressed and the anvil 1040 can come into contact with the staples 1020. More particularly, the compression of the cartridge body 1010 and the downward movement of the tissue contacting surface 1019 can cause the tips 1023 of the staple legs 1021 to pierce the first layer 1011 of the cartridge body 1010, pierce the tissue T, and enter the forming cavities. 1042 on the anvil 1040. When the cartridge body 1010 is further compressed by the anvil 1040, the tips 1023 can come into contact with the walls defining the forming cavities 1042 and, as a result, the legs 1021 can deform or curl inwards, for example, as illustrated in Fig. 18C. When the staple legs 1021 are deformed, as illustrated, in addition, in Fig. 18C, the bases 1022 of the staples 1020 may come into contact with or be supported by the staple cartridge holder 1030. Optionally, as described in more detail below, the staple cartridge holder 1030 may comprise a plurality of support features, such as grooves, grooves, or staple support channels 1032, for example, which can be configured to support staples 1020, or at least the bases 1022 of the staples 1020, while the staples 1020 are deformed. As illustrated, in addition, in Fig. 18C, the cavities 1015 in the fourth layer 1014 can be folded as a result of the compression force applied to the body of the cartridge. staple cartridge 1010. In addition to the cavities 1015, the staple cartridge body 1010 it may further comprise one or more voids, such as voids 1016, for example, which may or may not comprise a portion of a staple positioned therein, which may be configured to allow the cartridge body 1010 to be folded. The cavities 1015 and / or the voids 1016 can be configured to be folded so that the walls defining the cavities and / or the walls deviate downwardly and come into contact with the supporting surface of the cartridge 1031 and / or come into contact with a layer of the body of the cartridge 1010 positioned below the cavities and / or voids.

After comparing Fig. 18B and Fig. 18C, it is evident that the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 have been compressed substantially by the compression pressure applied by the anvil 1040. It can also be noted that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 has also been compressed. When the anvil 1040 moves to its closed position, the anvil 1040 can continue to further compress the cartridge body 1010 by pushing the tissue contacting surface 1019 downwardly of the staple cartridge holder 1030. When the Cartridge body 1010 is further compressed, anvil 1040 can deform staples 1020 in its fully formed form as illustrated in Fig. 18D. With reference to Fig. 18D, the legs 1021 of each staple 1020 can deform downwardly from the base 1022 of each staple 1020 for the purpose of capturing at least a portion of the tissue T, the first layer 1011, the second layer 1012, the third layer 1013, and the fourth layer 1014 between the deformable legs 1021 and the base 1022. After comparing Figs. 18C and 18D, it is evident, furthermore, that the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 have been substantially compressed, furthermore, by the compression pressure applied by the anvil 1040. It can also be noted, after comparing Figs. 18C and 18D that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 have additionally been compressed. After the staples 1020 have been formed completely, or at least sufficiently, the anvil 1040 can be lifted out of the tissue T, and then the holder of the staple cartridge 1030 can be moved away from and / or uncoupled from the staple cartridge 1000. As it is represented in Fig. 18D, and as a result of the foregoing, the body of the cartridge 1010 can be implanted with the staples 1020. In various circumstances, the body of the implanted cartridge 1010 can support the tissue along the staple line. In some circumstances, a hemostatic agent, and / or any other suitable therapeutic medicament, contained within the body of the implanted cartridge 1010 can treat the tissue over time. A hemostatic agent, as mentioned above, can reduce bleeding of the cut and / or stapled tissue while a binding agent or a tissue adhesive can provide strength to the tissue over time. The body of the implanted cartridge 1010 can be comprised of materials such as ORC (oxidized regenerated celluloses), protein matrix, polyglycolic acid (PGA) which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS) ), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecapronate 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. In certain circumstances, the cartridge body 1010 may comprise an antimicrobial and / or antibiotic material, such as colloidal silver and / or triclosan, for example, which may reduce the possibility of infection at the surgical site.

The body layers of the cartridge 1010 can be connected to each other. The second layer 1012 can adhere to the first layer 1011, the third layer 1013 can adhere to the second layer 1012, and the fourth layer 1014 can adhere to the third layer 1013 with the use of at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or a protein hydrogel, for example. Although not illustrated, the body layers of the cartridge 1010 can be connected together by mechanical interlacing characteristics. For example, each of the first layer 1011 and the second layer 1012 may comprise the corresponding interlacing characteristics, such as a tongue and groove arrangement and / or a dovetail joint arrangement, for example. Similarly, the second layer 1012 and the third layer 1013 each may comprise corresponding interlock features while the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014 each may comprise corresponding interlock features. Although not illustrated, the staple cartridge 1000 may comprise one or more rivets, for example, which may extend through one or more layers of the cartridge body 1010. For example, each rivet may comprise a first end, or head, positioned adjacent the first layer 1011 and a second head positioned adjacent the fourth layer 1014 which can already either assemble to or conform to a second end of the rivet. Due to the compressible nature of the cartridge body 1010, the rivets can compress the body of the cartridge 1010 so that the heads of the rivets can be lowered relative to the tissue contacting surface 1019 and / or the lower surface 1018 of the body. of the 1010 cartridge, for example. For example, the rivets may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecapronate. (PGCL), which is marketed under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. The body layers of the cartridge 1010 may not be connected to each other except for the staples 1020 contained therein. For example, the frictional engagement between the staple legs 1021 and the body of the cartridge 1010, for example, can hold together the body layers of the cartridge 1010 and, once the staples have been formed, the layers can be captured within the body. the staples 1020. At least a portion of the staple legs 1021 may comprise a roughened surface or a rough coating which may increase the frictional forces between the staples 1020 and the cartridge body 1010.

As described above, a surgical instrument may comprise a first clamp including the staple cartridge holder 1030 and a second clamp including the anvil 1040. Optionally, as described in greater detail below, the cartridge of the staple cartridge 1030 and a second clamp includes the anvil 1040.

Staples 1000 may comprise one or more retaining features which can be configured to engage the staple cartridge holder 1030 and, as a result, releasably retain the staple cartridge 1000 to the staple cartridge holder 1030. The staple cartridge 1000 can be adhered to the staple cartridge holder 1030 by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or a protein hydrogel, for example. In use, in at least one circumstance, especially in laparoscopic and / or endoscopic surgery, the second clamp can move within a closed position opposite the first clamp, for example, in such a way that the first and second clamps can be inserted through a trocar into a surgical site. For example, the trocar can define an opening or cannula, of approximately 5 mm, through which the first and second clamps can be inserted. The second clamp can be moved to a partially closed position intermediate between the open position and the closed position which can allow the first and second clamps to be inserted through the trocar without deforming the staples 1020 contained in the staple cartridge body 1010 For example, the anvil 1040 may not apply a compressive force to the staple cartridge body 1010 when the second clamp is in its partially closed intermediate position while the anvil 1040 may compress the staple cartridge body 1010 when the second clamp it is in its intermediate position partially closed. Even though the anvil 1040 can compress the body of the staple cartridge 1010 when it is in such an intermediate position, the anvil 1040 may not compress the body of the staple cartridge 1010 sufficiently, so that the anvil 1040 comes into contact with the staples 1020 and / or, such that the staples 1020 are deformed by the anvil 1040. Once the first and second Clamps have been inserted through the trocar into the surgical site, the second clamp can be opened once more and the anvil 1040 and the staple cartridge 1000 can be positioned relative to the target tissue as described above.

With reference now to Figs. 19A to 19D, an end effector of a surgical stapler may comprise an implantable staple cartridge 1100 positioned between an anvil 1140 and a staple cartridge holder 1130. Similar to the above, the anvil 1140 may comprise a contact surface with the 1141, the staple cartridge 1100 may comprise a tissue contacting surface 1119, and the staple cartridge holder 1130 may comprise a support surface 1131, which may be configured to support the staple cartridge 1100. Referring to FIG. Fig. 19A, the anvil 1140 can be used to position the tissue T against the tissue contacting surface 1119 of the staple cartridge 1100 without deforming the staple cartridge 1100 and, when the anvil 1140 is in such a position, the contact surface with the fabric 1141 a distance 1101a can be positioned away from the surface of the staple cartridge holder 1131 and the tissue contacting surface 1119 can be positioned a distance 1102a is placed away from the surface of the staple cartridge holder 1131. After that, when the anvil 1140 moves toward the staple cartridge holder 1130, with reference now to FIG. 19B, the anvil 1140 can push the upper surface, or tissue contacting surface 1119, of the staple cartridge 1100 downwardly and compress the first layer 1111 and the second layer 1112 of the body. of the cartridge 1110. When the layers 1111 and 1112 are compressed, with reference again to Fig. 19B, the second layer 1112 can be squashed and the legs 1121 of the staples 1120 can pierce the first layer 1111 and enter the tissue T. for example, the staples 1120 can be positioned at least partially within the staple pockets, or the voids, 1115 in the second layer 1112 and, when the second layer 1112 is compressed, the staple pockets 1115 can be folded and, as a result, allow that the second layer 1112 is folded around the staples 1120. The second layer 1112 may comprise the coating portions 1116, which may extend over the staple pockets 1115 and enclose, or at least 9 partially enclosing the staple cavities 1115. FIG. 19B illustrates the facing portions 1116 collapsing downwardly within the staple pockets 1115. The second layer 1112 may comprise one or more weakened portions which may facilitate the folding of the staples. the second layer 1112. Optionally, such weakened portions may comprise dot markings, perforations, and / or thin cross sections, for example, which can facilitate a controlled folding of the cartridge body 1110. The first layer 1111 may comprise one or more portions weakened, which can facilitate the penetration of the staple legs 1121 through the first layer 1111. Optionally, such weakened portions may comprise marks of points, perforations, and / or thin cross sections, for example, which can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with staple legs 1121.

When the anvil 1140 is in a partially closed non-fired position with reference again to FIG. 19A, the anvil 1140 may be positioned a distance 1101a away from the cartridge support surface 1131 such that an opening is defined therebetween. This opening can be filled by the staple cartridge 1100, which has a staple cartridge height 1102a, and the fabric T. When the anvil 1140 moves downward to compress the staple cartridge 1100, with reference again to FIG. 19B, the distance between the tissue contact surface 1141 and the cartridge support surface 1131 it can be defined by a distance 1101b that is smaller than distance 1101a. In various circumstances, the opening between the contact surface with the tissue 1141 of the anvil 1140 and the cartridge support surface 1131, defined by the distance 1101b, may be larger than the height of the original non-deformed staple cartridge 1102a. When the anvil 1140 moves near the cartridge support surface 1131, with reference now to FIG. 19C, the second layer 1112 can continue its folding and the distance between the staple legs 1121 and the forming cavities 1142 can decrease . Similarly, the distance between the tissue contacting surface 1141 and the cartridge support surface 1131 may decrease at a distance 1101c which may be greater than, equal to, or less than the cartridge height. not deformed 1102a, original. Referring now to Fig. 19D, the anvil 1140 can move within a final fired position in which the staples 1120 are completely formed, or at least formed at a desired height. In such a position, the tissue contacting surface 1141 of the anvil 1140 may be a distance 1101d away from the cartridge support surface 1131, where the distance 1101d may be smaller than the height of the original non-deformed cartridge 1102a. As illustrated, further, in Fig. 19D, the staple pockets 1115 may be fully, or at least substantially folded and staples 1120 may be completely, or at least substantially surrounded by the second folded layer 1112. In various circumstances, the anvil 1140 may thereafter move away from the staple cartridge 1100. Once the anvil 1140 has been uncoupled from the staple cartridge 1100, the cartridge body 1110 may at least partially expand again at several locations, i.e., intermediate locations to adjacent staples 1120, for example. The body of the squashed cartridge 1110 may not expand again elastically. The formed staples 1120 and, additionally, the cartridge body 1110 positioned intermediate the adjacent staples 1120 can apply pressure, or compression forces, to the tissue T which can provide various therapeutic benefits.

As discussed above, with reference again to FIG. 19A, each staple 1120 may comprise staple legs 1121 extending therefrom. Although staples 1120 are represented as they comprise two staple legs 1121, several staples may be used, which may comprise a staple leg or, alternatively, more than two staple legs, such as three staple legs or four staple legs, for example. As illustrated in FIG. 19A, each staple leg 1121 can be incorporated in the second layer 1112 of the cartridge body 1110 such that the staples 1120 are secured within the second layer 1112. The staples 1120 can be inserted into the cavities. of staples 1115 on the cartridge body 1110, such that the tips 1123 of the staple legs 1121 enter the cavities 1115 before the bases 1122. After the tips 1123 have been inserted into the cavities 1115, the tips 1123 may be pressed into the coating portions 1116 and cut the second layer 1112. The staples 1120 may be seated to a sufficient depth within the second layer 1112, such that the staples 1120 do not move, or at least substantially do not move, relative to the second layer 1112. The staples 1120 may be seated to a sufficient depth within the second layer 1112, such that the bases 1122 are positioned or incorporated within the staple cavities 1115. Alternatively, the bases 1122 may not be positioned or incorporated within the second layer 1112. Referring again to FIG. 19A, the bases 1122 may extend below the bottom surface 1118 of the cartridge body 1110. bases 1122 can rest on, or be positioned directly against, the cartridge support surface 1130. The cartridge support surface 1130 may comprise support features extending therefrom and / or defined therein, where, for example, the bases 1122 of the staples 1120 may be positioned within and supported by one or more supporting grooves, grooves, or channels, 1132, for example, on the staple cartridge holder 1130, as described in more detail below.

In addition to the above, with reference now to Fig. 20, the bases 1122 of the staples 1120 can be positioned directly against the support surface 1131 of the staple cartridge holder 1130. Optionally, and with the inclusion of where the staple bases 1122 comprise arcuate or circular lower surfaces 1124, for example, the staple bases 1122 can move or slide along the surface of the staple cartridge holder 1131. Such sliding can occur when the anvil 1140 is pressed against the tips 1123 of the staple legs 1121 during the process of staple formation. For example, as described above and with reference now to Fig. 21, the staple cartridge holder 1130 may comprise one or more support grooves 1132 therein, which may be configured to eliminate, or at least reduce, the relative movement between the staple bases 1122 and the cartridge support surface 1131. For example, each support groove 1132 can be defined by a surface contour that engages, or at least substantially engages, the contour of the lower surface of the staple positioned on the surface. East. For example, the lower surface 1124 of the base 1122 shown in FIG. 21 may comprise a circular, or at least substantially circular, surface and the supporting groove 1132 may comprise, in addition, a circular surface, or at least substantially circular. For example, the surface defining the groove 1132 can be defined by a radius of curvature that is greater than or equal to the radius of curvature defining the lower surface 1124. Although the grooves 1132 can help in preventing or reducing the relative sliding movement between 1120 and the staple cartridge holder 1130, the slots 1132 can be further configured to prevent or reduce relative rotational movement between the staples 1120 and the staple cartridge holder 1130. More particularly, the slots 1132 can be configured to receiving the bases 1122 tightly so as to prevent or reduce the rotation of the staples 1120 around the axes 1129, for example, such that they do not twist or twist when the staples 1120 are deformed.

In addition to the above, each staple 1120 can be formed from a round, or at least substantially round, wire. The legs and the base of each staple can be formed from a wire having a non-circular cross section, such as a rectangular cross-section, for example. For example, the staple cartridge holder 1130 may comprise corresponding non-circular grooves, such as rectangular grooves, for example, configured to receive the bases of such staples. Referring now to Fig. 22, each staple 1120 may comprise a crown, such as a crown 1125, for example, overmolded onto a base 1122, wherein each crown 1125 can be positioned within a support groove in the holder of the staple cartridge 1130. For example, each crown 1125 can comprise a square and / or rectangular cross section, for example, which can configured to be received within the square and / or rectangular slots 1134, for example, in the staple cartridge holder 1130. The crowns 1125 may be comprised of bioabsorbable plastic, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), which is marketed under the name commercial Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprona 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example, and can be formed around the bases 1122 of staples 1120 by an injection molding process, for example. Various crowns and methods for forming various crowns are described in U.S. patent application no. of series 11 / 541,123, entitled SURGICAL STAPLES HAVING COMPRESSIBLE OR CRUSHABLE MEMBERS FOR SECURING TISSUE THEREIN AND STAPLING INSTRUMENTS FOR DEPLOYING THE SAME, filed on September 29, 2006, the full description of which is incorporated by reference in the present description. Referring again to Fig. 22, the slots 1134 may further include leads, or bevels, 1135 that may be configured to facilitate insertion of the crowns 1125 into the slots 1134. The bases and / or crowns of the staples 1120 can be positioned within the slots 1134 when the staple cartridge 1100 is assembled to the staple cartridge holder 1130. The crowns 1125 of the staples 1120 can be aligned with the slots 1134 when the staple cartridge 1100 is assembled to the cartridge support. staples 1130. For example, crowns 1125 may not enter slots 1134 until a compression force is applied to the staple legs 1121 and the bases and / or crowns of the staples 1120 are pushed down into the grooves 1134.

Referring now to Figs. 23 and 24, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1200, for example, may comprise a compressible, implantable cartridge body 1210 comprising an outer layer 1211 and an inner 1212 layer. to the foregoing, the staple cartridge 1200 may comprise a plurality of staples 1220 positioned within the cartridge body 1210. Optionally, each staple 1220 may comprise a base 1222 and one or more staple legs 1221 extending therefrom. For example, the staple legs 1221 can be inserted into the inner layer 1212 and set to a depth where the bases 1222 of the staples 1220 abut and / or are positioned adjacent the lower surface 1218 of the inner layer 1212, for example . In Figs. 23 and 24, the inner layer 1212 does not comprise staple pockets configured to receive a portion of the staples 1220 although, alternatively, the inner layer 1212 may comprise such staple pockets. In addition to the above, the inner layer 1212 may be comprised of a compressible material, such as bioabsorbable foam and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example, which may be configured to allow the cartridge body 1210 to be folded when a compressive load is applied. apply to this The Interior layer 1212 may comprise a lyophilized foam comprising polylactic acid (PLA) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The ORC may be commercially available under the trade name of Surgicel and may comprise a loose woven fabric (such as a sponge) surgical), loose fibers (such as a cotton ball), and / or a foam. The inner layer 1212 may comprise a material that includes drugs, such as lyophilized thrombin and / or fibrin, for example, contained in and / or coating it that can be activated with water and / or activated by fluids within the patient's body , for example. For example, lyophilized thrombin and / or fibrin can be attached in a Vicryl matrix (PGA), for example. In certain circumstances, however, the activatable medicaments may be activated unintentionally when the staple cartridge 1200 is inserted into a surgical site within the patient, for example. With reference again to Figs. 23 and 24, the outer layer 1211 may be comprised of a material impervious to water, or at least substantially impermeable to water, such that the liquids do not come into contact, or at least substantially in contact, with the inner layer 1212 up to after the body of the cartridge 1210 has been compressed and the legs of the staples have penetrated the outer layer 1211 and / or after the outer layer 1211 has been pierced in some way. The outer layer 1211 may comprise a reinforcing material and / or a plastic material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The outer layer 1211 may comprise a wrap surrounding the inner layer 1212 and the staples 1220. More particularly, the staples 1220 may be inserted into the inner layer 1212 and the outer layer 1211 may then be wrapped and sealed around the subunit comprising the layer 1212 interior and 1220 staples.

Referring now to Figs. 25 and 26, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1300, for example, may comprise an implantable, compressible cartridge body 1310 that includes an outer layer 1311 and an inner layer 1312. Similar to the foregoing, the staple cartridge 1300 may further comprise staples 1320 positioned within the cartridge body 1310 wherein each staple 1320 may comprise a base 1322 and one or more legs 1321 extending therefrom. Similar to the staple cartridge 1200, the bases 1322 of the staples 1320 may extend below the lower surface 1318 of the inner layer 1312 and the outer layer 1311 may surround the bases 1322. For example, the outer layer 1311 may be sufficiently flexible to wrapping each staple base 1322, such that the outer layer 1311 fits the contour of the bases 1322. Alternatively, with reference again to FIG. 24, the outer layer 1211 may be sufficiently rigid, such that it extends around the bases 1222 without adapting to each base 1222. In any case, the outer layer 1311 can be positioned between the bases 1322 of the staples 1320 and a supporting surface of the staple cartridge, such as the support surfaces 1031 or 1131, for example, which support the staple cartridge 1300. For example, the outer layer 1311 can positioned between the bases 1322 and the support slots, such as the slots 1032 or 1132, for example, defined on the support surface of the staple cartridge. For example, in addition to the above, the outer layer 1311 can be configured to limit the movement of the bases 1322 and / or increase the coefficient of friction between the bases 1322 and the surface of the staple cartridge holder and / or the supporting slots for the purpose of reducing the relative movement between them. Alternatively, with reference now to Figs. 27 and 28, the outer layer of a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1400, for example, may not completely surround staples positioned therein. For example, an outer layer 1411 of a body of the compressible implantable cartridge 1410 can be assembled to the inner layer 1412 before the staple legs 1421 of the staples 1420 are inserted into the body of the cartridge 1410. As a result of the above, the bases 1422 of the staples 1420 may extend outside the outer layer 1411 and, for example, the bases 1422 may be positioned directly in the supporting grooves 1032 or 1132 within the supporting surfaces of the staple cartridge 1031 or 1131, for example. example. The staple legs 1421 can cut the outer layer 1411 when they are inserted through it. In various circumstances, the gaps created by the staple legs 1421 can closely encircle the staple legs 1421, so that very little, if any, fluid can drip between the staple legs 1421 and the outer layer 1411 which can reducing the possibility of, or preventing, the medicament contained within the body of the staple cartridge 1410 from being activated and / or leaking out of the body of the cartridge 1410 prematurely.

As discussed above, with reference again to Figs. 23 and 24, the legs 1221 of the staples 1220 can be incorporated within the body of the cartridge 1210 and the bases 1222 of the staples 1220 can extend outwardly from the lower surface 1218 of the layer interior 1212. In addition to the above, inner layer 1212 may not comprise staple pockets configured to receive staples 1220. Alternatively, with reference now to Figs. 29 and 30, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1500, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 1510 comprising the staple pockets 1515, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the staples 1520 in these For example, an upper portion of the staple legs 1521 of the staples 1520 can be embedded in the inner layer 1512 while a lower portion of the staple legs 1521, and the bases 1522, can be positioned within the staple pockets 1515. The bases 1522 can be completely positioned in the staple pockets 1515 or the bases 1522 can extend at least partially below the lower surface 1518 of the inner layer 1512. Similar to the foregoing, the outer layer 1511 can enclose the inner layer 1512 and staples 1520 positioned therein. Alternatively, with reference now to FIG. 31, a staple cartridge 1600 may comprise staples 1620 positioned within the staple pockets 1615 in an implantable, compressible cartridge body 1610, wherein at least a portion of the staples 1620 does not it is enclosed by the outer layer 1611. For example, each staple 1620 may comprise staple legs 1621, which are incorporated at least partially into the inner layer 1612 and, additionally, the bases 1622, which extend outwardly around the layer 1611 exterior.

With reference now to Figs. 32 and 33, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1700, for example, may comprise a compressible, implantable cartridge body 1710 and a plurality of staples 1720 at least partially positioned within the body of the cartridge 1710. The body of the cartridge Cartridge 1710 may comprise an outer layer 1711, an inner layer 1712 and, further, an alignment matrix 1740 which may be configured to align and / or retain the staples 1720 in position within the cartridge body 1710. The inner layer 1712 may comprise a recess 1741, which can be configured to receive the alignment matrix 1740 in this. The alignment matrix 1140 can be snapped into the recess 1741 and / or suitably secured in any other way to the inner layer 1712 by the use of at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or a protein hydrogel, for example. . The recess 1741 may be configured such that the lower surface 1742 of the alignment matrix 1740 aligns, or at least substantially aligns, with the lower surface 1718 of the inner layer 1712. The lower surface 1742 of the alignment matrix can be lowered with respect to and / or extended from the lower surface 1718 of the second layer 1712. Optionally, each staple 1720 can comprise a base 1722 and one or more legs 1721 extending from the base 1722, wherein at least a portion of the staple legs 1721 may extend through the alignment die 1740. The alignment die 1740 may further comprise a plurality of openings and / or grooves, for example, extending therethrough, which they can be configured to receive the staple legs 1721 in these. For example, each aperture can be configured to tightly receive a staple leg 1721 such that there is little relative movement, if any, between the staple leg 1721 and the side walls of the aperture. The openings of the alignment die may not extend completely through the alignment die 1740 and it may be necessary for the staple legs 1721 to cut the alignment die 1740 when the staple legs 1721 are pushed through it.

The alignment matrix 1740 may comprise a molded plastic body which, for example, may be more rigid or less compressible than the inner layer 1712 and / or the outer layer 1711. For example, the alignment matrix 1740 may comprise a plastic material and / or any other suitable material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The alignment matrix 1740 can be assembled to the inner layer 1712 and thereafter the staple legs 1721 can be inserted through the alignment matrix 1740 and embedded in the inner layer 1712. The lower surface 1742 of the alignment matrix 1740 can comprise one or more grooves, grooves, or channels, for example, which can be configured to at least partially receive the bases 1722 of the staples 1720. Similar to the foregoing, the outer layer 1711 can then be placed around the subunit comprising the inner layer 1712, alignment matrix 1740, and staples 1720. Alternatively, outer layer 1711 can be placed around a subunit that it comprises the inner layer 1712 and the alignment matrix 1740, wherein the staples 1720 can be inserted later through the outer layer 1711, the alignment matrix 1740, and the inner layer 1712. In any case, as a result of the above , the inner layer 1712, the alignment matrix 1740, and / or the outer layer 1711 can be configured to retain the staples 1720 in position until and / or after they are deformed by an anvil, as described above. For example, the alignment matrix 1740 can serve to hold the staples 1720 in place before the staple cartridge 1700 is implanted within a patient and, additionally, secure the tissue along the staple line after which the staple cartridge 1700 is implanted. The staples 1720 can be secured within the alignment matrix 1740 without being embedded in the inner layer 1712 and / or the outer layer 1711, for example.

With reference now to Figs. 34 to 40, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1800, for example, can be assembled by compressing an inner layer 1812, by inserting staples, such as staples 1820, for example, into the layer interior 1812, and by wrapping the inner layer 1812 with an outer layer 1811. Referring first to FIG. 34, a compressible inner layer 1812 is illustrated as comprising a plurality of staple cavities 1815 defined therein, although other alternatives are visualized in which the inner layer 1812 does not comprise the staple cavities, as described above. Referring now to FIG. 35, the compressible inner layer 1812 can intermediate positioned to a transfer plate 1850 and a support plate 1860 and compress between the compression surfaces 1852 and 1862 thereof, respectively. As illustrated in FIG. 35, the upper and lower surfaces of the inner layer 1812 can be compressed toward each other and, in response to this, the inner layer 1812 can bulge outwardly in the lateral directions. The inner layer 1812 may be compressed to a height that is about one third of its original height, for example, and may have a height or thickness between about 1.5 mm (0.06") and about 2.0 mm (0.08") in its compressed state, for example. As illustrated, further, in Fig. 35, the transfer plate 1850 may further comprise a plurality of staples, such as staples 1820, for example, positioned within a plurality of staple pockets 1853. Additionally, the transfer plate 1850 may further comprise a plurality of impellers 1851 which may be configured to push staples 1820 up and out of staple pockets 1853. Referring now to FIG. 36, impellers 1851 may be used to push staple legs 1821 of the staples 1820 within and through the inner compressed layer 1812. The 1851 impellers can be configured, such that the upper surfaces of these are placed flush, or at least almost flush, with the compression surface 1852 of the transfer plate 1850 when the staples 1820 have been fully deployed from the staple pockets 1853 of the transfer plate 1850. As illustrated, furthermore, in Fig. 36, the support plate 1860 may comprise a plurality of reception openings 1861, which they can be configured to receive the staple legs 1821, or at least the tips of the staple legs 1821, after they are pushed through the inner layer 1812. The reception openings 1861, or the like, may be needed where the inner layer 1812 has been compressed to a height that is smaller than the height of the staples 1820 and, thus, when the staples 1820 have been completely ejected from the staple pockets 1853, the staple legs 1821 may protrude from the upper surface of the staple. compressed inner layer 1812. The inner layer 1812 can be compressed to a height that is higher than the height of the staples 1820 and, as a result, the receiving openings 1861 on the support plate 1860 may be unnecessary.

After the staples 1820 have been inserted into the inner layer 1812, with reference now to FIG. 37, the support plate 1860 can be moved away from the transfer plate 1850 for the purpose of allowing the inner layer 1812 to decompress. . In such circumstances, the inner layer 1812 may resiliently expand to its original, or at least nearly original, non-compressed height. When the inner layer 1812 expands again, the height of the inner layer 1812 may increase, such that it exceeds the height of the staples 1820 and, such that the staple legs 1821 of the staples 1820 no longer protrude from the staple. upper surface of the inner layer 1812. In various circumstances, the receiving openings 1861 may be configured to hold the staple legs 1821 in position at least until the support plate 1860 has been sufficiently moved out, such that the legs 1821 no longer be positioned within the receiving openings 1861. In such circumstances, the receiving openings 1861 can assist in maintaining the relative alignment of the staples 1820 within the inner layer 1812 when it expands again. In various circumstances, the inner layer 1812 and the staples 1820 positioned therein may be comprised of a subassembly 1801 which, with reference now to FIG. 38, may be inserted within an outer layer 1811, for example. For example, the outer layer 1811 may comprise a cavity 1802 defined therein, which may be configured to receive the subunit 1801 therein. In various circumstances, a tool, such as the tweezers 1855, for example, can be used to pull the outer layer 1811 over the subunit 1801. Once the subassembly 1801 has been sufficiently positioned within the outer layer 1811, with reference now to Fig. 39, the outer layer 1811 can be sealed. The outer layer 1811 can be sealed by the application of thermal energy to a portion thereof. More particularly, the outer layer 1811 may comprise a plastic material, wherein the open end of the outer layer 1811 may be thermally staked by one or more heated elements, or plates, 1856 for the purpose of coupling and / or sealing together the perimeter of the open end of the outer layer 1811. For example, with reference now to Fig. 40, a surplus portion 1857 of the outer layer 1811 can be removed and the staple cartridge 1800 can then be used as described in the present disclosure.

As described above, a staple cartridge can be positioned within and / or secured to a joint portion of the cartridge.

Staples With reference now to Figs. 41 and 42, a fastener portion of the staple cartridge may comprise a staple cartridge channel, such as the staple cartridge channel 1930, for example, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1900, for example, in this. The staple cartridge channel 1930 may comprise a lower support surface 1931, a first side support wall 1940, and a second side support wall 1941. In use, the staple cartridge 1900 can be positioned within the staple cartridge channel 1930, such that the staple cartridge 1900 is positioned against and / or adjacent the lower support surface 1931 and positioned intermediate to the first support wall side 1940 and second side support wall 1941. The first side support wall 1940 and the second side support wall 1941 can define a lateral spacing between these. For example, the staple cartridge 1900 may comprise a side width 1903 that is the same and / or wider than the lateral opening defined between the support walls 1940 and 1941, such that a body of the cartridge implantable cartridge 1910 of staples 1900 can be securely fitted between the walls 1940 and 1941. The lateral width 1903 of the staple cartridge 1900 can be smaller than the opening defined between the first and second side walls 1940 and 1941.

Optionally, at least a portion of the walls 1940 and 1941 and the lower support surface 1931 can be defined by a metal channel or alternatively, in at least one embodiment, at least a portion of the Side support wall 1940 and / or lateral support wall 1941 may be comprised of a flexible material, such as an elastomeric material, for example. Referring first to Fig. 41, the first side wall 1940 and the second side wall 1941 of the staple cartridge channel 1930 may each be comprised of a rigid portion 1933 extending upwardly from the lower support surface 1931 and a flexible portion 1934 extending upward from the rigid portions 1933.

In addition to the above, the cartridge body 1910 of the staple cartridge 1900 may comprise one or more compressible layers, such as the first layer 1911 and the second layer 1912, for example. When the cartridge body 1910 is compressed against the lower support surface 1931 by an anvil, as described above, the side portions of the cartridge body 1910 may expand laterally. Where the staple cartridge 1930 comprises rigid side walls, the lateral expansion of the cartridge body 1910 can be prevented, or at least limited, by the rigid side walls and, as a result, a significant amount of internal pressure, or strain, can be developed within the cartridge body 1910. Where at least a portion of the staple cartridge 1930 comprises the flexible side walls, the flexible side walls can be configured to flex laterally and allow the side portions of the cartridge body 1910 to expand laterally, which thus reduces the internal pressure, or stress, generated within the cartridge body 1910. Where the cartridge channel does not comprise walls lateral, or comprises side walls that are relatively shorter than the staple cartridge, the side portions of the staple cartridge may expand laterally without restrictions, or at least substantially without restrictions. In any case, with reference now to Fig. 42, a channel of staple cartridge 2030 may comprise side walls 2040 and 2041 which may be comprised entirely of a flexible material, such as an elastomeric material, for example. The staple cartridge channel 2030 may further comprise side grooves 2033 extending along the sides of the lower support surface 2031 of the staple cartridge channel 2030, which may be configured to receive and secure at least a portion of the staple cartridge channel 2030. of the side walls 2040 and 2041 in this. The side walls 2040 and 2041 can be secured in the slots 2033 by snap-fitting and / or snap-fit arrangement, while the side walls 2040 and 2041 can be secured in the slots 2033 by one or more adhesives. The side walls 2040 and 2041 may be separable from the lower support surface 2031 during use. In any case, a body of the compressible implantable cartridge 2010 can be disassembled and / or uncoupled from the side walls 2040 and 2041 when the body of the cartridge 2010 is implanted with the staples 2020.

Referring now to FIG. 43, a surgical instrument may comprise a rod 2150 and an end effector extending from the distal end of the rod 2150. The end effector may comprise, similar to the foregoing, a channel of the cartridge. staples 2130, a anvil 2140 movable between an open position and a closed position, and a staple cartridge 2100 positioned intermediate the staple cartridge channel 2130 and the anvil 2140. In addition, similar to the foregoing, the staple cartridge 2100 may comprise a cartridge body implantable 2110 and a plurality of staples 2120 positioned on the cartridge body 2110. The channel of the staple cartridge 2130 may comprise, one, a lower support surface 2131 against which the staple cartridge 2100 can be positioned, two, a distal end 2135 and, three, a proximal end 2136. As illustrated in Fig. 43, the staple cartridge 2100 can comprising a first end 2105 that can be positioned at the distal end 2135 of the staple cartridge channel 2130 and a second end 2106 that can be positioned at the proximal end 2136 of the staple cartridge channel 2130. The distal end 2135 of the cartridge channel of staples 2130 may comprise at least one distal retaining member, such as a retaining wall 2137, for example and, similarly, the proximal end 2136 may comprise at least one proximal retainer, such as a retaining wall 2138, for example . For example, the distal retaining wall 2137 and the proximal retaining wall 2138 may define a spacing between these, which may be equal to or less than the length of the staple cartridge 2100 such that the staple cartridge 2100 can be fitted with securely within the staple cartridge channel 2130 when the staple cartridge 2100 is inserted therein.

With reference again to Figs. 23 and 24, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1200, for example, may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, tissue contact surface 1219. For example, the staple cartridge body 1210 of the staple cartridge 1200 may comprise a first end 1205 that can be defined by a first height, or thickness, 1207 and a second end 1206 that can be defined by a second height, or thickness, 1208 , wherein the first height 1207 may be the same, or at least substantially equal, at the second height 1208. The body of the cartridge 1210 may comprise a constant or at least substantially constant height or thickness, between the first end 1205 and the second end. end 1206. For example, the tissue contacting surface 1219 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the bottom surface 1218 of the cartridge body 1210. Referring once more to Fig. 43, the first end 2105 of the cartridge body 2110 of the staple cartridge 2100 can be defined by a first height 2107 that is different from a second height 2108 of the second end 2106. As illustrated, the first height 2107 is May r that the second height 2108, although the second height 2108 could be alternatively greater than the first height 2107. The height of the cartridge body 2110 can decrease linearly and / or geometrically between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106. For example, the tissue contacting surface 2119, which extends between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106, may be oriented along an angle defined therebetween. For example, the contact surface with the fabric 2119 may be non-parallel to the bottom surface 2118 of the cartridge body 2110 and / or parallel to the support surface 2131 of the staple cartridge channel 2130.

With reference again to Figs. 43 and 44, the anvil 2140 may comprise a tissue contacting surface 2141, which may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the support surface 2131 of the staple cartridge channel 2130 when the anvil 2140 is in a position closed, as shown in Fig. 44. When the anvil 2140 is in a closed position, the anvil 2140 can be configured to compress the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 more than the second end 2106 due to the higher height of the first end 2105 and the smaller height of the second end 2106. In some circumstances, including the circumstances where the tissue T positioned intermediate the fabric contacting surfaces 2119 and 2141 has a constant thickness, or at least substantially constant, the pressure generated within the tissue T and the cartridge 2100 may be greater at the distal end of the end effector than at the proximal end of the end effector. More particularly, when the tissue T between the anvil 2140 and the staple cartridge 2100 has a substantially constant thickness, the tissue T positioned intermediate the distal end 2145 of the anvil 2140 and the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 may be more compressed than the tissue T positioned intermediate the proximal end 2146 of the anvil 2140 and the second end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100. According to the invention, a pressure gradient can be generated within the tissue T between the proximal end and the distal end effector end. More particularly, when the tissue T between the anvil 2140 and the staple cartridge 2100 has a substantially constant thickness and the height of the staple cartridge 2100 decreases linearly from the distal end to the proximal end of the end effector, the pressure within the tissue T may decrease linearly from the distal end of the end effector to the proximal end of the end effector. Similarly, when the tissue T between the anvil 2140 and the staple cartridge 2100 has a substantially constant thickness and the height of the staple cartridge 2100 geometrically decreases from the distal end to the proximal end of the end effector, the pressure within the tissue T It may decrease geometrically from the distal end of the end effector to the proximal end of the end effector.

Referring again to FIG. 43, the tissue T positioned between the staple cartridge 2100 and the anvil 2140 may not have a constant thickness throughout. In at least one of such a circumstance, the tissue T positioned between the proximal end 2146 of the anvil 2140 and the second end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100 may be thicker than the tissue T positioned between the distal end 2145 of the anvil 2140 and the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100. Under such circumstances, as a result, the thicker tissue T can be positioned generally over the smaller proximal end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100 and the thinner tissue T can be positioned, generally, over the distal end 2105. In use, the firing collar 2152 of the shank 2150 can be advanced distally along the length of the the central tubular portion of the rod 2151 in such a manner that the firing collar 2152 engages the cam portion 2143 of the anvil 2140 and rotates the anvil 2140 towards the staple cartridge 2100 as illustrated in Fig.44. Once the anvil 2140 has been turned to a fully closed position, the tissue T can be compressed between the tissue contacting surfaces 2119 and 2141 e, even when the height of the staple cartridge 2100 may not be constant between the proximal ends. and distal from the end effector, the pressure or compression forces applied to the tissue T may be constant, or at least substantially constant, through them. More particularly, when the thinnest tissue T can be associated with the highest height of the staple cartridge 2100 and the thicker fabric T can be associated with the smaller height of the staple cartridge 2100, the cumulative height, or sum of the tissue T and the staple cartridge 2100 may be constant, or at least substantially constant, between the proximal and distal ends of the end effector and, as a result, the compression of this cumulative height by the anvil 2140 may be constant, or at least substantially constant, through these.

With reference again to Figs. 43 and 44, the staple cartridge 2100 may comprise an asymmetric configuration. For example, the height of the staple cartridge 2100 at the first end 2105 thereof may be higher than the height of the staple cartridge 2100 at the second end 2106 thereof. The staple cartridge 2100 and / or staple cartridge channel 2130 may comprise one or more alignment and / or retention features that can be configured to ensure that the staple cartridge 2100 can be positioned within the staple cartridge channel 2130 only in one orientation, i.e., an orientation in which the first end 2105 is positioned at the distal end 2135 of the staple cartridge channel 2130 and the second end 2106 is positioned at the proximal end 2136. Alternatively, the staple cartridge 2100 and / or the staple cartridge channel 2130 may comprise one or more retention and / or alignment features which may be configured to allow the staple cartridge 2100 to be positioned within the staple cartridge 2100. of the staple cartridge channel 2130 in more than one orientation. Referring now to FIG. 45, for example, the staple cartridge 2100 can be positioned within the staple cartridge channel 2130 such that the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 can be positioned at the proximal end 2136 of the staple cartridge. staple cartridge 2130 and second end 2106 can be positioned at distal end 2135. Optionally, as a result, the shortest height of staple cartridge 2100 can be positioned proximate distal retaining wall 2137 and the highest height of the staple cartridge. staples 2100 can be positioned proximate to proximal retaining wall 2138. For example, staple cartridge 2100 can be suitably arranged to apply a constant, or at least substantially constant, clamping pressure to tissue T having a thicker portion inside the end distal of the end effector and a thinner portion within the proximal end of the end effector. The staple cartridge 2100, for example, can be selectively oriented within the staple cartridge channel 2130. For example, The alignment and / or retention characteristics of the staple cartridge 2100 can be symmetric and a surgeon can selectively orient the staple cartridge 2100 within the staple cartridge channel 2130 in the orientations shown in Fig. 43 and Fig. 45, by example.

In addition to the above, the body of the implantable cartridge 2110 may comprise a longitudinal axis 2109 which, when the staple cartridge 2100 is positioned in the staple cartridge channel 2130, may extend between the proximal and distal ends of the end effector. The thickness of the cartridge body 2110 can generally decrease and / or increase between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106 along the longitudinal axis 2109. For example, the distance, or height, between the lower surface 2118 and the surface of contact with the fabric 2119 may generally decrease and / or increase, generally, between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106. The thickness of the cartridge body 2110 may both increase and decrease along the longitudinal axis 2109. For example, the thickness of the cartridge body 2110 may comprise one or more portions that increase in thickness and one or more portions that may decrease in thickness. The staple cartridge 2100 may comprise a plurality of staples 2120 positioned therein. In use, as described above, the staples 2120 can deform when the anvil 2140 moves to a closed position. Each staple 2120 may have the same height, or at least substantially this. For example, the height of a staple can be measured from the bottom of the base of the staple to the top, or tip, of the highest leg of the staple, for example.

The staples inside a staple cartridge can have different staple heights. For example, a staple cartridge may comprise a first group of staples having a first staple height that are positioned in a first portion of a compressible cartridge body and a second group of staples having a second staple height that are positioned in a second portion of the compressible cartridge body. The first staple height can be higher than the second staple height and the first staple group can be positioned at the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 while the second staple group can be positioned at the second end 2106. Alternatively, the first higher group of staples can be positioned at the second end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100 while the second smaller group of staples can be positioned at the first end 2105. A plurality of groups of staples can be used, each group having a height of different staple. For example, a third group, which has an intermediate staple height, can be positioned in the cartridge body 2110 between the first group of staples and the second group of staples. Optionally, each staple within a row of staples in the staple cartridge may comprise a different staple height. The highest staple within a row of staples can be positioned at a first end of a row of staples and the short staple can be positioned at an end opposite the row of staples. For example, the staples positioned between the highest staple and the shortest staple can be arranged in such a way that the staple heights decrease between the highest staple and the shortest staple, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 46, an end effector of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2240, a staple cartridge channel 2230, and a staple cartridge 2200 supported by the staple cartridge channel 2230. The cartridge staples 2200 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2210 and a plurality of staples, such as staples 2220a and staples 2220b, for example, positioned therein. The staple cartridge channel 2230 may comprise a cartridge support surface 2231 and a plurality of staple holder slots, such as the support slots 2232a and 2232b, for example, defined therein. For example, staple cartridge 2200 may comprise two staple outer rows 2220a and two staple inner rows 2220b, wherein support slots 2232a may be configured to support staples 2220a and support slots 2232b may be configured to support staples 2220b. With reference to Figs.46 and 47, the anvil 2240 may comprise a plurality of staple forming cavities 2242 defined therein which may be configured to receive and deform the staples 2220a and 2220b when the anvil 2240 is moved toward the staple cartridge 2200. For example, the lower surfaces of the supporting grooves 2232a can be separated at a first distance 2201a from the upper surfaces of the staple forming cavities 2242 while the lower surfaces of the supporting grooves 2232b can be separated at a second distance. 2201b of the upper surfaces of the staple forming cavities 2242. For example, the supporting grooves 2232b are positioned closer to the anvil 2240 due to the raised step on support surface 2231 where they are defined. Due to the different distances 2201a and 2201b, the outer rows of staples 2220a and the inner rows of staples 2220b can deform to different formed heights. In various circumstances, staples deformed at differently formed heights can apply different pressures or clamping forces to the staple tissue T. In addition to the above, the staples can start with different heights of non-conformed staples. For example, with reference again to Fig. 46, the outer staples 2220a may have an initial unformed height that is greater than the initial unformed height of the inner staples 2220b. As illustrated in Figs. 46 and 47, the inner staples 2220b, which have a non-formed height smaller than the outer staples 2220a, may additionally have a smaller formed height than the outer staples 2220b. Alternatively, the inner staples 2220b may have a higher unformed height than the outer staples 2220a and still have a deformed staple height smaller than the outer staples 2220a.

In addition to the above, the anvil 2240 can move within a closed position, as illustrated in Fig. 47, for the purpose of compressing the cartridge body 2210 and deforming the staples 2220a and 2220b. A surgical stapler comprising the end effector shown in Figs. 46 and 47, for example, may further comprise a cutting member which can be configured to sever the tissue T positioned between the anvil 2240 and the staple cartridge 2200. For example, the anvil 2240, the staple cartridge channel 2230 and / or the staple cartridge 2200 can define a slot configured to slidably receive in this a cutting member. More particularly, the anvil 2240 may comprise a slot portion 2249, the staple cartridge channel 2230 may comprise a slot portion 2239, and the staple cartridge 2200 may comprise a slot portion 2203, which may be aligned, or at least substantially align, with each other when the anvil 2240 is in a closed, or at least substantially closed position. The cutting member can be moved from the proximal end of the end effector to the distal end of the end effector after the anvil 2240 has been closed and the staples 2220a, 2220b have been deformed. The cutting member can move independently of the deformation process of the staples. The cutting member can be advanced at the same time that the staples are deformed. In either case, the cutting member can be configured to cut the fabric along a path positioned between the inner rows of staples 2220b.

Optionally, as illustrated in Fig. 47, the inner staples 2220b may be formed at a shorter height than the outer staples 2220a, wherein the inner staples 2220b may apply a greater clamping force or force to the tissue adjacent to the cutting line created by the cutting member. For example, the greater clamping force or pressure created by the inner clamps 2220b can provide various therapeutic benefits such as reducing bleeding of the cut tissue T while the lower clamping pressure created by the external clamps 2220a can provide flexibility within the stapled tissue . With reference again to Figs.46 and 47, the anvil 2240 may further comprise at least one piece of reinforcing material, such as reinforcing material 2260, for example, coupled thereto. For example, the legs of the staples 2220a, 2220b can be configured to cut the reinforcing material 2260 and / or through the openings in the reinforcing material 2260 when the staple cartridge 2200 is compressed by the anvil 2240 and thereafter, entering in contact with the staple forming cavities 2242 in the anvil 2240. When the staple legs 2220a, 2220b deform, the legs can contact and / or cut the base material 2260 once more. The reinforcing material 2260 can improve hemostasis and / or provide resistance to the tissue that is stapled.

Referring again to Figs.46 and 47, the lower surface of the cartridge body 2210 may comprise a stepped contour that adjusts, or at least substantially adjusts, the stepped contour of the cartridge support surface 2231. The lower surface of the body of the cartridge 2210 can be deformed to adjust, or at least substantially adjust, the contour of the cartridge support surface 2231. Referring now to FIG. 48, an end effector, similar to the end effector shown in FIG. 46 , for example, may comprise a staple cartridge 2300 positioned therein. The staple cartridge 2300 may comprise a compressible implant body 2310 comprising an inner layer 2312 and an outer layer 2311 wherein, in addition to the foregoing, the outer layer 2311 may be comprised of a water impervious material. The outer layer 2311 may extend around the staples 2220a, 2220b and may positioned between the staples 2220a, 2220b and the support slots 2232a, 2232b, respectively. Referring now to Fig. 49, an end effector, similar to the end effector shown in Fig. 46, for example, may comprise a staple cartridge 2400 positioned thereon. Similar to the staple cartridge 2300, the compressible, implantable cartridge body 2410 of the staple cartridge 2400 may comprise an inner layer 2412 and an outer layer 2411; Nevertheless; The cartridge body 2410 may not comprise a cut member groove in it. For example, the cutting member may be required to cut the inner layer 2412 and / or the outer layer 2411, for example, as it is advanced through the staple cartridge.

Referring now to FIG. 50, an end effector of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2540, a channel of staple cartridge 2530, and a staple cartridge 2500 positioned in the staple cartridge channel 2530. Similar to above, the staple cartridge 2500 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2510, the outer rows of staples 2220a, and the inner rows of staples 2220b. The staple cartridge channel 2530 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, cartridge support surface 2531 and staple holder grooves 2532 defined therein. The anvil 2540 may comprise a stepped surface 2541 and a plurality of staple forming cavities, such as the forming cavities 2542a and 2542b, for example, defined therein. Similar to the previous ones, the forming cavities 2542a and the supporting grooves 2532 can define a distance between them, which is greater than the distance between the forming cavities 2452b and the supporting grooves 2532. The anvil 2540 may further comprise a piece of reinforcing material 2560 coupled to the stepped surface 2541 of the anvil 2540. For example, the reinforcing material 2560 can be adapted, or at least substantially adapted, to the stepped surface 2541. In various embodiments, the reinforcing material 2560 can be removably coupled to the surface 2541 by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or a protein hydrogel, for example. The cartridge body 2510 may further comprise a stepped profile which, for example, is analogous, or at least substantially analogous, to the stepped surface 2541 of the anvil 2540. More particularly, the anvil 2540 may comprise the steps 2548 which extend towards the staple cartridge 2500, wherein the steps 2548 may comprise a step height that equals, or at least substantially equals, the step height of the steps 2508 that extend from the cartridge body 2510. For example, as a As a result of the above, the amount of the compressible cartridge body 2510 that can be captured in the first staples 2220a can be different from the amount of the compressible cartridge body 2510 that can be captured in the second staples 2220b, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 51, an end effector may comprise an anvil 2640, a channel of the staple cartridge 2530, and a staple cartridge 2600 positioned therein. The staple cartridge 2600 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2610 that it includes an inner layer 2612, an outer layer 2611, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 2220a and 2200b, for example, positioned therein. The anvil 2640 may comprise a plurality of staple forming cavities 2642 on a surface 2641 and the staple cartridge channel 2530 may comprise a plurality of staple forming slots 2532 defined on the support surface 2531. As illustrated in FIG. Fig. 51, the surface of the anvil 2641 can be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the supporting surface of the cartridge 2531, in which each forming cavity 2642 can be positioned a distance equal, or at least substantially equal, away from a corresponding and opposite staple holder groove 2532. Staple cartridge 2600 can comprise staples having this, or at least substantially this, staple height not initially formed and, additionally, this, or at least substantially this staple height formed The outer rows of staples may comprise the staples 2220a and the inner rows of staples may comprise staples 2220b where, as described above, the staples 2220a and 2220b may have different non-formed staple heights. When the anvil 2640 moves towards the staple cartridge 2600 within a closed position, the staples 2220a and 2220b can be formed such that they have this, or at least substantially this staple height formed. For example, as a result of the foregoing, the outer staples 2220a and the inner shaped staples 2220b may have the same amount, or at least substantially the same amount, of body of compressible cartridge 2610 contained therein; however, although the outer staples 2220a have a higher non-conformed staple height than the inner staples 2220b and can have the same shaped staple height, a greater clamping pressure can be generated on the outer staples 2220a than in the inner staples 2220b , for example.

Referring now to FIG. 52, an end effector of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2740, a staple cartridge channel 2530, and a staple cartridge 2700 positioned within the staple cartridge channel 2530. Similar to above, the staple cartridge 2700 may comprise a compressible canister cartridge body 2710 comprising an inner layer 2712, an outer layer 2711, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 2220a and 2220b, for example, positioned therein. The thickness of the cartridge body 2710 can vary across its width. For example, the cartridge body 2710 may comprise a central portion 2708 and the side portions 2709, wherein the central portion 2708 may comprise a thickness that is greater than the thickness of the side portions 2709. The thicker portion of the cartridge body 2710 can be located in the central portion 2708 while the thinner portion of the cartridge body 2710 can be located in the side portions 2709. For example, the thickness of the cartridge body 2710 can gradually decrease between the central portion 2708 and the side portions 2709 The thickness of the cartridge body 2710 can decrease linearly and / or geometrically between the central portion 2708 and the side portions 2709. For example, the contact surface with the fabric 2719 of the cartridge body 2710 may comprise two inclined, or angled, surfaces which slope downwardly from the central portion 2708 towards the side portions 2709. The anvil 2740 may comprise two inclined, or angled, surfaces which equal, or at least substantially even, the inclined surfaces in contact with the fabric 2719. The anvil 2740 may further comprise at least one piece of reinforcing material 2760 coupled to the inclined surfaces of the anvil 2740.

In addition to the above, the inner rows of staples in the staple cartridge 2700 may comprise the higher staples 2220a and the outer rows of staples may comprise the shorter staples 2220b. Higher 2220th staples can be positioned within and / or adjacent to the thicker central portion 2708 while staples 2220b can be positioned within and / or adjacent to the side portions 2709. For example, as a result, the highest staples 2220a can capture more material from the implantable cartridge body 2710 than shorter clips 2220b. Such circumstances could result in the staples 2220a applying greater clamping pressure to the tissue T than the staples 2220b. Even though higher staples 2220a can capture more body material from cartridge 2710 in the same as smaller staples 2220b, higher staples 2220a can have a staple height formed higher than smaller staples 2220b due to the tilted arrangement of the staple forming cavities 2742a and 2742b. Such considerations can be used to achieve a clamping pressure desired in the captured by the 2220th staples and 2220b where tissue as a result, the clamping pressure in the staples 2220th may be greater than, less than, or equal to the clamping pressure applied to the tissue by 2220b staples, e.g. . As an alternative to the end effector illustrated in Fig. 52, the smaller staples 2220b may be positioned within and / or adjacent the thicker central portion 2708 of the cartridge body 2710 and the higher staples 2220a may be positioned within and / or adjacent to the finer side portions 2709. Further, although the staple cartridge 2700 is depicted as comprising rows of outside and inside staples, the staple cartridge 2700 may comprise rows of additional staples, such as staple rows positioned intermediate to the rows of outside and inside staples, for example. For example, rows of intermediate staples can comprise staples having a height staple unformed that is between the heights of staple unformed the 2220th and 2220b staples and a height formed staple is between the heights of formed staple of staples 2220a and 2220b, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 53, an end effector of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2840, a staple cartridge channel 2530, and a staple cartridge 2800 positioned within the staple cartridge channel 2530. Similar to above, the staple cartridge 2800 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2810 comprising an inner layer 2812, an outer layer 2811, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 2220a and 2220b, for example, positioned in East. The thickness of the cartridge body 2810 can vary across its width. For example, the cartridge body 2810 may comprise a central portion 2808 and the side portions 2809, wherein the central portion 2808 may comprise a thickness that is less than the thickness of the side portions 2809. The thinnest portion of the cartridge body 2810 may be located in the central part 2808 while the thickest portion of the cartridge body 2810 may be located at the side portions 2809. for example, the thickness of the cartridge body 2810 may gradually increase from the central portion and the side portions 2808 2809 The thickness of the cartridge body 2810 can be increased linearly and / or geometrically between the central portion 2808 and the side portions 2809. For example, the tissue contacting surface 2819 of the cartridge body 2810 can comprise two inclined surfaces, or at an angle, which inclines upwards from the central portion 2808 towards the side portions 2809. The yun that 2840 can comprise two inclined surfaces, or angled, which equal, or at least substantially even, the inclined surfaces in contact with the fabric 2819. The anvil 2840 may further comprise at least one piece of reinforcing material 2860 coupled to the inclined surfaces of the anvil 2840. In addition to the above, the rows staple interiors in the staple cartridge 2800 may comprise the higher staples 2220a and the outer rows of staples may comprise the shorter staples 2220b. The highest clips 2220a can be positioned within and / or adjacent the thicker side portions 2809 while the clips 2220b can be positioned within and / or Adjacent to the central portion 2808. For example, as a result of the foregoing, the higher staples 2220a can capture more material from the implantable cartridge body 2810 than the shorter staples 2220b.

As described above with respect to Fig. 46, for example, the staple cartridge channel 2230 may comprise a stepped support surface 2231 which can be configured to support the staples 2220a and 2220b at different heights relative to the anvil 2240. The channel of the staple cartridge 2230 can be comprised of metal and the steps on the support surface 2231 can be formed on the support surface 2231 by a grinding operation, for example. Referring now to FIG. 54, an end effector of a surgical instrument may comprise a channel of the staple cartridge 2930 comprising a support insert 2935 positioned therein. More particularly, the staple cartridge channel 2930 can be formed such that it has a flat support surface 2931, or at least substantially planar, for example, that can be configured to support the insert 2935 comprising the staggered surfaces to support the staples 2220a and 2220b of the staple cartridge 2200 in different heights. For example, the insert 2935 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially planar, bottom surface that can be positioned against the support surface 2931. The insert 2935 may further comprise support grooves, grooves, or channels 2932a and 2932b that they can be configured to support staples 2220a and 2220b, respectively, in different heights.

Similar to the above, the insert 2935 may comprise a blade slot 2939 defined therein, which may be configured to allow a cutting member to pass therethrough. The staple cartridge channel 2930 may comprise the same material or a material other than the support insert 2935. The staple cartridge channel 2930 and the support insert 2935 may both be comprised of metal, for example, while, alternatively, the channel of the staple cartridge 2930 may be comprised of metal, for example, and the support insert 2935 may be comprised of plastic, for example. The support insert 2935 can be attached and / or welded into the staple cartridge channel 2930. The support insert 2935 can be snapped and / or snapped into the staple cartridge channel 2930. The support insert 2935 can be secured in the channel of the staple cartridge 2930 by the use of an adhesive.

Referring now to FIG. 55, an end effector of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 3040, a channel of staple cartridge 3030, and a compressible staple cartridge 3000 positioned in the staple cartridge channel 3030. Similar to the foregoing, the anvil 3040 may comprise a plurality of staple forming cavities 3042 defined therein and a knife slot 3049, which may be configured to slidably receive a cutting member therein. In addition, similar to the above, the staple cartridge channel 3030 may comprise a plurality of staple holder grooves 3032 defined therein and a knife groove 3039, which may be configured, in addition, to slidably receive a cutting member in this. The staple cartridge 3000 may comprise a first layer 3011, a second layer 3012, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 3020a and 3020b, for example, positioned therein. The staples 3020a may comprise a non-formed staple height, which is higher than the unstained staple height of the staples 3020b. The first layer 3011 may be comprised of a first compressible material and the second layer 3012 may be comprised of a second compressible material. The first compressible material can be compressed at an index that is greater than that of the second compressible material while, the first compressible material can be compressed at an index that is smaller than that of the second compressible material. The first compressible material may comprise a flexible material, which may comprise a first elastic index and the second compressible material may comprise a flexible material, which may comprise a second elastic index, which is different from the first elastic index. The first compressible material may comprise an elastic index, which is greater than the elastic index of the second compressible material. The first compressible material may comprise an elastic index, which is less than the elastic index of the second compressible material. The first compressible layer may comprise a first stiffness and the second compressible layer may comprise a second stiffness, wherein the first stiffness is different from the second stiffness. The first compressible layer may comprise a stiffness that is greater than the stiffness of the second compressible layer. The first compressible layer can understand a stiffness that is less than the stiffness of the second compressible layer.

Referring again to FIG. 55, the second layer 3012 of the staple cartridge 3000 may comprise a constant thickness, or at least substantially constant, across the width thereof. The first layer 3011 can comprise a thickness that varies across the width thereof. For example, the first layer 3011 may comprise one or more steps 3008 that can increase the thickness of the cartridge body 3010 in certain portions of the cartridge body 3010, such as the central portion, for example. Referring again to Fig. 55, the smaller staples 3020b can be positioned or aligned with the rungs 3008, ie, the thicker portions of the cartridge body 3010, and the higher staples 3020a can be positioned or aligned with the larger portions. fine of the cartridge body 3010. Optionally, as a result of the thicker and thinner portions of the cartridge body 3010, the rigidity of the cartridge body 3010 may be greater along the inner rows of staples 3020b than the outer rows of staples 3020a. The first layer 3011 can be connected to the second layer 3012. For example, the first layer 3011 and the second layer 3012 can comprise interlacing characteristics, which can hold the layers 3011 and 3012 together. The first layer 3011 may comprise a first laminate and the second layer 3012 may comprise a second laminate, wherein the first laminate may be adhered to the second laminate by one or more adhesives. The cartridge of staples 3000 may comprise a knife slot 3003, which can be configured to slidably receive a cutting member therein.

Referring now to FIG. 56, a staple cartridge 3100 may comprise an implantable, compressible cartridge body 3110 comprising a single layer of compressible material and, additionally, a plurality of staples, such as staples 3020b, for example, positioned in this. The thickness of the cartridge body 3110 can vary across the width of this. For example, the cartridge body 3110 may comprise the steps 3108 extending along the side portions thereof. Referring now to FIG. 57, a staple cartridge 3200 may comprise an implantable, compressible cartridge body 3210 comprising a single layer of compressible material and, additionally, a plurality of staples, such as staples 3020b, for example. positioned in this. The thickness of the cartridge body 3210 can vary across its width. For example, the cartridge body 3210 may comprise the steps 3208 that extend along the central portion thereof. Referring now to Fig.58, a staple cartridge 3300 may comprise an implantable, compressible cartridge body 3310 wherein, similar to the foregoing, the thickness of the cartridge body 3310 may vary across its width. The thickness of the cartridge body 3310 can be geometrically increased between the side portions and the central portion of the cartridge body 3310. For example, the thickness of the cartridge body 3310 can be defined by an arched or curved profile and can comprise a surface of contact with the arched or curved 3319 fabric. The thickness of the body of the cartridge 3310, and the outline of the contact surface with the fabric 3319, can be defined by a radius of curvature or, alternatively, by several radii of curvature, for example. Referring now to FIG. 59, a staple cartridge 3400 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 3410, wherein the thickness of the cartridge body 3410 may increase linearly, or at least substantially linearly, between the side portions and the central portion of the cartridge body 3410.

Referring now to FIG. 60, a staple cartridge 3500 may comprise an implantable cartridge body., compressible 3510 and a plurality of staples 3520 positioned therein. The body of the implantable cartridge 3510 may comprise a first inner layer 3512, a second inner layer 3513, and an outer layer 3511. The first inner layer 3512 may comprise a first thickness and the second inner layer 3513 may comprise a second thickness, wherein the second inner layer 3513 may be thicker than the first inner layer 3512. Alternatively, the first inner layer 3512 may be thicker than the second inner layer 3513. As a further alternative, the first inner layer 3512 may have the same thickness, or at least substantially the same as the second inner layer 3513. Each staple 3520 may comprise a base 3522 and one or more deformable legs 3521 extending from the base 3522. Optionally, each leg 3521 may comprise a tip 3523 that is embedded in the first inner layer 3511 and, additionally, each base 3522 of the staples 3520 can embedding in the second inner layer 3512. The first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may comprise at least one medicament stored therein, and the outer layer 3511 may encapsulate and seal the first inner layer 3512 and the second inner layer 3513 in such a way that the medicament does not flow out of the staple cartridge body 3510 until after the outer layer 3511 has been pierced by the staples 3520. More particularly, in addition to the above, an anvil can be pushed down against the tissue positioned against the tissue contacting surface 3519 of the staple cartridge 3500, such that the body of the cartridge 3510 is compressed and the surface 3519 moves down, and at least partially below, the tips of the staples 3523, in such a way that the tips 3523 break or pierce the outer layer 3511. After the outer layer 3511 has been pierced by the legs of the clips 3521, at least one medicament or M may flow out of the cartridge body 3510 around the legs of the staples 3521. In various circumstances, further compression of the cartridge body 3510 may drain the additional medication M out of the cartridge body 3510 as illustrated in FIG. 61 Referring again to FIG. 60, the outer layer 3511 may comprise a waterproof, or at least substantially impermeable, shell that can be configured to prevent the medicament from flowing prematurely out of the staple cartridge 3500 and, two, prevent fluids from entering a surgical site, for example, entering prematurely within the 3500 staple cartridge. The first inner layer 3512 may comprise a first medicament stored, or absorbed, in this and the second inner layer 3513 may comprise a second medicament stored, or absorbed, therein, wherein the second medicament may be different from the first medicament. An initial compression of the cartridge body 3510, which causes the outer layer 3511 to rupture, can generally discharge the first medicament out of the first inner layer 3512 and a further compression of the cartridge body 3510 can generally pour the second medicament out of the second inner layer 3513. In such cases, however, portions of the first medicament and the second medicament may be poured simultaneously although most of the medicament initially poured may comprise the first medicament, and most of the medicament subsequently discharged after that. You can understand the second medication. In addition to the above, the first inner layer 3512 may comprise a more compressible material than the second inner layer 3513 in such a way that the initial compression or pressure forces, which may be less than the subsequent compression or pressure forces, may cause a larger initial deflection within the first inner layer 3512 than within the second inner layer 3513. This larger initial deflection within the first inner layer 3512 may cause a larger portion of the first medicament to be expressed from the first inner layer 3512 than the second medicament from the second inner layer 3513. The first inner layer 3512 may be more porous and / or more flexible than the second inner layer 3513. For example, the first inner layer 3512 may comprise a plurality of pores, or voids, 3508 defined therein and the second inner layer 3513 may comprise a plurality of pores, or voids, 3509 defined therein, wherein the pores 3508 can be configured to store the first medicament in the first inner layer 3512 and the pores 3509 can be configured to store the second medicament in the second inner layer 3513. The size and density of the pores 3508 within the first inner layer 3512 and the pores 3509 within the second inner layer 3513 may be selected to provide a desired result described in the present disclosure.

With reference again to Figs. 60 and 61, the outer layer 3511, the first inner layer 3512, and / or the second inner layer 3513 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material. The first inner layer 3512 can be comprised of a first bioabsorbable material, the second inner layer 3513 can be comprised of a second bioabsorbable material, and the outer layer 3511 can be comprised of a third bioabsorbable material, wherein the first bioabsorbable material, the second bioabsorbable material, and / or the third bioabsorbable material may be comprised of different materials. The first bioabsorbable material can be bioabsorbable to a first index, the second bioabsorbable material can be bioabsorbable to a second index, and the third bioabsorbable material can be bioabsorbed to a third index, wherein the first index, the second index, and / or the third index they can be different For example, when a material is By bioabsorbing a particular index, such an index can be defined as the amount of mass of material that is absorbed by a patient's body over a unit of time. As it is known, the bodies of different patients can absorb different materials at different rates and, thus, such rates can be expressed as average rates in order to explain such variability. In any case, a faster rate may be an index at which more mass is bioabsorbed by a unit of time than a slower rate. With reference again to Figs. 60 and 61, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may be comprised of a material that bioabsorbs faster than the material comprising the outer layer 3511. For example, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable foam, a tissue sealant, and / or a hemostatic material, such as oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example, and outer layer 3511 may be comprised of a reinforcing material and / or a plastic material, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA) which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprona 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. In such cases, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 can immediately treat the tissue and can reduce tissue bleeding, by example, wherein outer layer 3514 may provide longer term structural support and may bioabsorb at a slower rate.

Due to the slower rate of bioabsorption of the outer layer 3511, in addition to the above, the outer layer 3511 can structurally or base reinforce the tissue within the staple line while it heals. One of the first inner layer 3512 and the second inner layer 3513 can be comprised of a material that can bioabsorb faster than the other such that one of the layers can provide an initial release of a therapeutic material and the other layer can provide a sustained release of the same therapeutic material and / or a different therapeutic material. For example, the rate at which a therapeutic material can be released from a layer 3512, 3513 may be a function of the bioabsorption of the substrate layer in which the medicament is absorbed or dispersed. For example, the substrate comprising the first inner layer 3512 can be bioabsorbable faster than the substrate comprising the second inner layer 3513 and, as a result, a medicament can be released from the first inner layer 3512 faster than the second inner layer 3513, for example. Optionally, as described in the present disclosure, one or more of the layers 3511, 3512, and 3513 of the cartridge body 3510 can adhere to each other by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or a protein hydrogel, by example. The adhesive can be water soluble and can be configured to release the connection between the layers when the staple cartridge 3500 is implanted and / or some time after that. For example, the adhesive can be configured to bioabsorb faster than the outer layer 3511, the inner first layer 3512, and / or the second inner layer 3513.

With reference now to Figs. 62 and 63, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 3600, for example, may comprise a cartridge body 3610 that includes a first compressible layer 3611, a second layer 3612 coupled to the first layer 3611, and a compressible layer. which can be removed 3613 coupled to the second layer 3612. For example, the first layer 3611 can be comprised of a compressible foam material, the second layer 3612 can comprise a laminate material adhered to the first layer 3611 by the use of one or more adhesives, and the third layer 3613 may comprise a compressible foam material removably adhered to the second layer 3612 by the use of one or more adhesives, for example. The staple cartridge 3600 may further comprise a plurality of staples, such as staples 3620, for example, positioned in the cartridge body 3610. For example, each staple 3620 may comprise a base 3622 positioned in the third layer 3613 and one or more deformable legs 3621 that extend upwardly from the base 3622 through the second layer 3612 and into the first layer 3611, for example. In use, in addition to the above, the upper surface 3619 of the staple cartridge body 3610 can be pushed down an anvil until the legs of the staples 3621 penetrate through the upper surface 3619 and the target tissue and come into contact with the anvil.

After the legs of the staples 3621 have deformed sufficiently, the anvil can move out of the staple cartridge 3600, such that the compressible layers thereof can at least partially expand again. In various circumstances, the insertion of the staples through the tissue can cause the tissue to bleed. The third layer 3613 may be comprised of an absorbent material, such as protein hydrogel, for example, which can draw blood out of the stapled tissue. Additionally to or instead of the above, the third layer 3613 can be comprised of a hemostatic material and / or a tissue sealant, such as lyophilized thrombin and / or fibrin, for example, which can be configured to reduce bleeding from the tissue . The third layer 3613 may provide structural support to the first layer 3611 and the second layer 3612, wherein the third layer 3613 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material and / or a non-bioabsorbable material. In any case, the third layer 3613 can be separated from the second layer 3612 after the staple cartridge 3610 has been implanted. Where the third layer 3613 comprises a material of implantable quality, the surgeon can choose whether to remove the third layer 3613 from the cartridge body 3610. The third layer 3613 can be configured to be removed from the second layer 3612 in one piece.

The first layer 3611 may be comprised of a first foam material and the third layer 3613 may be comprised of a second foam material that may be different from the first foam material. The first foam material can have a first density and the second foam material may have a second density, wherein the first density may be different from the second density. For example, the second density may be greater than the first density where, as a result, the third layer 3613 may be less compressible, or have a lower compression ratio, than the first layer 3611. Alternatively, the first density may be greater than the second density where, as a result, the first layer 3611 may be less compressible, or have a lower compression ratio, than the third layer 3613. Referring now to Figs. 64 and 65, a 3700 staple cartridge, similar to the 3600 staple cartridge, can comprise a cartridge body 3710 comprising a first layer of compressible foam 3711, a second layer 3712 coupled to first layer 3711, and a third layer of removable compressible foam 3713 removably attached to second layer 3712. For example , the third layer 3713 may comprise a plurality of staple-receiving grooves, or slits, 3709 that can each be configured to receive at least a portion of a staple 3620, such as a staple base 3622, for example, in these. The staples 3620 can be configured to slide into the staple receiver slots 3709 or, in other words, the third layer 3713 can be configured to slide relative to the staples 3620 when the staple cartridge 3700 is positioned against the target tissue and compress by an anvil, for example. The receiving grooves 3709 can be configured such that there is a clearance between the staples 3620 and the side walls of the receiving grooves 3709.

For example, as a result of the above, the staples 3620 may not capture a portion of the third layer 3713 therein when the staples 3620 are deformed, as illustrated in FIGS. 64 and 65. The ends of the staple receiving slots 3709 adjacent the second layer 3712 can be closed by a portion of the third layer 3713 and, as a result, at least a portion of the third layer 3713 can be captured within the staples 3620. when they are deformed. In any case, the third layer 3713 may comprise one or more perforations and / or dot markings 3708, for example, which may be configured to allow the third layer 3713 to be removed from the second layer 3712 in two or more pieces as illustrated in FIG. Fig. 64. In Fig. 64, one of the pieces of the third layer 3713 is illustrated when it is removed by a tool 3755. The perforations 3708 can be arranged along a line positioned between a first row of staples and a second row of staples.

Referring again to Figs.64 and 65, the bases 3622 of the staples 3620 can be positioned within the reception slots 3709, where the side walls of the reception slots 3709 can be configured to come into contact and releasably retain the legs of staples 3621 in position. Although not illustrated, third layer 3713 may comprise an elongated slot that surrounds all staples within a line of staples. For example, a staple cartridge comprising four rows of staples, for example, may comprise an elongated slot aligned with each row of staples in the lower layer of the staple cartridge. In addition to the foregoing, at least a portion of the staple cartridge 3600 and / or the staple cartridge 3700 can be implanted within a patient and at least a portion of the staple cartridge can be removed from the patient. With reference again to Figs. 64 and 65, the first layer 3711 and the second layer 3712 can be captured within the staples 3620 and can be implanted with the staples 3620, while the third layer 3713 can optionally be removed or separated from the staple cartridge 3700. In various circumstances, the Removing a portion of the implanted staple cartridge can reduce the amount of material that the patient's body has to reabsorb which can provide several therapeutic benefits. In the event that a portion of a staple cartridge is removed or separated, such as by a laparoscopic tool 3755, for example, the portion of the staple cartridge separated can be removed from the surgical site through a trocar, such as a trocar. which has an opening of 5 mm, for example. A cartridge body may comprise more than one removable layer. For example, the cartridge body 3710 may comprise a fourth layer, wherein the third layer 3713 of the cartridge body 3710 may be comprised of a hemostatic material and the fourth layer may be comprised of a support layer. For example, a surgeon can remove the support layer and then choose whether to remove the hemostatic layer, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 66, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 3800, for example, can comprise a cartridge body 3810 that includes an outer layer 3811 and an inner layer 3812. inner layer 3812 may be comprised of a compressible foam material and outer layer 3811 may be wrapped at least partially around inner layer 3812. Outer layer 3811 may comprise a first portion 3811a configured to be positioned on a first side of the inner layer 3812 and a second portion 3811b configured to be positioned on a second side of the inner layer 3812, wherein the first portion 3811a and the second portion 3811b can be connected by a flexible hinge, such as the hinge 3809, for example. For example, at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or protein hydrogel, for example, can be applied to the first side and / or the second side of the inner layer 3812 for the purpose of securing the portions of the outer layer 3811 thereto. The outer layer 3811 may comprise one or more fastening members extending therefrom. For example, the outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3821 that extend from one side of the outer layer 3811, which may be seated in the compressible inner layer 3812. For example, the legs 3821 may not protrude from the second side of the inner layer 3812 while, alternatively, the legs 3821 can at least partially protrude from the inner layer 3812. When the compressible cartridge body 3810 is compressed, in use, the legs 3821 can be configured to pierce the inner layer 3812 and the second portion 3811b of outer layer 3811. Second portion 3811b of outer layer 3811 can comprise openings, such as openings 3808, for example, defined therein, which can be configured to receive the legs of staples 3821. At least portions of the staple cartridge 3800 may comprise a blade slot 3803, which can be configured to slidably receive a cutting member therein. For example, the knife slot 3803 may not extend completely through the thickness of the cartridge body 3810 and, as a result, the cutting member may cut the body of the cartridge 3810 as it moves relative to it.

Referring now to Fig. 67, a staple cartridge 3900 may comprise, similar to the staple cartridge 3800, a cartridge body 3910 that includes an inner layer 3812 and an outer layer 3811, wherein the outer layer 3811 may comprise a first portion 3811a positioned adjacent the first side of inner layer 3812 and a second portion 3811b positioned adjacent to second side of inner layer 3812. Similar to the foregoing, outer layer 3811 may comprise one or more attachment members extending from this. For example, the outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3921 extending from one side of the outer layer 3811, which may be inserted into the compressible inner layer 3812. Each deformable leg 3921 may comprise at least one hook or tab 3923 protruding from it, which can be configured to engage the second portion 3811b of the outer layer 3811 and, as a result, retain the outer layer 3811 to the inner layer 3812. For example, the tabs 3923 can be configured to protrude from the second side of the inner layer 3812 and extending through the openings 3808 in the second portion 3811b of the outer layer 3811 in such a way that the tabs 3923 can be coupled to the surface outside the outer layer 3811 and blocking the outer layer 3811 to the inner layer 3812. For the purpose of constructing the staple cartridge 3900, the inner layer 3812 may be compressed at least partially for the purpose of causing the prongs to protrude from this and enter into the openings 3808. For example, the staple cartridge 3900 may be pre-compressed at least partially when inserted into a staple cartridge, for example. In addition to the above, at least a portion of the legs 3921 may be incorporated within the first portion 3811a of the outer layer 3811, wherein the outer layer 3811 may be comprised of a plastic material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example, and the plastic material can be overmoulded around at least a portion of the legs 3921.

Referring now to Figs.68 to 72, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4000, for example, may comprise a cartridge body 4010 that includes a first compressible layer 4011 and a second layer 4012 and, additionally, a plurality of staples 4020 positioned within the cartridge body 4010. With reference to FIG. 70, each staple 4020 may comprise a base 4022 and at least one deformable leg 4023 extending from the base 4022. With reference to FIG. 68, the staple cartridge 4000 can be positioned between a staple cartridge channel 4030 and an anvil 4040 of an end effector of a surgical stapler, wherein the second layer 4012 of the cartridge body 4010 and / or the bases 4022 of the staples 4020 can be positioned against staple cartridge channel 4030.

Referring now to FIG. 69, the second layer 4012 may comprise a layer of napkins 4060 interconnected to each other by a napkin support frame 4061. For example, the napkins 4060 and the napkin support frame 4061 may be comprised of a molded plastic material, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. Each pad 4060 may comprise one or more openings or slots 4062 that can be configured to receive a leg of the staple 4021 that extends therethrough as illustrated in Figs. 70 and 71. Each pad 4060 may comprise, furthermore, a receiving groove 4063 defined therein, which can be configured to receive a base 4022 of a staple 4020. Referring again to FIG. 69, the pads 4060 and / or the compress support frame 4061 can comprise a plurality of dot markings, perforations, or the like, which may be configured to allow the pads 4060 to be separated from the pad support frame 4061 at a desired location. Similarly, with reference to Fig. 71, one or more pads 4060 may be connected to one another along a line comprising perforations and / or scoring marks 4064, for example. In use, the compressible foam layer 4011 can be positioned against the target tissue T and the body of the cartridge 4010 can be compressed by the anvil 4040, such that the anvil 4040 can deform the staples 4020. When the staples 4020 become deformed, the staple legs 4021 of each staple 4020 can capture the tissue T, a portion of the first layer 4011, and a napkin 4060 within the deformed staple. When the staple cartridge channel 4030 is moves away from the implanted staple cartridge 4060, for example, the pad support frame 4061 can be separated from the pads 4060 and / or the pads 4060 can be separated from each other. In certain circumstances, the pads 4060 can be separated from the frame 4061 and / or one another when the staples 4020 are deformed by the anvil 4040 as described above.

As described in the present description, staples of a staple cartridge can be formed completely by an anvil when the anvil moves to a closed position. Alternatively, with reference now to FIGS. 73 to 76, the staples of a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4100, for example, can be deformed by an anvil when the anvil moves to a closed position and, additionally, by a staple driver system that moves the staples toward the closed anvil. The staple cartridge 4100 may comprise a compressible cartridge body 4110 which may comprise a foam material, for example, and a plurality of staples 4120 at least partially positioned within the compressible cartridge body 4110. The staple driver system may comprise a driver carrier 4160, a plurality of staple drivers 4162 positioned within the driver carrier 4160, and a staple cartridge tray 4180 that can be configured to retain the staple drivers 4162 on the driver carrier 4160. For example, the staple drivers 4162 can be positioned within one or more slots 4163 in the impeller carrier 4160, wherein the side walls of the slots 4163 can assist in guiding the staple drivers 4162 upwardly toward the anvil. Staples 4120 they can be supported within the slots 4163 by the staple drivers 4162, where the staples 4120 can be fully positioned in the slots 4163 when the staples 4120 and the staple drivers 4162 are in their non-fired positions. Alternatively, at least a portion of the staples 4120 may extend upward through the open ends 4161 of the slots 4163 when the staples 4120 and the staple drivers 4162 are in their non-fired positions. For example, with reference first now to Fig. 74, the bases of the staples 4120 can be positioned within the driver support 4160 and the tips of the staples 4120 can be incorporated within the compressible cartridge body 4110. Approximately one third of the height of the staples 4120 can be positioned within the driver carrier 4160 and approximately two thirds of the height of the staples 4120 can be positioned within the cartridge body 4110. With reference to Fig. 73A, the staple cartridge 4100 can comprise, in addition, a waterproof membrane or envelope 4111 surrounding the cartridge body 4110 and the impeller holder 4160, for example.

In use, the staple cartridge 4100 can be positioned within a staple cartridge channel, for example, and the anvil can move towards staple cartridge 4100 within a closed position. The anvil may come into contact with and compress the body of the compressible cartridge 4110 when the anvil moves to its closed position. The anvil may not come into contact with the staples 4120 when the anvil is in its closed position. The anvil can come in contact with the legs of the staples 4120 and at least partially deforming the staples 4120 when the anvil moves to its closed position. In any case, the staple cartridge 4100 may further comprise one or more sliders 4170 that can be advanced longitudinally within the staple cartridge 4100, such that the sliders 4170 can sequentially couple the staple drivers 4162 and move the impellers of staples 4162 and staples 4120 toward the anvil. The sliders 4170 can slide between the staple cartridge tray 4180 and the staple drivers 4162. In the event that the closure of the anvil has initiated the staple forming process 4120, the upward movement of the staples 4120 towards the anvil can complete the forming process and deform staples 4120 to its fully formed, or at least desired, height. In the event that the closure of the anvil has not deformed the staples 4120, the upward movement of the staples 4120 toward the anvil can initiate and complete the forming process and deform the staples 4120 to its fully formed, or at least desired, height. . The sliders 4170 can be advanced from a proximal end of the staple cartridge 4100 to a distal end of the staple cartridge 4100 so that the staples 4120 positioned at the proximal end of the staple cartridge 4100 are completely formed before the staples 4120 are positioned. at the distal end of staple cartridge 4100 they are completely formed. With reference to Fig. 75, the sliders 4170 may each comprise at least one angled or inclined surface 4711, which may configured to slide below the staple drivers 4162 and raise the staple drivers 4162, as illustrated in FIG. 76.

In addition to the above, the staples 4120 can be shaped to capture at least a portion of the tissue T and at least a portion of the body of the compressible cartridge 4110 of the staple cartridge 4100 therein. After the staples 4120 have been formed, the anvil and staple cartridge channel 4130 of the surgical stapler can be separated from the staple cartridge 4100. In various circumstances, the cartridge tray 4180 can be fixedly attached to the cartridge channel. of staples 4130 wherein, as a result, the cartridge tray 4180 can be separated from the body of the compressible cartridge 4110 when the staple cartridge channel 4130 is removed from the body of the implanted cartridge 4110. Referring again to FIG. 73, the Cartridge tray 4180 may comprise opposite side walls 4181 between which the cartridge body 4110 can be removably positioned. For example, the body of the compressible cartridge 4110 can be compressed between the side walls 4181 so that the body of the cartridge 4110 can be removably retained between them during use and removably detachable from the cartridge tray 4180 when the tray is removed. of cartridges 4180. For example, the impeller holder 4160 can be connected to the cartridge tray 4180 so that the impeller holder 4160, the impellers 4162, and / or the sliders 4170 can remain in the cartridge tray 4180 when it is removed the cartridge of cartridges 4180 of the surgical location. The 4162 impellers can ejected from the impeller carrier 4160 and stay inside the surgical site. For example, impellers 4162 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA) which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprona 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. The impellers 4162 may be coupled to the staples 4120 so that the impellers 4162 are deployed with the staples 4120. For example, each impeller 4162 may comprise a channel configured to receive the bases of the staples 4120, for example, where the channels they can be configured to receive the staple bases in a snap-fit manner and / or snap-fit.

In addition to the above, the impeller carrier 4160 and / or the sliders 4170 can be ejected from the cartridge tray 4180. For example, the sliders 4170 can slide between the cartridge tray 4180 and the impeller holder 4160 so that, a As the sliders 4170 are advanced to drive the staple drivers 4162 and the staples 4120 upward, the sliders 4170 can further move the driver carrier 4160 upwardly out of the cartridge tray 4180. For example, the carrier of the impeller 4160 and / or the sliders 4170 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA) which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA) ), polyglecaprona 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. The sliders 4170 can be integrally formed and / or coupled to a drive rod, or cutting member, which pushes the sliders 4170 through the staple cartridge 4100. In such cases, the sliders 4170 may not be ejected from the cartridge tray 4180 and can remain with the surgical stapler while, in other cases, where the 4170 sliders do not engage the drive rod, the 4170 sliders can stay in the surgical location. In any case, in addition to the above, the compressibility of the cartridge body 4110 may allow thicker staple cartridges to be used within an end effector of a surgical stapler since the body of the cartridge 4110 may be compressed, or reduced, when The anvil of the stapler closes. As a result of the staples becoming at least partially deformed after the closure of the anvil, the higher staples, such as staples having a staple height of about 4.6 mm (0.18"), for example, could be used where the height of staple of about 3.0 mm (0.12") can be positioned within the compressible layer 4110 and wherein the compressible layer 4110 can have a non-compressed height of about 3.6 mm (0.14"), for example.

Referring now to Figs.77 to 80, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4200, for example, may comprise a compressible cartridge body 4210, a plurality of staples 4220 positioned therein, and a plurality of flexible side support members 4234. Referring now to Fig. 78, the staple cartridge 4200 can be positioned between an anvil 4240 and a staple cartridge channel 4230, wherein the side support members 4234 can be engaged to the staple cartridge channel 4230. When the anvil 4240 moves downward to compress the cartridge body 4210 and at least partially deform the staples 4220, as illustrated in FIG. 79, the side portions of the cartridge body 4210 may laterally bulging and pushing the lateral support members 4234 outwards. For example, the side support members 4234 may be coupled to the cartridge body 4210 and, when the cartridge body 4210 bulks laterally, as described above, the side support members 4234 may be separated from the cartridge body 4210 as illustrated in FIG. Fig. 79. The lateral support members 4234 may be adhered to the body of the cartridge 4210 by the use of at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or a protein hydrogel, for example. Similar to the above, closing the anvil 4240 may only partially deform the staples 4220, wherein the staple conformation 4220 may be completed by advancing one or more sliders 4270 through the staple cartridge 4200 as illustrated in FIG. 80. With reference now to Figs. 82 and 83, the sliders 4270 may be advanced from a proximal end of the staple cartridge 4200 to a distal end of the staple cartridge 4200 by a cutting member 4280. For example, the cutting member 4280 may comprise a cutting element, or blade, 4283, which can be advanced through the tissue T and / or the body of the compressible cartridge 4210. The cutting member 4280 may comprise the cam members 4282 that can travel along the outer surfaces of the clamps 4230 and 4240 and move or hold the clamps in place. Optionally, as a result of the foregoing, the staples 4220 can be formed in their final forms at the same time, or at least substantially at the same time, as the T-tissue is cut. For example, the sliders 4270 can be positioned distally with respect to to blade 4283, such that tissue T is only cut when the preceding portion of the fabric has been fully stapled, for example.

With reference again to Figs. 82 and 83, the sliders 4270 may comprise distinct slidable members that are advanced together by the cutting member 4280. For example, the sliders 4270 may be contained within the staple cartridge 4200 and the cutting member 4280 may be advanced within the staple cartridge 4200 by a bar 4281, so that the cutting member 4280 engages the sliders 4270 and advances the sliders 4270 distally. The sliders 4270 may be connected to each other. In any case, each slider 4270 may comprise a skewed surface, or cam, 4271, which may be configured to lift staples 4220 aligned within a row of staples. The angled surfaces 4271 can be integrally formed with the cutting member 4280. Referring again to FIGS. 82 and 83, each staple 4200 may comprise a base, at least one deformable member extending from the base, and a crown 4229 overmoulded on and / or positioned around at least a portion of the base and / or the deformable members of the staple 4200. Optionally, such crowns 4229 can be configured to be operated directly by a slider 4270, for example. More particularly, the crowns 4229 of the staples 4220 can be configured, such that the angled surfaces 4271 of the sliders 4270 can slide underneath and come into direct contact with the crowns 4229 without a staple driver positioned between them. In such cases, each crown 4229 can comprise at least one auxiliary angled or inclined surface, which can be coupled by an angled surface 4271 of the sliders 4270, such that the auxiliary angled surfaces can drive the staples 4220 upwardly when the sliders 4270 slide under staples 4220.

Referring now to Fig. 81, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4300, for example, may comprise a compressible body 4310 and a plurality of staples 4320 positioned within the compressible body 4310. Similar to the above, the Staple cartridge 4300 may comprise the flexible side supports 4334 which may be coupled to a channel of staple cartridges and / or adhered to the compressible body 4310. In addition to the above, the flexible side supports 4334 may be connected together by one or more supports, or connecting members, 4335 which can be configured to hold together the side supports 4334. In operation, the connecting members 4335 can be configured to prevent, or at least inhibit, the side supports 4334 from separating prematurely from the cartridge body 4310. The connecting members 4335 may be configured to hold the side supports 4334 together after the staple cartridge 4300 has been compressed by an anvil. In such cases, the side supports 4334 may resist bulging or lateral displacement of the side portions of the cartridge body 4310. A cutting member, such as the cutting member 4280, for example, may be configured to sever the connecting members. 4335 when the cutting member 4280 moves distally within the body of the cartridge 4310. For example, the cutting member 4280 can be configured to push distally one or more sliders, such as the sliders 4270, for example, in order to form the Staples 4320 against an anvil. The sliders 4270 can direct the cutting edge 4283, such that the blade member 4280 does not sever a connecting member 4335 until the staples 4320 adjacent to that connecting member 4335 have been completely formed, or at least shaped to a desired height. In various circumstances, the connecting members 4335, in cooperation with the lateral supports 4334, can prevent, or at least reduce, the lateral movement of the body of the compressible cartridge 4310 and, simultaneously, prevent, or at least reduce, the lateral movement of the the staples 4320 positioned within the body of the cartridge 4310. In such circumstances, the connecting members 4335 can hold the staples 4320 in position until after they deform and the connecting members 4335 can be cut after that to release the portions. sides of the cartridge body 4310. As mentioned above, the side supports 4334 can be connected to the staple cartridge channel and, as a result, can be removed from the surgical site with the staple cartridge channel after the cartridge has been implanted of staples 4300. The side supports 4334 may comprise an implantable material and may be left inside a surgical site. The connecting members 4335 can be positioned between the cartridge body 4310 and the tissue T and, after the connecting members 4335 have been separated from the side supports 4334, the connecting members 4335 can remain implanted in the patient. For example, the connecting members 4335 may comprise an implantable material and the connecting members 4335 may comprise the same material as the side supports 4334, for example. Connection members 4335 and / or lateral supports 4334 may comprise a flexible bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polygallecapronate 25 (PGCL), which is marketed under the trade name of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. According to the invention, a connecting member may comprise a sheet of material connecting the side supports 4334. A staple cartridge may comprise connecting members that extend through the upper surface of the container. cartridge body 4310 and, additionally, connecting members extending around the lower surface of the cartridge body 4310.

Referring now to FIG. 84, a staple cartridge may comprise staples, such as staples 4420, for example, which may comprise a portion of wire inserted into a portion of the crown. The wire portion may comprise a metal, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, for example, and / or a plastic, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The crown portion may comprise a metal, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, for example, and / or a plastic, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The wire portion of each staple 4420 may comprise a base 4422 and deformable legs 4421 extending from the base 4422, wherein the crown portion of each staple 4420 may comprise a crown 4429 which may be configured to receive therein at least a portion of a base 4422. In order to assemble the portions of each staple 4420, with reference now to Figs. 85A to 85C, the legs 4421 of the wire portion can be inserted into an opening 4426 in a crown 4429, where the opening 4426 can be configured to guide the legs 4421 within a base chamber 4427. The wire portion can be inserted , in addition, on the crown 4429, such that the legs 4421 leave the base chamber 4427 and the base 4422 of the wire portion enters the base chamber 4427. For example, the base chamber 4427 can be configured, such that the wire portion is rotated within the crown 4429 a as the base 4422 enters the chamber of the base 4427, such that the staple legs 4421 are oriented in an upward direction, or at least substantially upwards. Referring again to Fig. 84, the crown 4429 may comprise the exit holes 4425 which may be configured to receive the staple legs 4421 therein.

In addition to the above, a surgical stapler may comprise a slider 4470 configured to pass through the staple cartridge 4400 and the staple cartridge channel 4430 and move the staples 4420 contained within the body of the cartridge 4410 toward an anvil. In various circumstances, the slider 4470 can be moved from a proximal end of the staple cartridge channel 4430 to a distal end of the cartridge channel 4430 for the purpose of implanting the staple cartridge body 4410 and the staples 4420. In certain circumstances, the slider 4470 can be retracted or returned to the proximal end of the cartridge channel 4430 and another staple cartridge 4400 can be inserted into the cartridge channel 4430. Once the new staple cartridge 4400 has been positioned within the cartridge channel 4430, the 4470 slider can advance distally once more. The surgical stapler may comprise one or more locking features that may prevent the slider 4470 from advancing distally once more if a new staple cartridge 4400 has not been positioned within the cartridge channel 4430. For example, with reference again to Fig. 84, the staple cartridge channel 4430 may comprise a locking support 4439, which may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the distal movement of the slider 4470. More particularly, slider 4470 may be configured to abut support 4439 unless slider 4470 is at least partially raised upwardly on support 4439 by a lifting feature 4428, for example, extending between the staples more proximal 4420 within a staple cartridge 4400. Stated another way, in the absence of the most proximal staples 4420 in a new 4400 staple cartridge, the 4470 slider can not advance. Thus, when a staple cartridge 4400 is worn within the cartridge channel 4430, or no staple cartridge 4400 is present in the cartridge channel 4430, the slider 4470 can not advance within the cartridge channel 4430.

In addition to the above, with reference now to Fig. 86, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4500, for example, may be positioned within a staple cartridge channel 4530 and may comprise a compressible cartridge body 4510 , a plurality of staples 4520 positioned within the cartridge body 4510, and a cartridge tray, or retainer, 4580. The compressible cartridge body 4510 may comprise an outer layer 4511 and an inner layer 4512 wherein, the outer layer 4511 may hermetically enclose the inner layer 4512. For example, the outer layer 4511 may extend between the inner layer 4512 and the cartridge tray 4580. The outer layer 4511 may only partially surround the inner layer 4512 and, for example, the outer layer 4511 and the cartridge tray 4580 can cooperate to encompass, or at least substantially encompass the inner layer 4512. In addition to the above, the 4520 staples can supported by the cartridge tray 4580, wherein the cartridge tray 4580 may comprise one or more staple holder channels configured to support the staples 4520. The cartridge tray 4580 may be coupled to the cartridge body 4510 where, for example, the cartridge body 4510 can be compressed laterally between the opposite side walls of the cartridge tray 4580. The side walls of the cartridge tray 4580 can support the cartridge body 4510 laterally and, for example, the cartridge tray 4580 can comprise a or more walls, or fins, 4582 extending upward from the lower support 4583 within the cartridge body 4510. For example, the cartridge body 4510 may comprise one or more slots, or channels therein, which can be configured to receiving and / or interlocking with the walls 4582. The walls 4582 may extend partially, or almost entirely, through the body of the cartridge 451 0. For example, the walls 4582 may extend longitudinally through the staple cartridge 4500 between a first row of staples 4520 and a second row of staples 4520.

The cartridge body 4510 and / or the cartridge tray 4580 may comprise auxiliary retaining features that can provide a snap fit between the cartridge tray 4580 and the cartridge body 4510. The staple cartridge 4500 may be positioned within the cartridge channel. cartridge 4530 in such a way that the cartridge tray 4580 is positioned against and / or engages the cartridge channel 4530. The cartridge tray 4580 can be detachably coupled to the cartridge channel 4530, such that, after the staple cartridge 4500 has been compressed by the anvil 4540 and the staples 4520 have been deformed, the cartridge tray 4580 can be separated from the cartridge channel 4530 and can be implanted with the cartridge body 4510. For example, the cartridge tray 4580 may comprise a bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA) , polygallecaprona 25 (PGCL), which is marketed under the trade name of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. A surgical stapler may further comprise a trigger mechanism and / or trigger that can be slid between the staple cartridge channel 4530 and a lower actuating surface in the cartridge tray 4580, which can be configured to raise or eject the staple tray. cartridge 4580 of the cartridge channel 4530. The cartridge body 4510 can be detachably coupled to the cartridge tray 4580 in such a way that, after the staple cartridge 4500 has been compressed by the anvil 4540 and the staples 4520 have been When the cartridge body 4510 is deformed, the body of the cartridge 4510 can be separated from the cartridge tray 4580. For example, the cartridge tray 4580 can remain fixedly engaged with the cartridge channel 4530, such that the cartridge tray 4580 is removed from the surgical site with the cartridge channel 4530. A surgical stapler may further comprise a trigger mechanism and / or trigger that can be slid between the cartridge tray stapler 4580 and one lower drive surface on the cartridge body 4510 which can be configured to lift or eject the cartridge body 4510 from the cartridge tray 4580. For example, the staple cartridge 4500 can further comprise staple drivers positioned between the cartridge tray 4500. staple cartridge 4580 and staples 4520 in such a manner that, as the firing mechanism slides distally, the staple drivers and staples 4520 can be driven upward towards the anvil. For example, the staple drivers may be embedded at least partially within the compressible cartridge body 4510.

Optionally, similar to the previous one, the staple cartridge 4500 may comprise a locking element which may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the distal movement of a blade member unless an unsprung staple cartridge has been positioned. 4500 within the staple cartridge channel 4530. The staple cartridge tray 4580 may comprise a surface that raises the cutting member up and over a locking surface within the staple cartridge channel 4530, for example. In the event that a staple cartridge 4500 comprising a cartridge tray 4580 is not present in the cartridge channel 4530, the knife member can not advance. The most proximal staples and / or any other suitable staple, within a staple cartridge 4500 may comprise a lifting surface that can sufficiently raise the cutting member over the locking surface. In addition to or instead of the above, several portions of the staple cartridge 4500 can comprise materials that have different colors. In such cases, a surgeon can visually identify when a non-fired and / or a fired staple cartridge is present in the staple cartridge channel 4530. For example, the outer layer 4511 of the cartridge body 4510 may have a first color, the cartridge tray 4580 may have a second color, and the staple cartridge channel 4530 may have a third color. In the event that the surgeon sees the first color, the surgeon may know that a non-fired 4500 staple cartridge is present in the 4530 staple cartridge channel. In the event that the surgeon sees the second color the surgeon may know that a fired cartridge is present in the staple cartridge channel 4530 and the remaining cartridge tray 4580 must be removed; and in the event that the surgeon sees the third color, the surgeon may know that no portion of a staple cartridge 4500 remains within the cartridge channel 4530.

Referring now to FIG. 87, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4600, for example, may comprise a compressible, implantable cartridge body 4610 and a plurality of staples 4620 positioned therein. The cartridge body 4610 may comprise an outer layer 4611 and an inner layer 4612. The inner layer 4612 may comprise a plurality of cavities, such as pockets, or cavities, 4615, for example, defined therein, which may facilitate the folding of the cartridge body 4610. For example, the inner layer 4612 may comprise a crimped, or honeycombed, network that can be configured to resist a compression force, or pressure, as long as the compression force, or pressure, does not exceed a certain threshold value. When the threshold value has not been exceeded, the inner layer 4612 may be deformed, with respect to the compressive force, or the pressure, which is applied, at a linear speed, or at least substantially linear. After the compression force, or pressure, has exceeded the threshold value, the inner layer 4612 may suddenly succumb to large deflections and bend, or bend, as a result of the compression load. The network of the inner layer 4612 may comprise a plurality of sublayers 4612a that can be connected together. Each sublayer 4612a may comprise a plurality of alternating ridges and ridges, or waves, which may be aligned with the alternating ridges and ridges of an adjacent sublayer 4612a. For example, the grooves of a first sublayer 4612a may be positioned adjacent the ridges of a second sublayer 4612a and, similarly, the ridges of the first sublayer 4612a may be positioned adjacent the grooves of the second sublayer 4612a. Adjacent sublayers 4612a may adhere to each other and / or to outer layer 4611 by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and / or a protein hydrogel, for example. Fig. 88 illustrates the staple cartridge 4600 after the body of the cartridge 4610 has been folded and the staples 4620 have been deformed in order to capture and hold the tissue T against the body of the cartridge 4610.

With reference now to Figs. 89-91, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4700, for example, may comprise a compressible, implantable cartridge body 4710 and a plurality of staples 4720 positioned within the body of the cartridge 4710. Similar to the above, the cartridge body 4710 may comprise an outer layer 4711 and an inner layer 4712, wherein the inner layer 4712 may comprise a plurality of sublayers 4712a. Similar to the above, in addition, each sublayer 4712a may comprise grooves 4717 and alternating crests 4718 that can be aligned with each other to define pockets or cavities, 4715 therebetween. For example, grooves 4717 and / or ridges 4718 can extend along axes that are parallel to each other and / or parallel to a longitudinal axis 4709. Staples 4720 can be aligned in a plurality of staple rows that can be extended to along axes that are parallel to each other and / or parallel to the longitudinal axis 4709. Alternatively, with reference again to Figs. 87 and 88, the staples 4620 contained in the cartridge body 4600 can extend along axes that are transverse or perpendicular with respect to the axes defined by the grooves and ridges of the sublayers 4612a. With reference again to Figs. 89 to 91, staples 4720 may extend through grooves 4717 and ridges 4718, where friction forces between staples 4720 and sublayers 4712a may hold staples 4720 within the body of cartridge 4710. The plurality of sublayers 4712a may comprise a reinforcing material and / or a plastic material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example, which may be configured to hold the staples 4720 in a vertical orientation, for example, and / or keeping staples 4720 in alignment with one another as illustrated in Figs. 89 and 90. Fig. 91 illustrates the staple cartridge 4700 after the body of the cartridge 4710 has been folded and the staples 4720 have been deformed in order to capture and hold the tissue T against the body of the cartridge 4710.

With reference again to Figs. 89 to 91, the cartridge body 4710, when compressed, can be flexibly or elastically folded. For example, the waves formed within each sublayer 4712a by the grooves 4717 and the ridges 4718 can flatten, or at least substantially flatten, when the cartridge body 4710 is compressed which can fold, or at least substantially fold, the cavities 4715. defined among these. In various circumstances, the cartridge body 4710, or at least portions of the body of the cartridge 4710, may flexibly or elastically expand again after the compression force, or pressure, has been removed from the cartridge body 4710. For example , the connections between the grooves 4717 and the ridges 4718 of the adjacent sublayers 4712a may remain intact, or at least substantially intact, when the cartridge body 4710 is compressed in such a way that, after the compression force has been removed from the cartridge body 4710, the sub-layers 4712a can deflect themselves from each other and, as a result, at least partially expand the cartridge body 4710. The cartridge body 4710 can be plastically deformed, or crushed, when it is compressed and , as a result, the cartridge body 4710 may not expand again after the compression force, or pressure, has been removed from the cartridge body 4710. Referring now to Fig. 92, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4800, for example, may comprise a collapsible cartridge body 4810 comprising an outer layer 4811 and an inner layer 4812, wherein the inner layer 4812 may comprise a corrugated network, configured in the form of a honeycomb, having a plurality of pockets, or cavities, 4815 defined therein. The walls defining the network of the inner layer 4812 may comprise one or more weakened, or thin, cross sections 4819 that can be configured to allow the walls defining the network to break when the cartridge body 4810 is compressed. Under such circumstances, The body of the cartridge 4810 can be crushed when the staple cartridge 4800 is implanted.

With reference now to Figs. 93 to 95, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4900, for example, may comprise a cartridge body 4910 comprising an outer layer 4911 and a plurality of foldable elements 4912 positioned between the upper and lower portions of the layer outside 4911, for example. With reference mainly to Figs. 93 and 94, the staple cartridge 4900 may further comprise a plurality of staples 4920, wherein each staple 4920 may be positioned in a foldable member 4912. More particularly, each foldable member 4912 may comprise a first portion 4912a, a second portion 4912a. 4012b, and a third portion 4012c that can cooperate to define a cavity 4915 therein, which is configured to receive a staple 4920. In operation, in addition to the above, the cartridge staples 4900 can be positioned within a channel of staple cartridges and a compressive force can be applied to the surface in contact with the tissue 4919 with the objective of compressing the body of the cartridge 4910. As the surface in contact with the tissue 4919 moving downwards, foldable elements 4912 can be folded. Under such circumstances, the second portion 4912b of each folding element 4912 can be folded into a corresponding first portion 4912a and, similarly, the third portion 4912c of each folding element 4912 can be folded into a second corresponding portion 4912b. As the body of the cartridge 4910 is compressed and the folding members 4912 fold, the staples 4920 positioned within the folding members 4912 can be deformed, as illustrated in Fig. 95. The second portion 4912b of each folding element 4912 can be engaged by friction and / or snapping into a corresponding first portion 4912a, such that, once the compression force applied to the folding element 4912 exceeds the holding force retaining the first portion 4912a and the second portion 4912b in its extended position (Figure 94), the first portion 4912a and the second portion 4912b may begin to slide relative to each other. Similarly, the third portion 4912c of each folding element 4912 can be frictionally engaged and / or snapped into a corresponding second portion 4912b, such that, once the compression force applied to the folding element 4912 exceeds the force of retention that retains the second portion 4912b and the third portion 4912c in its extended position (Fig. 94), second portion 4912b and third portion 4912c may begin to slide relative to each other.

As described in the present description, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of staples therein. Optionally, such staples may be comprised of a deformed metal wire in a substantially U-shaped configuration having two staple legs. Alternatives are contemplated in which the staples may comprise different configurations such as two or more wires that have been joined together having three or more staple legs. The wire, or wires, used to form the staples may comprise a round, or at least substantially round, cross section. The staple wires may comprise any other suitable cross section, such as square and / or rectangular cross sections, for example. The staples may be comprised of plastic wires. The staples may be comprised of metal wires coated with plastic. According to the invention, a cartridge can comprise any suitable type of fastener in addition to or in place of the staples. For example, such a fastener may comprise swivel arms that are bent when engaged by an anvil. Two-part fasteners could be used. For example, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of the first portions of the fastener and an anvil may comprise a plurality of the second fastener portions that are connected to the first fastener portions when the anvil is compressed against the staple cartridge. As described above, a slider or pusher may be advanced within a staple cartridge to complete the staple forming process. A slider or pusher may be advanced within an anvil to move one or more forming members downwardly in engagement with the opposite staple cartridge and staples, or fasteners, positioned therein.

As described in the present description, a staple cartridge may comprise four rows of staples stored therein. The four rows of staples can be placed in two rows of inside staples and two rows of outside staples. For example, a row of inner staples and a row of outer staples can be positioned on a first side of a slot of the cutting member, or blade within the staple cartridge and, similarly, a row of inner staples and a row of staples The exterior can be positioned on a second side of the groove of the cutting member, or blade. A staple cartridge may not comprise a groove in the cutting member; however, such a staple cartridge may comprise a designated portion configured to be cut by a cutting member instead of a staple cartridge slot. The rows of inner staples can be placed within the staple cartridge so that they separate equally or at least substantially equally from the groove of the cutting member. Similarly, the rows of outer staples can be disposed within the staple cartridge, such that they are equally spaced, or at least substantially equally, from the groove of the blade member. According to the invention, a staple cartridge may comprise more or less of Four rows of staples stored inside a staple cartridge. A staple cartridge can comprise six rows of staples. For example, the staple cartridge may comprise three rows of staples on a first side of a groove of the cutting member and three rows of staples on a second side of the groove of the cutting member. A staple cartridge may comprise an odd number of rows of staples. For example, a staple cartridge may comprise two rows of staples on a first side of a blade member slot and three rows of staples on a second side of the knife member slot. The rows of staples may comprise staples having this height, or at least substantially the same staple height.

Alternatively, one or more of the rows of staples may comprise staples having a non-formed staple height different from the other staples. For example, the staples on a first side of a groove of the cutting member may have a first height not formed and the staples on a second side of a groove of the cutting member may have a second non-formed height that is different from the first. height, for example.

Referring now to FIGS. 96A to 96D, an end effector of a surgical stapler may comprise a cartridge engaging portion, such as the staple cartridge channel 5030, for example, a retainer cartridge removably positioned on the cartridge. the staple cartridge channel 5030, such as the staple cartridge 5000, for example, and a clamp 5040 positioned opposite the staple cartridge 5000 and the staple cartridge channel 5030. The staple cartridge 5000 may comprise a compressible body 5010 and a plurality of staples 5020, and / or any other suitable fastener, at least partially positioned in compressible body 5010. For example, each staple 5020 may comprise a base 5022 and, additionally, legs 5021 extending to above from the base 5022, wherein at least a portion of the legs 5021 can be incorporated into the cartridge body 5010. The compressible body 5010 can comprise a top surface, or in contact with the fabric, 5019 and a lower surface 5018, in where the bottom surface 5018 can be positioned against and supported by a bearing surface 5031 of the staple cartridge channel 5030. Similar to the above, the support surface 5031 may comprise a plurality of support slots 5032 (Fig. 96D), for example, defined therein which may be configured to receive and support the bases 5022 of the staples 5020. The end effector of the surgical stapler it may further comprise a retention matrix, such as retention matrix 5050, for example, which may be configured to engage staples 5020 and capture tissue therebetween. For example, the holding matrix 5050 can be removably mounted to the clamp 5040. In operation, once the staple cartridge 5000 has been positioned within the staple cartridge channel 5030, the clamp 5040, and the holding matrix 5050 coupled thereto can be moved towards the staple cartridge 5000 and the staple cartridge channel 5030. The clamp 5040 can be moved down along a shaft 5099 in such a manner that the clamp 5040 and the staple cartridge channel 5030 remain parallel, or at least substantially parallel to each other when the clamp 5040 is closed. More particularly, for example, the clamp 5040 can be closed in a manner such that a tissue contacting surface 5051 of the retaining mat 5050 is parallel, or at least substantially parallel to the tissue contacting surface 5019 of the staple cartridge 5000 when the clamp 5040 is moved towards the staple cartridge 5000.

Referring now to FIG. 96A, the retainer 5050 can be removably secured to the bracket 5040, such that there is little relative movement, if any, between the retainer 5050 and the bracket 5040 when the matrix retention 5050 is attached to clamp 5040. Clamp 5040 may comprise one or more retention features that can be configured to hold retention die 5050 in place. For example, the holding matrix 5050 can be snapped and / or snapped into the clamp 5040. The holding matrix 5050 can be adhered to the clamp 5040 by the use of at least one adhesive. In any case, the clamp 5040 can be moved to a position in which the holding matrix 5050 is in contact with the tissue T and the tissue T is positioned against the surface in contact with the tissue 5019 of the staple cartridge 5000. When the T tissue is positioned against the staple cartridge 5000 by the clamp 5040, the compressible body 5010 of the staple cartridge 5000 may or may not be compressed by the clamp 5040. Under all circumstances, the legs 5021 of the staples 5200 may not protrude through the clamp 5040. the contact surface with the tissue 5019 of the staple cartridge 5000 as illustrated in Fig. 96A. Additionally, as illustrated, in addition, in Fig. 96A, clamp 5040 can hold tissue T against compressible body 5010 without coupling retaining matrix 5050 with staples 5020. These can allow a surgeon to open and close the clamp 5040 multiple times in order to obtain a desired positioning of the end effector within a surgical site, for example, without damaging tissue T. However, other alternatives are contemplated, where staple tips 5023 may protrude from the surface in contact with the tissue 5019 before the cartridge body 5010 is compressed by the anvil 5040. Once the end effector has been properly positioned, with reference now to FIG. 96B, the clamp 5040 can be moved downward toward the staple cartridge channel 5030 so that the compressible body 5010 is compressed by the anvil 5040 and such that the surface in contact with the tissue 5019 is pushed down in relation to the staples 5020. As the surface in contact with the fabric 5019 is pushed down, the tips 5023 of the staple legs 5021 can pierce the surface in contact with the tissue 5019 and perforate at least a portion of the tissue T. In such circumstances, the holding matrix 5050 can be positioned above the staples 5020, such that the retaining openings 5052 of the holding matrix 5050 align, or at least substantially align, with the tips 5023 of the staple legs 5021.

As the holding die 5050 is pushed down along the axis 5099, now referring to Fig. 96C, the staple legs 5021 of the staples 5020 can enter the retaining openings 5052. The staple legs 5021 may be attached to the side walls of the retainer openings 5052. As described in greater detail below, the retainer 5050 may comprise one or more retainer members that extend in and / or around the retainer openings 5052. which can be attached to the staple legs 5021. In any case, the staple legs 5021 can be retained in the retaining openings 5052. In various circumstances, the tips 5023 of the staple legs 5021 can enter the retaining openings 5052 and can frictionally engage the retaining elements and / or the side walls of the openings 5052. As the retaining matrix 5050 is pushed towards the 5022 bases of the staples 5020, the staple legs 5021 can slide relative to the side walls and / or the retaining members. As a result of the foregoing, sliding friction forces can be created between the staple legs 5021 and the retainer 5050 wherein such sliding friction forces can oppose the insertion of the retainer 5050 in staples 5020. The sliding friction forces between the retainer 5050 and the staples 5020 can be constant, or at least substantially constant, as the retainer 5050 slides down along the staple legs 5021 of the staples 5021. 5020 staples. The sliding friction forces can be increase and / or decrease as the holding die 5050 slides down along the staple legs 5021 due to variations in the geometry of the staple legs 5021, the retaining openings 5052, and / or the retention members extending in and / or around the retention openings 5052, for example. The insertion of the holding matrix 5050 in the staples 5020 can be further counteracted by the compressible body 5010 of the staple cartridge 5000. More particularly, the compressible body 5010 can comprise an elastic material, for example, which can apply a force of resistance to the holding matrix 5050 which increases as the distance at which the compressible body 5010 is compressed increases. For example, the increase in the resistance force generated by the cartridge body 5010 may be linearly proportional, or at least substantially linearly proportional, with respect to the distance at which the cartridge body 5010 is compressed. The increase in the resistance force generated by the cartridge body 5010 can be geometrically proportional with respect to the distance at which the body is compressed of the cartridge 5010.

In addition to the above, a sufficient firing force can be applied to the clamp 5040 and the holding die 5050 in order to overcome the strength and friction forces described above. In operation, the holding matrix 5050 can be seated at any suitable depth with respect to the staples 5020. The holding matrix 5050 can be seated at a depth with respect to the bases 5022 of the staples 5020 in order to secure two or more layers of tissue together and generate compressive forces, or pressure, within the tissue. In various circumstances, the system comprising the retention matrix 5050 and the staples 5020 may allow a surgeon to select the magnitude of the compression forces, or the pressure, which is applied to the tissue by selecting the depth at which it is applied. For example, the holding die 5050 can be pushed down towards the staple bases 5022 of the staples 5020 until the holding die 5050 is seated at a certain depth 5011 separated from the bottom of the grooves of support 5032, wherein a shorter depth 5011 may result in higher compression forces, or pressure, which are applied to tissue T than a higher depth 5011, which may result in lower compression forces, or pressure, which are applied to the tissue T. The compression forces, or pressures, applied to the tissue T may be linearly proportional, or at least substantially linearly proportional, to the depth 5011 at which the holding matrix 5050 sits. In various circumstances, the compression forces, or pressure, applied to the tissue T may depend on the thickness of the tissue T positioned between the holding matrix 5050 and the staple cartridge 5020 More particularly, for a given distance 5011, the presence of thicker T tissue may result in higher compression forces, or pressure, than the presence of thinner T tissue.

In various circumstances, in addition to the above, a surgeon may adjust the depth at which the retention matrix 5050 sits with the aim to consider the thicker and / or thinner tissue positioned within the end effector and apply a given or predetermined pressure to the tissue T regardless of the thickness of the tissue. For example, the surgeon can seat the retention matrix 5050 at a shorter depth 5011 when it fixes the thinner T tissue or a higher depth 5011 when it fixes the thicker tissue T in order to reach the same compression pressure, or at least substantially this, within the tissue. In addition to the above, a surgeon can selectively determine the magnitude of the compression pressure to be applied to the tissue T positioned between the retaining matrix 5050 and the staple cartridge 5010. In various circumstances, a surgeon can couple the holding matrix 5050 with the staples 5020 and positioning the holding matrix 5050 at a first distance separated from the bases 5022 of the staples 5020 in order to apply a first compression pressure to the fabric. The surgeon can alternatively position the retaining matrix 5050 at a second spaced distance from the bases 5022, which is shorter than the first distance, in order to apply a second compression pressure to the tissue, which is greater than the first pressure. The surgeon can alternatively position the retaining matrix 5050 at a third distance spaced from the bases 5022, which is shorter than the second distance, in order to apply a third compression pressure to the tissue, which is greater than the second pressure. The fastening system comprising the retaining matrix 5050 and the staples 5020 can be configured to allow a surgeon to apply a wide range of compression pressures to the target tissue.

Referring now to FIG. 96D, the staple legs 5021 can be inserted through the retainer 5050 in such a manner that the tips of the staple legs 5023 extend above the upper surface of the retainer 5050. With reference again to Fig. 96C, the clamp 5040 may further comprise slack openings 5042 defined therein that can be configured to receive the tips of the staple legs 5023 as they pass through the retaining openings 5052 in the retainer 5050. For example, the clearance openings 5042 can be aligned with the retention openings 5052 of so that the legs 5021 do not come into contact with the clamp 5040. The clearance openings 5042 may be of sufficient depth such that the staple legs 5021 do not come into contact with the clamp 5040 regardless of the distance at which the retaining mat 5050 seats. After the retaining mat 5050 has engaged with staples 5020 and seated to a desired position, with reference now to Fig.96D, staple cartridge channel 5030 and clamp 5040 can be separated from tissue T. More particularly, staple cartridge channel 5030 can be separated from the cartridge of staples 5000 implanted and the anvil 5040 can be separated from the implanted retention matrix 5050. As the clamp 5040 is separated from the retaining matrix 5050 and the staple supports 5032 are separated from the staple bases 5022, the distance 5011 between the holding matrix 5050 and the lower part of the bases 5022 can be maintained even when the clamp 5040 and the staple cartridge channel 5030 no longer provide support to these. The static friction forces between the staple legs 5021 and the retainer 5050 may be sufficient to maintain the retainer 5050 in its position despite a pressing force applied to the retainer 5050 by the body of the staple 5050. 5010 compressed cartridge and / or compressed T tissue. For example, the cartridge body 5010 may comprise a flexible material which, when compressed, may apply an elastic pressing force to the retaining matrix 5050 and the staples 5020 in a manner that tends to push apart the retaining matrix 5050 and the staples 5020, although such movement is counteracted by frictional engagement between the staple legs 5021 and the retainer 5050.

Optionally, as described above, a retainer matrix may comprise a plurality of retention apertures, wherein each retention aperture may be configured to receive therein a leg of a fastener. Referring now to FIG. 97, a portion of a retainer 5150 is illustrated therein, which may comprise a retainer opening 5152 defined by a perimeter 5156. The perimeter 5156 of the aperture 5152 may comprise a circular profile, or at least substantially circular, and / or any other suitable profile. The retainer 5150 may comprise one or more retention members, such as retention members 5153, for example, which extend into opening 5152 and may be configured to engage a clamping leg when the clamping leg is inserted. through these. For example, each retention member 5153 may comprise a cantilever which extends inward towards a central axis 5159, that is, towards the center of the opening 5152. Optionally, each cantilever may comprise a first end, which is coupled to the body of the retaining matrix 5158 and a second end which it forms the perimeter 5156 of the retaining opening 5152. The perimeter 5156 of a retaining opening 5152 can be defined by a first diameter, or width and a clamping leg can be defined by a second diameter, or width, wherein the second diameter can be larger than the first diameter. For example, the clamping leg can be configured to contact and deflect one or more of the retaining members 5153 in order to increase the diameter of the retaining opening 5152 while the clamping leg is inserted through it. In addition to the above, the clamping leg can define a perimeter which is greater than the perimeter 5156 of the retaining opening 5152, in such a way that the clamping leg can expand the perimeter 5156 when the clamping leg is inserted therein. .

Referring again to Fig. 97, the opening 5152 can be defined by the deformable members 5153, wherein each deformable member 5153 can be configured to deviate relative to, or independently of, the other deformable members 5153. For example, the deformable members adjacent 5153 can be separated by slots 5154 that can be configured to allow each deformable member 5153 flexes in relation to the others. Each slot 5154 may comprise a first end 5155 in the body of the holding matrix 5158, a second end opening in the retention opening 5152, and a constant width, or at least substantially constant, extending between the first end 5155 and the second end. Alternatively, the width of each slot 5154 may not be constant and each slot 5154 may increase and / or decrease in width between the first and second end thereof. The first ends 5155 of the grooves 5154 may comprise an enlarged portion, such as a circular portion, which can provide, one, strain relief to the bases of the deformable members 5153 connected to the body of the retaining die 5158 and, two, means for increasing the flexibility of the deformable members 5153. The geometry of the deformable members 5153, and / or of the grooves 5154, may be selected to provide the deformable members 5153 with a desired flexibility. For example, the slots 5154 may be lengthened with the aim of creating longer deformable members 5153 which may be more flexible than the deformable members 5153 having a shorter length. The width of each deformable member 5153 can be selected to provide a desired flexibility. More particularly, the deformable members having a thinner width may be more flexible than the deformable members having a thicker width. Referring again to FIG. 97, the first ends of the cantilevers of the deformable members 5153 that engage the body of the retaining die 5158 may be wider than the second ends of the frames. cantilevers. For example, the overhangs may taper in a linear, or at least substantially linear, manner between the first and second ends thereof.

Referring again to Fig. 97, the body of the retaining matrix 5158 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, sheet of a material having a tissue contacting surface 5151 and an upper surface 5157. For example , the tissue contacting surface 5151 and the upper surface 5157 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, with each other. Optionally, each deformable member 5153 may comprise a first portion 5153a and a second portion 5153b, wherein the first portion 5153a may extend in a first direction and the second portion 5153b may extend in a second or different direction. For example, the body of the retaining matrix 5158 can define a plane and the first portions 5153a of the deformable members 5153 can be located within that plane. The second portions 5153b of the deformable members 5153 may extend at an angle relative to the first portions 5153a. For example, the second portions 5153b may extend in directions pointing away from the upper surface 5157 of the body of the retaining die 5158 and the second portions 5153b may converge toward the central axis 5159 of the retaining opening 5152. In any In this case, the second portions 5153b can be configured to deviate out of the central axis 5159 when the clamping leg is inserted through them. Wherein a staple leg 5021 of a staple 5020 is inserted into a retention opening 5152, the deformable members 5153 may deform in a direction generally outside the bases 5122 of the staples 5120. As a result, the deformable members 5153 may deviate in a general direction that is this, or at least substantially this, that the direction in which staple legs 5021 are inserted.

Referring again to Fig. BD, each of the second portions 5153b of the deformable members 5153 may comprise a sharp tip, for example, which may be configured to slide against a staple leg 5021 as the staple leg 5021 insert in this. The sharp tips of the second portions 5153b can be further configured to bite into the staple leg 5021 in the event that the staple leg 5021 is pulled in the opposite direction, i.e., in a direction that would remove the staple leg. 5021 of the retaining opening 5052. In certain circumstances, the second portions 5153b may be inclined at an angle relative to the side of the staple leg 5021 that is greater than 90 degrees and, as a result, the second portions 5153b may be driven, or penetrate, on the side of the staple leg 5021 when the staple leg 5021 undergoes a force tending to remove the staple leg 5021 from the retainer opening 5052. The staple legs 5021 may comprise indentations and / or depressions, such as micromuescas, for example, on the surfaces of these which can be configured to receive therein the tips of the deformable members 5053, for example. For example, the tips of the deformable members 5053 can be captured and penetrated in the notches in the staple legs 5021 when an extraction force is applied to the staple legs 5021. Optionally, as a result of the penetration of the second portions 5153b into the staple legs 5021, the forces acting to remove the staple legs 5021 of the retaining apertures 5022 can only seat the second portions 5153b deeper in the staple legs 5021 and increase the force necessary to remove the staple legs 5021. In addition, due to the upward tilt of the second portions 5153b, the second portions 5153b may be more permissive to the insertion of a staple leg 5021 within a retaining opening 5152 and more resistant to removal of the staple leg 5021. As a result, the force required to insert a leg of staple 5021 in a retaining opening 5022 can be less than the force required to remove the staple leg 5021 from the retaining opening 5022. The force The removal of the staple leg 5021 from the retaining opening 5022 may be approximately 50 percent greater than the force required to insert the staple leg 5021 into the retaining opening 5022, for example. Alternatively, the force required to remove the staple leg 5021 may be between about 10 percent and about 100 percent greater than the force needed to insert the staple leg 5021, for example. The force required to remove the staple leg 5021 may be about 100 percent, about 150 percent, about 200 percent, and / or greater than about 200 percent greater than the force required to insert the staple leg 5021, for example.

Referring again to Fig. 97, the second portions 5153b may be arranged circumferentially around the opening 5152 and may define a cavity therebetween. More particularly, the second portions 5153b can define a cavity 5160, which can be configured to receive the tip of the clamping leg when it is inserted in the retaining opening 5152. The second portions 5153b of the deformable members 5153 can comprise an annular contour , or at least substantially annular, which can cooperatively define an annular profile, or at least substantially annular, of the cavity 1560, for example. For example, the second portions 5153b may define a conical or frustoconical cavity. The cavity can be defined by an adequate number of deformable members, such as four deformable members 5153 (Figure 97), six deformable members 5153 (Fig. 98), or eight deformable members 5153 (Fig. 99), for example. Referring now to FIG. 100, the deformable members of a retention matrix, such as retention die 5250, for example, may form a pyramidal shape, or at least substantially pyramidal form, for example. According to the invention, a retaining die 5250 may comprise a plurality of retaining openings, such as the retaining opening 5252, for example, which may be defined by a perimeter 5256. The perimeter 5256 may comprise a polygonal profile, or at least substantially polygonal, and / or any other suitable profile. The retaining matrix 5250 may comprise one or more retaining members, such as the retaining members 5253, for example, which extend into the opening 5252 and may be configured to engage with a clamping leg when the clamping leg is inserted. through them. For example, each retaining member 5253 may comprise a cantilever which extends inward toward a central axis 5259, ie, toward the center of the aperture 5252. Optionally, each cantilever may comprise a first end that engages the body of the aperture. the holding die 5258 and a second end forming the perimeter 5256 of the retaining opening 5252. The perimeter 5256 of a retaining opening 5252 can be defined by a first diameter, or width, and a holding leg can be defined by a second diameter, or width, where the second diameter may be greater than the first diameter. For example, the clamping leg can be configured to contact and deflect one or more of the retaining members 5253 in order to increase the diameter of the retaining opening 5252 while the clamping leg is inserted through it. In addition to the above, the clamping leg can define a perimeter which is larger than the perimeter 5256 of the retaining opening 5252, such that the clamping leg can expand the perimeter 5256 when the clamping leg is inserted into this. .

Referring again to Fig. 100, the opening 5252 can be defined by the deformable members 5253, wherein each deformable member 5253 can be configured to deviate relative to, or independently of, the other deformable members 5253. For example, adjacent deformable members 5253 may be separated by slots 5254 that can be configured to allow each deformable member 5253 to flex relative to the others. The body of the retaining matrix 5258 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, sheet of a material having a tissue contacting surface 5251 and an upper surface 5257. For example, the contact surface with the fabric 5251 and the upper surface 5257 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, with each other. Optionally, each deformable member 5253 may comprise a first portion 5253a and a second portion 5253b, wherein the first portion 5253a may extend in a first direction and the second portion 5253b may extend in a second or different direction. For example, the body of the retaining die 5258 can define a plane and the first portions 5253a of the deformable members 5253 can be located within that plane. The second portions 5253b of the deformable members 5253 may extend at an angle relative to the first portions 5253a. For example, the second portions 5253b may extend in directions pointing away from the upper surface 5257 of the body of the retaining die 5258 and, the second portions 5253b may converge toward the central axis 5259 of the retaining opening 5252. In any In this case, the second portions 5253b can be configured to deviate out of the central axis 5259 when the clamping leg is inserted through the these. Referring again to Fig. 100, the second portions 5253b may be arranged circumferentially around the opening 5252 and may define a cavity therebetween. More particularly, the second portions 5253b can define a cavity, which can be configured to receive the tip of the clamping leg when it is inserted in the retaining opening 5252. The second portions 5253b of the deformable members 5253 can define a polygonal cavity, or at least substantially polygonal, for example. The cavity can be defined by an adequate number of deformable members, such as four deformable members 5253 (Figure 100), which can define a square, six deformable members 5253 (Fig. 101), which can define a hexagon, or eight deformable members 5253 (Fig. 102), which can define an octagon, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 103, a retention die, such as retention die 5350, for example, may be formed from a flat, or at least substantially planar sheet of a material such as titanium and / or steel. stainless, for example. For example, a plurality of openings 5352 may be formed in the body 5358 of the retaining die 5350 by one or more stamping processes. The sheet of the material can be positioned in a stamping die which, when actuated, can pierce certain portions of the material with the aim of forming the grooves 5354, the openings 5355 of the grooves 5354, and / or the perimeter 5356 of the opening retention 5352, for example. The stamping die can also be configured to bend the deformable members 5353 in a proper configuration. For example, the stamping die may deform the second portions 5353b upwardly relative to the first portions 5353a along a fold line 5353c. Referring now to FIG. 104, a retainer matrix, such as retainer 5450, for example, may comprise a plurality of retention apertures 5452. Similar to the foregoing, the perimeter 5456 of each retention aperture 5452 may defined by a plurality of deformable members 5453 separated by grooves, or slits, 5454. For example, the entirety of each deformable member 5453 can be bent upward, wherein the free ends of the cantilevers comprising the deformable members 5453 can define the perimeter 5456. The retaining matrix 5450 may comprise a plurality of openings 5455 that surround, or at least substantially surround, the retaining opening 5452. For example, the openings 5455 may be arranged in a circular array that surrounds or encloses a perimeter defined by fixed ends of the overhangs of the deformable members 5453. Each opening 5455 may comprise a circular perimeter, or at least essentially circular, and / or any other suitable perimeter. In operation, the openings 5455 can provide, one, the tension compensation for the bases of the deformable members 5453 attached to the body of the retaining matrix 5458 and, two, instruments for increasing the flexibility of the deformable members 5453. Optionally, the larger openings 5455 can provide more flexibility to the deformable members 5453 compared to the smaller openings 5455. In addition, openings 5455 that are closer to deformable members 5453 may provide more flexibility compared to openings 5455 that are further away.

Referring now to Fig. 105, a retention die, such as retention die 5550, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining openings 5552. Each retaining opening 5552 may comprise an elongated slot 5554 having elongated ends. circular, or at least substantially circular, 5555. For example, the ends 5555 may be defined by a diameter that is wider than the slot 5554. The elongated slot 5554 and the ends 5555 may be positioned along, and / or centered at long, of a longitudinal axis 5559. Slot 5554 and ends 5555 can define two opposite tabs 5553 that can be configured to engage a leg of a fastener and deviate as the clamping leg is inserted through them. The ends 5555 having a perimeter, or larger diameter, can define the longer tabs 5553 which can be more flexible than the tabs 5553 defined by the ends 5555 having a smaller perimeter, or diameter. The ends 5555 may have the same perimeter and diameter and, for example, each tab 5553 may be symmetrical about an axis that is perpendicular, or at least substantially perpendicular, to the longitudinal axis 5559. Alternatively, the ends 5555 may have different perimeters and / or diameters where, each tab 5553 may not be symmetric about its axis. For example, tabs 5553 may twisting around its axes as the clamping leg is inserted through the retaining opening 5552. Referring now to Fig. 106, a retaining matrix, such as the retaining matrix 5650, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 5652. Each retaining aperture 5652 may comprise an elongated slot 5654 comprising the circular, or at least substantially circular, ends 5655. For example, the elongated slot 5654 and the ends 5655 may be positioned along, and / or centering along a longitudinal axis 5659. Optionally, each end 5655 can be defined by a diameter that is the same, or at least substantially the same, as the width of the slot 5654.

Referring now to FIG. 107, a retention die, such as retention die 5750, for example, may comprise a plurality of retention openings 5752. Each retention opening 5752 may comprise a plurality of slots, such as 5754 slots, for example, having enlarged ends 5755. For example, slots 5754 and ends 5755 may be positioned along and / or centered along longitudinal axes 5759. Shafts 5759 may extend in directions that are perpendicular or transversal to each other. The slots 5754 and the ends 5755 can define four tabs 5753, for example, which can be configured to engage a clamping leg and deflect when the clamping leg is inserted through the retaining opening 5752. Each tab 5753 can comprise triangular configuration, or at least substantially triangular, such as a triangle equilateral, for example. Alternatively, with reference now to Fig. 108, a retention die, such as the retention die 5850, for example, may comprise a plurality of retention apertures 5852. Each retention aperture 5852 may comprise a plurality of slots, such as as the grooves 5854, for example, having the ends 5855, wherein the grooves 5854 and the ends 5855 can be positioned along and / or centered along the longitudinal axes 5859. The axes 5859 can extend in directions that are perpendicular or transversal to each other. Slots 5854 and ends 5855 can define tabs 5853 that can be configured to engage a clamping leg and deviate when the clamping leg is inserted through retention opening 5852. Each tab 5853 can comprise a curved profile. More particularly, each tab 5853 may comprise a curved end, as opposed to a sharp end shown in Fig. 105, which may be configured to come into contact with the clamping leg.

Referring now to Fig. 109, a retention die, such as the retainer 5950, for example, may comprise a plurality of retention openings 5952. Each retention aperture 5952 may comprise a plurality of slots, such as 5954 slots, for example, wherein each slot 5954 may extend along, and / or may be centered along, an axis 5959. The axes 5959 may be transverse to each other and, for example, the 5959 axes may be disposed of. such that all 5959 axes extend through a center of the retaining aperture 5952 and they are spaced apart equidistantly, or at least substantially equidistantly, from one another. Each slot 5954 may comprise an open end facing the center of the retaining opening 5952 and a second, or closed, end 5955 at the end opposite the slot 5954. Similar to the above, the slots 5954 and the ends 5955 may define three tabs 5953, for example, which can be configured to engage a clamping leg and deflect when the clamping leg is inserted into the retaining opening 5952. Optionally, each tab 5953 can comprise an arcuate configuration extending between adjacent ends 5955 of the slots 5954. Referring now to Fig. 110, a retaining die, such as the retainer die 6050, for example, may comprise a plurality of retainer openings 6052. Each retainer opening 6052 may comprise a tab 6053, which may be configured to engage a retainer leg and deviate when the clamping leg is inserted into the retaining opening 6052. For example, the tongue 6053 may comprise a base fixed to the body of the retaining die 6058 and a free end comprising a curved or arcuate profile 6056 which can be configured for get in contact with the clamping leg. The clamping leg can be a staple leg comprising a round wire, wherein the curved profile 6056 can be configured to match, or at least substantially coincide with, a curved outer surface of the round wire.

Referring again to Fig. 110, the body of the retainer die 6058 may comprise a plurality of slots 6054 and openings 6055 that can be configured to define the tab 6053 and various portions of the retainer opening 6052. The tab 6053 may comprise a rectangular configuration comprising parallel, or at least substantially parallel, sides. Referring now to Fig. 111, a retention die, such as the retainer die 6150, for example, may comprise a plurality of retainer openings 6152. Each retainer opening 6152 may comprise a tab 6153, which may be configured to coupling to a clamping leg and to deviate when the clamping leg is inserted in the retaining opening 6152. For example, the tongue 6153 may comprise a base fixed to the body of the retainer die 6158 and a free end comprising a curved or arched profile 6156 which may be configured to contact the securing leg. The body of the retaining matrix 6158 may comprise a plurality of grooves 6154 and openings 6155 that can be configured to define the tab 6153 and various portions of the retaining opening 6152. The tab 6153 can comprise a tapered configuration comprising arcuate sides. For example, the tongue 6153 may narrow geometrically with the base wider than the free end, for example.

Optionally, as described above, a fastening system may comprise a plurality of staples comprising the staple legs that are inserted through a plurality of staple openings. retention in a retention matrix. As described in more detail below, the staples can be held in a first clamp and the retention matrix can be held in a second clamp, wherein at least one of the first clamp and the second clamp can move in the direction of the other. In various circumstances, staples positioned within the first clamp can be secured therein, such that the staple legs align with the retention openings when the retainer matrix engages the staple legs. With reference to Figs. 112 and 113, a fastening system may comprise a staple cartridge 6200, for example, positioned in a first clamp of a surgical stapler and a retainer 6250, for example, positioned in a second clamp of the surgical stapler. With reference now to Figs. 119 and 120, in addition to the foregoing, the retainer die 6250 may comprise a plurality of retainer openings 6252, wherein each retainer opening 6252 may comprise a perimeter 6256 defined by one or more deflectable members 6253. For example, in addition to the above, the deflectable members 6253 defining each opening 6252 may define a cavity 6201. Optionally, each cavity 6201 may comprise a curved and / or concave surface, for example, which may be configured to guide a tip of a staple leg within the opening 6252 in the event that the staple leg is misaligned with the retaining opening 6252 and initially contacting the deflectable members 6253 and / or the tissue contacting surface 6251, for example.

In addition to the above, the fastening system may further comprise a plurality of staples 6220 comprising the staple legs 6221 that can be inserted through the retaining openings 6252 in the retaining die 6250. For example, each staple 6220 it may comprise a substantially U-shaped configuration, for example, comprising a base 6222 from which the staple legs 6221 may extend upwards. With reference now to Figs. 115 and 116, the retaining openings 6252 in the retaining die 6250 can be arranged in two parallel longitudinal rows, or at least substantially parallel, for example, which may extend along, or parallel to, a longitudinal axis of the holding matrix. The retaining openings 6252 in a first row can be displaced, or staggered, with respect to the retaining openings 6252 in a second row. For example, each staple 6220 may comprise a first staple leg 6221 positioned in a retention aperture 6252 in the first row and a second staple leg 6221 positioned in a retention aperture 6252 in the second row, wherein, as a result, the bases 6222 may extend in a direction that is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the retention die 6250. For example, the staples 6220 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to each other. More particularly, a base 6222a of a staple 6220a is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a base 6222b of a staple 6220b, which may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a base 6222c of a staple 6220c, for example . The staple legs 6221a of the staple 6220a can define a plane that is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a plane defined by the staple legs 6221b of the staple 6220b which may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a plane defined by the staple legs 6221 of the staple 6220c, for example.

With reference now to Figs. 112 and 114, the staple cartridge 6200 may comprise a plurality of staples 6220 and, in addition, an alignment die 6260 comprising a plurality of alignment guides, such as grooves, grooves, and / or openings, for example, that can configured to align the staples 6220. In various circumstances, the alignment matrix 6260 can be configured, such that the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 are aligned with the retainer openings 6252 in the holding matrix 6250 before the holding die 6250 engages the staple legs 6221. Referring now to FIGS. 117 and 118, the alignment die 6260 may comprise a plurality of alignment openings 6262 that can be configured to tightly receive the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220. For example, each staple 6220 may comprise a base 6222 and two staple legs 6221 extending from the base 6222, wherein the bases 6222 of the staples 6220 may extend around a lower surface 6264 of the retaining die 6260 and the staple legs 6221 may extend upward through the alignment openings 6262 Each alignment opening 6262 may be circular, or at least substantially circular, and may be defined by a diameter that is equal to or slightly greater than the diameter of the staple leg 6221 extending therethrough. The alignment matrix 6260 may further comprise a plurality of members 6263 which can extend upwardly from the upper surface 6261 of the alignment die 6260 and surrounds, or at least partially surrounds, the alignment openings 6262. The raised members 6263 can provide longer alignment openings 6262 where, in various circumstances, the longer openings 6262 may provide more control over the alignment of the staple legs 6221 than the shorter openings 6262.

In operation, a first clamp supporting the staple cartridge 6200 can be positioned on one side of the tissue to be stapled and a second clamp supporting the retaining mat 6250 can be positioned on the other side of the tissue. Once the clamps are properly positioned relative to the tissue, the second clamp and the retainer die 6250 can move in the direction of the staple cartridge 6200. As the staple legs 6221 are inserted through the retainer apertures 6252 of 6250a the retaining matrix a tissue contacting surface, or lower surface 6251 of the retaining matrix 6250 may come into contact with the tissue and press the tissue against the tissue contacting surface, or upper surface 6261 of the alignment matrix 6260. Alternatively, as described in more detail below, the staple cartridge 6200 may further comprise a compressible cartridge body which is positioned above the upper surface 6261 of the alignment die 6260, for example, which may get in contact with the tissue. With reference again to Figs. 114 and 118, the alignment array 6260 may further comprise one or more apertures 6203 defined therein which, when the alignment matrix 6260 is positioned against the tissue, can be configured to receive a portion of the tissue therein. Where a compressible cartridge body is placed above and / or against the alignment die 6260, a portion of the compressible cartridge body can enter the openings 6203 when the cartridge body is compressed. Similarly, the retention die 6250 can comprise a plurality of openings 6202 that can be configured to receive at least a portion of the tissue therein when the retention die 6250 is positioned against the tissue.

As the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 are inserted through the retaining apertures 6252 of the retaining die 6250, in addition to the above, the tips of the staple legs 6221 can protrude upwardly from the top surface 6257 of the holding die 6250. In various circumstances, as described above, the tips of the staple legs 6221 may remain un-bent after they have been inserted through the retaining openings 6252. Referring now to FIGS. . 121 to 124, a fastening system comprising the staple cartridge 6200 and the retaining die 6250 may further comprise a plurality of protective covers or covers, such as the covers 6270, for example, which can be assembled to the legs of staple 6221 protruding above the holding die 6250. Optionally, each cover 6270 can completely cover, or at least partially, the sharp end of a staple leg 6221, such that the sharpened end does not come in contact with he tissue positioned adjacent to it. Referring now to Fig. 124, each cap 6270 may comprise an aperture 6271 defined therein which may be configured to densely receive a tip of a staple leg 6221 therein. The covers 6270 may comprise an elastomeric material, such as silicone, polyisoprene, sanoprene, and / or natural rubber, for example. The opening 6271 may comprise a perimeter or diameter that is smaller than the perimeter or diameter of the staple leg 6221 inserted therein. For example, the opening 6271 in the protective cap 6270 can be expanded in order to receive the staple leg 6221 therein. Alternatively, the covers 6270 may not comprise openings and the tips of the staple legs 6221 may be configured to cut the covers 6270 while the legs 6221 are inserted therein. In any case, each cap 6270 can be seated on a staple leg 6221 until the base 6272 of the cap 6270 abuts, or is positioned adjacent to, the top surface 6257 of the retainer 6250. In various circumstances, the caps 6270 can be configured in such a way that they sit snugly on the tips of the staple legs 6221, so that they are not easily removed from them. Each cap 6270 may comprise a conical outer surface, or at least substantially conical, for example. The covers 6270 may comprise any suitable shape, such as shapes comprising a parabolic outer surface, or at least substantially parabolic, for example.

The fastening system described above, for example, could be implemented by using the surgical stapler shown in Figs. 125 to 127, for example. The end effector may comprise a first clamp, or the staple cartridge channel, 6230 that can be configured to support the staple cartridge 6200 in this and a second clamp 6240 that can be configured to support the staple die 6250 and the plurality of staples. protection caps 6270. With reference principally to Fig. 125, which illustrates the second clamp 6240 in an open configuration, the clamps 6230 and 6240 can be positioned relative to the tissue T, such that the tissue T is positioned between the retaining matrix 6250 and the staple cartridge 6200. Optionally, as described above, the staple cartridge 6200 may further comprise a compressible cartridge body, such as the cartridge body 6210, for example, in which the staples 6220 and the die can be positioned. 6260. For example, the fabric T may be positioned against an upper surface of the cartridge body 6210. The second bracket 6240 may comprise a plurality of recesses, or openings, 6245 configured to receive the plurality of protective caps 6270 and, in addition, , one or more retention features, or retainers, which can be configured to maintain the retention die 6250 in position over the caps 627 0. For example, the retention matrix 6250 can be configured to retain the covers 6270 in the openings 6245. Referring now to Fig. 137, each opening 6245 can be configured to receive therein a portion, or all, of a cover 6270. The openings 6245 they can be sufficiently dimensioned and configured in such a way that the caps 6270 can be secured therein by at least one of a snap and / or snap-fit arrangement, for example. At least one adhesive could be used to secure the caps 6270 in the openings 6245. For example, such an adhesive could be selected, so that the caps 6270 can be separated from the second clamp 6240 after the caps 6270 have been coupled with the legs 6270. staple 6221 and second clamp 6240 move away from the implanted holding unit. Referring now to Fig. 138, the second bracket 6240 may further comprise at least one cover sheet 6246 which may be assembled to the second bracket 6240 and may extend over and retain the covers 6270 in the openings 6245. For example, at least a portion of the cover sheet 6246 can be fixed to the bracket 6240 by the use of at least one adhesive, for example. In operation, the cover sheet 6246 can be at least partially detached from the clamp 6240 before inserting the end effector into a surgical site. The cover sheet 6246 may comprise an implantable material, such as PDS and / or PGA, for example, which can be cut by the staple legs 6221 when the staple legs 6221 emerge from the retaining die 6250. For example, the Cover sheet 6246 can be fixed in the fastening system between the covers 6270 and the retaining die 6250.

In addition to the foregoing, with reference now to FIG. 126, the bracket 6240 can be moved from an open position to a closed position in which the tissue T is positioned against the retaining matrix 6250 and the cartridge body 6210. In such a position, the holding die 6250 may not yet be coupled with the staples 6220. The clamp 6240 may move between its open position and its closed position by an actuator 6235. For example, the clamp 6240 may comprise a distal pin 6243 and a proximal pin 6244 extending therefrom, wherein the distal pin 6243 can slide vertically, or at least substantially vertically, into a distal groove 6233 defined in the channel of the cartridge 6230, and where the proximal pin 6244 can slide vertically, or at least substantially vertically, into a proximal slot 6234 which is also defined in the staple cartridge channel 6230. In operation, the driver 6235 can be retracted proximally with the objective of actuating the pins 6243 and 6244 within the upper ends of their respective slots 6233 and 6234 as illustrated in Fig. 126. For example, the action The driver 6235 may comprise a distal drive groove 6236 and a proximal drive groove 6237, wherein the side walls of the drive grooves 6236 and 6237 may be configured to contact the distal pin 6243 and the proximal pin 6244, respectively, and driving the pins 6243 and 6244 upward, as the actuator 6235 moves proximally. More particularly, as the impeller 6235 moves proximally, the distal pin 6243 can slide up a first inclined portion 6236a of the distal drive groove 6236 into an intermediate, or second, portion 6236b and, similarly, the proximal pin 6244 can slide fairy up a first inclined portion 6237a of distal drive slot 6237 within an intermediate portion, or second, 6237b. As the pins 6243 and 6244 move both upwards, the clamp 6240 can be rotated downward toward the tissue T to a closed position.

In addition to the above, with reference now to Fig. 127, the impeller 6235 can be pulled more proximally with the objective of pushing the second clamp 6240 down towards the first clamp 6230, compressing the body of the cartridge 6210, and coupling the holding matrix 6250 and the plurality of protective caps 6270 with the legs of staple of the staples 6220. For example, the further proximal movement of the actuator 6235 may cause the side walls of the driving grooves 6236 and 6237 to come into contact with the pins 6243 and 6244, respectively, and actuate the pins 6243 and 6244 downwards, towards the lower ends of the grooves 6233 and 6234, respectively. In such circumstances, the impeller 6235 can be pulled proximally, such that one, the distal pin 6243 leaves the second portion 6236b of the drive groove 6236 and enters into a third inclined portion 6236c and, similarly, the proximal pin 6244 leave the second portion 6237b of the drive slot 6237 and enter into a third inclined portion 6237c. As the pins 6243 and 6244 move both downwards, the second clamp 6240 can move downward towards the first clamp 6230 to a triggered position. For example, the second clamp 6240 can move downward, such that the matrix of retaining 6250 is kept parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the upper surface of the cartridge body 6210 and / or parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the alignment die 6260. In any case, once the holding matrix 6250 and the protection caps 6270 have been coupled with the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220, as illustrated in FIG. 129, the second clamp 6240 can be returned to an open, or at least substantially open, position. For example, the actuator 6235 can be pushed distally in order to drive the pins 6243 and 6244 toward the upper ends of the grooves 6233 and 6234, respectively, and then propel them down toward the lower ends of the grooves 6233 and 6234 once the pins have traversed the intermediate portions 6236b and 6237b of the respective driving grooves 6236 and 6237. Once the second clamp 6240 has been opened, the first clamp 6230 can be separated from the implanted staple cartridge 6200 and the first and second clamps 6230, 6240 can be moved away from the implanted holding assembly, as illustrated in Fig. 128.

Referring to Fig. 127 once more, the reader will note that the pins 6243 and 6244 are not illustrated as being seated in the same bottom portions of their respective slots 6233 and 6234 although the retainer die 6250 and the caps 6270 are have coupled with the staple legs 6221. Such circumstances may arise when thick tissue T is positioned between the retaining die 6250 and the body of the cartridge 6210. In circumstances where thinner tissue T is positioned between the die Withdrawal 6250 and the cartridge body 6210, now referring to Fig. 130, the pins 6243 and 6244 can be propelled further downwardly into their respective slots 6233 and 6234 as illustrated in Fig. 132. Generally, for example , the actuator 6235 can be pulled proximally with the objective of driving the pins 6243 and 6244 up and down by the progressions described above and illustrated in FIGS. 130 to 132 and, because of the thinner tissue T, the retaining die 6250 and the protective caps 6270 can be further urged onto the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220, as illustrated in FIGS. 133 and 134. Optionally, as a result of the adjustability provided by the retention die 6250, the same compression pressure, or at least substantially this, can be achieved in the subject tissue regardless of whether the tissue captured within the effector Extreme is thick or thin. The adjustability provided by the retention matrix 6250 may allow a surgeon to select whether to apply a higher compression pressure or a lower compression pressure to the tissue by selecting the depth at which the retention matrix 6250 sits. For example, the interval in which the holding die 6250 can settle on the staple legs 6221 can be determined by the lengths, or intervals, of the grooves 6233 and 6234, for example.

Optionally, as described above, the protection caps 6270 can comprise a soft or flexible material, for example, which can be configured to grip the ends of the staple legs 6221.

The protection caps 6270 may comprise a bioabsorbable plastic, polyglycolic acid (PGA) which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprona 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example, and / or a biocompatible metal, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, for example. As illustrated in Fig. 124, each cover 6270 may be without any connection with the other covers 6270. Alternatively, one or more caps 6270 may be mounted in the retainer 6250. For example, the caps 6270 may be connected to the retainer 6250 by at least one adhesive, for example, where the openings 6271 in the caps 6270 may be aligned, or at least substantially align, with the retaining openings 6252 in the retaining die 6270. Referring now to Fig. 135, a protective cap, such as a cover 6370, for example, can define an interior cavity, or dome , 6374 which can be configured to receive therein a tip of a staple leg 6221, for example. For example, the cap 6370 may comprise a lower portion 6372 and an opening 6371 extending through the lower portion 6372. The opening 6371 may be defined by one or more divertable members 6373 that may be configured to deviate when the staple foot 6221 it is inserted through them. Two or more lids 6370, for example, can be connected together to form a set of lids 6370. For example, with reference now to Fig. 136, a plurality of 6370 lids can be connected together by a sheet 6375 of material. The sheet 6375 may be sufficiently rigid in order to maintain a desired arrangement and / or alignment of the caps 6370. The caps 6370 may be comprised of a biocompatible metal, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, for example, and the sheet 6375 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable plastic, polyglycolic acid (PGA) which is marketed under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprona 25 (PGCL) which is marketed under the trade name of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. According to the invention, a sheet 6375 may comprise a bioabsorbable material that includes an antimicrobial agent, such as colloidal silver and / or triclosan, for example, stored and / or dispersed therein which may be released as it bioabsorbates sheet 6375, for example.

In addition to the above, the sheet 6375 can be injection molded around the covers 6370 by the use of an injection molding process, for example, in such a way that the covers 6370 are incorporated in the sheet 6375. The sheet 6375 can be molded by the use of an injection molding process, for example, wherein the openings 6376 can be formed in the sheet 6375 during the injection molding process and / or after the injection molding process by using a stamping process , for example. In any case, the covers 6370 can be inserted and secured in the openings 6376 by means of the use of an interconnection by snap fit and / or snap and / or at least one adhesive. Each cover 6370 may comprise an annular groove that surrounds, or at least partially surrounds, the perimeter of the lid 6370, which may be configured to receive therein the perimeter of an opening 6376. The sheet 6375 may be comprised of a flexible material and / or folding that can allow relative movement between the lids 6370. For example, the flexible sheet 6375 may be comprised of a rubber, plastic, and / or silicone material, for example, and the lids 6370 may be comprised of a material rigid, such as metal, for example. For example, similar to the foregoing, the flexible material can be molded around the caps 6370. The caps 6370 can be pressed into a pre-molded sheet 6375, for example. The hardness of the flexible material can be selected to provide a desired stiffness of the sheet 6375. The sheet 6375 can be configured such that it comprises a flexible band. In any case, the sheet 6375 can facilitate the joining of the caps 6370 within an end effector since a plurality of the caps 6370 can be positioned and / or aligned simultaneously within the end effector. In addition, the sheet 6375 connecting the caps 6370, once implanted, can strengthen or reinforce the tissue along the staple line, for example. In addition or instead of a sheet connecting the caps 6370, the caps 6370 can be connected together by a plurality of joints. For example, such hinges may be flexible and may allow relative movement between caps 6370.

With reference now to Figs. 139 and 140, a protective cap, such as the cap 6470, for example, may comprise a shaping surface, which may be configured to deform a tip of a staple leg. For example, lid 6470 may comprise a base 6472, which may include an opening 6471 extending therethrough. The opening 6471 may be configured to receive a staple leg, such as a staple leg 6221, for example, in this manner. The opening 6471 may be defined by a diameter or perimeter which may be equal to or greater than the diameter or perimeter of the staple leg 6221. The cover 6470 may comprise, furthermore, a cavity, or dome, 6474, which can be configured to receive the tip of the staple leg 6221, as it is inserted in the lid 6470. With reference mainly to Fig. 140, the lid 6470 can comprise, in addition, an anvil, or shaping surface, 6473 that can be configured to deflect and deform the staple leg 6221. In various circumstances, the shaping surface 6473 can be curved and / or concave, for example, and can be configured to curve the staple leg 6221 as it is inserted into the lid 6470. The staple leg 6221 can be deformed sufficiently, so that it can not be removed through the opening 6471 and, as a result, the lid 6470 can be locked to the foot of the foot. staple 6221. For example, the base 6472 of the lid 6470 may define a flange extending around the opening 6471 which may prevent the deformed staple leg 6221 from being removed from the cavity 6474. In various circumstances, as a result of l or earlier, one or more caps 6470 may prevent, or limit, that a retention die, such as the retention die 6250, for example, retracting or disengaging from the staples 6220. Optionally, although not illustrated, the cap 6470 may be symmetrically formed, or at least substantially symmetrically, and the opening 6471 may be positioned along a central axis 6479 extending through the lid 6470. Alternatively, with reference again to Fig. 139, the opening 6471 may be displaced with respect to the central axis 6479. For example, the displacement opening 6471 may allow the staple leg 6221 to contact one side of the forming surface 6473 and curve to the other side of the forming surface 6473 instead of coming into contact with the center of the forming surface 6473, as may occur in embodiments comprising a centered opening 6471 mentioned above.

Optionally, as described above, a retention die, such as retention die 6250, for example, may be comprised of a sheet of material and a plurality of retention openings 6252 extending therethrough. The sheet of material comprising the retainer die 6250 may be rigid or substantially inflexible. Alternatively, a retention matrix may be comprised of a set of elements of the retention matrix and a plurality of flexible connectors, or joints, connecting the elements of the retention matrix. Referring now to Fig. 141, a retention die, or a portion of the retention die, 6550 may comprise a plurality of element bodies 6505 that can be connected together by one or more connection joints 6507. Each element body 6505 may comprise a plurality of deformable members 6553 defining a retention opening 6552 therein. The element bodies 6505 and the connection joints 6507 of a holding die 6550 can be integrally formed and can comprise a unitary piece of material. The holding matrix 6550 can be stamped or fused, for example, from a metallic material, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, for example. The retention matrix 6550 can be comprised of plastic such as polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polypropylene which is marketed under the tradename Prolene, polyester, polyethylene terephthalate which is marketed under the trade names Ethibond and Mersilene, polyvinylidene fluoride, fluoride polyvinylidene-co-hexafluoropropylene, polyhexafluoropropylene VDF which is marketed under the trade name of Pronova, and / or long chain 6-nylon and nylon 6,6 aliphatic polymers which are marketed under the tradenames Ethilon and Nurolon, for example, and can conform by an injection molding process, for example. Element bodies 6505 may not be integrally formed with connection joints 6507. According to the invention, a plurality of singular element bodies 6505 may be produced, which are subsequently connected together and incorporated into a retaining matrix. For example, the element bodies 6505 can be stamped from a metallic material, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, for example, and placed in a plastic injection mold. wherein a plastic material can be injected into the mold to form, one, an edge 6506 of material that surrounds, or at least partially surrounds, the element bodies 6505 and, two, the connecting joints 6507 extending from the edges 6506 Alternatively, one or more connector networks may be formed comprising openings defined within a plurality of edges 6506, wherein each of said openings may be configured to receive an element body 6505 therein. Each element body 6505 may comprise a circular outer perimeter, or at least substantially circular and, similarly, each edge 6506 may define therein a circular, or at least substantially circular, opening in which the diameter of the opening may be equal to or less than the diameter of the element body 6505. For example , the element bodies 6505 can be press fit or embedded within the openings at the edges 6506. The element bodies 6505 can be fixed in the openings by the use of at least one adhesive.

In addition to the above, a retention matrix may comprise a plurality of element bodies 6505 and a plurality of connection links 6507 that can connect element bodies 6505 in any suitable assembly, such as those illustrated in Figs. 142 to 145, for example. Regardless of the pattern of the arrangement, the connecting joints 6507 can be configured to allow the element bodies 6505 and the retaining openings 6552 to move relative to each other. For example, the network of element bodies 6505 and the connection joints 6507 comprising the retaining matrix 6550, once coupled with the tissue, can be configured to stretch, twist, contract, and / or in any other way flex with the aim of allowing at least some movement within the tissue while, at the same time, resisting the larger movements of this. Optionally, each connecting link 6507 may comprise a flexible element that is configured to stretch, twist, and / or contract in order to allow the retaining matrix 6550 to flex between the retention members of the matrix 6505, for example. Referring again to Fig. 141, each joint 6507 extending from an edge 6506 can be defined by a width that is narrower than the width of the element body 6505 and / or the edge 6506. With reference to Figs. 142 to 145, one or more joints 6507 may comprise straight portions extending along a line between the adjacent element bodies 6506, for example. For example, each link 6507 may comprise a first end coupled to a first edge 6506 and a second end coupled to a second edge 6506. With reference once again to FIG. 141, two or more links 6507 may be connected to each other. For example, two or more joints 6507 can be connected to an intermediate hinge 6509, for example. The hinge 6509 may comprise a reduction in the thickness of the cross section in one or more directions compared to the thickness of the cross section of the joints 6507 which may allow the connected joints 6507 to move relative to one another for example. The retaining matrix 6550 may further comprise the hinges 6508 which can connect the joints 6507 to the edges 6506 and allow the relative movement between the joints 6507 and the edges 6506. Similar to the hinges 6509, the hinges 6508 may comprise a reduction in the thickness of the cross section in one or more directions as compared to the thickness of the cross section of the joints 6507, for example.

In addition to the above, the 6507 connected joints can extend in different directions. For example, a first link 6507 may extend in a first direction and a second link 6507 may extend in a second direction, wherein the first address may be different from the second direction. The first link 6507 may extend along a first line and the second link 6507 may extend along a second line, where the first line and the second line may intersect each other at an angle, such as about 30 degrees , approximately 45 degrees, approximately 60 degrees, and / or approximately 90 degrees, for example. The hinges 6508 and / or the hinges 6509 may comprise live hinges which may allow the joints 6507 to move relative to each other a number of times without breaking. The hinges 6508 and / or the hinges 6509 may comprise fragile, or easily breakable, portions that can break when flexed too much and / or flexed too many times. For example, such fragile portions may allow one or more portions of the holding matrix 6550 to be separated from another portion of the holding matrix 6550. The hinges 6508 and / or the hinges 6509, for example, may comprise sections of the matrix 6550 retention that are easier to cut than the others portions of the holding matrix 6550. More particularly, an implanted retention matrix, and the tissue held by the implanted retention matrix, can be cut many times by a blade member for various reasons and, in order to facilitate such cutting, the hinges 6508 and / or the hinges 6509 can provide tracks, or thin sections, through which a blade member can more easily traverse the retaining die 6550, for example. In addition to the above, the connecting links 6507 may comprise one or more embossed features or alterations of the material, for example, defined therein which may facilitate bending, breaking, and / or incision of the connecting links 6507.

According to the invention, a holding matrix can comprise a plurality of elements of the holding matrix, such as the element bodies of the matrix 6505, for example, which can be incorporated in a sheet, or flexible band, of the material . A flexible sheet of material can be formed from a bioabsorbable, elastomeric material, such as silicone, for example, wherein the flexible sheet can be produced with a plurality of openings defined therein. For example, a solid flexible sheet can be molded and a plurality of openings in the flexible sheet can be cut. Alternatively, the flexible sheet can be molded and the openings defined therein can be formed during the molding process. In any case, the retainer array elements 6505, for example, can be inserted and retained within the flexible sheet. Alternatively, similar to the above, the flexible sheet can be formed around the elements of the matrix 6505. The flexible sheet may comprise a woven mesh, for example, and / or any other suitable material. Such a woven mesh, in addition to the above, can be easy to cut transversely.

With reference now to Figs. 146 and 147, a fastening system comprising a retaining die, such as the retaining die 6250, for example, may further comprise a cover, such as cover 6670, for example, which may cover the tips of the fasteners. staple legs 6221 when extending above top surface 6257 of retention die 6250. Cover 6670 can be engaged with retention die 6250. Cover 6670 and / or retention die 6250 can comprise retention features that they can be configured to retain the cover 6670 to the retainer 6250. At least one adhesive can be used to adhere the cover 6670 to the retainer 6250. The cover 6670 can comprise a single layer, although the cover 6670 is illustrated as comprising two layers, as described in more detail later. With reference principally Fig. 147, the tips of the staple legs 6221 may extend through a lower surface 6673 of the cover 6670; however, the cover may comprise a sufficient thickness such that the staple legs do not extend through the upper surface of the cover 6670. For example, as a result, the tips of the staple legs 6221 may not protrude of cover 6670. Cover 6670 may comprise a plurality of layers. For example, the cover 6670 may comprise a first layer 6671 and a second layer 6672. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 can be coupled together wherein the second layer 6672 can comprise a lower surface 6676, which adheres to the first layer 6671. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 can understand different thicknesses although they can understand the same thickness. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may comprise substantially the same width and / or length. Alternatively, the layers 6671 and 6672 may comprise different widths and / or lengths.

In addition to the above, the first layer 6671 can be comprised of a compressible foam, a mesh material, and / or a hydrogel, for example, which can be cut by the staple legs 6211. The second layer 6672 can be comprised of a harder material, or skin, such as PGA and / or PDS, for example, and / or any suitable reinforcing material. For example, the staple legs 6221 can be configured to penetrate the first layer 6671; however, the staple legs 6221 may not be able to penetrate the second layer 6672. The second layer 6672 may be comprised of a material having sufficient flexibility and / or hardness, which may allow the second layer 6672 to come into contact and move through staple leg 6221 but do not cut, or only cut marginally, through the staple tip of staple leg 6221. Although not illustrated, a cover may comprise more than two layers, wherein one or more of such layers may be resistant to penetration. In use, for example, the retention die 6250 can be placed against the tissue to be held and pushed towards down such that the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 are pushed through the tissue T and the retaining openings 6252 in the retaining die 6250 and enter the first layer 6271 of the cover 6270. The tips of the staples staple legs 6221 may not enter, or at least substantially not enter, within the second layer 6272 of the cover 6270. After the retainer 6250 has been properly positioned, the clamp 6240 may be opened and the cover 6670 and the retaining die 6250 can be separated from bracket 6240 as illustrated in Fig. 146. As illustrated in Fig. 146, a bracket 6640 can be configured to hold more than one retaining die 6250 and cover 6670. For example, the clamp 6640 may comprise two channels 6679 each of which may be configured to receive a cover 6670 therein and a retaining die 6250 which is positioned on it in such a manner that the contact surface with The fabric 6251 of each retaining die 6250 hangs downward from the bottom of the bracket 6240. For example, a retaining die 6250 and a cover 6270 can be housed in the bracket 6640 on each side of a knife groove 6678 In operation, both retention dies 6250 and covers 6670 can be deployed simultaneously and / or at the same depth with respect to opposing staple cartridges, such as cartridges 6200, for example, positioned through them. After this, the subject fabric can be cut along a cutting line by a cutting member passing through the knife slot 6678, where the Clamp 6640 can then be reopened. The covers 6670 may not be attached to the holding die 6250. For example, the covers 6670 may be positioned in the channels 6679 and may be retained in the channels 6679 by the holding dies 6250 that can be secured to the clip 6640. Each holding matrix 6250 may be wider and / or longer than its respective covers 6670, such that retaining dies 6250 may retain all of its covers 6670 in position. Each retainer die 6250 may comprise the same width and / or length as its respective cover 6670, for example.

Optionally, as described above, a fastening system may comprise a layer of material that can be coupled to a retaining matrix, such as the retaining die 6250, for example. Referring now to Fig. 150, a layer of material 6870 may be coupled to the lower surface 6251 of the retaining die 6250. The layer 6870 and / or the retaining die 6250 may comprise retaining features that can be configured to retain the layer 6870 to the holding matrix 6250. At least one adhesive can be used to adhere the layer 6870 to the holding matrix 6250. In either case, the layer 6870 may comprise a lower surface, or in contact with the fabric, 6873, which it can be configured to come into contact with the fabric T when the holding die 6250 moves down towards the staples 6220 to couple the retaining openings 6252 with the staple legs 6221. For example, the layer 6870 can be comprised of a material compressible, such as a foam bioabsorbable, for example, that can be compressed between the bottom surface 6251 of the retaining matrix 6250 and the tissue T. The layer 6870 can further comprise at least one medicament stored and / or absorbed therein that can be poured from the 6870 layer as the layer 6870 is compressed. The medicament may comprise at least one tissue sealant, hemostatic agent, and / or antimicrobial material, such as ionized silver and / or triclosan, for example. The compression of layer 6870 can squeeze the medicament from layer 6870 in such a way that all, or at least a significant portion of the tissue surface T, it is covered with the medicine. In addition, as the layer 6870 is compressed and the staple legs 6221 penetrate the tissue T and layer 6870, the medicament can flow down the staple legs 6221 and treat the tissue that has just been cut by the tissues. Staple legs 6221, for example. The body of the holding matrix 6250 may comprise a first layer comprising a biocompatible material, such as titanium and / or stainless steel, for example, and the lower layer 6870 may comprise a second layer comprising a bioabsorbable material, such as cellulose oxidized regenerated (ORC), biologically active agents such as fibrin and / or thrombin (either in its liquid or freeze-dried state), glycerin, absorbable porcine gelatin either in its flowing or foam configurations, and / or antimicrobial , such as ionized silver and / or triclosan, for example. Additional bioabsorbable materials may comprise Surgicel Nu-Knit, Surgicel Fibrillar, Collagen / ORC which is a hybrid with an incorporated collagen matrix and is marketed under the commercial name Promogran, polyglycolic acid (PGA), which is marketed under the brand name of Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprona 25 (PGCL), which is marketed under the name commercial of Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, for example. Although only one layer 6870 is illustrated in Fig. 150, any suitable number of layers could be used. A first layer comprising a first drug could be coupled to the retention matrix 6250 and a second layer comprising a second medication, or different, could be coupled to the first layer. For example, a plurality of layers could be used wherein each layer may comprise a different medicament and / or a different combination of medicaments contained therein.

Referring now to Fig. 148, a fastening system may comprise a layer of material 6770 coupled to the lower surface 6251 of the retaining die 6250. The layer 6770 and / or the retaining die 6250 may comprise retaining features that they can be configured to retain the layer 6770 to the holding matrix 6250. At least one adhesive can be used to adhere the layer 6770 to the holding matrix 6250. In either case, the layer 6770 can comprise a lower surface, or in contact with the fabric, 6773, which can be configured to contact tissue T when retaining die 6250 moves down towards staples 6220 to engage retaining openings 6252 with staple legs 6221. For example, layer 6770 can be understood of a compressible material, such as a bioabsorbable foam, for example, which may be compressed between the surface 6251 of the retaining matrix 6250 and the tissue T. The layer 6770 may further comprise one or more encapsulations, or cells, 6774 which they can be configured to store at least one medicine inside. With reference to Fig. 149, the encapsulates 6774 can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the retaining openings 6252 in such a way that, when the staple legs 6221 are pushed through the tissue T and the layer 6770, the staple legs 6221 can pierce and / or otherwise break the encapsulates 6774. After the 6774 encapsulates have been broken, at least the only medication M stored in the encapsulates 6774 can flow out onto the tissue T. For example , the drug M can comprise a fluid that can flow or be absorbed down the staple legs 6221 and treat the tissue T that has just been cut by the staple legs. As a result of the foregoing, the medicament stored within the 6774 encapsulates can provide localized treatment to the tissue. Encapsulates 6774 in sheet 6770 may comprise different drugs stored therein. For example, a first group of encapsulates 6774 may comprise a first drug, or a first combination of drugs, stored therein and a second group of encapsulates may comprise a different drug, or a different combination of drugs, stored therein. The layer 6770 may comprise a flexible silicone sheet and the encapsulates 6774 they can represent hollow spaces in the silicone sheet. For example, the silicone sheet can comprise two layers that can be coupled together, wherein the encapsulates 6774 can be defined between the two layers. Layer 6770 may comprise one or more thin sections or weakened portions, such as partial perforations, for example, which may facilitate cutting of layer 6770 and rupture of encapsulations 6774 by legs 6221. At least a portion of the encapsulations 6774 can be positioned within the domes 6777, where the domes 6777 can extend upwardly from the sheet 6770. For example, the domes 6777 and / or at least a portion of the encapsulates 6774 can be positioned within the cavities 6201 formed within the holding matrix 6250. The encapsulates 6774 may comprise discrete cells not connected to each other. Alternatively, one or more of the encapsulates 6774 can be in continuous communication with each other through one or more passages, conduits, and / or channels, for example, that extend through the layer 6770. The patent description of the United States no. 7,780,685, entitled ADHESIVE AND MECHANICAL FASTENER, granted on August 24, 2010, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In addition to the above, a staple cartridge comprising a cartridge body, staples, and / or an alignment matrix thereon, can be loaded into a first clamp of an end effector and, similarly, a retention matrix and / or one or more covers can be loaded in a second clamp of the end effector. With reference now to Fig. 151, an instrument, such as the cartridge magazine 6990, for example, can be used to insert two or more fastener cartridges into an end effector therein. The cartridge magazine 6990 may comprise a handle 6991 and a cartridge carrier 6992, wherein the cartridge carrier 6992 may comprise a first holding portion that is configured to retain the cartridge body 6210 of the staple cartridge 6200 thereto and, in addition, a second retaining portion configured to retain a cartridge body 6980 that supports, one, a plurality of protection caps 6270 thereon and, two, a retainer 6250 along the lower surface thereof, for example . Each of the first and second retainer portions may comprise one or more retention members configured to removably engage the cartridge bodies 6210 and 6980. In operation, with reference now to FIGS. 152 and 153, an end effector may comprise a first, or lower, clamp 6230 and a second clamp, or upper, 6940, wherein the staple cartridge 6200 may be loaded in the first clamp 6230 and the cartridge body 6980 may be loaded in the second clamp 6940. In various circumstances, the upper clamp 6940 can be rotated from an open position (Fig. 152) to a closed position (Fig. 153) by an impeller 6235, wherein the operation of the impeller 6235 is described above and it is not repeated in the present description for the sake of brevity. Once the upper clamp 6940 is in its closed position, with reference now to Fig. 153, the distal end 6993 of the cartridge holder 6992 can be inserted into the end effector, such that the staple cartridge 6200 slides through the distal end 6938 of the first clamp 6930 and into a first engaging portion, or channel, 6939 in the first clamp 6230. Similarly , the distal end 6993 of the cartridge holder 6992 can be inserted into the end effector, such that the body of the cartridge 6980 slides through the distal end 6948 of the second clamp 6940 and into a second engaging portion, or channel , 6949 in the second clamp 6940. A surgeon, or other clinician, who holds the handle 6991 of the cartridge magazine 6990 can push the staple cartridge 6200 and the cartridge body 6980 through the channels 6939 and 6949, respectively, until that the staple cartridge 6200 and the body of the cartridge 6980 settle completely in these.

When the staple cartridge 6200 and the cartridge body 6980 are seated, each of the staple cartridge 6200 and the cartridge body 6980 can be coupled to one or more retainer portions in their respective clamps 6230 and 6940, as described in greater detail. detail below. In any case, once the staple cartridge 6200 and the body of the cartridge 6980 have been seated, with reference now to FIG. 154, the cartridge magazine 6990 can be separated from the staple cartridge 6200 and the cartridge body 6980 and withdraw from the end effector. For example, the holding force holding the staple cartridge 6200 in the first clamp 6230 may be greater than the holding force holding the staple cartridge 6200 to the cartridge holder 6992, so that when the cartridge carrier 6992 is pulled distally outward from the end effector, the staple cartridge 6200 may remain behind in the first clamp 6230. Similarly, the retention force which maintains the body of the cartridge 6980 in the second clamp 6940 may be greater than the holding force that holds the cartridge body 6940 to the 6992 cartridge holder, such that, as the cartridge holder 6992 is pulled distally out of the end effector, the body of the cartridge 6940 may remain behind in the second clamp 6940. Once the cartridge 6990 has been removed from the effector at the end, they can be positioned relative to the tissue T to staple the first loaded bracket 6230 and the second loaded bracket 6940. Referring now to Fig. 155, the second bracket 6940 can be moved from an open position (Fig. 154) to a fired position (Fig. 155) in order to couple the retainer die 6250 and the plurality of guard caps 6270 carried by the cartridge body 6980 with the staples 6220 positioned within the staple cartridge 6200.

With reference now to Figs. 156 and 157, the second clamp 6940 can be reopened and the plurality of protection caps 6270 and retention die 6250 can be separated from the cartridge body 6980, such that the caps 6270 and retention die 6250 can remain engaged. with the tissue T and the staple cartridge 6200. The cartridge body 6980 may comprise a plurality of cavities, wherein the plurality of caps 6270 may be removably positioned and one or more retaining grooves that are configured to removably retain the retainer die 6250 thereto. The retaining members of the second clamp 6940 coupled with the body of the cartridge 6980 can retain the body of the cartridge 6980 in the second clamp 6940 after the second clamp 6940 is opened. The body of the cartridge 6980 can be configured to break while the second one. Clamp 6940 is opened such that a portion of the cartridge body 6980 is implanted with the caps 6270 and the retainer 6250 and a portion of the cartridge body 6980 remains in the second clamp 6940. Similarly, with reference again to Figs. . 156 and 157, the retaining members of the first clamp 6230 coupled with the cartridge body 6210 can retain the body of the cartridge 6210 in the first clamp 6230 after the second clamp 6940 has been opened. The body of the cartridge 6210 can be configured to break while the first clamp 6230 is removed from the implanted cartridge 6200, such that a portion of the cartridge body 6210 is implanted with the staples 6220 and the alignment die 6260 and a portion of the cartridge body 6210 remains in the first clamp 6230. Referring now to Figs. 158-160, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 6900, for example, may comprise one or more longitudinal retention grooves 6913 extending along the length of the cartridge body 6910 which, when the cartridge staples 6900 is inserted into a clamp 6930, for example, they can be configured to receive one or more longitudinal retention rails 6916 extending therein from the clamp 6930. In operation, one end of the retention slots 6913 can be aligned with the distal ends of the retention rails 6916 before the staple cartridge 6900 slides through the distal end 6938 of the retention channel 6939, for example .

Referring again to FIG. 160, the bracket 6940 may comprise two retaining channels 6949, wherein each retaining channel 6949 may be configured to receive a cartridge body 6980 comprising therein a plurality of caps 6270 and a retainer matrix. 6250. Each cartridge body 6980 may comprise one or more longitudinal retention supports 6917 that can be configured to slide along one or more longitudinal retention rails 6918 of the second clamp 6940 as the bodies of the cartridge 6980 are inserted into the body. their respective retaining channels 6949 in the bracket 6940. The retaining rails 6918 and the retaining brackets 6917 can cooperate to retain the cartridge body 6980 in the second bracket 6940 when the cartridge bodies 6980 are separated from the caps 6270 and the holding matrix 6250 stored in them. Referring now to Fig. 159, the second bracket 6940 may further comprise one or more distal protuberances, or retaining members, 6915 extending therefrom, which may be configured to removably lock the bodies of the cartridge 6980 in their respective retention channels. For example, second clamp 6940 may comprise a distal protrusion 6915 that is configured and positioned relative to each retention channel 6949, such so that each body of the cartridge 6980 can flex around the protuberances 6915 while the bodies of the cartridge 6980 are inserted into the channels 6949 whereWhen the bodies of the cartridges 6915 are fully seated in the channels 6949, the distal ends of the bodies of the cartridge 6980 can clear and fasten on the protuberances 6915. With the aim of removing the cartridge bodies 6980 after they have worn out , as described above, the cartridge bodies 6980 can be pulled back on the protuberances 6915 and removed from the retaining channels 6949. Similar to the above, the first clamp 6930 can comprise one or more distal retention protrusions 6914 extending from there that can be configured to be received in one or more grooves, or retention grooves, 6912 (Fig. 158) in the cartridge body 6910 when the staple cartridge 6900 has been fully seated.

In addition to the above, a first clamping element cartridge comprising a plurality of first clamping elements placed thereon can be placed in a first clamp of a surgical clamping device and a second clamping element cartridge comprising a plurality of clamping elements. second fasteners placed therein can be placed in a second clamp of the surgical fastening device. In operation, the first clamp and / or the second clamp can move towards each other in order to couple the first clamps with the second clamps and secure the tissue therebetween. The cartridge of the first clips and the cartridge of the second clips can be attached to each other when the first fasteners are coupled with the second fasteners. The body of the first clamping cartridge can comprise a first compressible material and the body of the second clamping cartridge can comprise a second compressible material, wherein the first body and / or the second body can be compressed against the tissue that is clamped. After the tissue has been fixed, the first clamp can be separated from the cartridge of the first implant fixation elements and the second clamp can be separated from the cartridge of the second implant fixation elements. After that, the first clamp can be recharged with another cartridge of first fasteners, or the like, and the second clamp can be reloaded with another cartridge of second fasteners, or the like, and the surgical fastening instrument can be reused. Although staples may be used, alternatives comprising other types of fasteners, such as two-piece fasteners that lock together when engaged with one another, are contemplated, for example. For example, the first holding cartridge may comprise a first storage portion for storing the first portions of fastening elements and the second holding element cartridge may comprise a second storage portion for storing the second portions of fastening elements. The fastening systems described in the present description may use fasteners comprising any suitable type of material and / or form. The fasteners may comprise penetration members. Such penetration members could comprise a polymer, a compound, and / or a multilayer substrate, by example. An example of a multi-layer substrate can be a wire or a substrate sheet with an elastomeric or polymer coating. This could be a thin sheet formed, such that the penetration members are oriented perpendicular, or at least substantially perpendicular, to the connecting member. The penetrating members could comprise a rectangular profile, a semicircular profile, and / or any bar profile. The fasteners described in the present description can be manufactured by the use of any suitable process, such as a wire extrusion process, for example. Another possibility is the use of microfabrication to create hollow penetration members. These penetration members could be manufactured from a process that is different from a wire extrusion process and could use a combination of materials.

As described above, the tips of the staple legs that protrude through a retention die can be covered by one or more covers and / or covers. The tips of the staple legs can be deformed after they are inserted through the retention die. A clamp holding the retaining die can further comprise anvil cavities positioned above and / or aligned with the retaining openings that can be configured to deform the measured staple legs protruding above the retaining die. The staple legs of each staple may curl inwardly toward each other and / or towards the center of the staple, for example. Alternatively, one or more of the staple legs of a staple may be bent outwardly from so that they move away from the other staple legs and / or so that they move away from the center of the staple. Optionally, and independently of the direction in which the staple legs are curved, the tips of the staple legs may come into contact with the body of the retainer matrix and may not re-enter the tissue that is clamped. for the staples. The deformation of the staple legs after they pass through the retainer matrix can block the retainer matrix in place.

With reference now to Figs. 161 and 162, a surgical stapling instrument, such as the surgical stapler 7000, for example, may comprise a first clamp 7030 and a second clamp 7040, wherein the second clamp 7040 may approach and move away from the first clamp 7030 by movement of the actuator 6235. The operation of the impeller 6235 was described above and is not repeated in the present description for the sake of brevity. The first clamp 7030 may comprise a distal end 7031 and a proximal end 7032, wherein the first clamp 7030 may define a channel extending between the distal end 7031 and the proximal end 7032 that is configured to receive a staple cartridge. For purposes of illustration, the cartridge body of such a staple cartridge is not shown in Fig. 161, although such a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body, the staples 6220 positioned within the cartridge body, and the cartridge drivers. staples 7012 positioned below the staples 6220. Although not illustrated in Fig. 161 for the sake of clarity, the second clamp 7040 can configured to maintain a retention matrix, such as retention die 6250, for example, over staples 6220 and / or to move the retention die in engagement with staple legs 6220 as described above. Surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a slider 7010 placed in the first clamp 7030 which can slide from the distal end 7031 of the first clamp 7030 in the direction of the proximal end 7032, for example, and raise the staple drivers 7012, and the staple 6220 that is supported on these, in the direction of the retaining matrix and the second clamp 7040. Alternatively, the slider 7010 can be moved from the proximal end 7032 in the direction of the distal end 7031 in order to deploy the staples 6020, example. The slider 7010 may comprise one or more inclined ramps, or cams, 7011 which may be configured to slide below the staple drivers 7012 and raise the staple drivers 7012 upwardly. The surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a pull or push rod, operatively coupled to the slider 7010 which can be moved proximally and / or distally by an actuator located in a handle and / or the stem of the surgical stapler 7000, for example .

Referring again to FIG. 161, the second clamp 7040 of the surgical stapler 7000 may comprise a frame 7041, a distal end 7048, and a proximal end 7049 positioned opposite the distal end 7048. The second clamp 7040 may further comprise a guidance system comprising one or more guide rails, such as rails guide 7045 and 7046, for example, which extend along the longitudinal axis of the frame 7041 which, as described in more detail below, can be configured to guide one or more anvils or cams, which can couple and deform legs staple of the staples 6220 after the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 pass through the holding matrix. For example, the guide rails 7045 and 7046 may comprise a wire or guide wire that extends along a portion or upper surface of the frame 7041, around a distal post 7047, and back along the portion or surface Top of frame 7041, for example. Optionally, as mentioned above and with reference now mainly to Figs. 163 and 165, the second clamp 7040 may further comprise one or more anvils, or cams, such as the first anvil 7050 and the second anvil 7060, for example, which can move longitudinally along the second clamp 7040 with the purpose of deforming staple legs 6220 after they have passed through the retention matrix. The surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a first anvil driver, or actuator 7051, operatively connected and / or coupled to the first anvil 7050 which can be configured to pull the first anvil 7050 proximally and / or push the first anvil 7050 distally. Similarly, the surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a second anvil driver, or actuator, operatively connected and / or coupled to the second anvil 7060 which can be configured to push the second anvil 7060 distally and / or pull the second anvil 7060 proximally. The first anvil 7050 can comprising the guide grooves 7052 and the second anvil 7060 may comprise the guide grooves 7062 each which can be configured to slidably receive the guide rail 7045 or the guide rail 7046 therein. For example, guide rails 7045 and 7046 can be received snugly within guide grooves 7052 and 7062, such that relative lateral movement, or side to side, between these can be prevented, or at least limited.

In addition to the above, the first anvil 7050 can be pulled proximally and the second anvil 7060 can be pulled distally. With reference to Fig. 161, the guide rails 7045 and 7046 and the distal post 7047 may comprise a pulley system configured to pull the second anvil 7060 distally and / or pull the second anvil 7060 proximally. For example, the guide rail 7045 and the guide rail 7046 may comprise a continuous wire or cable extending around the distal post 7047, wherein a portion of the continuous wire can be pulled in order to cyclically move the wire around the distal post 7047. The guide rail 7046, for example, can be mounted on the second anvil 7060, such that, when the continuous cable cycles in a first direction, the second anvil 7060 can be pulled distally in the direction of the distal end 7048 of the clamp. 7040 and, when the continuous cable cycles in a second, or opposite, direction, the second anvil 7060 can be pulled proximally in the direction of the proximal end 7049. Referring now to FIG. 163, the guide rail 7046 can be secured within a guide slot 7062, in such a way that a tensile force between them. For example, the guide rail 7045 can be configured to slide into the other guide groove 7062. The first anvil 7050 can operate independently of the second anvil 7060 and the pulley system and the guide grooves 7052 defined in the first anvil 7050 can be configured to receive In a sliding manner the guide rails 7045 and 7046, in such a way that relative movement between them is allowed. The continuous cable comprising the guide rails 7045 and 7046 can be sufficiently flexible in order to accommodate the opening and closing of the upper clamp 7040. The continuous cable can also be sufficiently flexible in order to accommodate the vertical movement of the cable. second anvil 7060 approaching and moving away from the lower clamp 7030, which is described in more detail below.

With reference again to Figs. 163 and 165, the first anvil 7050 may comprise cam followers 7055 extending therefrom which can be configured to mount in one or more cam slots, or guide slots, such as cam slit 7070 (Figure 166), by example, defined in the frame 7041 of the second clamp 7040. More particularly, the frame 7041 may comprise a first cam groove 7070 extending longitudinally along a first side of the frame 7041 and a second cam 7070 extending longitudinally along a second, or opposite side, of the frame 7041, wherein the cam followers 7055 extending from a first side of the first anvil 7050 can mount in the first cam groove 7070 and the cam followers 7055 extending from a second side of the first anvil 7050 can be mounted on the second cam groove 7070. For example, the contours of each cam groove 7070 can be identical, or at least substantially identical, and can be aligned, or at least substantially align, with each other. Similarly, the second anvil 7060 may comprise the cam followers 7065 extending therefrom, which can be configured to mount in the cam slots 7070 (Figure 166) defined in the frame 7041 of the second clamp 7040. More particularly, the followers Cam 7065 extending from a first side of the second anvil 7060 can be mounted in the first cam groove 7070 and the cam followers 7065 extending from a second side of the second anvil 7060 can be mounted in the second cam groove 7070. Working, the cam followers 7055 of the first anvil 7050 and the cam followers 7065 of the second anvil 7060 can slide within the cam grooves 7070, such that the first anvil 7050 and the second anvil 7060 follow the contours of the grooves 7070. cam 7070 as the first anvil 7050 and the second anvil 7060 are pulled proximally and / or pushed distally. Optionally, each cam groove 7070 may comprise a plurality of seating portions, or upper, 7071 and a plurality of drive portions, or lower, 7072 that can be configured to move the anvils 7050 and 7060 vertically, ie, to and from the lower clamp 7030, at the same time that the anvils 7050 and 7060 move longitudinally, that is to say, between the distal end 7048 and the proximal end 7049 of the e 7041, as described in more detail below.

When the surgical stapler is in a non-triggered condition with reference to Fig. 166, the first anvil 7050 can be positioned at the distal end 7048 of the e 7041 and the second anvil 7060 can be positioned at the proximal end 7049 of the e 7041; further, with reference now to Fig. 167, the staples 6220 positioned in the first clamp 7030 may not yet be inserted into the tissue and / or the retention matrix positioned above it when the surgical stapler 7000 is in an un-triggered condition. In operation, with reference now to Fig. 168, the staples 6220 can be urged upwardly within the staple pockets 7033 of a staple cartridge by the staple drivers 7012 and, in addition, the first anvil 7050 can be moved proximally from the staple cartridge. distal end 7048 of e 7041 towards distal end 7049 for attaching staple legs 6221 of staples 6220. Staples 6220 can be urged upward before the first anvil 7050 engages with staple legs 6221 of these . Optionally, all staples 6220 can be deployed upwardly by slider 7010 before the first anvil 7050 is advanced in contact with the staple legs 6221 or, alternatively, the slider 7010 can move proximally at the same time as the first anvil 7050. it moves proximally, although the slider 7010 can sufficiently advance the first anvil 7050 in order to unfold the staples 6220 in front of the first anvil 7050. Optionally, as illustrated in Fig. 168, the cam grooves 7070 can be configured and arranged in such a way that the forming surfaces, such as the forming, or working surfaces of cam 7053 and 7054, for example, of the first cam 7050 may come into contact with at least some of the staple legs 6221 when the first cam 7050 passes through a rest position, or higher. In various circumstances, each of the cam followers 7055 of the first anvil 7050 can be positioned in a seat portion 7071 of the cam grooves 7070, such that the forming surfaces 7053 and 7054 are in an elevated position and, such that the staple legs 6221 deform only partially when the anvil 7050 thus passes into the seating position. As the first cam 7050 moves further along the cam grooves 7070, as illustrated in Fig. 169, the cam followers 7055 of the first anvil 7050 can be driven in the driven portions, or lower, 7072 of the cam grooves 7070, so that the shaping surfaces 7053 and 7054 move vertically downward toward the staple legs 6021 in order to urge the staple legs 6021 into their final shaped configurations. After that, as the first anvil 7050 is further advanced along the cam grooves 7070, the first anvil 7050 can be driven vertically upward into another set of seat portions 7071 of the cam grooves 7070 As illustrated in Figs. 168 and 169, the reader will notice that the first anvil 7050 can only attach some of the staple legs and the others do not. For example, the first anvil 7050 may be configured to deform only one group of staple legs comprising the distal staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220, for example. For example, the first anvil 7050 can be configured to deform the distal staple legs 6221 toward the center of the staples 6220. Optionally, each proximal staple leg 6221 can come into contact twice with the first anvil 7050, i.e. a first shaping surface 7053 and by a second shaping surface 7054 aligned with the first shaping surface 7053. For example, the first shaping surfaces 7053 may deform the distal staple legs 6221 in a partially deformed configuration when the first anvil 7050 is in a seating position, or higher, and the second shaping surfaces 7054 may deform the distal staple legs 6221 in a fully shaped configuration when the first anvil 7050 moves to an actuated, or lower, position. With reference now to Figs. 163 and 164, the first anvil 7050 may comprise a plurality of first forming surfaces 7053 and a plurality of second forming surfaces 7054 for the purpose of deforming the distal staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 when the staple legs 6221 are arranged in more than one row or line. Optionally, as described in more detail below, the proximal staple legs 6221 of the staples 6020 can be deformed by the second anvil 7060, for example.

In addition to the above, the first anvil 7050 can move from the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 to the proximal end 7049 in order to deform all the distal staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220. As the reader will see, the first anvil 7050 can moving up and down relative to the proximal non-deformed staple legs 6221 and, in order to accommodate such relative movement, the first anvil 7050 may comprise one or more clearance grooves 7057 (FIG. 165) that can be configured to receive the proximal staple legs without bending 6221 while the first anvil 7050 bends the distal staple legs 6221. Similarly, with reference again to Fig. 163, the second anvil 7060 may comprise a play slot 7067 that can be configured to accommodate movement vertical of the first cam drive 7051 moving up and down when the first anvil 7050 moves between its seat and ac positions cited as described above. After all of the distal staple legs 6221 are bent, the second anvil 7060 can move from the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041 to the distal end 7048 by the anvil driver 7061. Similar to the above, with reference now to FIG. 170, the cam followers 7065 of the second anvil 7060 can slide within the cam grooves 7070 so that the second anvil 7060 moves between the seat positions, or higher, and the positions actuated, or lower, with the aim of deforming the proximal staple legs 6221 inward towards the staple centers 6220, by example. Similar to the above, the second anvil 7060 may comprise a plurality of first shaping, or camming, surfaces 7063 and a plurality of second shaping, or camming surfaces, 7064 each of which may be configured to deform at least partially and / or completely one or more of the proximal staple legs 6021. Referring again to FIG. 164, the second anvil 7060 may comprise a plurality of first shaping surfaces 7063 and a plurality of second shaping surfaces 7064 that can be configured to deform the proximal staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 disposed in a plurality of rows, or lines, for example. As illustrated, further, in Fig. 164, the first shaping surfaces 7063 and the second shaping surfaces 7064 of the second anvil 7060 may not align with the first shaping surfaces 7053 and the second shaping surfaces 7054 of the first anvil 7050 wherein, as a result, the proximal legs 6221 of the staples 6220 can be positioned in rows, or different lines, of the distal legs 6221 of the staples 6220. As the reader will further observe, the second anvil 7060 can push the first anvil 7050 as the second anvil 7060 moves distally. For example, the second anvil 7060 can push the first anvil 7050 back into the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041, such that the first anvil 7050 can be returned to its initial position, or not triggered. After all of the proximal staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 have been deformed, the second anvil 7060 can be retracted proximally and return to its initial position, or not shot. In this way, the surgical stapler 7000 can be reset, such that a new staple cartridge can be positioned in the first clamp 7030 and a new retention matrix can be positioned in the second clamp 7040 in order to use the surgical stapler 7000 a more time Optionally, as described above, a surgical stapler may comprise two or more anvils that can travel longitudinally for the purpose of coupling the legs of a plurality of staples in a transverse direction. A surgical stapler may comprise an anvil that moves proximally, for example, with the aim of deforming a first group of staple legs and distally, for example, with the aim of deforming a second group of staple legs. For example, such an anvil may comprise proximally oriented shaping surfaces and distally oriented shaping surfaces, for example.

Referring now to Fig. 171, an anvil, such as anvil 7140, for example, may comprise a lower surface, or in contact with the fabric, 7141 and a plurality of forming cavities 7142 defined therein. The anvil 7140 may comprise more than one plate, such as the cavity plates 7143, for example, which may be welded in a frame 7144. For example, each cavity plate 7143 may be positioned in a plate channel 7145 in the frame 7144 and it is welded to the frame 7144 through a welding groove 7146 which extends to through the frame 7144 in order to form a longitudinal weld 7147. In various circumstances, the longitudinal weld 7147 may comprise a continuous weld that extends along the entire length of the weld groove 7146 or a series of weld spots separated from each other that extend along the length of this, for example. Optionally, each cavity plate 7143 may comprise two or more plate portions that have been welded together. For example, each cavity plate 7143 may comprise a first plate portion 7143a and a second plate portion 7143b that can be welded together along a seam 7148. The first plate portion 7143a and the second plate portion 7143b of each plate 7143 can be welded together before the plates 7143 are welded into the plate channels 7145 in the frame 7144. For example, the first plate portion 7143a and the second plate portion 7143b can comprise cooperating profiles, such as profiles toothes illustrated in Fig. 171, for example, that can be adjusted together to form a tight seam 7148. Each plate 7143 can comprise a height of about 0.5 mm (.02"), for example, which can be higher than the depth of the plate channels 7145, such that the fabric contacting surfaces 7141 thereof extend from the frame 7044 of the anvil 7040. Referring now to Fig. 172, the The plates 7143 can be connected together by at least one weld 7149 at the distal ends of the plates 7143, for example.

As illustrated in Figs. 171 and 172, each plate of cavities 7143 may comprise a plurality of forming cavities 7142 defined therein. The forming cavities 7142 can be formed in the plates 7143 by any suitable manufacturing process, such as a grinding process and / or an electroerosion process, for example. For example, with reference now to Figs. 173 and 174, each shaping cavity 7142 can be fabricated by first forming a deep well 7150, then forming an arcuate or curved surface 7151 surrounding the deep well 7150, and then forming a staple leg guide flute. 7152 on the curved surface 7151, for example. Alternatively, these steps can be executed in any suitable order. Referring now to Fig. 175, the staple forming cavities 7142 can be formed in such a way that the inner edges 7153 of the shaping cavities are separated by a constant, or at least substantially constant, distance 7154. For example, the separation 7154 may be approximately 0.2 mm (.008"), for example. Further, for example, the forming cavities 7142 can be positioned along two or more rows or lines, the center lines of which can be separated by a constant, or at least substantially constant, separation 7155. For example, the separation 7155 between the center lines may be approximately 0.89 mm (.035"), for example. Referring again to Fig. 175, each shaping cavity 7142 can taper between a narrow width 7156 and a wide width 7157. For example, the narrow width 7156 can be approximately 1.1 mm (.045") and the wide width 7157 can be approximately 1.9 mm (.075"), for example. The plates 7143 may be comprised of the same material as the frame 7144. For example, the plates 7143 and the frame 7144 can both be comprised of stainless steel, such as a stainless steel of the 300 series or one of the 400 series, for example, and / or titanium, for example. Alternatively, the plates 7143 and the frame 7144 may be comprised of different materials. For example, the plates 7143 may be comprised of a ceramic material, for example, and the frame 7144 may be comprised of stainless steel and / or titanium, for example. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, at least one brazing process could be used to secure the plates 7143 in the frame 7144, in addition, or instead of the welding processes described above, for example.

With reference now to Figs. 176 to 178, an anvil 7240 may comprise a frame 7244 and a plurality of cavity plates 7243 that may be inserted in the frame 7244. Similar to the foregoing, each cavity plate 7243 may comprise a plurality of forming cavities 7242 defined therein. . The anvil frame 7244 may comprise retention grooves 7246 defined therein, each of which may be configured to receive a retaining rail 7247 extending from a cavity plate 7243. In order to assemble the cavity plates 7243 the Anvil frame 7244, the side walls 7245 of the anvil frame 7244 can flex or extend outwards, as it is illustrated in Fig. 177, with the aim of enlarging the retention grooves 7246, so that each retaining groove 7246 can receive therein a retaining rail 7247 from a cavity plate 7243. Once the recesses 7246 7247 retention have been positioned in the retention grooves 7246, the side walls 7245 can be released, as illustrated in Fig. 178, which thus allows the frame 7244 to contract flexibly and / or return to its non-flexed state. In such circumstances, the retention slots 7246 can be contracted and thereby capture the retaining rails 7247. The retaining rails 7247 and / or the retaining grooves 7246 can comprise one or more auxiliary tapered surfaces which, after the flexed retaining grooves 7246 have been released, can form a tapered locking coupling that can hold the retaining rails 7247 in the retention grooves 7246. Similar to the above, the cavity plates 7243 may comprise the same material or a different material of the frame 7244. For example, the plates 7243 may be comprised of a ceramic material, for example, and the frame 7244 may be comprised of stainless steel and / or titanium, for example. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, at least one brazing process and / or at least one welding process, for example, could be used to secure the plates 7243 in the frame 7244.

In Figs. 179 and 180, a surgical cutting and stapling instrument 8010 may comprise an anvil 8014, which can be repeatedly opened and closed around its rotating union to a blood channel. elongated staples 8016. A staple application unit 8012 may comprise the anvil 8014 and the channel 8016, wherein the unit 8012 may be proximally coupled to the elongate shaft 8018 that forms a portion of the instrument 8022. When the staple application unit 8012 is closed, or at least substantially closed, the portion of the instrument 8022 may have a sufficiently small cross section suitable for inserting the staple application unit 8012 through a trocar. The unit 8012 can be operated by a handle 8020 connected to the rod 8018. The handle 8020 can comprise user controls such as a rotary knob 8030 which rotates the elongate shaft 8018 and the staple application unit 8012 about a longitudinal axis of the stem 8018. A latch trigger 8026, which can rotate in front of a handle 8036 about a latch trigger pin 8152 (Fig. 181) coupled laterally through the handle housing 8154, can be pressed to close the application unit of the latch. staples 8012. According to the invention, a lock release button 8038 may be displayed outwardly in the handle 8020 when the closure trigger 8026 is held in such a manner that the release button 8038 may be pressed to release the closure trigger 8026 and opening the staple application assembly 8012, as described in more detail below. A firing trigger 8034, which can rotate forward closure trigger 8026 may cause the application unit 8012 staples simultaneously cut and staple tissue clamped therein. In various circumstances, as described in greater Detail below, multiple trip displacements can be employed by using trigger 8034 to reduce the amount of force that is required to be applied by the surgeon's hand by displacement. The handle 8020 may comprise rotating indicator wheels on the right and / or left 8040, 8041 (Figure 181) which may indicate the progress of the shot. For example, the complete trip of the trip may require three full trip movements of the trip trigger 8034 and, thus, the indicator wheels 8040, 8041 may rotate up to one third of one revolution each by displacement of trip trigger 8034. As shown in FIG. described in greater detail below, a manual release release lever 8042 may allow the firing system to retract before the full firing displacement has been completed, if desired and, in addition, the firing release lever 8042 it may allow a surgeon, or other clinician, to retract the firing system in the event that the firing system sticks and / or fails.

With reference to Figs. 179 and 181, the elongate shaft 8018 may comprise an outer structure that includes a longitudinally alternating closure tube 8024 that rotates the anvil 8014 toward its closed position in response to the proximal depression of the closure trigger 8026 of the handle 8020. The channel elongate 8018 can be connected to the handle 8020 by a frame 8028 (Fig. 181) which is internal to the closure tube 8024. The frame 8028 can be rotatably coupled to the handle 8020 so that the rotation of the rotary knob 8030 (Fig. 179) can rotating the portion of the instrument 8022. With particular reference to Fig. 181, the rotary knob 8030 may comprise two halves which may include one or more interior projections 8031 which may extend through one or more elongated side openings 8070 in the tube 8024 and coupled to the frame 8028. As a result of the above, the rotary knob 8030 and the frame 8028 can be rotated together, or synchronously, in such a manner that the rotated position of the button 8030 determines the rotated position of the portion of the instrument 8022. The length along the longer opening 8070 is long enough to allow the longitudinal closing movement, and the opening movement, of the closure tube 8024. With respect to generating the closing movement of the tube of closure 8024, with reference mainly to Figs. 181 and 183, an upper portion 8160 of the closure trigger 8026 can push a closure bearing 8162 forward by means of a lock connection 8164. The closure connection 8164 is rotatably engaged at its distal end by a bearing pin 8166 to the closure bearing 8162 and rotatably engaged at its proximal end by a pin of the closure connection 8168. The closure trigger 8026 can be pushed to an open position by a tension spring of the closure trigger 8246 which it is connected proximally to the upper portion 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 and a handle housing 8154 formed by the right and left cover halves 8156, 8158. The tension force applied by the tension spring 8246 can be overcome by a closing force applied to the trigger of closing 8026 in order to advance the bearing 8162, the closing connection 8164, and the closing tube 8024 distally.

As the closing trigger 8026 is actuated, or pressed, as described above, the lock release button 8038 can be positioned, such that the surgeon, or other clinician, can push the lock release button 8038 , if desired, and allow the closing trigger 8026, and the rest of the surgical instrument, to return to a non-actuated state. The lock release button 8038 can be connected to a swivel lock arm 8172 by a central side pivot 8173, such that the movement between the release button 8038 and the locking arm 8172 can be transferred. Referring again to FIG. 181, a compression spring 8174 can press the closure release button 8038 proximally, i.e. clockwise around the central side pivot 8173 as seen from the right and the upper portion 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 may include a proximal ridge 8170 with a rear notch 8171. As the closing trigger 8026 is pressure, the swivel lock arm 8172 can be mounted on the proximal ridge 8170 and when the closing trigger 8026 reaches its fully depressed position, it should be noted that the rear notch 8171 is presented below the rotating locking arm 8172 that falls and blocks against the rear notch 8171 under the thrust of the compression spring 8174. At that point, the manual depression of the lock release button 8038 rotates the locking arm rotary 8172 up and out of the rear notch 8171 which thus unlocks the closing trigger 8026 and allows the closing trigger 8026 to return to its unclamped position.

Once the closing trigger 8026 is held proximally, as discussed above, the trigger 8034 can be pulled out to the handle 8036 for the purpose of advancing a firing rod 8032 distally from the handle 8020. The firing trigger 8032 shot 8034 can rotate about a trigger trigger pin 8202 that traverses laterally and engages with the right and left cover halves 8156, 8158 of handle 8020. Trigger trigger 8034, when actuated, can advance a cocking mechanism. articulated transmission shot 8150. The articulated transmission firing mechanism 8150 can be pushed to a retracted, non-fired position by a spring 8184 which, one, engages the handle 8036 of the handle 8020 and, two, engages with one of the articulations, for example, of the articulated transmission firing mechanism 8150 as described in more detail below. The spring 8184 may comprise a stationary end 8186 connected to the housing 8154 and a mobile end 8188 connected to a proximal end 8190 of a steel strip 8192. A distally disposed end 8194 of the steel strip 8192 may be coupled to a joining feature 8195 in a front union 8196a of a plurality of unions 8196a-8196d that form a joint rack 8200. The joint rack 8200 can be flexible, such t so that it can be easily retracted within the grip 8036 and minimize the length of the handle 8020 and still form a rigid rigid frame assembly that can transfer a significant firing force towards and / or through the firing rod 8032. As described in Further detail below, trigger trigger 8034 can be coupled with a first link 8196a during a first actuation of trigger 8034, coupled with a second link 8196b during a second trigger trigger 8034, coupled with a third link 8196c during a third actuation of trigger 8034, and coupling with a fourth union 8196d during a fourth actuation of firing trigger 8034, wherein each actuation of firing trigger 8034 can advance the fastener rack 8200 distally an incremental amount. In addition to the above, the multiple displacements of the firing trigger 1034 can rotate the right and left indicator wheels 1040, 1041 to indicate the distance that the joint rack 8200 has advanced.

With reference now to Figs. 181 and 183, an anti-reverse mechanism 8250 can prevent the tension / compression combination spring 8184 from retracting the joint rack 8200 between the trip displacements. According to the invention, a coupling slide tube 8131 abuts the first connection 8196a and is connected to the trigger rod 8032 to communicate the firing movement. The trigger rod 8032 extends proximally out of a proximal end of the frame 8028 and through a through hole 8408 of a backstop plate 8266. The through hole 8408 is dimensioned to slidably receive the firing rod 8032 when it is aligned perpendicularly but to stick it when it enters inclined. A coupling of the lower tab 8271 extends proximally from a lower edge of the proximal end of the frame 8028, which extends through an opening 8269 at a lower edge of the non-return plate 8266. This coupling of the lower tab 8271 extracts the portion bottom of the backstop plate 8266 proximate the frame 8028 so that the backstop plate 8266 is perpendicular when the firing rod 8032 advances distally and the rear upper part is allowed to tilt in a stuck state when it attempts to retract the firing rod 8032. 8264 backstop compression spring is bounded distally by the proximal end of the 8028 frame and proximally abuts an upper portion of the 8266 backstop plate, which presses the anti-reverse plate 8266 to a blocking state. In opposition to the spring pressure, an anti-kickback camshaft 8268 slidably encloses the coupling slide tube 8131 and abuts the backstop plate 8266. A proximally projecting backspin 8256 coupled to the anti-kickback cam tube 8268 extends over the upper part of the closing bearing 8162.

With reference to Fig. 181, an 8289 articulated automatic retraction mechanism is incorporated into the instrument surgical cut and staple 8010 to cause the blade to retract at the end of the full trip movement. To that end, the distal articulation 8196d includes a tongue 8290 projecting upwards as the distal joint 8196d advances within the rack channel 8291 (Fig. 181) formed in the seal bearing 8162. This tab 8290 is aligned to activate a lower proximal cam 8292 in an anti-reverse release lever 8248 (Fig. 186). With particular reference to Figs. 186 and 187, the structures formed in the right and left halves 8156, 8158 limit the movement of the anti-reverse release lever 8248. A pin receptacle 8296 and the circular pin 8293 formed respectively between the right and left halves 8156, 8158 are received through a longitudinally elongated opening 8294 formed in the anti-reverse release lever 8248 distal to the lower proximal cam 8292, thus allowing longitudinal translation as well as rotation around the circular pin 8293. In the right half 8156, an open channel proximally 8295 includes a horizontal proximal portion 8295a communicating with an upward angled portion and distal direction 8295b receiving a right rear pin 8297 (Fig. 187) near the proximal end of the anti-reverse release lever 8248, which thus imparts an upward rotation as the antiretress release lever Cesium 8248 reaches the most distal portion of its translation. A locking structure formed in the right half 8156 proximal to the anti-reverse release lever 8248 prevents movement proximal thereof once it is assembled to hold the posterior pin to the right 8297 in the proximally open channel 8295.

In addition to the above, as shown in Figs. 187 and 188, a distal end 8254 of the anti-reverse release lever 8248 is thus pushed distally and downwardly, which causes a front right pin 8298 to fall into the distally open step structure 8299 formed in the right half 8156, which this coupling is pushed by a compression spring 8300 (Fig. 188) hooked to a left hook 8301 on the anti-reverse release lever 8248 between the front pin to the right 8298 and the longitudinally elongated aperture 8294. The other end of the compression spring 8300 is coupled to a hook 8302 (Figs 186, 188, 189) formed in the right half 8156 in a more proximal and lower position just above the lock bearing 8266. Compression spring 8300 thus pulls the end distal 8254 of the anti-reverse release lever 8248 down and backward, which results in the front pin to the right 8298 being blocked in the step structure open distally 8299 when advancing distally. Thus, once actuated, with reference to Fig. 189, the anti-reverse release lever 8248 remains as a front support of the backstop 8266 in a perpendicular position and thus allows the rack of joints 8200 to be retracted. When the bearing of closing 8266 is retracted further when the end effector 8012 is released, a reset tab projecting upwards 8303 in the bearing of closure 8266 comes into contact with a lower distal cam 8305 of the anti-reverse release lever 8248, which lifts the front pin to the right 8298 out of the distally open step structure 8299, so that the non-return compression spring 8264 can push proximally the anti-reverse cam tube 8268 and the anti-reverse release lever 8248 towards its retracted positions (Fig. 186).

With reference to Figs. 179 and 189, the firing trigger 8034 can be operatively coupled to the joint rack 8200 in any suitable manner. With particular reference to Figs. 180 and 185, trigger 8034 rotates about a trigger trigger pin 8202 which is connected to housing 8154. An upper portion 8204 of trigger 8034 moves distally about trigger trigger pin 8202 as the trigger activates. firing trigger 8034 is pressed towards handle 8036, which stretches a tension spring of proximally placed firing trigger 8206 (Fig. 181) connected proximally between upper portion 8204 of trigger 8034 and housing 8154. Upper portion 8204 of the trigger activator 8034 is coupled to the joint rack 8200 during each depression of the trigger activator by means of a spring-biased side ratchet mechanism 8210. When the trigger activator is released, the side ratchet mechanism is decoupled from the 8200 junction rack and trip trigger can be returned to a non-pressed position, or not triggered. In operation, a track with right side on ramp formed by a beveled surface facing to the right and proximally 8284 in each of the joints 8196a-8196d is coupled by a side ratchet assembly 8285. Particularly, a ratchet slide 8270 (Figs 181 and 183) has lower right and left guides 8272 which slide respectively on a left track 8274 (Fig. 181) formed in the closing bearing 8266 below the rack channel 8291 and a right track 8275 on a closing bearing rail 8276 which equalizes the rack channel 8291 and engages a cover of the rack channel 8277, which closes an open portion to the right of the rack channel 8291 in the closure bearing 8266, which is distal to the travel of the ratchet slide 8270. In Figs. 181, 182, and 185, a compression spring 8278 is engaged between a hook 8279 in a proximal upper position in the closing bearing rail 8276 and a hook 8280 on a distal right side of the ratcheting slide 8270, which holds the ratcheting slide 8270 proximally in contact with the upper portion 8204 of the firing trigger 8034.

With particular reference to Fig. 181, a ratchet block 8318 sits on the ratchet slide 8270 which revolves around a vertical rear pin 8320 which traverses a left proximal corner of the ratchet block 8318 and the ratchet slide 8270. ejection block recess 8322 is formed in a distal portion of an upper surface of block 8318 to receive an ejector block 8324 fixed therearound by a vertical pin 8326 whose lower tip extends within ratchet spring recess 8328 on the upper surface of the ratchet slide 8270. A ratchet spring 8330 in the ratchet spring recess 8328 extends to the right of the vertical front pin 8326 which urges the ratchet block 8318 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above in engagement with the ramp-right track 8282. A small helical spring 8332 in the recess of the ejection block 8322 pushes the ejection block 8324 to turn clockwise when viewed from above , its proximal end is pushed into contact with a contoured edge 8334 formed in the seal bearing 8266 above the rack channel 8291. As shown in Fig. 184, the strongest mechanical advantage of the ratchet spring 8330 on the spring small helical 8332 means that the ratchet block 8318 tends to engage with the ejector block 8324 rotated in the clockwise direction. In Fig. 185When trigger 8034 is fully depressed and begins to release, ejector block 8324 encounters a ridge 8336 at contoured edge 8334 as ratchet slider 8270 retracts, forcing ejector block 8324 to rotate clockwise when viewed from above and, thus, ejects the ratchet block 8318 from its coupling with the joint rack 8200. The shape of the ejector block recess 8322 stops rotation in the direction of clock hands of the ejector block 8324 in an orientation perpendicular to the contoured edge 8334 which maintains this decoupling during full retraction and, thus, ratchet noise is eliminated.

In Figs. 181, 183, 190, and 195, the surgical cutting and stapling instrument 8010 may include a manual retraction mechanism 8500 which provides a manual release of the trigger mechanism, manual retraction, and in one version (Figs 196 to 202) performs, in addition, the automatic retraction at the end of the complete trip movement. With reference now to Figs. 181, 190, and 191, particularly, a front intermediate gear 8220 engages a top, left gear surface 8222 of the gear rack 8200, wherein the front intermediate gear 8220 is further coupled to a rear intermediate gear 8230 which Both have a lower ratchet gear with smaller right side 8231. Both the intermediate intermediate gear 8220 and the rear intermediate gear 8230 are rotatably connected to the handle housing 8154 respectively on the front intermediate shaft 8232 and the rear intermediate shaft 8234. Each end of the rear axle 8232 extends through the respective right and left halves of the housing 8156, 8158 and engages the left and right indicator wheels 8040, 8041 and, because the rear axle 8234 rotates freely in the handle housing 8154 and has a fixed coupling to the rear gear 8230, the indicator wheels 8040, 8041 rotate with the rear gear 8230. The relationship of engagement between the joint rack 8200, the intermediate gear 8220 and the rear gear 8230 can advantageously be selected such that the toothed top surface 8222 has tooth dimensions that are suitably strong and that the rear gear 8230 realizes no more than one turn during the full trip movement of the articulated drive trigger mechanism 8150. In addition to the gear mechanism 8502 which visually indicates the trip movement, or the progress, the gear mechanism 8502 can be used, moreover, to manually retract the blade . The smaller right side ratchet gear 8231 of the rear idler gear 8230 extends within a hub 8506 of the manual retract lever 8042, which is specifically aligned with a longitudinally aligned vertical groove 8508 (Figure 190) that bisects the hub 8506 A side through hole 8510 of the hub 8506 communicates with an upper recess 8512. A leading portion 8514 is shaped to receive a proximally directed locking pawl 8516 that rotates about a right-hand side pin 8518 formed at a distal end of the hub. upper recess 8512. A rear portion 8520 is shaped to receive an L-shaped spring tab 8522 that urges the locking pawl 8516 downwardly in engagement with the smaller ratchet gear on the right side 8231. A delay structure 8524 (Figs 186 and 193) is projected from the right half 8156 into the upper recess 8512 that delays the trin coupling Locking Screw 8516 with the ratchet gear on the smaller right side 8231 when the manual retract lever 8042 is down (Fig. 193). A coil spring 8525 (Fig. 181) pushes the manual retract lever 8042 downwardly.

In operation, as shown in Figs. 192 and 193, the tension / compression combination spring 8184 can be left disconnected with the junction rack positioned distally. In Figs. 194 and 195, as the manual retract lever 8042 is raised, the locking pawl 8516 rotates clockwise and is no longer held by the delay structure 8524 and engages with the ratchet gear of the ratchet. smaller right side 8231, which rotates the rear intermediate gear 8230 clockwise when viewed from the left. Thus, the intermediate forward gear 8220 responds with the retraction of the joint rack 8200 in the counterclockwise direction. In addition, a curved crest to the right 8510 projects outward from the hub 8506, sized to contact and move distally the anti-kickback lever 8248 to release the backstop mechanism 8250 when the manual retract lever 8042 is rotated.

In Figs. 196 to 202, an automatic retraction mechanism 8600 for a surgical stapling and cutting instrument 8010a can incorporate the automatic retraction at the end of the full tripping movement in a forward intermediate gear 8220a having a tooth 8602 that moves within a circular groove 8604 on a cam wheel 8606 until a lock 8608 is found after an almost complete turn corresponding to three trip movements. In such circumstances, the right crest 8610 is rotated upwardly in contact with a lower cam recess 8612 to distally move a non-return release lever 8248a. With particular reference to Fig. 197, the lever of Backspace release 8248a includes distal end 8254 which functions as described above. The circular pin 8293 and the pin receptacle 8296 formed between the right and left halves 8156, 8158 is received through a generally rectangular opening 8294a formed in the anti-kickback release lever 8248a in the rear part of the lower cam 8192, which allows thus the longitudinal translation as well as the downward locking movement of the distal end 8254 of the anti-reverse release lever 8248a. In its right half 8156, a proximally horizontal open channel 8295a receives the rear pin to the right 8297 near the proximal end of the anti-reverse release lever 8248a.

In operation, before firing in Figs. 198, 198A, the joint rack 8200 and the non-return cam tube 8268 are in a retracted position, which locks the backstop mechanism 8250 because the non-return compression spring 8264 proximally tilts the non-return plate 8266. The automatic retraction mechanism 8600 is in an initial state with the anti-reverse release lever 8248a retracted with the union 8196a in contact with the intermediate forward gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 is in a position of the hour six with the complete displacement of the circular groove 8604 progressing in the counterclockwise direction of this with the crest to the right 8610 just proximal to the tooth 8602. In Figs. 199, 199A, there has been a trip displacement that raises a distal joint 8196b in contact with the intermediate gear forward 8220a. The tooth 8602 has progressed a third of a turn through the circular groove 8604 of the immobile cam wheel 8606. In Figs. 200, 200A, a second trip movement has occurred which raises a plus hinge 8196c in contact with the forward intermediate gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 has progressed two thirds of a turn through the circular groove 8604 of the immobile cam wheel 8606. In Figs. 201, 201 A, a third trip displacement has occurred which raises a distal joint 8196d in contact with the intermediate forward gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 has progressed completely around the circular groove 8604 in contact with the lock 8608 which starts the rotation in the counterclockwise direction (when viewed from the right) of the cam wheel 8606 leading the edge to the right 8608 in contact with the anti-reverse release lever 8248a. In Fig.202, the anti-reverse release lever 8248a has moved distally in response to this, which locks the forward pin to the right 8298 within the distally open step structure 8299 and releases the 8250 anti-kickback mechanism. Similar surgical stapling is described in U.S. Pat. 7,083,075, issued August 1, 2006, the full description of which is incorporated by reference in the present description.

With reference to Fig. 203, the staple application unit 9012 of a surgical stapling instrument 9010 performs the functions of holding the tissue, driving the staples and cutting the tissue by two separate movements transferred longitudinally along the stem 9016 in relation to a shank frame 9070. This shank frame 9070 is proximally coupled to a handle of a surgical stapling instrument and engages thereto to rotate about a longitudinal axis. A multi-displacement handle illustrative for the stapling and surgical cutting instrument is described in greater detail in the co-pending and co-owned US patent application entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT INCORPORATING A MULTISTROKE FIRING POSITION INDICATOR AND RETRACTION MECHANISM, no. series 10 / 374,026, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Other applications consistent with the present invention may incorporate a single shot displacement, as described in the co-pending United States patent application SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING SEPARATE DISTINCT CLOSING AND FIRING SYSTEMS, no. series 10 / 441,632, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

With particular reference to Fig. 204, the distal end of the rod frame 9070 engages the staple channel 9018. The anvil 9022 has a rotatable proximal end 9072 that is rotatably received within a proximal end 9074 of the staple channel 9018, just distal to its engagement with the shank frame 9070. When the anvil 9022 is rotated downwardly, the anvil 9022 moves a surface in contact with the tissue 9028 and the forming cavities 9026 toward a staple cartridge opposite, described in more detail below. The rotating end 9072 of the anvil 9022 includes a locking feature 9076 proximal but distal to its rotatable connection with the staple channel 9018. Thus, a closure tube 9078, the distal end of which includes a horseshoe opening 9080 that engages this feature. of closure 9076, selectively imparts an opening movement to anvil 9022 during proximal longitudinal movement and a closing movement to anvil 9022 during longitudinal distal movement of closure tube 9078 that slides on stem frame 9070 in response to a trigger closing, similar to the previous one. The rod frame 9070 comprises and guides a firing movement from the handle through a longitudinally alternating movement of a two-piece firing rod and rod 9090. Particularly, the rod frame 9070 includes a groove of the firing rod longitudinal 9092 receiving a proximal portion of the blade and two-piece firing rod 9090, specifically a conical firing rod 9094. It should be noted that the laminated conical firing rod 9094 can be replaced with a solid firing rod and / or any other suitable materials.

An E-beam 9102 is the distal portion of the two-piece trigger rod 9090, which facilitates independent closing and firing as well as separation of the anvil 9022 from the elongated staple channel 9018 during firing. With particular reference to Figs. 204 and 205 in addition to any bonding treatment such as brazing or an adhesive, the 9090 trigger blade and rod are formed from a female vertical union aperture 9104 formed proximally on E-beam 9102 receiving a corresponding male coupling member 9106 distally presented by the laminated conical firing rod 9094, which allows each portion to conform to a selected material and the appropriate process for its different functions (for example, strength, flexibility, friction). The E-beam 9102 can conveniently be formed of a material having suitable material properties to form a pair of upper pins 9110, a pair of central pins 9112 and a lower pin or foot 9114, as well as being able to acquire an edge of Sharp cut 9116. In addition, the upper guide 9118 and the central guide 9120 integrally formed and projecting proximally that hold each vertical end of the cutting edge 9116 further define a load area of the fabric 9122 that helps guide the fabric before cutting it towards the edge of sharp cutting 9116. The central guide 9120 also serves to couple and fire the staple application apparatus 9012 by contacting a stepped central member 9124 of a wedge slider 9126 (FIG. 206) which effects the shaping of staples by the staple application unit 9012, as described in more detail below. The conformation of these characteristics (for example, the upper pins 9110, the central pins 9112, and the lower foot 9114) integrally with the E-beam 9102 facilitates manufacturing to tighter tolerances relative to each other as compared to assembling them to from a plurality of parties, which guarantees its desired operation during tripping and / or effective interaction with various locking features of the staple application unit 9012.

In Figs. 207 and 208, in staple application unit 9012 it is shown open, with E-beam 9102 completely retracted. During assembly, the bottom foot 9114 of the E-beam 9102 is lowered through a widened hole 9130 in the staple channel 9018 and the E-beam 9102 then advances in such a way that the E-beam 9102 slides distally along a lower track 9132 formed in the staple channel 9018. Particularly, the lower track 9132 includes a narrow slot 9133 that opens as a widened slot 9134 in a lower surface of the staple channel 9018 to form an inverted T in the lateral cross section, as particularly shown in Figs. 208 and 209, which communicates with the enlarged hole 9130. Once assembled, the components coupled proximally to the laminated conical firing rod 9094 do not allow the lower foot 9114 to move proximally back towards the enlarged hole 9130 to allow decoupling. With reference to Fig. 210, the laminated conical firing rod 9094 facilitates the insertion of the staple application unit 9012 through a trocar. In particular, a downward, more distal projection 9136 lifts the E-beam 9102 when it fully retracts. This is done by placing the downward projection 9136 at a point where it rises upward at a proximal edge of the enlarged hole 9130 in the staple channel 9018. Referring now to FIG. 211, the conical trigger rod laminated 9094 further improves the operation of certain locking features that can be incorporated into the staple channel 9018 by including a more proximal upward projection 9138 that is pushed downward by the rod frame 9070 during an initial portion of the trip movement . Particularly, a side rod 9140 is defined between a pair of square openings 9142 in the rod frame 9070 (Fig.204). A clip spring 9144 encompassing the side rod 9140 pushes down a portion of the laminated conical firing rod 9094 that projects distally out of the groove of the longitudinal firing rod 9092, which ensures that certain advantageous locking features engage when be suitable This thrust is more pronounced or confined solely to that portion of the trigger displacement when the upward projection 9138 comes into contact with the clip spring 9144.

In Figs. 207 and 208, the E-beam 9102 is retracted with the upper pins 9110 thereof that settle within an anvil cavity 9150 near the rotating proximal end of the anvil 9022. A downward vertical open anvil groove 9152 (Fig. 203 ) is laterally widened on the anvil 9022 on an inner track of the anvil 9154 which captures the upper pins 9110 of the E-beam 9102 as they are advanced distally during firing, as shown in Figs. 210 and 211, which affirmatively separate the anvil 9022 from the staple channel 9018. Thus, with the retracted E-beam 9102, the surgeon can repeatedly open and close the staple application unit 9012 until it is satisfied with the placement and orientation of the fabric captured in it for stapling and cutting, although the E-beam 9102 helps in the proper positioning of the fabric even for a staple application unit 9012 of reduced diameter and correspondingly reduced stiffness. In Figs. 203, 204, 206, 207, 209, and 215, the staple application unit 9012 is shown with the replaceable staple cartridge 9020 that includes the wedge slider 9126. The plurality aligned and longitudinally parallel of the open wedge slots toward down 9202 (Fig. 209) receives the respective wedges 9204 integral to wedge slider 9126. In Figs. 209 to 211, the wedge slider 9126 thus lifts up a plurality of staple drivers 9206 vertically slidable within the recesses of the staple drivers 9208. In this illustrative version, each staple driver 9206 includes two vertical projections, each moving through upwardly within a respective staple hole 9210, or cavity 9024, for ejecting upwardly and deforming a staple 9023 which sits on it against a staple forming surface 9214 (Fig. 211) of the anvil 9022. A shot recess central 9216 (Fig.204) defined within the staple cartridge 9020 next to the staple channel 9018 allows passage of the lower, horizontal portion 9218 (Fig.206) of the wedge slider 9126, as well as the central pins 9112 E-beam 9102. Specifically, a tray of staple cartridges 9220 (Figs 204, 209) engages and is the base of a body of the polymer staple cartridge 9222 that is formed in the shape of a staple cartridge. This recesses of staple drivers 9208, holes for staples 9210, and the central firing recess 9216. Because the staples 9023 thus conform to either side, the sharpened cutting edge 9116 enters a vertical through slot 9230 passing through the longitudinal axis of the staple cartridge 9020, with the exception only from one more distal end of this.

The firing of the staple application unit 9012 begins as shown in Fig. 211 with the two-piece firing rod and rod 9090 being withdrawn proximally until the downward projection 9136 lifts the central guide 9120 in the E- beam 9102 up and back, which allows a new staple cartridge 9020 to be inserted into the staple channel 9018 when the anvil 9022 opens as shown in FIGS. 203 and 207. In Fig. 212, the two-piece blading rod and rod 9090 has been advanced distally a small distance, which allows the downward projection 9136 to fall into the enlarged hole 9130 of the lower track 9132 under the thrust of the clip spring 9144 against the upward projection 9138 of the laminated conical firing rod 9094. The central guide 9120 prevents further downward rotation by seating it on the stepped central member 9124 of the wedge slider 9126, which thus maintains the central pin 9112 of the E-beam within the central firing recess 9216. In Fig. 213, the two-piece firing rod and rod 9090 has been fired distally, which advances the wedge slider 9126 to cause conformation of the staples 9023 while cutting the tissue 9242 held between the anvil 9022 and the staple cartridge 9020 with the sharp cutting edge 9116. After that, in Fig. 214, the knife and shooting ring Two 9090 pieces are retracted, which leaves the wedge slider 9126 positioned distally. In Fig. 215, the middle pin 9112 is allowed to translate downwardly within a locking recess 9240 formed in the staple channel 9018 (see, further, Figs 208, 211). Thus, the operator would receive a tactile indication when the middle pin 9112 encounters the distal edge of the locking recess 9240 when the wedge slider 9126 (not shown in Fig. 215) is not positioned proximally (ie, the cartridge is missing). staples 9020 or the staple cartridge 9020 was used up). Similar surgical stapling instruments are described in U.S. Pat. 7,380,696, issued June 3, 2008, the full description of which is incorporated by reference in the present description.

Optionally, as described above, a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body that includes a plurality of staple cavities defined therein. The cartridge body may comprise a cover and an upper cover surface, wherein each staple pocket may define an opening in the surface of the cover. As further described above, a staple can be positioned within each staple pocket, such that the staples are stored within the body of the cartridge until they are ejected therefrom. Before being expelled from the cartridge body, the staples may be contained with the cartridge body so that the staples do not protrude above the cover surface. As the staples they are positioned below the cover surface, in such cases, the possibility of the staples being damaged and / or coming into premature contact with the target tissue may be reduced. In various circumstances, the staples may move between an un-fired position in which they do not protrude from the cartridge body and a fired position in which they have emerged from the cartridge body and may be in contact with an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge. The anvil, and / or the forming cavities defined within the anvil, can be positioned at a predetermined distance above the cover surface so that, as the staples of the cartridge body unfold, the staples deform to a predetermined shaped height. In some circumstances, the thickness of the tissue captured between the anvil and the staple cartridge may vary and, as a result, the thicker tissue may be captured within certain staples while the thinner tissue may be captured within certain other staples. In any case, the pressure, or clamping force, applied to the fabric by the staples may vary from staple to staple or vary between a staple at one end of a row of staples and a staple at the other end of the row of staples, for example. In certain circumstances, the separation between the anvil and the cover of the staple cartridge can be controlled, such that the staples apply a certain minimum clamping pressure within each staple. In some of these circumstances, however, there may still be significant variation in clamping pressure within different staples.

As described in the present description, a staple cartridge may comprise means for compensating the thickness of the tissue captured within the staples deployed from the staple cartridge. With reference to Fig. 216, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 10000, for example, may include a first rigid portion, such as the support portion 10010, for example, and a second compressible portion, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example. With reference principally to Fig. 218, the support portion 10010 may comprise a cartridge body, an upper cover surface 10011, and a plurality of staple pockets 10012 wherein, similar to the foregoing, each staple pocket 10012 may defining an opening in the cover surface 10011. A staple 10030, for example, can be removably positioned in each staple pocket 10012. For example, with reference primarily to FIG. 245 and as described in greater detail below, each staple 10030 may comprise a base 10031 and one or more legs 10032 extending from the base 10031. Before the staples 10030 are deployed, as described, further, in more detail below, the bases 10031 of the staples 10030 can be supported by the staple drivers positioned within the support portion 10010 and, simultaneously, the legs 10032 of the staples 10030 can be contained at least partially within the s staple cavities 10012. The staples 10030 can be deployed between an un-fired position and a fired position so that the legs 10032 move through the tissue thickness compensator 10020, penetrate through a upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, penetrate the tissue T, and come into contact with an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge 10000. As the legs 10032 deform against the anvil, the legs 10032 of each staple 10030 can capturing a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and a portion of the tissue T within each staple 10030 and applying a compressive force to the tissue. In addition to the above, the legs 10032 of each staple 10030 can be deformed downwardly towards the base 10031 of the staple to form a staple capture area 10039 in which the tissue T and the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be captured. various circumstances, the staple capture area 10039 can be defined between the internal surfaces of the deformed legs 10032 and the inner surface of the base 10031. The size of the capture zone for a staple may depend on several factors such as the length of the staple. the legs, the diameter of the legs, the width of the base, and / or the degree to which the legs deform, for example.

Previously, for the tissue that is stapled a surgeon often needed to select the appropriate staples that have the appropriate staple height. For example, a surgeon may select high staples for use with thick tissue and short staples for use with thin tissue. In some circumstances, however, the tissue that was stapled did not have a constant thickness and, thus, some staples were unable to achieve the desired fired configuration. For example, Fig. 250 illustrates a high staple used in thin tissue. With reference now to Fig. 251, when a Fabric thickness compensator, such as the tissue thickness compensator 10020, for example, is used with thin tissue, for example, the larger staple may conform to a desired fired configuration.

Due to the compressibility of the fabric thickness compensator, the fabric thickness compensator can compensate for the thickness of the tissue captured within each staple. More particularly, with reference now to Figs. 245 and 246, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example, can consume larger and / or smaller portions of the staple capture area 10039 of each staple 10030 as a function of thickness and / or the type of fabric contained within the staple capture area 10039. For example, if thinner tissue T is captured within a staple 10030, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may consume a larger portion of the staple capture area 10039 compared to the circumstances where the thicker tissue T is captured within of the staple 10030. Correspondingly, if thicker tissue T is captured within a staple 10030, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may consume a smaller portion of the staple capture area 10039 compared to the circumstances, where captures the thinnest tissue T within staple 10030. In this way, the tissue thickness compensator can compensate for thinner tissue and / or thicker tissue and ensure that compressive pressure is applied to the tissue independently, or at least substantially independent of the thickness of the tissue captured within the staples. In addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can compensate for the different types, or compressibilities, of the fabrics captured within different staples 10030. Referring now to FIG. 246, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can apply a compressive force to vascular tissue T, which may include vessels V and, as a result, restrict blood flow through the less compressible vessels V while continuing to apply a desired compression pressure to the surrounding tissue T. In various circumstances, in addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can also compensate for malformed staples. With reference to Fig. 247, the mis-shaping of several staples 10030 may result in larger staple capture areas 10039 that are defined within such staples. Due to the flexibility of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, with reference now to FIG. 248, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 positioned within the malformed clips 10030 can still apply sufficient compressive pressure to the tissue T even though they can enlarging the staple capture zones 10039 defined within such malformed staples 10030. In various circumstances, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 located between the adjacent staples 10030 may be pressed against the tissue T by the suitably formed staples 10030 surrounding a staple poorly. shaped 10030 and, as a result, apply a compression pressure to the surrounding tissue and / or captured within malformed staples 10030, for example. In various circumstances, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for different tissue densities that they may be due to calcifications, fibrous areas, and / or because the tissue has been stapled or pretreated, for example.

According to the invention, a fixed or non-changeable tissue separation can be defined between the support portion and the anvil and, as a result, the staples can be deformed to a predetermined height despite the thickness of the tissue captured within the staples. . When a fabric thickness compensator is used in such cases, the fabric thickness compensator can be adapted to the tissue captured between the anvil and the staple cartridge support portion and, due to the elasticity of the tissue thickness compensator, the compensator of fabric thickness can apply an additional compression pressure to the fabric. With reference now to Figs. 252 to 257, a staple 10030 has been formed at a predefined height H. With respect to Fig. 252, a tissue thickness compensator has not been used and the tissue T consumes the entire staple capture area 10039. With respect to Fig. 259, a portion of a tissue thickness compensator 10020 that has been captured within the staple 10030, compresses the tissue T, and consumes at least a portion of the staple capture area 10039. With reference now to Fig. 254, the thin tissue T has been captured within the staple 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 2 / 9H and the thickness compensator of the compressed tissue 10020 has a height of approximately 7 / 9H, for example. Referring now to Fig. 255, the tissue T having an intermediate thickness has been captured within the staple 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of about 4 / 9H and the thickness compensator of compressed tissue 10020 has a height of about 5 / 9H, for example. Referring now to Fig. 256, the tissue T having an intermediate thickness has been captured within the staple 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 2 / 3H and the thickness compensator of the compressed tissue 10020 has a height of about 1 / 3H, for example. Referring now to Fig. 255, the coarse tissue T has been captured within the staple 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 8 / 9H and the thickness compensator of the compressed tissue 10020 has a height of approximately 1 / 9H, for example. In various circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height comprising approximately 10% of the staple capture height, approximately 20% of the staple capture height, approximately 30% of the capture height. of staple, approximately 40% of the staple capture height, approximately 50% of the staple capture height, approximately 60% of the staple capture height, approximately 70% of the staple capture height , approximately 80% of the staple capture height, and / or approximately 90% of the staple capture height, for example.

The staples 10030 may comprise any suitable non-conformed height. The staples 10030 may comprise an unformed height between about 2 mm and about 4.8 mm, per example. The staples 10030 can comprise an unshaped height of about 2.0 mm, about 2.5 mm, about 3.0 mm, about 3.4 mm, about 3.5 mm, about 3.8 mm, about 4.0 mm, about 4.1 mm, and / or about 4.8 mm, per example. The height H to which the staples can be deformed can be dictated by the distance between the cover surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 and the opposite anvil. The distance between the cover surface 10011 and the anvil tissue contacting surface may be approximately 2.5 mm (0.097"), for example. The height H can also be dictated by the depth of the forming cavities defined within the anvil. The shaping cavities may have a measured depth from the tissue contacting surface, for example. Optionally, as described in greater detail below, the staple cartridge 10000 may further comprise staple drivers that can raise the staples 10030 toward the anvil and raise, or "overdrive," the staples above the staple surface. cover 10011. In such cases, the height H to which the staples 10030 are formed can also be dictated by the distance at which the staples 10030 are overdriven. For example, staples 10030 may be overshoot approximately 0.71 mm (.028"), for example, and may result in staples 10030 being formed at a height of approximately 4.80 mm (0.189"), for example. Staples 10030 can be formed at a height of about 0.8 mm, about 1.0 mm, about 1.5 mm, approximately 1. 8 mm, approximately 2.0 mm, and / or approximately 2.25 mm, for example. The staples can be formed at a height between about 2.25 mm and about 3.0 mm, for example. In addition to the above, the height of the staple capture area of a staple can be determined by the formed height of the staple and the width, or diameter, of the staple wire. The height of the catch area of the staple 10039 of a staple 10030 may comprise the formed height H of the staple minus two wire diameter widths. The staple wire may comprise a diameter of about 0.23 mm (0.0089"), for example. The staple wire may comprise a diameter between about 0.18 mm (0.0069") and about 0.30 mm (0.0119"), for example, For example, the shaped height H of a staple 10030 may be approximately 4.8 mm (0.189") and the The diameter of the staple wire can be approximately 0.23 mm (0.0089"), resulting in a staple capture height of approximately 4.34 mm (0.171"), for example.

In addition to the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a non-compressed or pre-deployed height and may be configured to deform to one of a plurality of compressed heights. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height of about 3.18 mm (0.125"), for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height greater than or equal to about 2.0 mm (0.080"), for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise a non-compressed or pre-deployed height that is greater than the non-fired height of the staples. The uncompressed or pre-deployed height of the fabric thickness compensator may be about 10% higher, about 20% higher, about 30% higher, about 40% higher, about 50% higher, about 60% higher, approximately 70% higher, approximately 80% higher, approximately 90% higher, and / or approximately 100% higher than the non-fired height of the clips, for example. The uncompressed or pre-folded height of the fabric thickness compensator can be up to about 100% higher than the non-fired height of the staples, for example. The uncompressed or pre-deployed height of the fabric thickness compensator may be more than 100% higher than the non-fired height of the staples, for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is equal to the non-fired height of the staples. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is less than the non-fired height of the staples. The uncompressed or pre-extended height of the thickness compensator may be approximately 10% lower, approximately 20% lower, approximately 30% lower, approximately 40% lower, approximately 50% lower, approximately 60% lower, approximately 70% % lower, approximately 80% lower, and / or approximately 90% lower than the non-triggered height of the clips, for example. The second compressible portion may comprise an uncompressed height that is higher than an uncompressed height of tissue T that is stapled. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is equal to an uncompressed height of the staple tissue T. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is lower than an uncompressed height of the tissue T that is stapled.

As described above, a tissue thickness compensator can be compressed within a plurality of shaped staples regardless of whether thick tissue or thin tissue is captured within the staples. For example, the staples within a line or row of staples can be deformed so that the staple capture area of each staple comprises a height of about 2.0 mm, for example, where the T tissue and the thickness compensator of tissue can be compressed within this height. In certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.75 mm within the staple capture zone while the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height of approximately 0.25 mm within the staple capture zone, which thus totals approximately 2.0 mm in height from the staple capture area, for example. In certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.50 mm within the staple capture zone while the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height of approximately 0.50 mm within the staple capture zone, which thus totals approximately 2.0 mm in height from the catch area of staple, for example. In certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.25 mm within the staple capture zone while the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height of approximately 0.75 mm within the staple capture zone, which thus totals approximately 2.0 mm in height from the staple capture area, for example. In certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.0 mm within the staple capture zone while the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.0 mm within the staple capture zone, which thus totals approximately 2.0 mm in height from the staple capture area, for example. In certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a compressed height of approximately 0.75 mm within the staple capture zone while the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.25 mm within the staple capture zone, which thus totals approximately 2.0 mm in height from the staple capture area, for example. In certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.50 mm within the staple capture zone while the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height of approximately 0.50 mm within the staple capture zone, which thus totals approximately 2.0 mm in height from the staple capture area, for example. In certain circumstances, the T fabric may comprise a height approximately 0.25 mm compressed within the staple capture zone while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height of approximately 1.75 mm within the staple capture zone, thus totaling approximately 2.0 mm in height of the area for staple capture, for example.

In addition to the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is less than the fired height of the staples. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is equal to the fired height of the staples. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is higher than the fired height of the staples. For example, the uncompressed height of a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a thickness that is approximately 110% of the formed staple height, approximately 120% of the formed staple height, approximately 130% of the staple height formed, approximately 140 % of the formed staple height, approximately 150% of the staple height formed, approximately 160% of the formed staple height, approximately 170% of the formed staple height, approximately 180% of the formed staple height, approximately 190 % of the formed staple height, and / or about 200% of the formed staple height, for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is more than twice the fired height of the staples. The tissue thickness compensator can comprising a compressed height that is from about 85% to about 150% of the formed staple height, for example. Optionally, as described above, the fabric thickness compensator can be compressed between an uncompressed thickness and a compressed thickness. The compressed thickness of a tissue thickness compensator may be about 10% of its uncompressed thickness, about 20% of its uncompressed thickness, about 30% of its uncompressed thickness, about 40% of its uncompressed thickness, about 50%. % of its uncompressed thickness, about 60% of its uncompressed thickness, about 70% of its uncompressed thickness, about 80% of its uncompressed thickness, and / or about 90% of its uncompressed thickness, for example. The uncompressed thickness of the tissue thickness compensator may be about twice, about ten times, about fifty times, and / or about one hundred times thicker than its compressed thickness, for example. The compressed thickness of the fabric thickness compensator may be between about 60% and about 99% of its uncompressed thickness. The uncompressed thickness of the fabric thickness compensator can be at least 50% thicker than its compressed thickness. The uncompressed thickness of the fabric thickness compensator can be up to one hundred times thicker than its compressed thickness. The second compressible portion may be elastic, or at least partially elastic, and may press the T tissue against the legs deformed staples. For example, the second compressible portion can be elastically expanded between the tissue T and the base of the staple to urge the tissue T against the legs of the staple. As described in more detail below, the fabric thickness compensator can be positioned intermediate the tissue T and the deformed staple legs. In various circumstances, as a result of the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator may be configured to consume any intermediate space within the staple capture zone.

The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a polymer composition. The polymer composition may comprise one or more synthetic polymers and / or one or more non-synthetic polymers. The synthetic polymer may comprise a synthetic absorbent polymer and / or a non-absorbable synthetic polymer. The polymer composition may comprise a biocompatible foam, for example. The biocompatible foam may comprise an open cell, porous foam and / or a closed cell, porous foam, for example. The biocompatible foam may have a uniform pore morphology or may have a gradient pore morphology (ie, small pores that gradually increase in size to large pores through the thickness of the foam in one direction). The polymer composition may comprise one or more of a porous scaffold, a porous matrix, a gel matrix, a hydrogel matrix, a solution matrix, a filamentous matrix, a tubular matrix, a compound matrix, a membrane matrix, a biostable polymer, and a polymer biodegradable, and combinations of these. For example, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a foam reinforced by a filamentous matrix or may comprise a foam having an additional hydrogel layer that expands in the presence of body fluids to additionally provide tissue compression. According to the invention, a fabric thickness compensator could be further comprised of a coating on a material and / or a second or third layer that expands in the presence of bodily fluids to further provide tissue compression. Such a layer could be a hydrogel that could be a synthetic material and / or of natural origin and could be biodurable and / or biodegradable, for example. A tissue thickness compensator can be reinforced with fibrous non-woven materials or fibrous mesh-like elements, for example, which may provide additional flexibility, stiffness and / or resistance. According to the invention, a tissue thickness compensator having a porous morphology exhibits a gradient structure such as, for example, small pores in one surface and larger pores in the other surface. Such morphology could be more optimal for tissue growth or hemostatic behavior. In addition, the gradient could also be compositional with a variable bioabsorption profile. A short-term absorption profile may be preferred to address haemostasis while a long-term absorption profile may better address tissue healing without leakage.

Examples of nonsynthetic polymers include, but are not limited to, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and regenerated oxidized cellulose (ORC). Examples of synthetic absorbent polymers include, but are not limited to, poly (lactic acid) (PLA), poly (L-lactic acid) (PLLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polyglycolic acid (PGA), poly (trimethylene carbonate) (TMC), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), a glycolide copolymer and e-caprolactone (PGCL), a copolymer of glycolide and trimethylene carbonate, poly (glycerin sebacate) (PGS), polydioxanone, poly (orthoesters), polyanhydrides, polysaccharides, poly (ester amides), polyarylates based on tyrosine, polyiminocarbonates based on tyrosine, polycarbonates based on tyrosine, poly (D, L-lactide-urethane), poly (B-hydroxybutyrate), poly (E) -caprolactone), polyethylene glycol (PEG), poly [bis (carboxylatophenoxy) phosphazene], poly (amino acids), pseudo-poly (amino acids), absorbable polyurethanes, and combinations thereof. The polymer composition may comprise from about 50% to about 90% by weight of the PLLA polymer composition and about 50% to about 10% by weight of the PCL polymer composition, for example. The polymer composition may comprise about 70% by weight of PLLA and about 30% by weight of PCL, for example. The polymer composition may comprise from about 55% to about 85% by weight of the polymer composition of PGA and 15% to 45% by weight of the polymer composition of PCL, for example. The polymer composition may comprise about 65% by weight of PGA and about 35% by weight of PCL, for example. The polymer composition may comprise from about 90% to about 95% by weight of the polymer composition of PGA and about 5% to about 10% by weight of the polymeric composition of PLA, for example.

The synthetic absorbent polymer can comprise a biocompatible bioabsorbable elastomeric copolymer. Suitable biocompatible bioabsorbable elastomeric copolymers include, but are not limited to, copolymers of epsiloncaprolactone and glycolide (having a molar ratio of epsiloncaprolactone to glycolide from about 35:70 to about 70:30, preferably, from 35:65 to about 65: 35 and, more preferably, 45:55); elastomeric copolymers of epsiloncaprolactone and lactide, including copolymers of L-lactide, D-lactide or mixtures thereof or lactic acid (preferably, having a molar ratio of epsiloncaprolactone to lactide of from about 35:65 to about 65:35 and, more preferably, from 45:55 to 30:70) elastomeric dioxanone (1,4-dioxan-2-one) copolymers and lactide including L-lactide, D-lactide and lactic acid (preferably having a molar ratio of dioxanone to lactide from about 40:60 to about 60:40); elastomeric copolymers of epsiloncaprolactone and dioxanone (preferably, having a molar ratio of epsiloncaprolactone to dioxanone from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of p-dioxanone and trimethylene carbonate (preferably having a molar ratio of p-dioxanone to trimethylene carbonate from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of trimethylene carbonate and glycolide (preferably having a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate to glycolide from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymer of trimethylene carbonate and lactide including copolymers of L-lactide, D-lactide, mixtures of these or of lactic acid (preferably having a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate and lactide of about 30:70 to approximately 70:30) and mixtures of these. The elastomeric copolymer can be a copolymer of glycolide and epsilon-caprolactone. Alternatively, the elastomeric copolymer is a copolymer of lactide and epsilon-caprolactone.

The disclosures of the United States patent no. 5,468,253, entitled ELASTO ERIC MEDICAL DEVICE, issued November 21, 1995, and United States Patent No. 6,325,810, entitled FOAM BUTTRESS FOR STAPLING APPARATUS, granted on December 4, 2001, are incorporated into the present description as reference in their respective totalities.

The synthetic absorbent polymer may comprise one or more 90/10 poly (glycolide-L-lactide) copolymers, commercially available from Ethicon, Inc. under the trade designation of VICRYL (polyglactic 910), polyglycolide, commercially available from American Cyanamid Co. under the trade designation of DEXON, polydioxanone, commercially available from Ethicon, inc. under the commercial designation of PDS, random block copolymer poly (glycolide-trimethylene carbonate), commercially available from American Cyanamid Co. under the trade designation of MAXON, copolymer 75/25 poly (glycolide-caprolactone-polygallecaprolactone 25), commercially available from Ethicon under the trade designation of MONOCRYL, for example .

Examples of synthetic non-absorbent polymers include, but are not limited to, foamed polyurethane, polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE), polycarbonate, polyamides, such as nylon, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA), polystyrene (PS) ), polyester, polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polytrifluorochloroethylene (PTFCE), polyvinyl fluoride (PVF), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), polyacetal, polysulfone, and combinations thereof. Synthetic non-absorbent polymers can include, but are not limited to, foamed elastomers and porous elastomers, such as, for example, silicone, polyisoprene, and rubber. The synthetic polymers may comprise expanded polytetrafluoroethylene (ePTFE), commercially available from W. L. Gore & Associates, Inc. under the trade designation of GORE-TEX soft tissue patch and commercially available urethane copolyether ester foam from Polyganics under the commercial designation of NASOPORE.

The polymer composition of a fabric thickness compensator can be characterized by porosity in percent, pore size, and / or hardness, for example. The polymer composition may have a porosity in percent from about 30 volume% to about 99 volume%, for example. The polymer composition may have a porosity in percent from about 60% by volume to about 98% by weight. volume, for example. The polymer composition may have a porosity in percent from about 85% by volume to about 97% by volume, for example. The polymer composition may comprise about 70% by weight of PLLA and about 30% by weight of PCL, for example, and may comprise about 90% porosity by volume, for example. For example, as a result, the polymer composition would comprise approximately 10% copolymer by volume. The polymer composition can comprise about 65% by weight of PGA and about 35% by weight of PCL, for example, and can have a porosity in percent from about 93% by volume to about 95% by volume, for example. The polymer composition may comprise a porosity greater than 85% by volume. The polymer composition can have a pore size of about 5 microns to about 2000 microns, for example. The polymer composition can have a pore size between about 10 microns to about 100 microns, for example. For example, the polymer composition may comprise a copolymer of PGA and PCL, for example. The polymer composition can have a pore size between about 100 microns to about 1000 microns, for example. For example, the polymer composition may comprise a copolymer of PLLA and PCL, for example. According to certain aspects, the hardness of a polymeric composition can be expressed in terms of the Shore hardness, which can be defined as the resistance to the formation of fingerprints perms of a material as determined with a durometer, such as a Shore durometer. In order to evaluate the hardness value for a given material, a pressure is applied to the material with a durometer penetrating foot in accordance with ASTM D2240-00 procedure, entitled, "Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness", the whole of which is incorporated in the present description as a reference. The durometer penetrating foot can be applied to the material for a sufficient period of time, such as 15 seconds, for example, where a reading is then made from the appropriate scale. Depending on the type of scale used, a reading of 0 can be obtained when the penetrating foot completely penetrates the material, and a reading of 100 can be obtained when there is no penetration of the material. This reading is dimensionless. The durometer can be determined according to any suitable scale, such as type A and / or type 00 scales, for example, in accordance with ASTM D2240-00. The polymer composition of a fabric thickness compensator can have a Shore A hardness value of about 4 A to about 16 A, for example, which is about 45 00 to about 65 00 in the Shore 00 range. For example, the composition The polymer can comprise a PLLA / PCL copolymer or a PGA / PCL copolymer, for example. The polymer composition of a fabric thickness compensator can have a Shore A hardness value of less than 15 A. The polymer composition of a fabric thickness compensator can have a Shore A hardness value of less than 10 A. The composition Polymer of a thickness compensator The fabric may have a Shore A hardness value of less than 5 A. The polymeric material may have a Shore 00 composition value of from about 3500 to about 7500, for example.

The polymer composition can have at least two of the properties identified above. The polymer composition can have at least three of the properties identified above. The polymer composition can have a porosity of 85% to 97% by volume, a pore size of 5 micrometers up to 2000 micrometers, and a Shore A hardness value of 4 A up to 16 A and a Shore 00 hardness value of 45 00 to 65 00, for example. The polymer composition may comprise 70% by weight of the polymer composition of PLLA and 30% by weight of the PCL polymer composition having a porosity of 90% by volume, a pore size of 100 micrometers to 1000 micrometers, and a value Shore A hardness from 4 A to 16 A and Shore 00 hardness value from 45 00 to 65 00, for example. The polymer composition can comprise 65% by weight of the polymer composition of PGA and 35% by weight of the polymer composition of PCL having a porosity of 93% to 95% by volume, a pore size of 10 micrometers to 100 micrometers, and a Shore A hardness value of 4 A at 16 A and a Shore hardness value of from 4500 to 6500, for example.

The polymer composition may comprise a pharmaceutically active agent. The polymer composition can release a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutically active agent. He The pharmaceutically active agent can be released as the polymer composition dissolves / absorbs. The pharmaceutically active agent can be released into a fluid, such as, for example, blood, which passes over or through the polymer composition. Examples of pharmaceutically active agents can include, but are not limited to, hemostatic agents and drugs such as, for example, fibrin, thrombin, and regenerated oxidized cellulose (ORC); anti-inflammatory drugs such as, for example, diclofenac, aspirin, naproxen, sulindac, and hydrocortisone; antibiotic and antimicrobial agents or drugs such as, for example, triclosan, ionic silver, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B, chloramphenicol and anticancer agents, such as, for example, cisplatin, mitomycin, adriamycin.

Referring now to FIG. 216, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 10000, for example, may comprise a support portion 10010 and a compressible tissue thickness compensator 10020. Referring now to FIGS. 218 to 220, the support portion 10010 may comprise a surface of the cover 10011 and a plurality of staple cavities 10012 defined within the support portion 10010. Each staple pocket 10012 may be sized and configured to removably store a staple, such as a staple 10030. , for example. The staple cartridge 10000 may further comprise a plurality of staple drivers 10040 each of which may be configured to support one or more staples 10030 within the staple pockets 10012 when the staples 10030 and the staple drivers 10040 they are in their non-fired positions. For example, with reference mainly to Figs. 224 and 225, each staple driver 10040 may comprise one or more bases or channels, 10041, for example, which may be configured to support staples and limit relative movement between staples 10030 and staple drivers 10040. Referring again to Fig. 218, the staple cartridge 10000 may further comprise a staple trigger slider 10050 that can be moved from a proximal end 10001 to a distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge for the purpose of sequentially raising the staple drivers 10040 and staples 10030 from their non-fired positions towards an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge 10000. With reference primarily to Figs. 218 and 220, each staple 10030 may comprise a base 10031 and one or more legs 10032 extending from the base 10031, wherein each staple may have at least one shape of substantially one U and substantially one V, for example. The staples 10030 may be configured so that the tips of the staple legs 10032 are recessed with respect to the cover surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired positions. The staples 10030 may be configured so that the tips of the staple legs 10032 are flush with respect to the cover surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired positions. The staples 10030 can be configured so that the tips of the staple legs 10032, or at least some portion of the staple legs 10032, extend above the cover surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired positions. In such cases, the staple legs 10032 can extend into and can be embedded within the tissue thickness compensator 10020 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired positions. For example, the staple legs 10032 may extend above the cover surface 10011 by approximately 1.9 mm (0.075"), for example, the staple legs 10032 may extend above the cover surface 10011 at a distance between approximately 0.64 mm (0.025") and approximately 3.18 mm (0.125"), for example In addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 may comprise a non-compressed thickness between about 2.0 mm (0.08") and about 3.18 mm (0.125). "), for example.

In operation, furthermore, from the foregoing and with reference principally to Fig.233, an anvil, such as the anvil, 10060, for example, can move to a closed position opposite the staple cartridge 10000. As described in more detail further on, the anvil 10060 can position the tissue against the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and compress the tissue thickness compensator 10020 against the cover surface 10011 of the support portion 10010, for example. Once the anvil 10060 has been properly positioned, the staples 10030 can be deployed, as illustrated, in addition, in Fig. 233. Optionally, as mentioned above, the staple firmer 10050 can be moved from the proximal end 10001 of the staple cartridge 10000 towards the distal end 10002, as illustrated in Fig.234. As the slider 10050 advances, the slider 10050 may come into contact with the staple drivers 10040 and lift the staple drivers 10040 upwardly within the staple cavities 10012. The slider 10050 and the staple drivers 10040 each may comprising one or more ramp surfaces, or inclined, which may cooperate to move the staple drivers 10040 upwards from their non-fired positions. For example, with reference to Figs.221 to 225, each staple driver 10040 may comprise at least one slanted surface 10042 and the slider 10050 may comprise one or more slanted surfaces 10052 that may be configured, such that the slanted surfaces 10052 they can slide below the inclined surface 10042 as the slider 10050 advances distally within the staple cartridge. As staple drivers 10040 are raised upwardly within their respective staple pockets 10012, staple drivers 10040 can lift staples 10030 upward, such that staples 10030 can emerge from their staple pockets 10012 to through openings in staple cover 10011. During an illustrative firing sequence, with reference primarily to Figs. 227 to 229, the slider 10050 may first come into contact with the staple 10030a and begin lifting the staple 10030a upwards. As the slider 10050 further advances distally, the slider 10050 can begin to lift staples 10030b, 10030c, 10030d, 10030e, and 10030f, and any another subsequent staple, in a sequential order. As illustrated in Fig.229, the slider 10050 can urge the staples 10030 upwards, such that the staples 10032 of the staples come into contact with the opposite anvil, deform to a desired shape, and eject therefrom. support portion 10010. In various circumstances, the slider 10030 may move several staples upward at the same time as part of a trigger sequence. With respect to the firing sequence illustrated in Fig. 229, staples 10030a and 10030b have been moved to their fully fired positions and ejected from supporting portion 10010, staples 10030c and 10030d are in the process of being fired and less are partially contained within the support portion 10010, and the staples 10030e and 10030f are still in their non-fired positions.

As discussed above, and with reference to Fig. 235, the staple legs 10032 of the staples 10030 may extend above the surface of the cover 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired positions. . With respect, further, to this firing sequence illustrated in Fig. 229, the staples 10030e and 10030f are illustrated in their non-fired position and their staple legs 10032 extend above the surface of the cover 10011 and within the compensator of fabric thickness 10020. The tips of the staple legs 10032, or any other portion of the staple legs 10032, may not protrude through a contact surface with the upper fabric 10021 of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the Staples 10030 are in their positions not fired. When the staples 10030 move from their non-fired positions to their fired positions, as illustrated in Fig. 229, the tips of the staple legs may protrude through the surface in contact with the fabric 10032. the staple legs 10032 can comprise sharp tips that can cut and penetrate the fabric thickness compensator 10020. The tissue thickness compensator 10020 can comprise a plurality of openings that can be configured to receive the staple legs 10032 and allow the legs of staple 10032 are slid relative to the tissue thickness compensator 10020. The support portion 10010 may comprise, in addition, a plurality of guides 10013 extending from the cover surface 10011. The guides 10013 can be positioned adjacent the apertures of the staple cavities on the surface of the cover 10011, such that the staple legs 10032 can at least partially supported by the guides 10013. A guide 10013 can be positioned at a proximal end and / or a distal end of an opening of the staple pocket. According to the invention, a first guide 10013 can be positioned at a first end of each opening of the staple pocket and a second guide 10013 can be positioned at a second end of each opening of the staple pocket so that each first guide 10013 it can support a first staple leg 10032 of a staple 10030 and each second guide 10013 can support a second staple leg 10032 of the staple. With reference to Fig. 235, each guide 10013 may comprise a groove or groove, such as the groove. 10016, for example, within which a staple leg 10032 can be slidably received. Optionally, each guide 10013 may comprise a crossbeam, protuberance, and / or peak that may extend from the cover surface 10011 and may extend within the tissue thickness compensator 10020. As described in greater detail below, the crosspieces, protrusions , and / or peaks may reduce relative movement between the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and the support portion 10010. The tips of the staple legs 10032 may be positioned within the guides 10013 and may not extend above the top surfaces. of the guides 10013 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired position. For example, the guides 10013 can define a guide height and the staples 10030 may not extend above this guide height when they are in their non-fired position.

According to the invention, a fabric thickness compensator, such as fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example, can be comprised of a single sheet of material. A fabric thickness compensator may comprise a sheet of continuous material that can cover the entire top cover surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 or, alternatively, cover less than the entire cover surface 10011. The sheet material may cover the apertures of the staple pocket in the support portion 10010 while, alternatively, the sheet of material may comprise apertures that can be aligned, or at least partially aligned, with the opening of the staple pocket. According to the invention, a tissue thickness compensator may be comprised of multiple layers of material. Referring now to FIG. 217, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressible core and an envelope surrounding the compressible core. A wrapper 10022 can be configured to removably clamp the compressible core to the support portion 10010. For example, the support portion 10010 may comprise one or more projections, such as projections 10014 (FIG. 220), for example, that extend from it, which may be received within one or more openings and / or slots, such as openings 10024, for example, defined in the envelope 10022. Projections 10014 and openings 10024 may be configured, such that the projections 10014 may retain the envelope 10022 to the support portion 10010. The ends of the projections 10014 may be deformed, such as by a thermal staking process, for example, to extend the ends of the projections 10014 and, as a result, limit movement relative between the envelope 10022 and the support portion 10010. The envelope 10022 may comprise one or more perforations 10025 that can facilitate the release of the envelope 10022 of the support portion 10010, as illustrated in Fig. 217. Referring now to Fig. 226, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a shell 10222 including a plurality of apertures 10223, wherein apertures 10223 can be aligned, or at least partially aligned, with the apertures of the staple cavities in the support portion 10010. The core of the tissue thickness compensator it may further comprise the openings which align, or at least partially align, with the openings 10223 in the casing 10222. Alternatively, the core of the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a continuous body and may extend below the openings 10223 so that the continuous body covers the openings of the staple pocket in the cover surface 10011.

Optionally, as described above, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise an envelope for removably attaching a compressible core to the support portion 10010. For example, with reference to FIG. 218, a staple cartridge may further comprise retaining clips 10026 that can be configured to prevent the wrapper, and the compressible core, from prematurely separating from the support portion 10010. Optionally, each retention clip 10026 may comprise the openings 10028 that can be configured to receive the projections 10014 that extend from the support portion 10010 so that the retaining clips 10026 can be retained to the support portion 10010. The retaining clips 10026 each can comprise at least a portion of the tray 10027 which can extend below the support portion 10010 and can support and retain the staple drivers 10040 within the support portion 10010. As described above, a tissue thickness compensator can be removably coupled to the support portion 10010 by the staples 10030. More particularly, as previously described, the legs of the s 10030 staples can extend within the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired position and, as a result, removably hold the fabric thickness compensator 10020 to the support portion 10010. The legs of the staples 10030 can be in contact with the side walls of their respective staple cavities 10012 where, due to friction between the staple legs 10032 and the side walls, the staples 10030 and the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be held in place until the staples 10030 deploy the staple cartridge 10000. When the staples 10030 are deployed, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be captured within the staples 10030 and held against the stapled tissue T. When the anvil is thereafter moved to an open position to release the fabric T, the support portion 10010 can be separated from the fabric thickness compensator 10020 that has been fastened to the fabric. An adhesive can be used to removably attach the fabric thickness compensator 10020 to the support portion 10010. A two part adhesive can be used wherein a first part of the adhesive can be placed on the cover surface 10011 and a second part can be placed on the cover surface 10011. of the adhesive can be placed in the fabric thickness compensator 10020 so that, when the fabric thickness compensator 10020 is placed against the cover surface 10011, the first part can come in contact with the second part to activate the adhesive and attach The fabric thickness compensator 10020 is removably attached to the support portion 10010. Optionally, any other means could be used for detachably retaining the tissue thickness compensator to the supporting portion of a staple cartridge.

In addition to the above, the slider 10050 can be advanced from the proximal end 10001 to the distal end 10002 to fully deploy all the staples 10030 contained within the staple cartridge 10000. Referring now to FIGS. 258 to 262, the slider 10050 can be advanced distally within a longitudinal cavity 10016 within the support portion 10010 by a trigger member, or knife bar, 10052 of a surgical stapler. In operation, the staple cartridge 10000 can be inserted into a staple cartridge channel in a clamp of the surgical stapler, such as the staple cartridge channel 10070, for example, and the firing member 10052 can advance in contact with the staple cartridge 10000. the 10050 slider, as illustrated in Fig.258. As the slider 10050 advances distally by the firing member 10052, the slider 10050 may come into contact with the most proximal staple driver or impellers, 10040 and fire, or eject, the staples 10030 from the cartridge body 10010, as described above. As illustrated in FIG. 258, the firing member 10052 may further comprise a cutting edge 10053 that may advance distally through a knife slot in the support portion 10010 as the staples 10030 are fired. According to the invention, a corresponding blade slot can extend through the anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge 10000 so that the cutting edge 10053 can extend between the staple cartridge 10000. anvil and the support portion 10010 and cutting the tissue and the tissue thickness compensator positioned therebetween. In various circumstances, the slider 10050 can advance distally by the firing member 10052 until the slider 10050 reaches the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000, as illustrated in Fig. 260. At that point, the firing member 10052 can be retracted proximally. The slider 10050 may be retracted proximally with the firing member 10052 but with reference now to Fig. 261, the slider 10050 may be left behind at the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000 when the firing member 10052 retracts. the firing member 10052 has been sufficiently retracted, the anvil can be opened again, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be separated from the supporting portion 10010, and the remaining non-implanted portion of the spent staple cartridge 10000, which includes the portion of 10010 support, can be removed from the 10070 staple cartridge channel.

After the spent staple cartridge 10000 has been removed from the staple cartridge channel, in addition to the above, a new staple cartridge 10000, or any other suitable staple cartridge, can be inserted into the staple cartridge channel 10070. In addition to the above, the staple cartridge channel 10070, the firing member 10052, and / or the staple cartridge 10000 may comprise auxiliary features that may prevent the firing member 10052 from being advanced distally a second time or once. back without a new or untriggered staple cartridge 10000 positioned in the 10070 staple cartridge channel. More particularly, with reference again to Fig. 258, as the firing member 10052 advances in contact with the slider 10050 and, when the slider 10050 is in its proximal non-fired position, a support tip 10055 of the firing member 10052 can be positioned on and / or on a support flange 10056 on the slider 10050, such that the firing member 10052 is held in a sufficient upward position to prevent a blockage, or a bar, 10054 extending from the trigger member 10052 falls into a defined blocking recess within the staple cartridge channel. Because the lock 10054 will not fall into the locking recess, under such circumstances, the lock 10054 may not abut a distal side wall 10057 of the locking recess as the firing member 10052 advances. As the firing member 10052 pushes the slider 10050 distally, the firing member 10052 can be supported in its upward firing position due to the support tip 10055 resting on the support flange 10056. When the firing member 10052 retracts relative to the glider 10050 , as discussed above and illustrated in Fig. 261, the firing member 10052 can be pulled down from its upward position because the support tip 10055 no longer rests on the support flange 10056 of the glider 10050. example, the surgical staple may comprise a spring 10058, and / or any other suitable pressure element, which may be configured to press the trigger member 10052 in your position down. Once the firing member 10052 has completely retracted, as illustrated in Fig.262, the firing member 10052 can not advance distally through the spent staple cartridge 10000 once again. More particularly, the firing member 10052 can not be maintained in its upper position by the slider 10050 because the slider 10050, at this point in the operating sequence, has been left behind at the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000. Thus, as mentioned above, in the event that the firing member 10052 advances again without replacing the staple cartridge, the locking bar 10054 will come into contact with the side wall 10057 of the locking recess, which will prevent the staple member from engaging. 10052 shot advance distally inside the staple cartridge 10000 once again. Stated another way, once the spent staple cartridge 10000 has been replaced with a new staple cartridge, the new staple cartridge will have a proximally positioned slider 10050 which can keep the firing member 10052 in its upper position and allow the firing member 10052 advances distally once again.

As described above, the slider 10050 can be configured to move the staple drivers 10040 between a first, non-fired position and a second position, fired in order to eject the staples 10030 from the support portion 10010. The staple drivers 10040 can be contained within the staple pockets 10012 after the staples 10030 have been ejected from the support portion 10010. The support portion 10010 may comprise one or more retention features that can be configured to block the staples. staple drivers 10040 that are ejected from, or dropped from, the staple pockets 10012. Alternatively, the slider 10050 can be configured to eject the staple drivers 10040 from the support portion 10010 with the staples 10030. For example, the impellers of staples 10040 can be comprised of a bioabsorbable and / or biocompatible material, such as Ultem, for example. The staple drivers may be coupled to staples 10030. For example, a staple driver may be molded on and / or around the base of each staple 10030 so that the driver integrally forms with the staple. U.S. patent application no. of series 11 / 541,123, entitled SURGICAL STAPLES HAVING COMPRESSIBLE OR CRUSHABLE MEMBERS FOR SECURING TISSUE THEREIN AND STAPLING INSTRUMENTS FOR DEPLOYING THE SAME, filed on September 29, 2006, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In various circumstances, in addition to the foregoing, a compensator of compressible tissue thickness can move, twist, and / or deviate relative to the underlying rigid support portion of a staple cartridge. The support portion, and / or any other suitable portion of the staple cartridge, may comprise one or more features configured to limit relative movement between the tissue thickness compensator and the support portion. As described above, at least a portion of the staples 10030 may extend above the surface of the cover 10011 of the support portion 10010 where, in certain circumstances, with reference now to Figs. 263 and 264, the lateral forces applied to a tissue thickness compensator 10120, for example, can be counteracted by the staples 10030 and / or the crosspieces 10013 extending from the support portion 10010, for example. In various circumstances, the staples 10030 may be bent and / or bent within the staple pockets 10012 while counteracting the lateral movement of the fabric thickness compensator 10120 where the staple pockets 10012 and the staples 10030 can be sized and configured to maintain the relative alignment between the legs 10032 of the staples 10030 and the forming cavities 10062 in the opposite anvil 10060, in such a way that the staples 10000 are correctly formed during the process of forming the staples. The staples 10030 and / or the cross members 10013 can be configured to prevent or at least limit the lateral distortion within the tissue thickness compensator 10020, as illustrated in FIG. 264. For example, the staples 10030 and / or the crosspieces 10013 , for example, can be configured to tension, or limit the lateral and / or longitudinal movement of a surface, first, or in contact with tissue 10021 of the tissue thickness compensator relative to a second, or lower, surface 10029. according to the invention, a staple cartridge, and / or a staple cartridge channel into which the staple cartridge is positioned, can comprise at least one member to minimize distortion which can extend upward to limit lateral movement and / or longitudinal, or distortion, of a tissue thickness compensator. A wrap that surrounds at least Partially a fabric thickness compensator, as discussed above, can further prevent, or at least limit, lateral and / or longitudinal movement, or distortion, of the fabric thickness compensator.

With reference again to Figs. 263 and 264, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10120, for example, may comprise a core 10128 and a liner 10122. The liner 10122 and the compressible core 10128 may comprise different materials or, alternatively, the same material. In any case, the liner 10122 may have a greater density than the core 10128. In circumstances where the liner 10122 comprises the top of the fabric thickness compensator 10120, the tips of the staple legs 10032 can be incorporated into the liner 10122. Where a liner comprises the lower portion of the fabric thickness compensator 10120, the staple legs 10032 can extend through the liner and into the core. In any case, the coating of the thickness compensator of the fabric can help to maintain the staple legs 10032 in alignment with the forming cavities 10062 of the anvil 10060. The coating 10122 can comprise a density that is approximately 10% greater than the density of core 10128, approximately 20% greater than core density 10128, approximately 30% greater than core density 10128, approximately 40% greater than core density 10128, approximately 50% greater than core density 10128, approximately 60% greater than core density 10128, approximately 70% greater than core density 10128, approximately 80% greater than core density 10128, approximately 90% greater than core density 10128, and / or approximately 100% greater than the core density 10128, for example. The liner 10122 may comprise a density that is greater than the density of the core 10128 and less than two times the density of the core 10128, for example. The liner 10122 may comprise a density that is more than twice the density of the core 10128, for example. In addition to the above, the liner 10122 and the core 10128 can be formed, or manufactured, simultaneously. For example, a fluid comprising any suitable material described in the present description can be poured into a plate or a mold and, while the fluid is solidified, the fluid can form a coating, or layer, having a greater density than the rest of the body. material. Optionally, multiple layers within a material can be formed by the use of a process in which one or more subsequent layers of material are poured onto a previously cured layer. Two or more layers can be glued together with an adhesive, for example. Two or more layers may be coupled together by one or more fasteners and / or one or more mechanical interlacing characteristics, for example. For example, adjacent layers can be connected together by one or more dovetail joints, for example. The coating may comprise a sealed surface that may impede, or at least limit, the flow of fluid through it. The coating may comprise a porous open cell structure for example.

In addition to the above, the liner can be cut from the fabric thickness compensator. The fabric thickness compensator can be cut from a larger block of material such that the fabric thickness compensator does not comprise a coating. For example, the fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of a homogeneous, or at least substantially homogeneous, material comprising large pores, for example.

According to the invention, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of staple cavities each containing a staple positioned therein, wherein the staple pockets may be arranged in a plurality of rows, and wherein an anvil positioned opposite to the staple. The staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of shaping cavities corresponding to the staple cavities in the staple cartridge. Stated another way, the anvil may comprise a plurality of rows of forming cavities wherein each forming cavity may be positioned opposite a staple pocket in the staple cartridge. Optionally, each forming cavity may comprise two forming trays which are configured to receive the staple legs 10032 of a staple 10030, wherein each forming tray is configured to receive a staple leg 10032 and form or bend the staple leg 10032 in the direction of the other staple leg 10032, for example. In various Circumstances, the legs 10032 may bypass or not properly enter the forming trays and, as a result, the staple legs 10032 may be mis-formed during the firing sequence. As described in the present description, an anvil may comprise a matrix or sieve assembly, of the forming cavities which are each configured to receive and form a staple leg. For example, the set of forming cavities may comprise a number of forming cavities that exceed the number of staples contained in the staple cartridge. A staple cartridge may comprise six longitudinal rows of staple cavities, for example, wherein the anvil may comprise six rows of shaping cavities aligned with the six rows of staple cavities and, in addition, the forming cavities positioned between the rows of forming cavities. For example, on one side of the anvil, the anvil may comprise a first row of shaping cavities that can be positioned on a first row of staple cavities, a second row of shaping cavities that can be positioned on a second row of staple cavities which is adjacent to the first row of staple cavities and, in addition, a row of shaping cavities which is positioned intermediate between the first row of shaping cavities and the second row of shaping cavities. With reference now to Figs. 276 to 279, an anvil 10260 can comprise six rows of shaping cavities 10261 which can be configured to be placed on six corresponding rows of cavities of staples in the staple cartridge 10200. For example, the rows of intermediate shaping cavities 10262 can be positioned between and / or adjacent to the rows of shaping cavities 10261. Referring now to FIGS. 277, 278, and 280, each forming cavity 10261 and 10262 can comprise two forming trays, wherein each forming tray can comprise a distal portion 10263 that can be configured to shape or bend a staple leg 10032 proximally and a proximal portion 10264 which can be configured to shape or bend a staple leg 10032 distally. In other various circumstances, staples 10030 can be formed in a variety of other ways. For example, a staple 10030 may be formed such that one leg 10032 is formed outward and the other leg 10032 is formed inwardly (Fig. 281), or in such a manner that both legs 10032 are formed outwardly (Fig. 282) depending on, one, in which forming pans staple legs 10032 enter and / or, two, if legs 10032 enter proximal portion 10263 or distal portion 10064 of each forming pail, for example.

In addition to the above, each forming cavity 10261 and / or forming cavity 10262 may comprise a triangular or diamond-like shape, for example. Each distal portion 10263 and / or each proximal portion 10264 of the shaping cavities may comprise a triangular shape, wherein, for example, the triangular shapes of the distal portions 10263 and the proximal portions 10264 may be arranged such that they have vertices. that point in opposite directions. An anvil it may comprise a set of substantially square conformation cavities, for example. For example, the shaping surface of each square-shaped cavity may comprise an arcuate surface extending between the sides of the square. An anvil may comprise a set of circular or spherical holes, for example. In addition to the above, the forming cavities 10261 can be positioned along one or more lines and, similarly, the forming cavities 10262 can be further positioned along one or more lines. Alternatively, the shaping cavities 10261 and / or the shaping cavities 10262 can be arranged in one or more circular rows. For example, the shaping cavities 10261 can be arranged along a primary circumference and the shaping cavities 10262 can be arranged along a different circumference. The primary circumference and the different circumference may be concentric, or at least substantially concentric. The shaping cavities 10262 may be arranged along an inner circumference positioned radially inward with respect to the primary circumference and / or an outer circumference positioned radially outward with respect to the primary circumference, for example. The primary circumference can be defined by a primary diameter, the inner circumference can be defined by an inner diameter, and the outer circumference can be defined by an outer diameter. For example, the inner diameter may be shorter than the primary diameter and the outer diameter may be longer than the primary diameter.

Optionally, as described above, an anvil can move from an open position to a closed position for the purpose of compressing the tissue against the tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as the tissue thickness compensator 10020, by example. In various circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator may be positioned adjacent the support portion of the staple cartridge before the fabric thickness compensator is positioned relative to the fabric. The tissue thickness compensator 10020 may be in a position, where it abuts the support portion 10018 before the anvil moves to its closed position. The tissue thickness compensator 10020 may be in a position where there is a gap between the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and the support portion 10018. For example, the anvil can move the tissue and tissue thickness compensator 10020 downwardly until the tissue thickness compensator 10020 abuts the support portion 10018 where, at such a point, the anvil can move to its closed position and generate compression inside the tissue. In the event that a surgeon is not satisfied with the placement of the tissue between the anvil and the staple cartridge, the surgeon can open the anvil, adjust the position of the anvil and the staple cartridge, and close the anvil once more. Due to such positioning and repositioning of the staple cartridge relative to the tissue, under various circumstances, the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be dislodged from the support portion 10010, for example. In some such circumstances, the extreme distal of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may come into contact with the tissue and come off, or roll relative to the support portion 10010. Optionally, as described in greater detail below, a staple cartridge may comprise one or more features configured to removably retain a tissue thickness compensator to an underlying support portion of the staple cartridge.

Referring now to FIG. 265, a staple cartridge 10300 can comprise a support portion 10310, compensator tissue thickness 10320 supported by the support portion 10310, and a distal end 10302 that includes a tip 10,303 configured to hold removably a distal end 10325 of the fabric thickness compensator 10320 in its position. The tip 10303 may comprise a groove 10305 configured to receive the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320. The distal end 10325 may be compressed, or fitted, within the groove 10305, such that the distal end 10325 may be held in place. its place while the staple cartridge 10300 is positioned relative to the tissue. For example, the slot 10305 can be oriented in a direction that is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the surface of the cover 10311 of the support portion 10310. The slot 10305 can be horizontal with respect to the surface of the cover 10311 Alternatively, with reference now to FIG. 266, a staple cartridge 10400 may comprise a support portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10420 supported by the support portion, and a distal end 10402 which includes a tip 10403 configured to removably hold the distal end 10425 of the fabric thickness compensator 10420 in position. The distal end 10425 may comprise a projection extending therefrom and the tip 10403 may comprise a vertical slot 10405 configured to receive the projection of the distal end 10425. The distal end 10425, and / or the projection extending therefrom, may compressing, or engaging, within the slot 10405, such that the distal end 10425 can be held in place while the staple cartridge 10400 is positioned relative to the tissue. The tissue thickness compensator 10420 may comprise a groove, such as the groove 10429, for example, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the tip 10403 therein. The slot 10405 can be oriented in a direction that is perpendicular, or at least substantially perpendicular, to the surface of the cover 10411 of the support portion. Referring now to FIG. 267, a staple cartridge 10500 may comprise a support portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10520 supported by the support portion, and a distal end 10502 including a tip configured to contain removably. the distal end 10525 of the fabric thickness compensator 10520 in position. The tip may comprise a vertical groove 10505 configured to receive the distal end 10525 of the tissue thickness compensator 10520. The distal end 10525 may be compressed, or fit into the groove 10505, such that the distal end 10525 can be held in place while the staple cartridge 10500 is positioned relative to the tissue.

Referring again to Fig. 265, the fabric thickness compensator 10320 may comprise an upper surface 10324 that can be positioned above the upper surface 10304 of the tip 10303. Another example in which the upper surface of a thickness compensator of the Fabric positioned above the tip of the staple cartridge is illustrated in Fig. 238, wherein the top surface 10721 of the fabric thickness compensator 10720 is positioned above the top surface 10004 of the tip 10003, for example. In use, with reference once more to Fig. 265, the fabric can slide on the upper surface 10304 of the tip 10303 and, in some circumstances, the fabric can come into contact with the distal end 10325 of the fabric thickness compensator 10320 and can apply a force to the fabric thickness compensator 10320 which tends to detach the fabric thickness compensator 10320 from the support portion 10310. This peel force can be resisted by the distal end portion 10325 fitted within the tip 10303. In any case, once the tissue is positioned properly With respect to the staple cartridge 13000, the anvil can be rotated in a closed position to compress the fabric and fabric thickness compensator 10320 against the support portion 10310. For example, the anvil can be rotated in a position where the anvil comes in contact with the upper surface 10304 of the tip 10303 and, as a result, is it prevents the anvil from turning more. In various circumstances, because the upper surface 10324 of the fabric thickness compensator 10320 is positioned above the upper surface 10304 of the tip 10303, the upper surface 10324 can be pushed downward toward the support portion 10310 while the The anvil is closed and, in some circumstances, the upper surface 10324 can be pushed under the upper surface 10304 of the tip 10303, for example. After the staples contained in the staple cartridge 10300 are deployed and the tissue thickness compensator 10320 is incident, as described in the present description, the support portion 10310 and the tip 10303 can move out of the thickness compensator of the woven 10320 in such a way that the distal end 10325 of the fabric thickness compensator 10320 can slide out of the slot 10305.

As described above, an anvil, such as anvil 10060, for example, can be rotated in a closed position where the anvil 10060 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip 10004 of a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 10000, for example. Once the anvil reaches its closed position, the amount by which a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example, is compressed, will depend, among other things, on the uncompressed thickness, or height, the thickness compensator of the fabric and the thickness of the fabric. With reference now to Figs. 236 and 237, a fabric thickness compensator 10920 may comprise a top surface that is level, or less substantially at the same level, with the upper surface 10004 of the tip 10003. In such cases, the upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator 10920 can be pushed under the upper surface 10004 of the tip 10003. Referring now to Figs. 241 and 242, a tissue thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10820, for example, may comprise an upper surface 10821 which is positioned below the upper surface of the tip 10004 before the thickness compensator of the The fabric 10820 is compressed by the tissue T and the anvil 10060. In the circumstances where the tissue T is relatively thin, as illustrated in Figs. 239 and 240, the fabric thickness compensator 10920 can be subjected to a relatively small compression. With reference now to Figs. 241 and 242, the fabric thickness compensator 10820 can undergo a greater compression when the tissue T is relatively thicker. In the circumstances where the tissue T has both thin sections and thicker sections, as illustrated in Figs. 243 and 244, the fabric thickness compensator 10820 can be compressed a large amount when positioned below the thicker tissue T and a smaller amount when positioned under the thinner tissue T, for example. In this way, as described above, the fabric thickness compensator can compensate for different tissue thicknesses.

With reference now to Figs. 268-270, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise, one, a cartridge channel 16670 that is configured to receive a staple cartridge 16600 and, two, an anvil 16660 which is rotatably coupled to the cartridge channel 16670. The staple cartridge 16600 may comprise a support portion 16610 and a fabric thickness compensator 16620, wherein a distal end 16625 of the fabric thickness compensator 16620 may be fastened in a manner removable to support portion 16610 by a tip 16603 at distal end 16602 of staple cartridge 16600. Tip 16603 may comprise a groove 16605 and may be comprised of a flexible material. In use, reference is made principally to Fig. 269, the tip 16603 can flex down to expand the slot opening 16605. The tip 16603 can comprise notches or cutouts 16606 that can be configured to allow the tip 16603 to flex toward down. In any case, in various circumstances, the expanded opening of the slot 16605 can facilitate insertion of the distal end 16625 of the tissue thickness compensator 16620 into the slot 16605. Once the tissue thickness compensator 16620 is properly positioned, the tip 16603 can freeing and, due to the flexibility of the material comprising the tip 16603, the tip 16603 can return, or at least substantially return, to its non-flexed condition and trap the distal end 16625 of the fabric thickness compensator 16620 against the surface of the cover 16611, as illustrated in Fig.270. In use, similar to the foregoing, the distal end 16625 can be removed from the slot 16605 when the support portion 16610 moves away from the stapled tissue. In various circumstances, the flexible tip 16603 can be configured to deflect while the tissue thickness compensator 16620 is separated from the support portion. 16610. Referring again to FIG. 270, the fabric thickness compensator 16620 may comprise an upper surface 16621 that aligns, or at least substantially aligns, with an upper surface 16604 of the tip 16603.

With reference to Fig. 271, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise, one, a channel 10770 configured to receive a staple cartridge 10700 and, two, an anvil 10760 rotatably coupled to the channel 10770. The staple cartridge 10700 may comprising a support portion 10710 and a fabric thickness compensator 10720. The fabric thickness compensator 10720 can be held in position by a tip sheath 10703 that can be slid over the support portion 10710. With reference primarily to FIG. 272, the tip sleeve 10703 may comprise one or more side slots 10707 that can be configured to removably receive one or more tie rails that extend along the support portion 10710, for example. The fabric thickness compensator 10720 can be positioned between the side slots 10707. The tip sleeve 10703 can further comprise a distal end 10702 and a cavity 10706 def at the distal end 10702, wherein the cavity 10706 can also be configured to receive at least a portion of the support portion 10710, for example, in this. In use, the tip sheath 10703 can slide over the support portion 10710 in a distal to proximal direction. The fabric thickness compensator 10720 can be removably mounted to the tip sleeve 10703 in such a way that, after staples are fired through the fabric thickness compensator 10720, the fabric thickness compensator 10720 can be separated from the tip sleeve 10703 while the support portion 10710 and the tip sleeve 10703 move away from the fabric thickness compensator 10720. The upper surface 10721 of the fabric thickness compensator 10720 can be positioned below the upper surface 10704 of the tip 10703.

With reference now to Figs. 273 and 274, a surgical stapling instrument can comprise, one, a staple cartridge channel 11070 configured to receive a staple cartridge 11000 and, two, an anvil 11060 rotatably coupled to the channel 11070. Staple cartridge 11000 can comprising a support portion 11010 and a fabric thickness compensator 11020. The fabric thickness compensator 11020 can be mainta in the correct position by one or more longitudinal rails 11019 extending from the cover 11011 of the support portion 11010. longitudinal rails 11019 can be embedded within the fabric thickness compensator 11020. With reference primarily to Fig. 274, the fabric thickness compensator 11020 can comprise a longitudinal recess 11029 that can be configured to receive the longitudinal rails 11019. For example, the recess 11029 can be sized and configured to receive rails 11019 in a press fit arrangement, for example. Such features, in addition to the above, can be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the relative lateral movement between the tissue thickness compensator 11020 and the support portion 11010 and, furthermore, limiting the premature release of the fabric thickness compensator 11020 of the support portion 11010, for example. Referring now to FIG. 275, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise, one, a staple cartridge channel 11170 configured to receive a staple cartridge 11100 and two an anvil 11160 rotatably coupled to the channel 11170. staple cartridge 11100 may comprise a support portion 11110 and a fabric thickness compensator 11120. The fabric thickness compensator 11120 may be held in place by one or more longitudinal rows of peaks, or teeth, 11119 extending from the cover 11111 of the support portion 11110. The longitudinal rows of peaks 11119 may be incorporated within the fabric thickness compensator 11120.

With respect to Fig. 273, in addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 11020 of the staple cartridge 11000 can be progressively released from the support portion 11010 while the staples are ejected from the staple pockets 10012 defined therein. More particularly, in addition to the above, the staples positioned in the staple pockets 10012 can be sequentially ejected between the proximal end 11001 of the staple cartridge 11000 and the distal end 11002 of the staple cartridge 11000 such that, while the staples are ejected , the staples can apply upward pressure force to the fabric thickness compensator 11020 which acts to push the fabric thickness compensator 11020 off the rails 11019. In such circumstances, the proximal end 11006 of the thickness compensator of the fabric 11020 can be released from the support portion 11010 while the staples are ejected from the most proximal staple cavities 10012. The fabric thickness compensator 11020 can then be progressively released from the support portion 11010 while the staples are progressively expelled from the portion of support 11010 between the proximal end 11001 and the distal end 11002 of the staple cartridge 11000. When the staples positioned within the more distal staple pockets 10012 are ejected from the support portion 11010, the distal end 11007 of the thickness compensator The fabric 11020 can be released from the support portion 11010. With respect to Fig. 275, the fabric thickness compensator 11120 can be progressively released from the peaks 11119 extending from the support portion 11110 while the staples are progressively ejected from the fabric. staple cartridge between the proximal end 11101 and the distal end 11102.

As described above, a fabric thickness compensator can be progressively released from the support portion of a staple cartridge while the staples are progressively ejected from the support portion and come into contact with the tissue thickness compensator. Staple legs, such as staple legs 10032, for example, may be able to pass through the tissue thickness compensator without releasing the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion. In such cases, the fabric thickness compensator can be kept engaged with the support portion until the bases of the staples, such as 10031 bases, come into contact with the tissue thickness compensator and push it upwards. Optionally, however, the cross members and / or other retaining features extending from the support portion, for example, may oppose the release of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion. As described in more detail below, a support portion may comprise retention features that can be configured to progressively release a tissue thickness compensator from the support portion while the staples are progressively fired from the staple cartridge. Referring now to Fig. 283, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 11200 may comprise, for example, a support portion 11210 including retention features 11213 that can be configured to removably maintain a thickness compensator. of the fabric 11220 (Fig. 284) to the support portion 11210. The retaining features 11213 can be positioned at the ends of each staple pocket 11212, for example, wherein each retainer 11213 can comprise a guide groove 11216 defined in FIG. this, which is configured to slidably receive a staple leg 10032 of a staple 10030. In such cases, both staple legs 10032 and retention features 11213 can be configured to removably retain the fabric thickness compensator 11220 to the support portion 11210. In use, with reference now to FIG. 284, the staple drivers 10040 contained within the portion of s 11210 support can be propelled up by a slider 10050, as described above, wherein the staple drivers 10040 can be configured to come into contact with the retainer features 11213, at least partially detach the retainer features 11213 from the support portion 11210, and displace the retention features 11213 outwardly and away from the staples 10030 and the staple pockets 11212. When the retaining features 11213 are separated from the support portion 11210 and / or moved outwardly, as illustrated in Fig. 284, the retention 11213 may no longer be able to retain the fabric thickness compensator 11220 to the support portion 11210 and, as a result, the fabric thickness compensator 11220 may be released from the support portion 11210. Similar to the foregoing, the compensator fabric thickness 11220 can be progressively released from support portion 11210 while staples 10030 are ejected prog from the staple cartridge towards an anvil, such as anvil 11260, for example. The staple drivers 10040 may come into contact with the retaining features 11213 when the upper surfaces of the staple drivers 10040 are coplanar, or at least substantially coplanar, with the surface of the cover 11211 of the support portion 11210, for example . In such cases, the fabric thickness compensator 11220 can be released from the support portion 11210 at the same time and / or just before the staples 10030 are formed to their fully formed, or fully fired configuration. For example, with reference mainly to Fig.285, the impellers 10040 may be overdriven, such that they are pushed over the surface of the cover 11211 to completely form the staples 10030 and, during the overdrive process, break the retainer features 11213 away from the support portion 11210. With Referring again to Fig. 284, the retaining features 11213 may extend above or protrude, in the staple pockets 11212 before separating or moving outwardly such that the impellers 10040 may come into contact with the retention characteristics 11213 just as the impellers 10040 reach the cover surface 11211. In any case, once the fabric thickness compensator 11220 is released from the support portion 11210, with reference now to FIG. 285, the support portion 11210 can move away from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue 11220.

As described above, a compressible tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge can be progressively released from a support portion, or cartridge body, of the staple cartridge while the staples are fired, or deployed, from the staple cartridge. Staples In various circumstances, such release may comprise a progressive distension of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion where, in some circumstances, a complete separation of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion can not occur until it is opened the anvil and the support portion move away from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue. With reference now to Fig. 289, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 11300, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11320 that is removably retained to a support portion 11310. The support portion 11310 may comprise a plurality of staples. retaining members 11313 extending therefrom which are configured to removably compress and hold the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11320 to the support portion 11310. For example, each retention member 11313 may comprise a channel oriented inwardly or a slot 11316 that can be configured to receive the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11320 therein. In various circumstances, a plurality of retention members 11313 may extend along a first longitudinal side of the support portion 11310 and a plurality of retention members 11313 may extend along a second longitudinal side of the support portion 11310 where , in certain circumstances, retention members 11313 may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the relative lateral movement between the tissue thickness compensator 11320 and the support portion 11310 and, in addition, to prevent, or at least limit, the premature release of the fabric thickness compensator 11320 from the support portion 11310. The retention members 11313 can be formed integrally with the support portion 11310 and, with reference to Fig. 290, the retention members 11313 can be configured to separate, or at least partially separated from the support portion 11310 in order to allow the Fabric thickness compensator 11320 is separated from support portion 11310, as illustrated in Fig. 291, for example. An anvil, such as the anvil 11360, for example, can be configured to compress the fabric thickness compensator 11320 and, in response to the pressure generated within the fabric thickness compensator 11320, the fabric thickness compensator 11320 can be laterally expanded. to at least partially detach, or disengage, the retention members 11313 from the fabric thickness compensator 11320. Advancement of a knife member, which was described above, through the anvil 11360 and the staple cartridge 11300 may deploy the staples contained therein and, simultaneously, compress the anvil 11360 and the staple cartridge 11300 closer together which can apply a compression pressure added to the fabric thickness compensator 11320 and thus cause the retention members 11313 to separate sequentially while the blade member passes through the staple cartridge 11300.

With reference now to Figs. 292 to 294, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 11400, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11420 removably attached to a support portion 11410. Staple cartridge 11400 may comprise one or more staple cartridge 11400. retaining bars 11413 which can be configured to hold the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11420 to the surface of the cover 11411. For example, each retaining bar 11413 can comprise opposing arms 11418 which can define a channel 11416 among these. In such cases, one of the arms 11418 can be configured to extend above the fabric thickness compensator 11420 and the other arm 11418 can be configured to extend below a rim 11419 extending from the support portion 11410. With reference primarily to the Fig. 292, the channel 11416 of each retaining bar 11413 can be sized and configured to apply a compressive force to the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11420 before the staple cartridge 11400 is used. During use, with reference primarily to Fig. 293, the staple cartridge 11400 can be positioned within a staple cartridge channel and, once the staple cartridge 11400 is properly positioned, an anvil, such as the anvil 11460 , for example, it can be moved in a position where it can compress the fabric thickness compensator 11420. Similar to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 11420, when compressed, can expand laterally, or outward and, as As a result, separate the holding bars 11413 from the staple cartridge 11400. The closure of the anvil 11460 may not separate, or may not completely separate the holding rods 11413 from the staple cartridge. For example, advancement of a firing bar, as described above, through staple cartridge 11400 can deploy staples 10030 from support portion 11410 and, simultaneously, compress anvil 11460 and staple cartridge 11400. closer to each other to apply a compressive force to the fabric thickness compensator 11420 which is sufficient for causing the fabric thickness compensator 11420 to laterally expand and separate the detents 11413 from the staple cartridge 11400. Once the retainer bars 11413 are separated from the staple cartridge 11400, with reference to FIG. 294, the Support 11410 can be moved away from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue 11420 and removed from the surgical site. Alternatively, with reference now to Fig. 295, a staple cartridge 11400 'may comprise detents 11413' which, similar to the foregoing, may comprise arms 11418 'extending therefrom. For example, each of the arms 11418 'may comprise a lock wedge bevel 11417' which can be configured to removably engage the retainer bars 11413 'to the staple cartridge 11400'. More particularly, the support portion 11410 'of the staple cartridge 11400' may comprise recesses 11419 'which, in cooperation with the locking wedge bevels 11417', may be configured to removably retain the retainer bars 11413 'to the staple cartridge 11400 and inhibiting the fabric thickness compensator 11420 from prematurely separating from the support portion 11410 '. During use, similar to the above, the holding bars 11413 'can be separated from the staple cartridge 11400' when a sufficient compression force is applied to the fabric thickness compensator 11420, for example.

In various circumstances, as described above and with reference again to Figs. 259 and 260, the slider 10050 of the staple cartridge 10000 and the trigger member 10052 of an instrument of Surgical stapling can be moved from the proximal end 10001 of the staple cartridge 10000 to the distal end 10002 (Fig. 219) of the staple cartridge 10000 to deploy the staples 10030 from the support portion 10010. In at least one such circumstance, each staple 10030 can be moved from a non-fired position to a fired position and ejected from the support portion 10010 to capture the entire fabric thickness compensator 10020 against the tissue positioned between the anvil 10060 and the staple cartridge 10000. In certain circumstances, a surgeon may not need to fire all the staples 10030 from the staple cartridge 10000 and the surgeon can stop the progression of the slider 10050 and the firing bar 10052 at a point positioned intermediate between the proximal end 10001 and the distal end 10002 of the cartridge 10000 staples. In such circumstances, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can only be implanted partially In the tissue T, and to separate the non-implanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 from the support portion 10010, the surgeon can pull the support portion 10010 away from the tissue thickness compensator 10020 partially implanted in such a manner. that the non-implanted portion detaches or detaches from the support portion 10010. Although these are suitable in various circumstances, an improvement is illustrated in Figs. 300 to 302, wherein a tissue thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 11520 of the staple cartridge 11500, for example, may comprise a plurality of connected segments that can set to separate from each other. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 11520 may comprise a first segment 11520a, or more proximally, a second segment 11520b removably connected to the first segment 11520a, a third segment 11520c removably connected to the second segment 11520b, a fourth segment 11520d removably connected to the third segment 11520c, and a fifth segment 11520e removably connected to the fourth segment 11520d, for example. The fabric thickness compensator 11520 may comprise at least one thin section 11529 positioned between any of the two adjacent segments 11520a-11520e which may be configured to define a predetermined break or separation point in which the tissue thickness compensator segments may Separate from each other. A fabric thickness compensator may include any suitable arrangement of perforations, thin sections, and / or any other means for creating a separation point within the tissue thickness compensator. With reference principally to Fig. 301, an anvil 11560 is illustrated in a closed position and the firing member 10052 is illustrated as advancing partially through the staple cartridge 11500 in such a manner that the staples 10030 underlying the first segment 11520a, the second segment 11520b, and the third segment 11520c are triggered to capture the fabric thickness compensator 11520 against the tissue T. In such a position, the firing member 10052 still does not advance to deploy the staples 10030 underlying the fourth segment 11520d and the fifth segment 11520e, for example. Referring now to FIG. 302, the anvil 11560 moves to an open position and the support portion 11510 of the staple cartridge 11500 moves away from the thickness compensator portion of the fabric 11520 that is implanted. As illustrated in Fig. 302, the thin section 11529 (Fig. 300) positioned between the third segment 11520c and the fourth segment 11520d allows the non-implanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11520 to be separated from the implanted portion.

In addition to the above, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of fasteners configured to removably attach a tissue thickness compensator to a staple cartridge support portion. The support portion may comprise a plurality of openings defined in the surface of the cover, for example, wherein the fasteners may extend through the tissue thickness compensator and may be detachably retained in the openings of the support portion. In use, the fasteners can be progressively released from the support portion while the staples are progressively expelled from the support portion. For example, the fasteners can be implanted with the tissue thickness compensator and the fasteners can be comprised of at least one bioabsorbable material, for example. The fasteners can be separated from the support portion after the tissue thickness compensator is at least partially implanted and while the support portion moves away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator. With reference now to Figs. 323 to 325, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 11600, for example, it may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11620 removably mounted to a support portion 11610 by a plurality of fasteners 11613. Each fastener 11613 may comprise a first end 11618 embedded within and / or engaged with the tissue thickness compensator. 11620, a second end 11618 coupled with the support portion 11610, and a connector 11616 connecting the first end 11618 to the second end 11618. The fasteners 11613 may extend through a knife slot 11615 defined in the support portion 11610. In use, the firing member 10052, which was described above, can move a knife edge through the knife slot 11615 in the support portion 11610 and engage the fasteners 11613 to release the fabric thickness compensator 11620 from the support portion 11610. For example, the firing bar 10052 can be advanced from a proximal end 11601 of the staple cartridge 116. 00 to a distal end 11602 of the staple cartridge 11600 with the objective of, one, advancing the slider 10050 distally and progressively triggering the staples 10030, as described above and, two, progressively cutting and / or breaking the fasteners 11613 to release progressively the fabric thickness compensator 11620 of the support portion 11610. Similar to the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator 11620 may comprise a plurality of removable segments 11620a-11620e which may each be attached to the support portion 11610 by one or more fasteners 11613, for example. In the event that the firing member 10052 stops intermediate between the proximal end 11601 and distal end 11602 of staple cartridge 11600, as illustrated in Fig. 324, fasteners 11613 can assist in holding the non-implanted portion of tissue thickness compensator 11620 to support portion 11610 after that the anvil 11660 opens and the support portion 11610 moves away from the tissue T, as illustrated in Fig. 325. In addition to the above, the cutting edge 10053 of the firing member 10052 can be configured to cut and / or break the fasteners 11613. Alternatively, with reference now to Figs. 327 and 328, a staple deployment slider, such as slider 11650, for example, may comprise a knife edge 11653 that can be configured to impact the connectors 11616 of the fasteners 11613 while the slider 11650 traverses the staple cartridge 11600. example, each connector 11616 may comprise a cylindrical member extending between the T-shaped ends 11618 of the fasteners 11613, wherein the edge of the blade 11653 may comprise a concave profile 11653 that can be configured to receive the cylindrical connector 11616, for example.

As described above, a staple cartridge can be loaded into a staple cartridge channel of a surgical stapling instrument. In various circumstances, a surgeon, or other clinician, may insert the staple cartridge into the staple cartridge channel by placing a force down on the staple cartridge to lock the staple cartridge in place. In some such circumstances, the doctor may place his thumb, for example, on the upper surface of the staple cartridge to apply such force downwards. The upper surface of the staple cartridge may comprise the upper surface of a tissue thickness compensator wherein, as described above, the tissue thickness compensator may be compressible and the downward force applied to the tissue thickness compensator may cause that the tissue thickness compensator is compressed to the point where the clinician's thumb comes into contact with the tips of the staples stored within the support portion. According to the invention, a staple cartridge applicator can be used to insert a staple cartridge into a staple cartridge channel that can be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the ability of the clinician to touch the staples in the cartridge. of staples. After the staple cartridge is properly positioned within the staple cartridge channel, as described in more detail below, the applicator can be separated from the staple cartridge.

With reference now to Figs. 305 and 306, a staple cartridge applicator may comprise a rigid cover, such as cover 10080, for example, which may be connected to a staple cartridge 10000. In addition to the foregoing, the cover 10080 may be configured to avoid, or less inhibit, than a clinician's thumb, for example, coming into contact with the tips of the staples 10030 positioned within the staple cartridge 10000 when the staple cartridge 10000 is inserted into the staple cartridge channel. With reference now to Figs. 307 and 308, the cover 10080 may extend over the top surface 10021, or at least one portion of the top surface 10021, of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and may include, one, a bottom surface 10081 that may extend over and / or adjoin the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and, two, a top surface 10082 that can Provide a push surface for the clinician to apply a force down to this, for example. In use, the clinician can take a handle portion 10084 from the cover 10080, align the support portion 10010 of the staple cartridge 10000 with the staple cartridge channel, and at least partially insert the staple cartridge 10000 into the staple cartridge. staple cartridge. Thereafter, the clinician can completely seat the staple cartridge 10000 in the staple cartridge channel by applying force downward to the upper surface 10082 of the cover 10880 which can transmit the force downward directly to the staple cartridge. support portion 10010. For example, cover 10080 may comprise proximal supports 10087 which may extend downwardly and contact the cover surface 10011 of the support portion. The cover 10080 may further comprise a distal support portion 10083 which may be configured to abut the tip 10003. When a downward force is applied to the cover 10080, the downward force may be transmitted through the proximal support 10087 and / or the distal support portion 10083 without transmitting, or at least substantially not transmitting, the downward force to the support portion 10010 through the tissue thickness compensator 10020. In various circumstances, as a result of the foregoing, the physician may do not come into direct contact with the fabric thickness compensator 10020. In addition, as a result of the foregoing, the cover 10080 may not compress, or at least substantially compress, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 while the staple cartridge is inserted into the staple cartridge channel 10000. In accordance with the invention, a The cover may comprise any suitable number of supports that are configured to transmit a downward force to the support portion without transmitting, or at least transmitting substantially, the downward force through the fabric thickness compensator. The supports may extend around the distal end, the proximal end, and / or the longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator. The supports can be extended through the fabric thickness compensator. For example, the supports may extend through openings in the tissue thickness compensator and abut the cover of the support portion. At least some of the brackets may not come into contact with the cover before the downward force is applied to the cover; however, the cover can be configured to flex, or move, downward, until the supports come into contact with the cover of the support portion. At such a point, the downward flexing, or movement, of the cover can be prevented, or at least substantially prevented, from further flexing.

As described above, the cover 10080 may be attached to the staple cartridge 10000 and may be used to manipulate the position of the staple cartridge 10000. The cover 10080 may comprise any suitable number of clamping members that can be configured to removably clamp the cover 10080 to the support portion 10010 of the staple cartridge 10000, for example. For example, the cover 10080 may further comprise one or more retention members, such as the latch arms 10088 and / or 10089, for example. The latch arms 10089 may be configured to extend around the sides of the tip 10003 and engage the lower surface 10009 (FIG. 306) of the tip 10003. Similarly, the latch arms 10088 may extend around the sides of the lattice projections. lock 10008 extending from the support portion 10010 and engaging the lower surfaces of the locking projections 10008. These latching arms may be configured to place the cover 10080 over the area or region in which the staples are stored within the support portion 10010. In any case, once the staple cartridge 10000 is properly positioned, the cover 10080 may be separated from the staple cartridge 10000. The physician may apply an upward lifting force on the handle 10084 to separate the end distal of the cover 10080 from the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000. For example, the latch arms 10088 and 10089 can be they are flexed outwardly while the handle 10084 is raised upwardly such that the latching arms 10088 and 10089 can flex around the locking projections 10008 and the tip 10003, respectively. Thereafter, the proximal end of the cover 10080 it can be lifted away from the proximal end 10001 of the staple cartridge and the cover 10080 can be moved away from the staple cartridge 10000.

With reference now to Figs. 309 and 310, a staple cartridge applicator, such as the staple cartridge applicator 10680, for example, can be configured to position an upper tissue thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10690, for example, with in relation to an anvil, furthermore, of positioning a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 10600, for example, within a staple cartridge channel. Similar to the foregoing, the applicator 10680 may comprise latching arms 10688 that can be removably coupled with the locking projections 10608 extending from a supporting portion 10610 of the staple cartridge 10600 such that the applicator 10680 can be held in place. position on a tissue thickness compensator 10620 of staple cartridge 10600. The upper tissue thickness compensator 10690 can be detachably coupled to the staple cartridge applicator 10680, such that the anvil of a surgical instrument, such as the anvil 10060, for example, can be closed on applicator 10680, couple fabric thickness compensator 10690, and separate tissue thickness compensator 10690 from applicator 10680. Fabric thickness compensator 10690 and / or anvil 10060 can comprise one or more retention features that can be configured to removably hold the fabric thickness compensator 10690 to the anvil 10060. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 10690 can comprising a longitudinal rail 10695, for example, extending from the upper surface 10691 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 that can be received within a longitudinal blade slot 10065 defined within the anvil 10060. The fabric thickness compensator 10690 and the Longitudinal rail 10695 may be comprised of any suitable compressible material, such as those described in the application of this patent, for example, wherein the longitudinal rail 10695 may be compressed and / or fitted within the knife groove 10065, for example. Once the anvil 10060 engages with the fabric thickness compensator 10690, the anvil 10060 can return to an open position and, under such circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator 10690 can be separated from the applicator 10680. Thereafter, the applicator 10680 can be separated from the staple cartridge 10600, such that the anvil 10060 and the staple cartridge 10600 can be positioned relative to the tissue to be stapled and / or incised. In use, a staple deployment slider, such as slider 10050 (Fig. 236), for example, may advance distally through staple cartridge 10600 by a firing member 10052 (Fig.236), for example, to eject the staples of the staple cartridge 10060, as described above. While the staples are deformed, each staple may capture a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 against the upper surface of the fabric and a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 10620 against the lower surface of the fabric. At the same time, the firing member 10052 can advance a knife edge 10053 (Fig. 236) through the tissue thickness compensator 10620 and / or the fabric thickness compensator 10690 wherein, the knife edge 10053 can advance through the longitudinal bar 10695 to cut the rail 10695 and progressively separate the fabric thickness compensator 10690 from the anvil 10060. After that the staples are deployed, the anvil 10060 can be reopened and moved away from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue 10690 and, similarly, the support portion 10610 of the staple cartridge 10600 can move away from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue 10620. the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator 10620 and / or the fabric thickness compensator 10690 may comprise a plurality of removable segments that can be configured to separate from each other in the case that only portions of the fabric thickness compensators 10620 and 10690 are implanted by the staples.

In addition to the above, the applicator 10680 may comprise one or more retention features that can be configured to removably attach the fabric thickness compensator 10690 to the applicator 10680. For example, with reference primarily to FIG. 310, the 10680 applicator it may comprise a longitudinal retention rail 10685 which can be configured to be received in a longitudinal retention groove 10694 defined in the bottom surface 10692 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 in the form of a press fit, for example. In various circumstances, the retaining rail 10685 and the retaining groove 10694 can be configured to retain the fabric thickness compensator 10690 to the applicator 10680 until a sufficient upward lifting force is applied by the anvil 10060 tissue thickness compensator 10690, as described above. For example, retaining rail 10685 extending from applicator 10680 may further comprise end stops 10686 positioned at the proximal and distal ends of retaining rail 10685 that can be configured to prevent, or at least limit, movement relative longitudinal between the fabric thickness compensator 10690 and the applicator 10680. Referring again to Fig. 310, one or more adhesives, such as the longitudinal adhesive strips 10693, for example, can be positioned on the contact surface 10691 of the compensator of fabric thickness 10690 such that, when the anvil 10060 comes into contact with the fabric thickness compensator 10690, as described above, the adhesive can removably couple the fabric thickness compensator 10690 to the anvil 10060. Optionally , one or more adhesives can be used, in addition, or instead of the compressible retention characteristics described above, for example plo One or more adhesives may be used to removably attach a tissue thickness compensator to a staple cartridge applicator. Referring now to FIG. 310A, cover 10080, for example, may include one or more adhesive pads 12185 that can be configured to removably retain a top fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 12190, for example, to the upper surface 10082 of the cover 10080. For example, similar to the foregoing, an anvil may be closed over the fabric thickness compensator 12190 to engage the longitudinal retaining rail 12195 of the fabric thickness compensator 12190. A release mechanism can be positioned between the fabric thickness compensator 12190 and the cover 10080 that can be used to break the adhesive joints that hold the fabric thickness compensator 12190 to the cover 10080 and separate the tissue thickness compensator 12190 from the cover 10080. The release mechanism may comprise a pull tab 12196 and a circular instrument 12197, wherein the circular instrument 12197 may comprise the first and second ends that engage the pull tab 12196. The circular instrument 12197 may comprise a suture, for example, that can define a perimeter circumscribing the adhesive pads 12185 in such a way that, when the pull tab 12196 is pulled distally, the suture can slide between the tissue thickness compensator 12190 and the cover 10080 and come into contact with the tissue pads 12185. In such circumstances, the suture can at least one, separate the adhesive pads 12185 from the tissue thickness compensator 12190, separate the adhesive pads 12185 from the cover 10080, and / or cut the adhesive pads 12185, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 311, a staple cartridge may comprise a support portion 10710, for example, which, similar to the foregoing, may comprise a longitudinal blade slot 10715 extending therethrough. For example, a staple cartridge applicator, such as the applicator 10780, for example, may comprise a longitudinal retention and alignment member 10786 that may extend in the knife slot 10715 in the support portion 10710. The retention member 10786 can be configured to engage the side walls of the knife slot 10715 by press fit, for example, such that the applicator 10780 can be removably retained to the support portion 10710. Optionally, although not illustrated, a The first portion of a fabric thickness compensator can be positioned on a first side of the retaining member 10786 and a second portion of the fabric thickness compensator can be positioned on a second, or opposite, side of the retaining member 10786. Similar to the above , the first and second portions of the fabric thickness compensator can be mounted on the support portion 10710 of the staple cartridge through the retaining members 10013, for example. In addition, similar to the foregoing, a top fabric thickness compensator 10790 can be removably mounted to the applicator 10780 through a longitudinal retention member 10785 extending from the loading surface 10782 of the applicator 10780 where the retention member 10785 can be pressurized in a removable manner in a longitudinal groove 10794 defined in the lower surface 10792 of the fabric thickness compensator 10790, for example. Optionally, also similar to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 10790 may further comprise a longitudinal retention member 10795 extending from the upper surface 10791 of the fabric thickness compensator 10790 which can be removably retained in the slot for longitudinal blade 10065 defined in anvil 10060, for example. For example, the longitudinal retention member 10795 it may comprise a wedge-shaped cross section comprising an upper portion that is larger than a lower portion, wherein the lower portion may engage the retaining member 10795 to the fabric thickness compensator 10790, for example.

With reference now to Figs. 312 and 313, a cartridge of staples 10800 comprising a support portion 10810 and a compensator of v Fabric thickness 10820 can be loaded into a staple cartridge channel with a staple cartridge applicator 10880, for example. Similar to the above, the staple cartridge applicator 10880 can also be configured to place an upper fabric thickness compensator 10890, for example, in relation to an anvil, such as the anvil 10060, for example, so that when the anvil 10060 is closed, the anvil 10060 can contact and engage the fabric thickness compensator 10890. The fabric thickness compensator 10890 can comprise a plurality of retaining legs 10895 extending from the upper surface 10891 of the fabric compensator. fabric thickness 10890 which can be configured to engage the anvil 10060 and removably retain the fabric thickness compensator 10890 to the anvil 10060. For example, the legs 10895 can be arranged in a longitudinal row, wherein each leg 10895 can comprise at least a foot configured to enter and engage in the knife slot 10065 defined in the anvil 10060. Some of the feet of the legs 10895 may extend Go in one direction while other feet can extend in another direction. Some of the feet can extend in opposite directions. In any case, once the anvil 10060 engages with the fabric thickness compensator 10890, now referring to FIGS. 313 and 314, the anvil 10060 can be reopened and the physician can move the staple cartridge applicator 10880 away from the fabric thickness compensators 10820 and 10890. Thereafter, with reference to FIG. 314A, the tissue thickness compensator upper 10890 may be positioned on a first side of the objective fabric and the fabric thickness compensator 10820, which may comprise a lower fabric thickness compensator, may be positioned on a second side of the fabric. After the fabric thickness compensators 10820 and 10890 are suitably positioned, with reference now to FIG. 314B, a knife edge of a trigger member, such as the knife edge 10053, for example, can advance through. of tissue and tissue thickness compensators. Referring now to FIG. 318, a staple cartridge applicator, such as the applicator 12280, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 12290 detachably mounted thereto which may, similar to the foregoing, be inserted in a channel of staple cartridges, as illustrated in FIG. 319, and coupled by the anvil 10060 when the anvil 10060 moves to a closed position. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 12290 may comprise a plurality of retaining members 12295 extending upwardly from the upper surface 12291 of the fabric thickness compensator 12290, wherein each retaining member 12295 may comprise a plurality of legs. flexible 12296 that can be configured to be inserted in the knife slot 10065 in the anvil 10060. With reference primarily to Figs. 321 and 322, the flexible legs 12296 of each retaining member 12295 can be separated by a space 12298 in such a way that, while the legs 12296 are inserted in the knife slot 10065, the legs 12296 can flex inwardly and then return flexibly outward once the enlarged feet of the flexible legs 12296 pass through the knife slot 10065. The enlarged feet of the flexible legs 12296 can flex backward the opposing retention flanges 12297 which are defined in the anvil 10060 and , as a result of the interaction of the legs and flanges 12296 12297, the fabric thickness compensator 12290 can be retained by the anvil 10060. Thereafter, the staple cartridge applicator 12280 can move away from the fabric thickness compensator 12290, as illustrated in Fig.320. In use, once the fabric thickness compensator 12290 is impinged against the tissue by means of unfolded staples of the staple cartridge 10000, for example, the anvil 10060 can be reopened and, while the anvil 10060 moves away from the staple compensator 10060. thickness of the implanted tissue 12290, the legs 12296 of the retaining members 12995 can be flexed inwardly so that they can be removed from the knife groove 10065.

With reference now to Figs. 315 and 316, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 11990, for example, can be loaded longitudinally on an anvil, such as anvil 11960, for example. More particularly, the fabric thickness compensator 11990 may comprise one or more longitudinal rails 11995 which can be inserted into a distal opening in a blade slot 11965 of the anvil 11960 and then pushed proximally until the tissue thickness compensator 11990 has seated properly on the anvil 11960. For example, each rail 11995 may comprise a longitudinal retention foot 11996 which can be positioned behind a longitudinal retention flange 11997 which at least partially defines the blade groove 11965, for example. As illustrated in FIG. 316, the feet 11996 can extend in opposite directions to be positioned behind the retaining flanges 11997 positioned on opposite sides of the knife slot 11965. According to the invention, a longitudinal gap 11998 can defined between the rails 11995 that can be configured to allow the rails 11995 to flex inwardly toward each other when the fabric thickness compensator 11990 is separated from the anvil 11960. Referring now to FIG. 317, a thickness compensator of fabric, such as the fabric thickness compensator 12090, for example, may comprise one or more locking arms 12098 that may extend around the sides of an anvil, such as anvil 12060, for example. In use, the locking arms 12098 can couple the anvil 12060 and removably retain the fabric thickness compensator 12090 to the anvil 12060. For example, the anvil 12060 can comprise one or more notches, or lock supports 12097, for example , which can each be configured to receive a foot extending from a locking arm 12098. In use, the arms 12098 can flex outwards and separate from the anvil 12060 when the anvil 12060 moves away from the tissue thickness compensator 12090 after the tissue thickness compensator 12090 is implanted, at least partially.

As described above, a surgical stapling instrument can comprise a staple cartridge channel configured to receive a staple cartridge, an anvil rotatably coupled to the staple cartridge channel, and a trigger member comprising a knife edge that is mobile in relation to the anvil and the staple cartridge channel. In use, a staple cartridge can be positioned within the staple cartridge channel and, after the staple cartridge is at least partially expended, the staple cartridge can be removed from the staple cartridge channel and replaced with a new staple cartridge. For example, the staple cartridge channel, the anvil, and / or the trigger member of the surgical stapling instrument can be reused with the replacement staple cartridge. Alternatively, a staple cartridge may comprise a part of an assembly of the disposable loading unit which may include a staple cartridge channel, an anvil, and / or a trigger member, for example, that can be replaced together with the cartridge of staples as part of the replacement of the disposable loading unit assembly. Some disposable load unit assemblies are described in United States patent application serial number 12 / 031,817, entitled END EFFECTOR COUPLING ARRANGEMENTS FOR A SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING INSTRUMENT, which was filed on February 15, 2008, whose full description is incorporated as a reference in the present description. Referring now to Fig. 370, a disposable loading unit, such as the disposable loading unit 12500, for example, may comprise a support portion 12510, an anvil 12560 rotatably coupled to the support portion 12510, and an elongate shaft 12570 extending from the support portion 12510. Similar to the staple cartridges described herein, the support portion 12510 may comprise a plurality of staple pockets 10012 and a staple, such as staple 10030, by example, positioned in each staple pocket 10012, for example. The disposable loading unit 12500 may further comprise a firing member 12552 that can advance distally to move the anvil 12560 from an open position, as illustrated in Fig. 370, to a closed position. The disposable loading unit 12500 may further comprise a fabric thickness compensator 12520 positioned and / or coupled to the support portion 12510 where, when the anvil 12560 is in its closed position, the anvil 12560 can be positioned opposite the compensator of fabric thickness 12520 and, in some cases, anvil 12560 can at least partially compress the fabric thickness compensator 12520 when the anvil 12560 is in its closed position. In any case, the firing member 12552 may advance further to eject the staples from the support portion 12510. While the staples are being expelled, the staples may be deformed by the anvil 12560 and trap at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 12520 in this. Thereafter, the firing member 12552 can be retracted proximally, the anvil 12560 it can be reopened, and the support portion 12510 can move away from the thickness compensator of the implanted tissue 12520.

In addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 12520 can be removably mounted to the support portion 12510. For example, the support portion 12510 can comprise a longitudinal holding rail 12526 mounted on each side thereof, wherein each rail 12526 may comprise one or more openings 12528 that can be configured to receive at least a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 12520 therein. Once the fabric thickness compensator 12520 is at least partially impregnated, the fabric thickness compensator 12520 can be removed from the openings 12528 while the support portion 12510 moves away. With reference now to Figs. 371 to 373, a disposable loading unit 12600 may comprise a support portion 12610, a fabric thickness compensator 12620 removably mounted to the support portion 12610, and one or more retention rails 12626 that can be configured to extend below of the fabric thickness compensator 12620 and mounting the fabric thickness compensator 12620 to the support portion 12610. Each retaining rail 12626 may comprise a plurality of retaining hooks 12628, for example, that can be coupled to the support portion 12610 through retention grooves 12614, for example, which are defined in the support portion 12610. In use, for example, the fabric thickness compensator 12620 can be configured to separate from the retention rails 12626 after the compensator 12620 tissue thickness is implanted at least partially and the support portion 12610 moves away from the tissue thickness compensator 12620. Referring now to FIGS. 374 to 376, a disposable loading unit 12700 may comprise one or more retention rails 12726 each which may comprise a lower bar 12725 which may extend below the fabric thickness compensator 12720 and an upper bar 12727 which may extend over the surface 12621 of the fabric thickness compensator 12620. The fabric thickness compensator 12620 can be compressed, at least partially, between the upper bars 12727 and the lower bars 12725, such that the retaining rails 12726 can removably hold the tissue thickness compensator 12620 relative to support portion 12610. For example, each retainer rail 12726 may comprise one or more retaining hooks 12728 that can be engaged with support portion 12610 to retain retention rails 12726 at support portion 12610.

With reference now to Figs. 377 and 378, a disposable loading unit 12800 can comprise a retaining member 12822 that can be configured to mount a tissue thickness compensator 12620 to the support portion 12610. For example, the retaining member 12822 can comprise a sheet of material positioned against the cover surface 12611 of the support portion, wherein the tissue thickness compensator 12620 can be attached to the sheet of material by at least one adhesive, for example. The retaining member 12822 may further comprise a longitudinal retention rail 12825 configured to extend downwardly within a knife groove 12615 defined in the support portion 12610. For example, the retaining rail 12825 can be sized and configured, such that it is compressed between the side walls of the knife groove 12615. In use, the trigger member 12552 may comprise a blade edge that can pass through the knife slot 12615 while the firing member 12552 advances distally and transversally cuts the tissue thickness compensator 12620 and the retaining rail 12825 longitudinally. Further, in use, staples expelled from the support portion 12610 can penetrate the retaining member 12822, the fabric thickness compensator 12820, and the fabric positioned between the tissue thickness compensator 12820 and the anvil 12560. Retention 12822 may comprise a biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable material. The retaining member 12822 may be comprised of a material sufficiently compressible to comprise a tissue thickness compensator underlying the fabric thickness compensator 12620. Referring now to Figs. 379 to 381, a disposable loading unit 12900 may comprise a loading unit that includes a lower portion 12922 that can be removably coupled to the support portion 12610, an upper portion 12990 that can be removably coupled to the anvil 12560, and a flexible joint 12991 connecting the lower portion 12922 and the upper portion 12990. Similar to the above, a longitudinal retaining rail 12825 may extend downwardly from the lower portion 12922 and in the knife slot 12615 defined in the support portion 12610 such So that the lower portion 12922 can be detachably retained to the support portion 12610. Similarly, a longitudinal retaining rail 12995 can extend upwardly from the upper portion 12990 in a knife groove defined in the anvil 12560 in such a way that the upper portion 12990 can be removably retained to anvil 12560. As illustrated in Figs. 380 and 381, a tissue thickness compensator 12620 can be mounted on the lower portion 12922 of the loading assembly, wherein, in order to position the tissue thickness compensator 12620 relative to the support portion 12610, a physician could flex the portion 12990 and the lower portion 12922 facing each other, place the load assembly between the anvil 12560 and the support portion 12610, and release the flexure load assembly in such a way that it can flex flexibly and press the upper portion 12990 against the anvil 12560 and the lower portion 12922 against the support portion 12610. Referring now to Figs. 382 to 384, the loading unit may further comprise one or more retaining hooks, such as retaining hooks 12994, for example, extending therefrom which can be configured to removably connect the upper portion 12990 to the anvil 12560 and / or removably connecting the lower portion 12922 to the support portion 12610.

Referring now to Figure 385, a disposable loading unit 15900, for example, may comprise an anvil 15960 and a staple cartridge channel 15970, wherein the staple cartridge channel 15970 may rotate relative to the anvil 15960. example, the Anvil 15960 may not be able to rotate. The fabric can be positioned between the anvil 15960 and the staple cartridge channel 15970 and, thereafter, the staple cartridge channel 15970 can be rotated in the direction of the tissue to hold the tissue against the anvil. For example, the disposable loading unit 15900 may further comprise a fabric thickness compensator 15920 that can be configured to come into contact with the fabric.

As described above and with reference to Fig. 332, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 10000, for example, may comprise a support portion 10010 and a tissue thickness compensator 10020, wherein a plurality staples 10030 may be stored at least partially in support portion 10010 and may extend to tissue thickness compensator 10020 when staples 10030 are in their non-fired position. The tips of the staples 10030 do not protrude from the tissue thickness compensator 10020 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired positions. While the clips 10030 move from their non-fired positions to their positions fired by the staple drivers 10040, as described above, the tips of the staples 10030 can penetrate through the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and / or penetrate through of the upper layer, or liner, 10022. Alternatively, the tips of the staples 10030 may protrude through the upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and / or of the liner 10022 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired position. . In any case, staples 10030, while extending upwards out of the support portion 10010 before unfolding, may be tilted and / or biased relative to the support portion, as also described above. Referring now to Figure 329, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 13000, for example, may comprise a plurality of guide members, or retainers that can be configured to limit relative movement between the cartridge support portion 13010. of staples 13000 and the tips of the staples positioned in these. With reference principally to Fig. 330, the staple cartridge 13000 may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13020 mounted on a support portion 13010 and, in addition, a plurality of pads 13022 attached to the upper surface 13021 of the thickness compensator of the fabric 13020. Optionally, each pad 13022 may comprise a plurality of openings 13029 defined therein that can be configured to slidably receive and / or guide legs 13022 of a staple 13030 therein. In addition to or instead of the openings, a pad can comprise any suitable opening such as a slot, guide, and / or groove, for example, which can be configured to slidably receive and / or guide the legs 13022. As illustrated in FIG. Figure 330, the tips of the staple legs 13032 can be positioned within the openings 13029 when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired positions. For example, the tips of the staple legs 13032 may protrude above the pads 13022 when the staples are in their non-fired position. The tips of the staple legs 13032 can be positioned just below the pads 13022 when staples 13030 they are in their non-fired positions such that when the staples 13030 move upwardly through the tissue thickness compensator 13020, the staple legs 13032 can enter the openings 13029 of the pads 13022 and slide therethrough. When the legs 13032 of the staples 13030 are positioned within the pads, lateral and / or longitudinal movement of the staple legs 13032 can be limited without preventing upward movement of the staple legs 13032 when staples 13030 are deployed. When staples 13030 unfold, with reference now to FIG.331, staple legs 13032 can slide upwardly through pads 13022 to penetrate tissue T, come into contact with an anvil positioned opposite staple cartridge 13030, and deforming downward to capture the tissue T and the fabric thickness compensator 13030 therein.

In addition to the foregoing, the pads 13022 may be coupled to the fabric thickness compensator 13020 by the use of at least one biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable adhesive, for example. The pads 13022, and / or a retainer member extending from each pad, can be incorporated at least partially within the fabric thickness compensator 13020. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 13020 can comprise cavities defined therein that they configure to at least partially receive a pad 13022. The fabric thickness compensator 13020 can be integrally molded, or formed around the pads 13022 during a molding manufacturing process. The pads 13022 can comprise discrete retainers that can move independently of each other. With reference principally to Figure 330, each pad 13022 may comprise interlocking and / or locking features that can be configured to allow and, to some extent, limit relative lateral and longitudinal movement between the pads 13022. For example, each pad 13022 may understand a projection 13026 and one or more recesses 13027, for example, wherein the projection 13026 of a first pad 13022 can be positioned within and / or aligned with respect to the recesses 13027 of the second and third adjacent compresses 13022. Optionally, between adjacent compresses 13022 there may be spaces that may allow the pads 13022 to move or slide relative to each other until they come in contact with an adjacent pad 13022. The pads 13022 may be weakly interconnected. The pads 13022 can be detachably connected to each other. For example, the pads 13022 can be manufactured as a sheet of interconnected pads wherein, when sufficient force is applied to the sheet, one or more of the pads 13022 can be released from the others. Referring again to Figure 329, a first sheet 13024 of pads 13022 can be positioned on a first side of a longitudinal slot 13025 and a second sheet 13024 of pads 13022 can be positioned on a second side of slot 13025. In addition to the above, the longitudinal slot 13025 extending through the tissue thickness compensator 13020 can be configured to facilitate the passage of a knife edge of a trigger member through the tissue thickness compensator 13020 and, while the firing member thus passes, the firing member can apply a compressive force to the blades 13024 and separate or remove at least some of the pads 13022.

The pads 13022 can be comprised of a biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable plastic, for example. The pads 13022 can be comprised of a solid material, a semi-solid material, and / or a flexible material, for example. The pads 13022 may be incorporated within a tissue thickness compensator such that the pads 13022 move with the tissue thickness compensator. For example, the pads 13022 may be sufficiently flexible, such that they can flex with the top surface of the tissue thickness compensator. The pads 13022 can be configured to remain incorporated in the tissue thickness compensator while the pads 13022 can be configured to come out, or separate from, the tissue thickness compensator. The pads 13022 may comprise a top surface that is flush with the top surface of the tissue thickness compensator. The upper surfaces of the pads 13022 can be positioned above and / or below the top surface of the tissue thickness compensator. The top surfaces of the pads 13022 may be arranged such that they are visible during visualization of the top surface of the tissue thickness compensator while, alternatively, the top surfaces of the pads 13022 can be positioned under a thickness compensator layer of tissue, for example. The guide features can be molded on the upper surface of a tissue thickness compensator, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator may not comprise a composite material and may comprise a unitary piece of material, for example.

Referring now to Figure 338, a staple cartridge may comprise a tissue thickness compensator and a top coat or layer, for example. For example, one or more pads, or retainers 13622, for example, may be incorporated in the liner 13621. Each retainer 13622 may comprise one or more openings 13629 defined therein that can be configured to receive the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 in FIG. these when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired position, as illustrated in Figure 338. In use, in addition to the above, the staple legs 10032 can slide through the openings 13629 when the staples 13030 are displaced from their position. not fired to its fired position until the bases 13031 of the staples 13030 come into contact with the fabric thickness compensator 13620 and compress at least a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 13620 against the lower surfaces of the pads 13622, for example . Referring now to Figure 333, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13120 and a coating or top layer, 13122, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 13120 may comprise conical bulges, projections, and / or protrusions 13128, for example, which may extend upwardly from the surface 13121 of the fabric thickness compensator 13120. The projections 13128 can be configured to receive and wrap the tips of the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired position, as illustrated in FIG. 333. The top layer 13122 may further comprise conical bulges, projections, and / or protrusions 13129 that may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the projections 13128. In use, the staple legs 10032 may penetrate the projections 13128 and 13129 and emerging from the fabric thickness compensator 13120. Referring now to Figure 337, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13520 and a top coat or layer, 13522, for example. For example, the liner 13522 may comprise conical bulges, projections, and / or protrusions 13529, for example, which may extend upwardly from the top surface 13521 of the fabric thickness compensator 13520. Similar to the foregoing, the projections 13529 may be configured for receiving and wrapping the tips of the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired position, as illustrated in FIG. 337. In use, the staple legs 10032 can penetrate the projections 13529 and emerge from the lining 13522.

Referring now to Figure 334, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13220 and a top coat, 13222, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 13220 may comprise conical holes and / or recesses 13128, for example, which may extend downwardly into the upper surface 13221 of the fabric thickness compensator 13220. The tips of the staple legs 13032 may extend through the recesses 13128 when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired position. , as illustrated in Figure 334. The top layer 13222 may also comprise conical holes and / or recesses 13229 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the recesses 13228. Referring now to Figure 335, a staple cartridge can comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13320 and a coating or top layer, 13322, for example. For example, the liner 13320 may comprise thick portions 13329 that may extend downwardly on the upper surface 13321 of the fabric thickness compensator 13320. In various circumstances, the thick portions 13329 may be configured to receive at least a portion of the staple legs. 13032 of the staples 13030 therein when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired position, as illustrated in Fig. 335. In such cases, the thick portions 13429 can hold the staple legs 13032 in place, such that the legs 13032 align, or at least substantially align, with the staple forming cavities of an anvil positioned opposite the fabric thickness compensator 13320. Referring now to Figure 336, a staple cartridge may comprise a thickness compensator of fabric 13420 and a liner or top layer, 13433, for example. For example, the liner 13422 may comprise thick portions 13429 that may extend upwardly. from the upper surface 13421 of the fabric thickness compensator 13420. In various circumstances, the thick portions 13429 can be configured to receive at least a portion of the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 therein when the staples 13030 are in their non-position. fired, as illustrated in Fig. 336. In such cases, the thick portions 13 429 can hold the staple legs 13032 in position, such that the legs 13032 align, or at least substantially align, with the legs 13032. staple forming cavities of an anvil positioned opposite the tissue thickness compensator 13420.

In various embodiments, with reference now to Figs. 339 and 340, a staple cartridge may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 13720 and a coating or top layer, 13721, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 13720 may comprise pyramidal and / or stepped bulges, projections, and / or protrusions 13728, for example, which may extend upwardly from the upper surface 13721 of the tissue thickness compensator 13720. The projections 13728 may be configured to receive and wrap the tips of the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired position, as illustrated in FIG. 340. Similarly, the upper layer 13721 may comprise pyramidal and pourable bulges. / or staggered, projections, and / or protrusions 13729 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with projections 13728. Coating 13721 can further comprise one or more teeth 13727 extending upwardly from the projections 13729 that can be configured to engage the tissue positioned against the top layer 13721 and prevent, or at least limit, the relative lateral and / or longitudinal movement between the tissue , the upper layer 13721, and / or the tips of the staple legs 13032. In use, the staple legs 13032 can penetrate the projections 13728 and 13729 and emerge from the tissue thickness compensator 13720 when the staples 13030 move from their positions not fired at their fired positions. With reference now to Figs. 341 and 342, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13820 and a top coat or layer, 13821, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 13820 may comprise pyramidal and / or stepped bulges, projections, and / or protrusions 13828, for example, which may extend upwardly from the top surface 13821 of the fabric thickness compensator 13820. The projections 13828 may be configured to receive and wrap the tips of the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 when the staples 13030 are in their non-fired position, as illustrated in FIG. 342. Similarly, the upper layer 13821 may comprise pyramidal bulges and / or staggered, projections, and / or protrusions 13829 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the projections 13828. Upper layer 13821 can further comprise one or more teeth 13827 extending downwardly in the thickness compensator of fabric 13820 that they can be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the relative lateral and / or longitudinal movement between the top layer and the tissue thickness compensator 13821, for example. In use, the staple legs 10032 can penetrate the projections 13828 and 13829 and emerge from the fabric thickness compensator 13820 when the staples 13030 move from their non-fired positions and their fired positions.

Referring now to Figure 343, a staple cartridge may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as tissue thickness compensator 13920, for example, which may include ridges 13923 and valleys 13924 defined therein, wherein valleys 13924 can be defined between ridges 13923. Optionally, each ridge 13923 may comprise the same height, substantially the same height, or different heights. Similarly, each valley 13924 may comprise the same depth, substantially the same depth, or different depths. According to the invention, a plurality of staples 13030 can be stored at least partially within the tissue thickness compensator 13920 such that the tips of staples 13030 can be positioned within frames 13923. For example, staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 can not protrude from the fabric thickness compensator 13920 and / or an upper skin or layer, 13921 coupled to the fabric thickness compensator 13920, for example, when the staples 13030 are stored in their non-fired position. Ridges 13923 and / or valleys 13924 may extend laterally through the staple cartridge.

For example, the staple cartridge may comprise a slot for a longitudinal blade, wherein ridges 13923 and valleys 13924 may extend in a direction that is transverse and / or perpendicular to the blade slot. In various circumstances, ridges 13923 can be configured to hold the tips of staple legs 13032 in place until staples 13030 move from their non-fired position in their fired position. In various embodiments, with reference now to Figure 344, a fabric thickness compensator, and / or a covering covering a tissue thickness compensator, may comprise ridges and / or longitudinal valleys. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise an upper surface defined by ridges 14023 and valleys 14024, where valleys 14024 may be defined between ridges 14023, for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise a liner 14021 which may include a plurality of openings 14029 defined therein which can be configured to receive a staple leg 13032. Openings 14029 can be defined at ridges 14023, where the tips the staple legs 13032 can be positioned below the peaks 14028 of ridges 14029, positioned flush with peaks 14028, and / or positioned above peaks 14028. Additionally or instead of the above, openings 14029 can be defined in the valleys 14024, for example. Each opening can be surrounded, or at least partially surrounded, by a relief, for example, which can strengthen the coating and / or the fabric thickness compensator that surrounds the openings. In any case, in addition to the foregoing, the liner 14021 may be connected to a fabric thickness compensator in any suitable manner, including the use of at least one adhesive, for example.

As described above and with reference again to Fig. 233, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise an anvil, such as anvil 10060, for example, movable between an open position and a closed position to compress tissue T against the fabric thickness compensator 10020 of a staple cartridge 10000, for example. In various circumstances, the anvil 10060 can be rotated in the direction of the staple cartridge 10000 until its downward movement is stopped by some portion of the staple cartridge 10000 and / or a portion of the channel, where the staple cartridge 10000 is positioned. In at least one such circumstance, the anvil 10060 can be rotated downwards until its downward movement is resisted by the tip 10003 of the staple cartridge 10000 and / or the tissue T positioned intermediate between the tip 10003 and the staple cartridge 10000 In some circumstances, the anvil 10060 can sufficiently compress the tissue thickness compensator 10020 to allow the tissue T to come in contact with the tips of the staples 10030. In certain circumstances, depending on the thickness of the tissue T, the anvil 10060 can compressing the tissue thickness compensator 10020 sufficiently that the anvil 10060 comes into contact with the staples 10030 at the moment when the yunq ue 10060 reaches its fully closed position. In other words, in such circumstances, the anvil 10060 can deform the staples 10030 before the firing member 10052 advances towards the staple cartridge 10000 to fire staples 10030. Such circumstances may be acceptable in some cases; however, with reference now to Figs. 358 and 359, alternatives are contemplated wherein a distal gap fastener element, such as element 10059, for example, can be used to limit the distance at which the anvil 10060 can be closed before the firing bar 10052 advances in the staple cartridge 10000. The element 10059 may extend upwardly from the upper surface 10021 of the tissue thickness compensator 10020, such that the downward movement of the anvil 10060 can be stopped while the tissue T is compressed against the element 10059 and a resistance force is generated between them. In use, as described above, the firing member 10052 can advance distally in the staple cartridge 10000 in the direction of the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000 to eject the staples 10030 from the support portion 10010. Simultaneously, the staple member shot 10052 may engage the anvil 10060 and place the anvil 10060 at a desired distance from the surface of the cover 10011 (Fig. 218) of the support portion 10010 on the staples 10030 formed. In this manner, the firing member 10052 can control the distance, or space, between the contact surface with the anvil tissue 10060 and the surface of the cover 10011 at a particular location, where this particular location can advance distally while the firing member 10052 advances distally. In various circumstances, this distance of space may be shorter than the spade between the anvil 10060 and the surface of the cover 10011 which is controlled or dictated by the distal space fastener 10059 at the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020. Referring now to Figure 359, the blade edge 10053 of the firing member 10052 can be configured to cross-section the distal space fastener 10059 when the firing member 10052 reaches the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 such that, after the element 10059 is cross-sectioned, the firing member 10052 can pull the anvil 10060 downwardly toward the support portion 10010 and close the space at the desired space height when the staples 10030 are fired at the distal end of the staple cartridge 10000 Alternatively, a distal gap fixation element can be configured to fold while the firing member approaches the end of the gap. istal of the staple cartridge. For example, the distal space fastener may comprise a column that can provide anvil resistance as described above and, then, be suddenly bent once the buckling strength of the space fastener is reached when the member The triggering device approaches the distal end of the staple cartridge. This buckling force can be approximately 44 N (10 Ibf), for example. A space fastener can be configured to drop downwardly into the cover of the support portion when a force greater than a predetermined amount is applied to the space fastener, for example. The distal space can controlled by the tip of the staple cartridge. For example, downward movement of the anvil 10060 may be limited by the tip until the firing member reaches the distal end of the cartridge, where, at such a point, the compression force applied to the tip may cause the tip to fold . The tip may comprise a cavity defined by walls of the cavity which may allow the cavity to be folded once the compression force applied thereto exceeds a predetermined force. For example, the cavity can be defined by folding walls.

Optionally, as described above, an anvil, such as the anvil 10060, for example, can move between an open position and a closed position for the purpose of compressing a tissue thickness compensator between the anvil and the supporting portion of an anvil. staple cartridge. In certain circumstances, with reference now to Figs. 360 and 361, the tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as the fabric thickness compensator 14120 of the staple cartridge 14100, for example, can expand laterally and / or longitudinally when the tissue thickness compensator 14120 is compresses against a support portion 14110 of the staple cartridge 14100. The ends and / or sides of the fabric thickness compensator 14120 may not be constrained by the support portion 14110 and / or the anvil 10060 and, as a result, the compensator Fabric thickness 14120 may expand in those directions without generating a compression pressure, or at least an undesirable compression pressure, within the fabric thickness compensator 14120. In such cases, a trigger member, such as the firing member 10052 (Figure 236), for example, passing through the fabric thickness compensator 14120 may not be unduly hindered by an undesirable compression pressure within the fabric thickness compensator 14120, for example. Alternatively, with reference again to Figure 360, the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 may be limited by the tip 14103 of the staple cartridge 14100, for example. In this particular embodiment, similar to the above, the distal end 14125 of the fabric thickness compensator 14120 may be constrained by the tip 14103 to reduce the possibility that the fabric thickness compensator 14120 prematurely separates from the support portion 14110 . In any case, as a result of the above, a large internal pressure may be generated within the distal end 14125 which may impede the advancement of the firing member 10052, especially when the firing member 10052 reaches the distal end 14125. More particularly, in certain circumstances, the trigger member 10052 can push, channel, and / or move the tissue thickness compensator 14120 distally while transversally cutting the tissue thickness compensator 14120 and, as a result, an even larger internal pressure can be created within the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120. In order to at least partially dissipate this pressure within the tissue thickness compensator 14120, the tip 14103 may comprise a flexible material that can allow the tip 14103 to flex in the distal direction, example, and create space Additional to the fabric thickness compensator 14120. Referring now to Figs. 362 and 363, the tip of a staple cartridge may comprise a portion that can slide distally. More particularly, the tip 14203 of the staple cartridge 14200 may comprise a slidable portion 14204 that can be slidably connected to the tip 14203 in such a manner that, when the anvil 10060 is closed and / or the firing member 10052 advances at the end distal of the staple cartridge 14200, the slidable portion 14204 can slide distally and create additional space for the tissue thickness compensator 14200 and at least partially relieve the internal pressure therein. One of the tip 14203 and the slidable portion 14204 may comprise one or more rails and the other between the tip 14203 and the slidable portion 14204 may comprise one or more channels configured to slidably receive the rails therein. The channels and rails can be configured to cooperatively limit the movement of the slidable portion 14204 to a longitudinal distal path, for example.

In various circumstances, in addition to the above, certain staples, such as the most distal staples within a staple cartridge, for example, may capture a larger portion of a tissue thickness compensator than the proximal staples within the staple cartridge. . In such circumstances, as a result, a great clamping pressure can be applied to the tissue captured within the distal staples as compared to the proximal staples. These circumstances may arise when at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator moves and / or accumulates in the distal end of the staple cartridge during use, as described above, even though the tissue thickness compensator may be comprised of a substantially homogeneous material having a substantially constant thickness. In various circumstances it may be desirable for certain staples to apply a higher clamping pressure to the tissue than other staples, wherein a support portion and / or a tissue thickness compensator can be constructed and arranged to control which staples can apply the upper clamping pressure. to the fabric and that staples can apply a lower clamping pressure to the tissue. Referring now to FIG. 364, a staple cartridge 14300 may comprise a support portion 14310 and, in addition, a fabric thickness compensator 14320 positioned on the surface of the cover 14311 of the support portion 14310. In comparison with FIG. other embodiments described in this application comprising a support portion 14310 having a flat, or at least substantially flat, cover surface, the cover surface 14311 may be inclined and / or reduced between the distal end 14305 and the proximal end 14306 of the support portion 14310. The cover surface 14311 of the support portion 14310 may comprise a height of the cover at its distal end 14305 that is shorter than the height of the cover at its proximal end 14306. For example, the staples 10030 at the distal end of the staple cartridge 14300 may extend over the cover surface 14311 a greater distance than the staples 10030 in the proximal extremity. Alternatively, the surface of the cover of a support portion may understand a height at its distal end that is higher than its height at its proximal end. Referring again to FIG. 364, the fabric thickness compensator 14320 may comprise a thickness that is different along the longitudinal distance thereof. The fabric thickness compensator 14320 may comprise a thickness at its distal end 14325 that is thicker than its proximal end 14326, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 14322 can comprise a lower surface 14322 that can be tilted or reduced to adjust, or at least substantially adjust, the sloped or reduced cover surface 14311 of the support portion 14310. As a result, the upper surface, or contact with the tissue, 14321 of the fabric thickness compensator 14320 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, surface on which tissue T can be positioned. In any case, as the fabric thickness compensator 14320 is thicker at its distal end 14325, the distal clips 10030 may capture a larger portion of the tissue thickness compensator 14320 therein than the proximal clips 10030 and, as a result, the distal staples 10030 may apply a greater compressive force to the tissue T, especially when the space distance between the anvil 10060 and the cover surface 14311 is constant, or at least substantially constant, at the proximal and distal ends of the cartridge. Staples In certain circumstances, however, the anvil 10060 may not reach a fully closed position and, as a result, the distance of space between the anvil 10060 and the surface of the cover 14311 may be larger in the Distal end of staple cartridge 14300 than at the proximal end. In various circumstances, distal staples 10030 may not be completely formed and, as a result, distal staples 10030 may not apply the desired clamping pressure to tissue T. Where the tissue thickness compensator is thicker at the distal end of the cartridge of staples, the thickness compensator of the fabric can compensate for the deformation of the staples and apply sufficient pressure to the tissue T.

Referring now to Figure 365, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 14400, for example, may comprise a support portion 14410 and, additionally, a tissue thickness compensator 14420 positioned on the cover surface 14411 of the support portion 14410. Similar to the above, the cover surface 14411 may be inclined and / or reduced such that the distal end 14405 of the support portion 14410 may have a height of the cover that is shorter than the height of the cover at the proximal end 14406, for example. The fabric thickness compensator 14420 may comprise a constant, or at least substantially constant, thickness along the length thereof and, as a result, the top, or tissue contacting surface 14421 of the fabric thickness compensator 14420 it can equal, or at least substantially equal, the contour of the cover surface 14411. The staples 10030 of the staple cartridge 14400 can be fully incorporated within the tissue thickness compensator 14420 and the support portion 14410 when the staples 10030 are in your position does not shot. The staples 10030 positioned at the proximal end of the staple cartridge 14400 can be fully integrated within the tissue thickness compensator 14420 and the support portion 14410 when the staples 10030 are in their non-fired position while, due to the reduced slope of the cover 14411 and upper surface 14421, the tips of certain staples 10030, which includes staples 10030 positioned at the distal end of staple cartridge 14400, may protrude through upper surface 14421 of tissue thickness compensator 14420 when staples 10030 are in their non-fired position.

Optionally, as described above, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a single material, wherein the entire fabric thickness compensator may have the same properties of the material, or at least substantially the same, such as density, rigidity, elastic index, hardness, and / or elasticity, for example, everywhere. Alternatively, with reference now to Figure 368, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 14520, for example, may comprise a plurality of materials or layers of materials. The fabric thickness compensator 14520 may comprise a first, or middle, layer 14520a, second, or intermediate layers 14520b attached to the first layer 14520a on opposite sides thereof, and a third, or outer layer 14520c, attached to each of the layers. second layers 14520b. The intermediate layers 14520b can be coupled to the central layer 14520a by the use of at least one adhesive and, similarly, the outer layers 14520c can be coupled to the second layers 14520 by using at least one adhesive. In addition or in lieu of an adhesive, the layers 14520a-14520c may be held together by one or more interlacing features and / or fasteners, for example. In any case, the inner layer 14520a may comprise a first material having a first set of a second material having a second set of properties of the materials, the intermediate layers 14520b may comprise a set of properties of the materials, and the layers external 14520c may be comprised of a third material having a third set of properties of the materials, for example. These sets of material properties can include density, stiffness, spring rate, hardness, and / or elasticity, for example. A staple cartridge may comprise six rows of staples 10030, for example, wherein a row of staples 10030 may be positioned at least partially on each of the outer layers 14520c and each of the inner layers 14520b, for example, and wherein two rows of staples 10030 can be positioned at least partially with the inner layer 14520a. In use, similar to the above, the staples 10030 can be ejected from the staple cartridge in such a manner that the staple legs 10032 of the staples 10030 penetrate the upper surface 14521 of the tissue thickness compensator 14520, penetrate the tissue positioned against the tissue. upper surface 14521 by an anvil and then come into contact with the anvil in such a manner that the legs 10032 are deformed to capture the thickness compensator of the fabric 14520 and the fabric within the staples 10030. In addition, similar to the above , the fabric thickness compensator 14520 can cut transversally by a firing member while the firing member advances through the staple cartridge. For example, the trigger member can cross-section the inner layer 14520a, and the tissue, along a path defined by an axis 14529, for example.

In addition to the above, the rows of staples 10030 positioned within the inner layer 14520a may comprise the rows of staples that are closer to the edges of the cross-sectioned fabric. Correspondingly, the staple rows 10030 that are positioned within the outer layers 14520c may comprise staple rows that are further away from the edges of the transversely cut fabric. The first material comprising the inner layer 14520a may comprise a density that is greater than the density of the second material comprising the intermediate layers 14520b and, similarly, the density of the second material may be greater than the density of the third material comprising the layers external 14520c, for example. In various circumstances, as a result, larger compression forces can be created within the staples 10030 positioned within the inner layer 14520a compared to the compression forces generated within the staples 10030 positioned within the intermediate layers 14520b and the outer layers. 14520c. Similarly, larger compression forces can be created within the staples 10030 positioned within the intermediate layers 14520b, as compared to the compression forces created within the staples 10030 positioned within the outer layers 14520c, for example.

Alternatively, the first material comprising the inner layer 14520a may comprise a density that is less than the density of the second material comprising the intermediate layers 14520b and, similarly, the density of the second material may be less than the density of the third material comprising the outer layers 14520c, for example. In various circumstances, as a result, within the staples 10030 positioned within the outer layers 14520c larger compression forces can be created as compared to the compression forces created within the staples 10030 positioned within the intermediate layers 14520b and the inner layer 14520a. Similarly, within the staples 10030 positioned within the intermediate layers 14520b larger compression forces can be created, as compared to the compression forces created within the staples 10030 positioned within the inner layer 14520a, for example. Alternatively, any other suitable arrangement of layers, materials, and / or material properties could be used. In any case, the layers 14520a-14520c of the fabric thickness compensator 14520 can be configured to remain joined together after being implanted. The layers 14520a-14520c of the fabric thickness compensator 14520 can be configured to separate from one another after being implanted. For example, layers 14520a-14520c may be coupled by the use of one or more bioabsorbable adhesives that can initially hold the layers together and then allow the layers to be released from each other over time.

As described above, a tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as tissue thickness compensator 14520, for example, may comprise a plurality of longitudinal layers. Alternatively, with reference now to Figure 369, a staple cartridge may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 14620, for example, which may comprise a plurality of horizontal layers. For example, the compensator tissue thickness 14620 can comprise a first layer, or lower, 14,620th, a second layer, or intermediate, 14620b coupled to the lower layer 14,620th, and a third layer, or higher, 14620c coupled to the intermediate layer 14620b. The first layer 14620a may comprise a flat, or substantially planar bottom surface 14626a and a triangular, or pyramid top surface 14625a, for example. For example, the second layer 14620b may comprise a triangular or pyramidal bottom surface 14626b, which can be configured to match and abut the top surface 14625a of the first layer 14620a. Similarly to the foregoing, the second layer 14620b may comprise a triangular or pyramidal upper surface, 14625b which can equal and abut a triangular, or pyramid, bottom surface 14626c of the third layer 14620c, for example. The upper surface of the third layer 14626c may comprise a contact surface with the flat, or at least substantially flat, fabric 14621. In addition, similar to the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator 14620 may be configured to store at least six rows of fabric. staples, such as staples 10030, for example, in These are where a trigger member can transversely cut the fabric thickness compensator 14620 between the two rows of innermost staples along a displacement extending through the axis 14629, for example. Similar to above, each layer 14,620th, 14620b, and 14620c may comprise a different material may comprise different material properties and, as a result of the triangular configuration, or pyramidal, the 14,620th-14620c layers compensator tissue thickness 14620 may have different global properties in several places within it. For example, the outermost rows of staples 10030 can capture more of the third layer 14620c than of the first layer 14620a therein while the innermost rows of the staples 10030 can capture less of the third layer 14620c than the first layer 14620a and, as a result, the fabric thickness compensator 14620 can compress the captured tissue within the outermost staples 10030 differently than the fabric captured within the innermost staples 10030, for example, even though the tissue thickness compensator 14620 may have the same total thickness, or at least substantially the same, through it.

Referring now to Figure 286, a tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as the tissue thickness compensator 14720 of the staple cartridge 14700, for example, may comprise voids, cavities, channels, and / or grooves. , for example, defined herein that the thickness of the fabric thickness compensator 14720 may vary. In at least one such embodiment, the fabric thickness compensator 14720 It can be positioned against the cover surface 14711 of a support portion 14710 of the staple cartridge 14700 such that the gaps 14 723 defined in the lower surface 14722 compensator tissue thickness 14720 may cover certain cavities staple 10012, but no other . The voids 14723 may extend transversely to the knife groove 14715 of the support portion 14710, perpendicular to the knife groove 14715, and / or parallel to the knife groove 14715, for example. The voids 14723 may define a pattern of fingerprints on the bottom surface 14722 of the fabric thickness compensator 14720. In any case, when staples, such as staples 10030, for example, are deployed from support portion 14710, with reference now to FIGS. 287 and 288, certain staples 10030 may capture the tissue thickness compensator 14720 within a region containing a hollow space 14723, while other staples 10030 may capture the tissue thickness compensator 14720 within a region positioned intermediate between the voids 14723.

In addition or in lieu of the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator 14720 may comprise voids, cavities, channels, and / or grooves, for example, which are defined on the upper surface, or tissue contact surface, 14721. With reference now to Figs. 366 and 367, a staple cartridge 14800 may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 14820 which may include a plurality of indentations 14823 extending from at least one between, upwardly from an upper surface 14821 of the fabric thickness compensator 14820, inward toward a central groove 14825, and / or distally towards the distal end of the staple cartridge 14800, for example. For example, the tracks 14823 can be separated by channels, grooves, and / or grooves, such as channels 14824, for example. In various circumstances, as a result of the foregoing, the total thickness of the fabric thickness compensator may vary between the rows and / or vary between the staples within a row of staples. In certain circumstances, the traces, or thick portions, can be constructed and arranged in such a way that they can flow in a desired direction, such as inwards, for example, when the tissue thickness compensator is compressed.

Referring now to Figure 303, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 14900, for example, may comprise a support portion 14910 and, additionally, a tissue thickness compensator 14920 positioned against the support portion 14910. Similar to the above, the support portion 14910 may comprise staple drivers that can be lifted upward by a staple deployment slider to lift the staples, such as staples 10030, for example, at least partially positioned within the portion of the staple. support 14910 in the direction of an anvil, such as the anvil 10060, for example, positioned opposite the staple cartridge 14900. The support portion 14910 may comprise six rows of staple cavities, such as two outer rows of staple cavities, two inner rows of staple cavities, and two intermediate rows of staple cavities positioned intermediate between the inner rows and the outer rows, by example, wherein the anvil 10060 may comprise six rows of shaping cavities 10062 aligned, or at least substantially aligned with, the staple cavities. The inner rows of staple cavities may include staple drivers 14940a positioned therein, the intermediate rows of staple cavities may include staple drivers 14940b positioned therein, and the outer rows of the staple cavities may include staple drivers 14940c positioned in these, wherein each of the staple drivers 14940a may include a base 14949a configured to support a staple 10030, wherein each of the staple drivers 14940b may include a base 14949b configured to support a staple 10030, and wherein each of the staple drivers 14940c may include a base 14949c configured to support a staple 10030. In their non-fired positions, i.e., when the staple drivers 14940a-14940c are seated in the drive brackets 14926 extending below of the support portion 14910, the 14949a bases of the 14940a staple drivers can be positioned closer to the the anvil 10060 as the bases 14949b of the staple drivers 14940b and the bases 14949c of the staple drivers 14940c. In such a position, a first forming distance can be defined between the bases 14949a and the forming cavities 10062 positioned on the bases 14949a, a second forming distance can be defined between the bases 14949b and the forming cavities 10062 positioned on the bases 14949b, and a third forming distance can be defined between the bases 14949c and the forming cavities 10062 positioned on the bases 14949c, in where the first shaping distance can be shorter than the second shaping distance and the second shaping distance can be shorter than the third shaping distance, for example. When the staple drivers 14940a-14940c move from their non-fired positions (Fig. 303) to their fired positions, each staple driver 14940a-14940c can move up an equal, or at least substantially equal distance in the direction of the anvil 10060 by the staple deployment slider in such a manner that the first impellers 14940a propel their respective staples 10030 to a first formed height, the second impellers 14940b propel their respective staples 10030 to a second formed height, and the third 14940c impellers drive their respective ones staples 10030 at a third height formed, wherein the first height formed may be shorter than the second height formed and the second height formed may be shorter than the third height formed, for example. Various alternatives are contemplated wherein the first staple drivers 14940a move up a first distance, the second staple drivers 14940b move up a second distance, and the third staple drivers 14940c move up a third distance, at where one or more of the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance may be different.

Referring again to Figure 303, the cover surface 14911 of the support portion 14910 may vary in height with respect to the contact surface with the tissue 10061 of the anvil 10060.

This variation in height can occur laterally and, the height of the covering surface 14911 surrounding the inner rows of staple cavities can be higher than the covering surface 14911 surrounding the outer rows of the staple cavities, by example. The bottom surface 14922 of the fabric thickness compensator 14920 can be configured to equal or at least substantially equalize the cover surface 14911 of the support portion 14910. In addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 14920 can also vary in thickness , wherein, the top, or tissue contacting surface 14921 of the fabric thickness compensator 14920 can be tilted inward from the outside or the side edges thereof. For example, as a result of the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator 14920 may be thinner in a region positioned on the inner rows of staple pockets, and thicker in a region positioned on the outer rows of the staple pockets, for example. Referring now to Figure 304, the cover surface of a support portion 15010 may comprise a stepped deck surface, for example, wherein the highest steps of the stepped surface may surround the inner rows of staple pockets, and the lower steps of the stepped surface may surround the outer rows of staple cavities, for example. For example, steps that have an intermediate height may surround the intermediate rows of staple cavities. A tissue thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 15020, for example, it may comprise a lower surface that can match and abut the cover surface of the support portion 15010. The upper, or tissue contacting surface 15021 of the fabric thickness compensator may comprise an arched, parabolic surface, and / or curve, for example, which may extend from a first side side of the fabric thickness compensator 15020 to a second side side of the fabric thickness compensator 15020 with a vertex aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the center of the staple cartridge 15000, for example. With reference now to Figure 299, a staple cartridge 15300, for example, may comprise a support portion 15310, a plurality of staple drivers 15340 movably positioned within the staple pockets defined in the support portion 15310, and a tissue thickness compensator. 15320 positioned above the cover surface 15311 of the support portion 15310. The staple cartridge 15300 may further comprise one or more lower tray portions 15326 that can be coupled to the support portion 15310 and extend around the portion bottom of the support portion 15310 and support the impellers 15340, and the staples 15330, in their non-fired positions. While a staple display slider advances through the staple cartridge, the slider can also be supported by the lower tray portions 15326 while the slider lifts the staple drivers 15340 and staples 15330 upwardly through the tissue thickness compensator. 15320. The tissue thickness compensator 15320 may comprise a first, or inner, portion 15322a positioned on an inner row of the staple pockets, a second portion, or intermediate portion 15322b positioned on an intermediate row of staple pockets, and a third, or outer portion 15322c positioned on a staple pocket. row of staple cavities, wherein the inner portion 15322a may be thicker than the intermediate portion 15322b and the intermediate portion 15322b may be thicker than the outer portion 15322c, for example. The fabric thickness compensator 15320 can comprise longitudinal channels, for example, defined therein that can create the thinner portions 15322b and 15322c of the fabric thickness compensator 15320. Alternatively, the longitudinal channels can be defined on the upper surface and / or the bottom surface of a tissue thickness compensator. The upper surface 15321 of the fabric thickness compensator 15320 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, surface, for example.

Referring now to Figure 296, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 15120, for example, which may comprise a plurality of portions having different thicknesses. The fabric thickness compensator 15120 may comprise a first, or inner, portion 15122a which may have a first thickness, second, or intermediate portions, 15122b extending from the first portion 15122a which may each have a second thickness, and third portions portions, or exterior, 15122c that they extend from the second portions 15122b which may each have a third thickness. For example, the third thickness may be thicker than the second thickness and the second thickness may be thicker than the first thickness, for example, although any of the suitable thicknesses could be used. The portions 15122a-15122c of the fabric thickness compensator 15120 may comprise steps having different thickness. Similar to the above, a staple cartridge may comprise several rows of staples 10030 and a plurality of staple drivers having different heights that can deform staples 10030 at different heights formed. In addition, similar to the above, the staple cartridge may comprise first staple drivers 15140a which can drive the staples 10030 supported thereon at a first formed height, second staple drivers 15140b which can drive the staples 10030 supported thereon to a second one. height formed, and third staple drivers 15140c that can drive the staples 10030 supported thereon at a third height formed, wherein the first height formed may be shorter than the second height formed and the second height formed may be shorter than the height formed. third height formed, for example. Optionally as illustrated in Figure 296, each staple 10030 may comprise the same height, or substantially this, not formed, or not fired. In certain other embodiments, with reference now to Figure 296A, the first impellers 15140a, the second impellers 15140b, and / or the third impellers 15140c can support unformed staples having different heights. By For example, first staple drivers 15140a can support staples 15130a having a first height not formed, second staple drivers 15140b can support staples 15130b having a second height not formed, and third staple drivers 15140c can support staples 15130c that they have a third height not formed, where the first height not formed can be shorter than the second height not formed and the second height not formed can be shorter than the third height not formed, for example. Referring again to Figure 296A, the tips of staples 15130a, 15130b, and / or 15130c may be, or at least be substantially in the same plane, while, alternatively, the tips of the staples, 15130a, 15130b, and / or 15130c may not be in the same plane. Referring now to Figure 297, a staple cartridge can include a fabric thickness compensator 15220 having a plurality of portions having different thickness that can be implanted against tissue T by staples 15130a, 15130b, and 15130c, as shown in FIG. described earlier. In at least one embodiment, with reference now to Figure 298, staples 15130a, 15130b, and / or 15130c can be deformed at different heights formed, where first staples 15130a can be formed at a first formed height, second staples 15130b can formed at a second formed height, and the third staples 15130c may be formed at a third height formed, and wherein the first height formed may be shorter than the second height formed and the second height formed may be shorter than the third height formed , by example. Other alternatives are contemplated wherein staples 15130a, 15130b, and 15130c can be formed at any suitable formed height and / or any relative formed height.

Optionally, as described above, the anvil of a surgical stapling instrument can move between an open position and a closed position. In such circumstances, the contact surface with the anvil tissue can move in its final, or forming position, while the anvil moves to its closed position. Once the anvil is in its closed position, the contact surface with the tissue may not be adjustable again. Alternatively, with reference now to Figure 351, a surgical stapler, such as surgical stapler 15500, for example, may comprise an anvil channel 15560 and an adjustable anvil adjustment contact plate 15561 positioned within the channel of anvil 15560. In such cases, the anvil plate 15561 can be raised and / or lowered into the anvil channel 15560 in order to adjust the position of the contact surface with the tissue of the anvil plate 15561 relative to a cartridge of staples positioned opposite the anvil plate 15561. The surgical stapler 15500 may comprise an adjustment slide 15564 which, with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357, can slide intermediate between the anvil channel 15560 and the anvil plate 15561 in order to control the distance between the anvil plate 15561 and the staple cartridge. With reference again to Figs. 351 and 352, the surgical stapler 15500 may further comprise an impeller 15562 coupled to the adjustment slip 15564 that can slide proximally with the objective of sliding the adjustment slide 15564 proximally and / or sliding distally with the objective of sliding the adjustment slide 15564 distally. With reference again to Figs. 356 and 357, the pusher 15562 can slide between two or more predefined positions in order to adjust the anvil plate 15561 between two or more positions, respectively. Such predefined positions can be demarcated on surgical stapler 15500 as demarcations 15563 (Figure 351), for example. With reference to Figure 357, the adjustment slide 15564 may comprise a plurality of support surfaces, such as the first support surface 15565a, the second support surface 15565b, and the third support surface 15565c, for example, which may aligning with a plurality of plate positioning surfaces, such as the first positioning surface 15569a, the second positioning surface 15569b, and the third positioning surface 15569c, respectively, at the rear of the anvil plate 15561 to position the anvil plate 15561 in a first position. In order to place the anvil plate 15561 in a second position, the pusher 15562 and the slide 15564 can slide proximally, for example, to realign the bearing surfaces 15565a-15565c of the slide 15564 relative to the locating surfaces 15569a- 15569c of the anvil plate 15561. More particularly, with reference to FIG. 356, the slide 15564 can slide distally such that the first bearing surface 15565a of the slide 15564 can be positioned behind the second positioning surface 15569b of the anvil plate 15561 and in such a way that the second support surface 15565b of the slide 15564 can be positioned behind the third positioning surface 15569c of the anvil plate 15561 to move the plate of anvil 15561 closer to the staple cartridge. When the anvil plate 15561 moves from its first position to its second position, under such circumstances, the adjustable anvil plate 15561 can further compress the tissue T positioned between the anvil plate 15561 and the staple cartridge. In addition to the above, the height formed of the staples can be controlled by the position of the anvil plate 15561 relative to the staple cartridge while the forming cavities defined in the anvil plate 15561 move closer and / or farther from the staple cartridge when the anvil plate 15561 is adjusted. Although only two positions are discussed above, the slide 15564 can be slid into an appropriate number of positions to move the anvil plate 15561 closer and / or away from the staple cartridge. In any case, once the anvil plate 15561 is properly positioned, a staple deployment slider 15550 can slide distally within the staple cartridge to lift the staple drivers 15540 and the staples 15530 in the direction of the anvil plate 15561 and stapling tissue T, as illustrated in Fig. 354. Similar surgical staplers are described in U.S. Patent Application No. series 13 / 036,647, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT, which was presented on February 28, 2011, whose description is incorporated in its entirety as a reference in the present description.

Referring now to Figure 353, a staple cartridge can be positioned within a staple cartridge channel 15570 of surgical stapler 15500 which may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as tissue thickness compensator 15520, for example. . When the anvil plate 15561 moves in the direction of the staple cartridge, as described above, the anvil plate 15561 can compress the tissue thickness compensator 15520 and / or the tissue T positioned intermediate between the anvil plate 15561 and the fabric thickness compensator 15520. While staples 15530 are deployed from the staple cartridge, with reference to FIG. 355, staples 15530 can compress and implant tissue thickness compensator 15520 against tissue T. Optionally, when the plate of anvil 15561 is positioned against slip 15564 and the tissue is still not positioned between anvil plate 15561 and tissue thickness compensator 15520, a space can be defined between anvil plate 15561 and top surface 15521 of the thickness compensator of fabric 15520 when the anvil plate 15561 is in a first position. When the anvil plate 15561 is moved to a second position, the anvil plate 15561 can come into contact with the fabric thickness compensator 15520. Alternatively, when the anvil plate 15561 is positioned against the slide 15564 and the tissue is still it is not positioned between the anvil plate 15561 and the compensator of fabric thickness 15520, a space may be defined between the anvil plate 15561 and the top surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 when the anvil plate 15561 is in a first position and / or a second position. For example, the anvil plate 15561 may not come into contact with the fabric thickness compensator 15520. Alternatively, when the anvil plate 15561 is positioned against the slide 15564 and the tissue is still not positioned between the anvil plate 15561 and the fabric thickness compensator 15520, the anvil plate 15561 may come into contact with the top surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 regardless of whether the anvil plate 15561 is in a first position and / or a second position, for example. Although only two positions of the anvil plate 15611 are described in the present description, the anvil plate 15611 can be positioned, or indexed, in any suitable number of positions.

Optionally, as a result of the foregoing, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise means for adjusting the formed height of the staples that can, in various circumstances, compensate for different tissue thicknesses. In addition, the surgical stapling instrument may comprise other means for compensating different tissue thicknesses and / or thickness variations within the tissue, for example. For example, the anvil plate 15561 can be adjusted up or away from the opposite staple cartridge to increase the formed, or fired, height of the staples. Correspondingly, the anvil plate 15561 can be adjusted to down, or in direction, to the opposite staple cartridge to decrease the formed, or fired, height of the staples. The adjustment of the anvil plate 15561, for example, can adjust the space between the forming cavities defined in the anvil plate 15561 and the fired height of the staple drivers or, more specifically, the triggered height of the impeller bases. of staples, for example. Even with such a capacity to adjust the height of the staples formed to take account of the thicker and / or thinner fabric, for example, a thickness compensator of the fabric can also compensate for the thicker and / or thinner fabric and / or compensate for thickness variations in the tissue, as described above. In such cases, a surgeon may be provided with various means of compensation within the same surgical stapling instrument.

As described above, a surgical stapling instrument can use a staple cartridge having a linear array of staple and staple cavities, wherein a trigger member can advance distally through the staple cartridge to deploy the staples from the staples. staple cavities. A staple cartridge may comprise rows of staple cavities, and staples that are curved. With reference now to Figs. 345 and 346, a surgical stapling instrument, such as stapler 15600, for example, may comprise one or more circular or annular rows of staple cavities defined in a circular or annular support portion 15610. Such rows of circular staples may comprise a circular row of internal staple cavities 15612 and a circular row of cavities of external staples 15613, for example. For example, the circular rows of the staple cavities may surround a circular opening 15615 or annular defined in the stapler 15600 that can accommodate a circular or annular knife movably positioned therein. In use, the fabric can be positioned against the cover surface 15611 of the support portion 15610 and an anvil (not illustrated) can be mounted to the surgical stapler 15600 through an impeller that extends through and / or is positioned within the opening 15615 such that, when the impeller is actuated, the anvil can be clamped in the direction of the support portion 15610 and compress the tissue against the cover surface 15611. Once the tissue is compressed sufficiently, the staples positioned within the staple pockets 15612 and 15613 can be ejected from the support portion 15610 and through the tissue in such a manner that the staples can come into contact with the anvil and deform sufficiently to capture the tissue therein. While the staples are fired and / or after the staples are fired, the circular blade can advance and cut the tissue transversely. Thereafter, the anvil may move away from the support portion 15610 and / or separate from the surgical stapler 15600 in such a manner that the anvil and the surgical stapler 15600 may be removed from the surgical site. Such surgical staplers 15600 and such surgical techniques can be used to couple two portions of a large intestine, for example. In various circumstances, the lines of circular staples can be configured to hold the portions of the large intestine together while the tissue is recovered and, At the same time, they allow the portions of the large intestine to expand flexibly. Similar surgical surgical stapling instruments and surgical techniques are described in U.S. Pat. 5,285,945, entitled SURGICAL ANASTOMOSIS STAPLING INSTRUMENT, granted on February 15, 1994, the disclosure of which is incorporated in its entirety as a reference in the present description.

In addition to the above, a tissue thickness compensator can be positioned against and / or coupled to the support portion 15610 of the surgical stapler 15600, for example. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a circular or annular ring of material comprising an inner radius and an outer radius, for example. In certain circumstances, the fabric may be positioned against this ring of material and, when the anvil is used to move the fabric toward the support portion 15610, the tissue thickness compensator may be compressed between the tissue and the surface of the fabric. cover 15611. During use, the staples can be fired through the thickness compensator of the fabric and the fabric such that the staples can come in contact with the anvil and deform to its fired position to capture portions of tissue and the compensator Thickness of the tissue inside the staples. In various circumstances, in addition to the above, the ring of material comprising the tissue thickness compensator must be flexible enough to allow the portions of the large intestine that surround the staple lines to expand. With reference again to Figs. 345 and 346, a fabric thickness compensator 15620 it may comprise a circular or annular flexible inner ring 15624, for example, which may define a circular opening 15625 or annular. The inner ring 15624 may be configured such that it is not captured within the staples deployed from the surgical stapler 15600; rather, the inner ring 15624 can be positioned radially inward with respect to the inner row of the staple pockets 15612. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 15620 can comprise a plurality of labels, such as inner labels 15622 and labels external 15623, for example, extending from it, in such a way that labels can be captured at least partially within the staples, while deforming. More particularly, with reference primarily to Fig. 345, each inner tag 15622 may comprise a head that is positioned over a staple pocket 15612 that is defined in the surgical stapler 15600, wherein the head may be engaged with the inner ring 15624 by a neck 15626, for example, and, similarly, each outer tag 15623 may comprise a head that is positioned over a staple pocket 15613 defined in surgical stapler 15600, wherein the head may be coupled to inner ring 15624 by a neck 15627, by example. The heads of the inner tags 15622 and the outer tags 15623 may comprise any suitable shape, such as round, oval, and / or elliptical, for example. The collars 15626 and / or 15627 may further comprise any suitable shape, wherein, the collars 15627 connecting the heads of the external tags 15623 to the inner ring 15624 they may be configured to extend between the adjacent inner staple pockets 15612 in the support portion 15610, such that the collars 15627 are not captured within the staples deployed from the inner staple pockets 15612.

With reference now to Figs. 347 and 348, a flexible fabric thickness compensator 15720 may comprise a circular or annular flexible outer ring 15724, for example. The outer ring 15724 can be configured such that it is not captured within staples deployed from the surgical stapler 15600; rather, the outer ring 15724 can be positioned radially outwardly relative to the outer row of the staple pockets 15613. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 15720 can comprise a plurality of labels, such as inner labels 15622 and labels external 15623, for example, extending from it, in such a way that labels can be captured at least partially within the staples, while deforming. More particularly, with reference primarily to Fig. 347, each inner tag 15622 may comprise a head that is positioned over a staple pocket 15612 that is defined in the surgical stapler 15600, wherein the head can be coupled to the outer ring 15724 by a neck 15726, for example, and, similarly, each outer tag 15623 may comprise a head that is positioned over a staple pocket 15613 defined in the surgical stapler 15600, wherein the head can be coupled to the outer ring 15724 by a neck 15727, by example. The inner label heads 15622 and outer labels 15623 may comprise any suitable shape, such as round, oval, and / or elliptical, for example. The collars 15726 and / or 15727 may further comprise any suitable shape, wherein the collars 15726 connecting the heads of the inner tags 15622 to the outer ring 15724 may be configured to extend between the adjacent outer staple pockets 15613, in such a manner that collars 15726 are not captured within the unfolded staples of outer staple pockets 15613. Alternatively, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise a circular or annular flexible inner ring, a circular or annular flexible outer ring and, in addition, a plurality of labels that can be connected to the inner ring and / or the outer ring. Certain labels can be connected to the inner ring and some other labels can be connected to the outer ring. At least some of the labels can be connected to both the inner ring and the outer ring. In any case, in addition to the foregoing, the inner ring 15624 of the fabric thickness compensator 15620, the outer ring 15724 of the fabric thickness compensator 15720, and / or any other suitable fabric thickness compensator, can be configured to flexibly expand and / or contract to accommodate the expansion and / or contraction of tissue that is implanted against. In addition, although various embodiments are described in the present description as comprising circular or annular support rings, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise any support structure in a form suitable for the connection of the labels to East. In addition to the above, the circular blade that is advanced by the surgical stapler to cut the captured tissue between the anvil and the support portion can also cut the reinforcing material. The blade can separate the inner support ring from the labels by cutting the necks of these, for example.

In addition to the above, a fabric thickness compensator can comprise removable and / or relatively movable positions that can be configured to allow the tissue thickness compensator to expand and / or contract in order to accommodate tissue movement against the tissue. which is implanted. With reference now to Figs. 349 and 350, a circular or annular tissue thickness compensator 15820 can be positioned against and / or supported by the cover surface 15611 of the surgical stapler 15600 that can be maintained in an unexpanded position (Fig. 349) while implanting against the fabric and, after the fabric thickness compensator 15820 is implanted, the fabric thickness compensator 15820 can be configured to expand outwardly, as illustrated in Fig. 350. The fabric thickness compensator 15820 can comprise a plurality of arcuate portions 15822 that can be connected together by an inner ring 15824, for example. The arcuate portions 15822 may be separated from each other by the seams 15828. Alternatively, the arcuate portions 15822 may be connected together where, for example, an array of perforations may allow the arcuate portions 15822 to be separated from each other. In any case, the arcuate portions 15822 may comprise each interlock features, such as projections 15826 and notches 15823, for example, which may cooperate to limit relative movement between the arcuate portions 15822 before the fabric thickness compensator 15820 is implanted. In addition to the foregoing, each portion arched 15822 can be connected to the inner ring 15824 by one or more connectors 15827, for example, which can be configured to removably maintain the arcuate portions 15822 in position. After the staples, such as staples 10030, for example, stored within the support portion 15610 are used to implant the tissue thickness compensator 15620 against the tissue, with reference primarily to FIG. 350, the connectors 15827 can separating from the inner ring 15824 and allowing the fabric thickness compensator 15820 to expand at least partially to accommodate movement within the underlying tissue. In various circumstances, all the arcuate portions 15822 can be separated from the inner ring 15824, while, in other circumstances, only some of the arcuate portions 15822 can be separated from the inner ring 15824. Alternatively, the arcuate portions 15822 can be connected by flexible sections that can be allowing the arcuate portions 15822 to move relative to each other but not to separate from each other. For example, the flexible sections may not receive staples therein and may be configured to stretch and / or contract to accommodate the relative movement of the arcuate portions 15822. In Figs. 349 and 350, the fabric thickness compensator 15820 may comprise eight arcuate portions 15822, for example.

Alternatively, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise any suitable number of arcuate portions, such as two or more arcuate portions, for example.

In addition to the foregoing, a tissue thickness compensator 15620, 15720, and / or 15820, for example, may be configured to compensate for thicker and / or thinner tissue captured between the anvil and support portion 15610 of surgical instrument 15600. Optionally, similar to the above, the formed, or triggered, height of the staples can be adjusted by moving the anvil in the direction of, and / or away from the support portion 15610. More particularly, the anvil can move closer to the support portion 15610 to decrease the formed height of the staples, whereas, correspondingly, the anvil can move further away from the portion. of support 15610 to increase the height formed of the staples. In such cases, as a result, a surgeon can adjust the anvil away from the support portion 15610 to take the coarse tissue into account and toward the support portion 15610 to take the thin tissue into account. In various other circumstances, the surgeon may decide not to adjust the anvil at all and rely on the tissue thickness compensator to account for the thinnest and / or thickest tissue. Optionally, as a result, the surgical instrument 15600 may comprise at least two means for compensating different thicknesses and / or variations in tissue thickness.

Optionally, as described above, a tissue thickness compensator may be coupled to a carrier support portion. a staple cartridge The lower surface of the fabric thickness compensator may comprise one between a layer of hooks or a layer of circular instruments while one surface of cover on the support portion may comprise the other between the layer of hooks and the layer of circular instruments. For example, the hooks and circular instruments may be configured to engage with each other and removably retain the tissue thickness compensator to the support portion. Optionally, each hook may comprise an enlarged head extending from a neck, for example. A plurality of pads comprising the circular instruments, for example, may be coupled to the lower surface of the fabric thickness compensator, while a plurality of pads comprising the hooks may be coupled to the cover surface of the support portion. The support portion may comprise one or more openings and / or recesses, for example, which may be configured to receive an insert therein comprising hooks and / or circular instruments. In addition or in lieu of the foregoing, a fabric thickness compensator may be removably mounted to an anvil by the use of such hook and circular instrument arrangements, for example. Hooks and circular instruments may comprise fibrous surfaces, for example.

Optionally, as described above, a staple cartridge may comprise a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator coupled to the support portion. As also described above, the support portion may comprise a groove longitudinal shaped to receive a cutting member therein and the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a retaining member that can be retained in the longitudinal groove. Referring now to FIG. 386, a staple cartridge 16000 may comprise a support portion 16010 that includes a cover surface 16011 and a longitudinal groove. 16015. The staple cartridge 16000 may further comprise a fabric thickness compensator 16020 positioned above the cover surface 16011. The fabric thickness compensator may include a longitudinal retention member 16025 extending downwardly within the longitudinal groove 16015. For example, retaining member 16025 can be pressed into groove 16015 in such a way that the interaction between retaining member 16025 and groove 16015 can resist relative movement between support portion 16010 and thickness compensator of fabric 16020. The body of the fabric thickness compensator 16020 may be comprised of a first material and the retaining member 16025 may be comprised of a second or different material. The body of the fabric thickness compensator 16020 may comprise a material having a first hardness and the retaining member 16025 may comprise a material having a second hardness, wherein the second hardness may be greater than the first hardness, for example. In use, staples 10030 can be pushed up by staple drivers 10040, such that the tips of staples 10030 can push through the body of the thickness compensator fabric 16020 and emerge from the fabric contacting surface 16021 and capture in at least a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 16020 against the target tissue. According to the invention, a cutting member passing through the slot 16015 can cross-section the retaining member 16025 while the staples 10030 are deployed. Once the tissue thickness compensator 16020 is implanted, the retaining member 16025 can be removed from the slot 16015. The body of the tissue thickness compensator 16020 can be configured to separate from the retaining member 16025.

With reference now to Figs. 387 and 389, a staple cartridge 17000 may comprise a support portion 17010 that includes a cover surface 17011 and a longitudinal slot 17015. The staple cartridge 17000 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 17020 positioned above the cover surface 17011. The fabric thickness compensator 17020 may include a longitudinal retaining member 17025 extending downwardly within the longitudinal slot 17015. For example, the retainer member 17025 may be pressed into the slot 17015 in such a manner that the interaction between the retention member 17025 and the slot 17015 can withstand relative movement between the support portion 17010 and the tissue thickness compensator 17020. The retention member 17025 can extend through the entire thickness compensator tissue 17020 to the upper surface 17021 of this, wherein the body portions 17024 of the compensator of Fabric thickness 17020 may be coupled to opposite sides of retaining member 17025. For example, retaining member 17025 may also be configured to resist lateral deviation, for example, of fabric thickness compensator 17020. Body portions 17024 may be comprised of a first material and the retaining member 17025 may be comprised of a second or different material. The body portions 17024 can be comprised of a material having a first hardness and the retaining member 17025 can be comprised of a material having a second hardness, wherein the second hardness can be higher than the first hardness, for example . In addition to the above, a cutting member passing through the slot 17015 can cross-section the retaining member 17025 while the clips 10030 are deployed. Once the tissue thickness compensator 17020 is implanted, the retaining member 17025 it can be removed from the slot 17015. Alternatively the body portions 17024 can be configured to separate from the retaining member 17025.

Referring now to Fig. 388, a staple cartridge 18000 may comprise a support portion 18010 that includes a cover surface 18011 and a longitudinal groove 18015. The staple cartridge 18000 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator. 18020 positioned above the cover surface 18011. The fabric thickness compensator 18020 may include a longitudinal retention member 18025 that extends downwardly into the groove longitudinal 18015. For example, the retaining member 18025 may be pressed into the groove 18015 in such a manner that the interaction between the retaining member 18025 and the groove 18015 can withstand relative movement between the support portion 18010 and the thickness compensator fabric 18020. Retaining member 18025 can extend through the entire fabric thickness compensator 18020 to the upper surface 18021 thereof, wherein the body portions 18024 of the fabric thickness compensator 18020 can be attached to opposite sides. of retaining member 18025. Retaining member 18025 can comprise an enlarged portion 18026 that can be received in a cavity 18016 that is defined in slot 18015. For example, enlarged portion 18026 can resist removal of retention member 18025 from the slot 18015.

Referring now to FIG. 400, a fabric thickness compensator 21020 may comprise a compensator body 21022 and a plurality of capsules, or tubes 21024 positioned therein. Each of the tubes 21024 may include a cavity 21026 defined therein which may include one or more drugs therein. As described in more detail below, the fabric thickness compensator 21020 can be manufactured by placing the tubes 21024 in a mold, for example, and forming the body of the compensator 21022 around the tubes 21024. The one or more drugs can be placed in the tubes 21024 before the tubes 21024 are placed in the mold so that, after the body of the compensator 21022 has been solidified, lyophilized, and / or cured, for example, the tubes 21024 may be encapsulated in the body of the compensator 21022. Alternatively, with reference now to Fig. 401, a fabric thickness compensator 21120 may comprise a plurality of capsules, or tubes, 21124 positioned within a body of the compensator 21122, in where one or more medicaments may be loaded into the tubes 21124 after the body of the compensator 21122 has been formed around the tubes 21124. For example, the tissue thickness compensator 21120 may comprise a port 21123 which may be in communication with fluids with the tubes 21124 and can be configured to allow the drug (s) to be injected into the tubes 21124 through the use of a syringe 21125, for example. In some circumstances, a surgeon or other clinician may load the one or more drugs into the tubes 21124 just before the tissue thickness compensator 21120 is inserted into the patient. These can be especially useful when the fabric thickness compensator 21120 can expect, or is required to have, a long storage life, or shelf life.

Referring now to Fig. 402, the body of the compensator 21022 of the tissue thickness compensator 21020 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material, for example. The body of the compensator 21022 may be comprised of any suitable material, such as PGA and / or PCL, for example. The tubes 21024 may be comprised of any suitable bioabsorbable material, for example. The tubes 21024 can be comprised of any suitable material, such as hyaluronic acid, gelatin, PDS, and / or regenerated oxidized cellulose (ORC), for example. The drug (s) 21025 contained within the cavity 21026 may comprise a fluid, such as doxycylielin, for example. For example, each of the tubes 21024 can be sealed so that the drugs 21025 can be stored within the tubes 21024 until at least a portion of the tubes 21024 has been dissolved and / or bioabsorbed, for example. In use, with reference now to Fig. 403, the tubes 21024 may be exposed to a body fluid, such as blood, for example, which may come into contact with and dissolve the tubes 21024. With reference to Fig. 404, the Body fluid can be squeezed from the tissue T when the tissue T and the tissue thickness compensator 21020 are compressed by an anvil 21060 and / or a plurality of the staples 21030, for example. In accordance with the invention, a bioabsorbable wrap can be used to enclose, or at least partially enclose, the body of the compensator 21022. For example, the wrap can be comprised of hyaluronic acid and / or ORC, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 406, a capsule, or tube, 21224 may comprise a plurality of layers 21224a-21224d, for example. Each tube 21224 may comprise an outer layer or first layer 21224a, a second layer 21224b, a third layer 21224c, and an inner layer 21224d, for example. The outer layer 21224a may be comprised of a hemostatic material, such as thrombin, for example. The second layer 21224b may be comprised of an antimicrobial and / or antibiotic material, such as doxycycline and / or gentamicin, for example. The third layer 21224c can be comprised of an anti-inflammatory material, such as diclofenac and / or NSAIDS, for example. The inner layer 21224d can be comprised of a curing material, such as a synthetic collagen powder material, for example. Referring again to FIG. 406, the tube 21224 may be structured and positioned so that the outer layer 21224a dissolves, or at least substantially dissolves, before the second layer 21224b dissolves, or at least partially dissolves. With reference to Fig. 405, the outer layer 21224a may begin to dissolve as soon as it is exposed to a body fluid. This moment in time is indicated as time tO. The outer layer 21224a can completely dissolve over the course of minutes, hours, and / or days, wherein the material comprising the outer layer 21224a can reach a maximum efficiency or concentration at a time in time indicated as time t1. At a later time in time, outer layer 21224a may dissolve completely or at least substantially for a moment at the time indicated by time t2.

As the outer layer 21224a dissolves, the body fluid can reach the second layer 21224b and begin to dissolve at least partially the second layer 21224b. Similar to the above, the second layer 21224b can completely dissolve over the course of minutes, hours, and / or days, wherein the material comprising the second layer 21224b can reach a maximum efficiency or concentration at a time in the time indicated as t3 time. In various circumstances, a body fluid it can pass through the outer layer 21224a to reach the second layer 21224b so that the outer layer 21224a and the second layer 21224b can begin to dissolve at the same time or at least substantially at the same time. In any case, the reader will note that the time t1 in which the material comprising the outer layer 21224a reaches its efficiency or maximum concentration can occur before the time t3. At a later time in time, the second layer 21224b may dissolve completely or at least substantially for a moment at the time indicated by time t5. As the reader will also notice, time t5 may occur after time t2. As the second layer 21224b dissolves, the body fluid can reach the third layer 21224c and begin to dissolve at least partially the third layer 21224c. Similar to the foregoing, the third layer 21224c may be completely dissolved over the course of minutes, hours, and / or days wherein the material comprising the third layer 21224c may reach a maximum efficiency or concentration at a time in the time indicated as time. t6. In various circumstances, a body fluid can pass through the outer layer 21224a and the second layer 21224b to reach the third layer 21224c, so that the outer layer 21224a, the second layer 21224b, and / or the third layer 21224c can begin to dissolve at the same time or at least substantially at the same time. In any case, the reader will note that the time t3, in which the material comprising the second layer 21224b reaches its maximum efficiency or concentration, may occur before time t6. At a later time in the time, the third layer 21224c may dissolve completely or at least substantially for a moment at the time indicated by the time t8. As the reader will also notice, time t8 can occur after time t5.

As the third layer 21224c dissolves, the body fluid can reach the fourth layer 21224d and begin to at least partially dissolve the fourth layer 21224d at a moment in the time indicated by time t4. Similar to the above, the fourth layer 21224b can completely dissolve over the course of minutes, hours, and / or days, wherein the material comprising the fourth layer 21224d can reach a maximum efficiency or concentration at a time in the time indicated as t7 time. In various circumstances, a body fluid can pass through the outer layer 21224a, the second layer 21224b, and the third layer 21224c to reach the fourth layer 21224d so that the outer layer 21224a, the second layer 21224b, the third layer 21224c , and / or fourth layer 21224d may begin to dissolve at the same time or at least substantially at the same time. In any case, the reader will note that the time t6 in which the material comprising the third layer 21224c reaches its maximum efficiency or concentration can occur before the time t7. At a later time in time, the fourth layer 21224d may dissolve completely or at least substantially for a moment at the time indicated by time t9. As the reader will also note, time t9 can occur after time t8. Optionally, as a result of the above, a stepped release of drugs may occur.

Referring now to Figs.410 and 412, a staple cartridge 21300 may comprise a cartridge body 21310 that includes a plurality of staple pockets 21312 and a plurality of staples 21330 positioned therein. The staple cartridge 21300 may comprise, furthermore, a fabric thickness compensator 21320 which may include a compensator body 21322 that can be positioned against the body of the cartridge 21310 and, additionally, a plurality of discrete capsules 21324 positioned within the body of the compensator 21322. The capsules 21324 can be oriented vertically and, when staples 21330 are in their non-fired configuration, as illustrated in Fig. 412, each capsule 21324 can be positioned between staple legs 21322 of a staple 21330. For example, staple legs 21322 can extend at least partially in the fabric thickness compensator 21320 when the staples 21330 are in their non-fired position without breaking the capsules 21324. When the staples 21330 move from their non-fired position to their fired position, now referring to FIG. 413, staples 21330 can break capsules 21324 and thereby release the at least one medicament stored therein. More particularly, the staples 21330 can be deformed by the forming cavities 21062 defined in the anvil 21060 when the staples 21330 are raised upwardly so that the staple legs 21332 can be screwed, or deformed, downwardly and inwardly towards the capsules 21324 positioned among these. Staples 21330 can be lifted upwards by a firing system comprising the 21340 impellers and the slider 21345, wherein the slider 21345 can be configured to longitudinally traverse the staple cartridge 21000 and sequentially raise and fire the staple drivers 21340 and the staples 21330 positioned therein. In any case, the staple legs 21332 can pierce and / or crush the capsules 21324 so that the internal cavities 21326 defined in the capsules 21324 can be broken and the one or more medicaments contained in the internal cavities 21326 can escape therefrom. The one or more medicaments may include one or more powders and / or fluids contained therein, for example. The staple cartridge 21300 may further comprise a cutting member 21380 that can be advanced distally with the slider 21345 for the purpose of severing the tissue T positioned between the staple cartridge 21300 and the anvil 21060, for example. The cutting member 21380 can be configured to pass through a knife slot 21314 defined in the cartridge body 21310 where, for example, one or more capsules, such as the capsules 21324, for example, can be positioned within and / or above the knife groove 21314 so that the cutting member 21380 can sever such capsules 21324. In any case, the fabric thickness compensator 21320 may further comprise a layer 21321 positioned at the top, and / or lower part, of the cartridge body 21322 which, for example, can be comprised of hyaluronic acid, for example, and can stabilize the cartridge body 21322 and / or the staples 21330. For example, the cutting member 21380 can be configured to sectioning the layer 21321 when the cutting member 21380 is advanced through the staple cartridge 21300 as described above.

Referring now to FIG. 414, a fabric thickness compensator 21420 may comprise a compensator body 21422 and a plurality of capsules 21444 positioned therein. Similar to the foregoing, each capsule 21444 may comprise a sealed cavity 21446 that can be configured to removably store the drug (s) therein. Each of the capsules 21444 may comprise a tapered and / or tapered end 21447, for example. For example, the tapered ends 21447 can be used to hold the capsules 21444 in place while the body of the cartridge 21422 is formed around them. According to the invention, a mold can include a plurality of openings and / or slits that can be configured to receive and secure the tapered ends 21447 so that, when the compensator material is poured around the capsules 21444, the mold can hold capsules 21444 in its position. In addition to the above, the capsules 21444 can be positioned and positioned so that they can not be broken or burst until the staples are fired in and / or through the fabric thickness compensator 21420 during use, for example.

Alternatively, with reference now to Fig. 415, a fabric thickness compensator 21520 may comprise a plurality of capsules 21524 positioned within a body of the compensator 21522. The capsules 21524 each may comprise one or more openings 21528 defined on the outer wall thereof where the openings 21528 can be configured to allow the drug (s) 21525 to escape from the cavities 21526 defined in the capsules 21524. The openings 21528 can be sized and configured to control the speed at which the drugs escape. drugs 21525 from cavities 21526. For example, larger openings 21528 may allow a more rapid release of drugs 21525 while smaller openings 21528 may allow a slower release of drugs 21525, for example. The outer wall of each capsule 21524 may be comprised of a tube that ends 21527 that is closed and / or sealed. The outer walls of the capsules 21524 can be comprised of one or more bioabsorbable polymers, for example, and the ends 21527 can be closed and / or sealed by the use of a thermal staking process, a thermal welding process, and / or a laser welding process, for example. The outer walls, or covers, of the capsules 21524 can be manufactured by using an injection molding process where, after the covers have been formed, the medication (s) can be positioned on the covers through one or more open ends of these. After that, the open end or the ends, in the cover can be covered by the use of a polymer solution, for example. In the event that the walls of the capsules 21524 are comprised of a bioabsorbable material, the openings 21528 defined therein may increase with time. By For example, the rate at which drugs 21525 are released from cavities 21526 may increase with time.

The body of the compensator 21522 can be comprised of gelatin, for example, and can be manufactured in a foam material by using a lyophilization process, for example. The capsules 21524 can be inserted into the body of the compensator 21522 where, for example, the body of the compensator 21522 can be formed with openings configured to receive the capsules 21524. For example, a layer, or film, could then be placed on the body of the compensator 21522 to cover or enclose capsules 21524 in this. The capsules 21524 can be positioned within a mold and a compensator material can be at least partially formed around the capsules 21524 to form the body of the compensator 21522. In any case, the body of the compensator 21552 can comprise one or more key elements or elements. indexed that can be configured to align and orient the tissue thickness compensator 21520 with a cartridge body of the staple cartridge so that the capsules 21524 are positioned in a desired position.

Referring now to FIG. 416, a surgical stapling system can include a staple cartridge 21600 and an anvil 21060, wherein staple cartridge 21600 and anvil 21060 can be positioned on opposite sides of the tissue T. Similar to Other staple cartridges described in the present disclosure, the staple cartridge 21600 may comprise a cartridge body 21310 that includes a plurality of staple cartridges. staple cavities 21312 and a plurality of staples 21330 positioned therein. In use, with reference to Fig. 420, the staples 21330 may be raised upwardly by the impellers 21340 from a non-fired position to a fired position so that they deform against the anvil 21060 or, more particularly, deform inside. of the forming cavities 21062. As the staples 21330 are fired, the staples 21330 can pierce the tissue T and a fabric thickness compensator 21620 engages the anvil 21060 before the staples 21330 are deformed between their non-fired configuration (FIG.417) and its triggered configuration (Fig. 418). The staples 21330 may be comprised of any suitable material such as stainless steel and / or titanium, for example, and may be configured to apply a compression and clamping force against the tissue thickness compensator 21620 and the tissue T. As illustrated in FIG. Fig. 416, the staples 21330 can be placed in a plurality of rows, wherein a staple 21330 can be positioned in each staple pocket 21312. The staple cartridge 21300 can further comprise the piercing members 21635 (FIG 419) which can be configured to couple and pierce the tissue T, the tissue thickness compensator 21620, and / or the medicament capsule (s) positioned within the tissue thickness compensator 21620, for example. For example, piercing members 21635 can be positioned within staple pockets 21312 where piercing members 21635 can be fired or ejected from staple pockets 21312 by impellers 21340. In addition to the above, some staple pockets 21312 of the staple cartridge 21600 may include the staples 21330 positioned therein while other staple pockets 21312 may include the piercing members 21635 positioned therein. The staple cartridge 21600 may include some rows of staple pockets 21312 having only the staples 21330 positioned therein, some rows having only the piercing members 21635 positioned therein, and / or some rows having both the 21330 staples and 21635 drilling members positioned in these. As illustrated, with reference to Fig. 420, the four inner rows of the staple pockets 21312 may comprise only the staples 21330 therein while the outer rows of the staple pockets 21312 may comprise both the staples 21330 and the staples 21330. of drilling 21635 in these. The staples 21330 and the piercing members 21635 within the outer rows of the staple cavities 21312 can be placed in an alternating arrangement, for example. Referring now to FIG. 421, the staples 21330 and the piercing members 21635 can be placed in a pattern comprising two staples 21330, followed by a piercing member 21635, followed by two staples plus 21330, followed by a piercing member. 21635, and etcetera, for example.

Referring principally to Fig. 419, each piercing member 21635 may comprise a base 21638 and legs 21637 extending upwardly from opposite sides of base 21638. Referring now to Fig. 420, impellers 21340 each One can comprising a channel 21348, which can be configured to receive and support the base 21638 of a piercing member 21635. When the impellers 21340 are pushed upward by the slider 21345, with reference now to FIG. 421, the slider 21345 can fire sequentially the staples 21330 and the piercing members 21635. Referring now to FIG. 420, the staples 21330 may deform against the anvil 21060 while the piercing members 21635 may not touch the anvil 21060. With reference primarily to FIG. 419, one or both of the legs 21636 of each piercing member 21635 may include a tip sharp 21639 which can be configured to pierce tissue T and / or fabric thickness compensator 21620 and at least one tongue 21637 which can be configured to retain legs 21636 in tissue T and / or fabric thickness compensator 21620, by example. A tissue thickness compensator may not be used at all. The legs 21636 of the piercing members 21635 may not be long enough to pass all the way through the tissue T, let alone touch the anvil 21060. The legs 21636 may be long enough so that they may come into contact with the anvil 21060 and they can deform in a different configuration.

The piercing members 21635 may be comprised of a material that is different from the material comprising the staples 21330. The piercing members 21635 may be comprised of at least one bioabsorbable polymer, such as PGA, for example. Drilling members 21635 each can understand the less a medicament, such as an antibacterial agent, an anti-inflammatory agent, pain medication, and / or an MMP inhibitor, for example. Because the piercing members 21635 can be located within the staple lines, for example, the piercing members 21635 can deliver one or more drugs to the tissue T within and / or adjacent the staple line as the members Drill 21635 dissolve and / or bioabsorb. Piercing members 21635 can be coated with one or more drugs. The piercing members 21635 may comprise one or more medicaments incorporated within a structural substrate comprising the piercing members 21635. Some piercing members 21635 may be comprised of a first structural substrate and / or a first medicament while other piercing members 21635 they may be comprised of a second or different structural substrate and / or a second or different medication, for example. The piercing members 21635 can be manufactured by using a molding injection process, for example.

Referring now to Figs. 422 and 423, a staple cartridge 21700 may include a cartridge body 21710 and a fabric thickness compensator 21720 positioned on or adjacent a cover surface 21711 of the cartridge body 21710. Similar to above, the cartridge body 21710 may comprise a plurality of staple pockets 21312 and a plurality of staples positioned therein. The body of the cartridge 21710 can further include a slot 21714 that can be configured to receive a cutting member, such as cutting member 21380 (FIG 424), for example, therein. In use, as illustrated in Fig. 244, the cutting member 21380 can be configured to sever the tissue T positioned between the anvil 21060 and the staple cartridge 21700. Referring again to Figs. 422 and 423, the compensator Fabric thickness 21720 may comprise a compensator body 21722 and a plurality of medication packages, or capsules, 21724 positioned within the body of the compensator 21722. The capsules 21724 can be positioned and positioned in the body of the compensator 21722 so that the capsules 21724 overlap the slot 21714 defined in the body of the cartridge 21710. In use, with Referring principally to Fig.425, the cutting member 21380 can be configured to cut the capsules 21724 as the cutting member 21380 is advanced through the staple cartridge 21700. For example, the 21724 capsules can be sealed before being cut. by the cutting member 21380 and, after the capsules 21724 have been cut, the one or more medicaments contained therein can be released. Due to the position of the capsules 21724 over the slot 21714, the one or more medicaments can be released in the portion of the tissue T which has been sectioned by the cutting member 21380. The one or more medicaments contained within the capsules 21724 can comprise a biological agent in the form of a powder, for example. The one or more drugs in capsules 21724 may comprise regenerated oxidized cellulose, alginate, and / or calcium, for example.

With reference again to Figs. 422 and 423, capsules 21724 may comprise the same medicaments therein. Alternatively, one or more of the capsules 21724 may comprise one or more different drugs therein. A first plurality of capsules 21724 may comprise a first medicament in this and a second plurality of capsules 21724 may comprise a second medicament therein. For example, the capsules 21724 may be placed in an alternating arrangement along the longitudinal path of the cutting member 21380, for example, so that a capsule 21724 including the first medicament may be followed by a capsule 21724 that includes the second medicament. which can be followed by a capsule 21724 that includes the first medication, and etc., for example. The cutting member 21380 can be configured to mix the first medicament and the second medicament together as the cutting member 21380 is advanced through the staple cartridge 21300. Referring again to FIGS. 422 and 423, the fabric thickness compensator 21720 may further comprise one or more channels 21726 extending outwardly from each capsule 21724. Channels 21726 may be configured to allow drugs within capsules 21724 to migrate within the compensator of fabric thickness 21720, and tissue T positioned against these, after capsules 21724 have been cut. Capsules 21724 can be configured so that they do not burst when a compression load is applied to them by anvil 21060. With reference mainly to Figs. 422 and 425, the cartridge body 21710 may comprise a plurality of recesses 21715 that can each be configured to receive at least a portion of a capsule 21724 therein. For example, the recesses 21715 can be configured to allow the capsules 21724 to slide downwardly within the recesses 21715 when a compression load is applied thereto so that the capsules 21724 can not burst. Alternatively, one or more of the capsules 21724 could be configured to burst only when a certain compressive force applied to them is received or exceeded. For example, the capsules 21724 may be configured to resist the clamping pressure applied by the anvil 21060 but may burst when the compression pressure applied thereto increases as a result of the cutting member 21380 being advanced through the staple cartridge 21700 , for example. The capsules 21724 may include a lubricant therein which may facilitate movement of the cutting member 21380 as it is advanced and / or retracted into the staple cartridge 21700.

Referring now to FIG. 426, a fabric thickness compensator 21820 may comprise a compensator body 21822 and a longitudinal tube 21824 extending therethrough. Similar to the foregoing, the tube 21824 may comprise a longitudinal cavity 21826 defined therein and one or more medications 21825 positioned within the cavity 21826. The longitudinal tube 21824 may further include one or more support legs 21827 extending toward out of this that can be configured to For example, with reference now to FIG. 427, the support legs 21827 can support the tube 21824 within a mold 21890, while the body of the compensator 21822 is formed around the tube 21824. With reference now to Figs. 428 and 429, the material comprising the body of the compensator 21822, such as PGA and / or PCL, for example, can be poured around the tube 21824 and then lyophilized, foamed, and / or solidified, for example. Referring again to FIG. 427, the material comprising the compensator body 21822 can be poured into a cavity 21891 surrounding the tube 21824 where the cavity 21891 can then be closed by a cover 21892. With reference to FIG. 426, the ends of the support legs 21827 may not be covered by the poured material and may be flush with the lower surface 21821 of the compensator body 21822. The support legs 21827 and / or the tube 21824 may be comprised of a material soluble and / or bioabsorbable, such as gelatin, hyaluronic acid, PDS, and / or ORC, for example. The legs 21827 can be rapidly dissolved by body fluids and / or a saline solution, for example, where the channels or passages can be left behind extending between the outer perimeter and the inside of the fabric thickness compensator 21820. Such passages can be created for allowing the one or more drugs 21825 positioned within the tube 21824 to dissolve and / or absorb rapidly. Alternatively, the fabric thickness compensator 21920, for example, may comprise a compensator body 21922 and a tube 21924 including a plurality of support legs 21927, as shown in FIG. illustrated in Fig. 430. With reference to Fig. 431, the support legs 21927 may be part of a larger support network or structural grid 21928 that may extend through the body of the compensator 21922.

Referring again to FIG. 426, legs 21827 extending from tube 21824 may also include one or more medications therein. When the legs 21827 dissolve and / or absorb, as described above, the one or more drugs in the legs 21827 can provide a first medicated response to staple and / or cut the tissue while the one or more drugs 21825 in the tube 21824 may provide a second or subsequent medicated response. With reference now to Figs. 432 and 434, a fabric thickness compensator 22020 may comprise a body of the compensator 22022 and a longitudinal medication tube 22024 extending through the body of the compensator 22022. Similar to the foregoing, the tube 22024 may define a longitudinal cavity 22026a which includes one or more 22025th medications positioned in it. Similar also to the foregoing, the tube 22024 can include a plurality of longitudinal leg supports 22027 that can extend along the length of the tube 22024. Optionally, each of the leg supports 22027 can define a longitudinal cavity, such as the cavities 22026b and 22026c, for example, in which each may include one or more drugs, such as drugs 22025b and 22025c, for example, in this. The leg supports 22027 can be comprised of a material that can be rapidly dissolved and / or absorbed in a that the 22025b and 22025c drugs can be released quickly. After that, support legs 22027 and tube 22024 can dissolve and / or be absorbed further so that medicament 22025a can be released later. Medications 22025a, 22025b, and / or 22025c may be comprised of the same material. Alternatively, drugs 22025a, 22025b, and / or 22025c may be comprised of different materials. The drugs 22025b and 22025c may be comprised of the same material, or materials, which may be different from the material, or materials, comprising the medicament 22025a.

In addition to the above, the tube 22024, the legs 22027, and / or the cavities 22026a-22026c defined therein can be manufactured by using a molding injection process. The tube 22024, the legs 22027, and / or the cavities 22026a-22026c can be manufactured by using an extrusion process, for example, wherein, as a result, such elements can comprise a continuous cross-section along the length of these. As a result of such processes, tubes 22024 and legs 22027 can be integrally formed. After that, the drugs 22025a-22025c can be positioned within the cavities 22026a-22026c, respectively. Medications 22025a-22025c each may comprise one or more powders and / or one or more fluids, for example. Referring now to FIG. 435, ends 22029 of cavities 22026a-22026c may be sealed for the purpose of containing drugs 22025a-22025c therein. In any case, the tube 22024 it can then be positioned within a mold, such as the mold 21890 described above, for example, wherein the material comprising the body of the compensator 22022 can be poured around the tube 22024, as illustrated in Fig. 433, to form the compensator of fabric thickness 22020. Various alternatives are illustrated in Figs. 436 and 437. With reference to Fig. 436, a fabric thickness compensator 22120 may comprise a compensator body 22122 and a plurality of longitudinal tubes 22124 that are connected together. Each of the tubes 22124 can define a longitudinal cavity 22126 therein, wherein each can include one or more drugs 22125 therein. The longitudinal cavities 22126 may not be in fluid communication with each other or one or more of the longitudinal cavities 22126 may be in fluid communication with one another. Similar to the foregoing, the compensator 22120 may further comprise the legs 22127 extending downwardly from the tubes 22124 and each may include a longitudinal cavity 22126 and at least one medicament 22125 therein. Tubes 22124 and / or support legs 22127 can be comprised of materials that can be configured to dissolve and / or bioabsorb at different rates. For example, the support legs 22127 can be comprised of a material that can dissolve and / or bioabsorb at a faster rate than the material comprising the tubes 22124, for example. Referring now to Fig. 437, a fabric thickness compensator 22220 may comprise a compensator body 22222 and a tube longitudinal 22224, wherein the tube 22224 may include a plurality of support legs 22227 extending from the east. A single longitudinal cavity 22226 can be defined within the tube 22224 and can extend into the support legs 22227. Similar to the foregoing, the cavity 22226 can include one or more drugs 22225 positioned therein.

Referring again to FIG. 426, support legs 21827 can be comprised of one or more materials that can be configured to absorb a fluid, such as blood and / or a saline solution, for example. Support legs 21827 can be configured to absorb fluid to tube 21824 and the one or more drugs 21825 contained therein. Such absorption may allow drugs 21825 to dissolve and / or bioabsorb prior to the healing process. The ends of the support legs 21827 may not be covered by the body of the compensator 21822 and may be exposed to the fluid. This absorption process can occur by capillary action and can occur despite the orientation of the fabric thickness compensator 21820, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 441, a fabric thickness compensator 22320 may comprise a compensator body 22322 and a plurality of tubes 22324 positioned therein. The body of the compensator 23222 may be comprised of a frame foam of regenerative tissue, such as an acellular omentum biomatrix, omentum scaffold material, and / or ACell, for example. The omentum shell material may comprise a hydrophilic foam produced from the omentum shell and, in some cases, it can be compressible. When exposed to a fluid, the omentum shell material can expand and apply pressure to the tissue positioned against it. Such a hydrophilic expansion of a material that includes omental framework material is depicted in Figs. 349 and 350, for example. ACell is a regenerative product that provides an extracellular matrix or framework network to stimulate cell proliferation and migration. The tissue framework comprising the body of the compensator 22322 may be loaded with stem cells, PRP, or growth factors, for example. The tissue frame comprising the body of the compensator 22322 can be coated on a collagen matrix, for example. The tissue frame matrix of the compensator body 22322 may be comprised of a fiber matrix and the fiber matrix may be comprised of randomly oriented fibers. In some circumstances, a fiber matrix consists of randomly oriented fibers that may not be able to provide a desired elasticity or strength within the compensator body 22322. To explain this, the randomly oriented fibers may be comprised of a hydrophilic material and / or they can be coated with a hydrophilic material which, after being exposed to a liquid, can be configured to expand and provide a desired resilience to the fiber matrix and / or a desired compression force to the fabric. In various circumstances, the fiber matrix may not be exposed to a liquid until after it has been captured against the fabric by a plurality of staples, as described above. For example, the body of the Compensator 22322 may comprise a liquid impervious casing that can be marred, punctured, broken, and / or torn, for example, in use to allow liquid to enter the compensator body 22322 and access the hydrophilic fibers. In any case, when the liquid is absorbed by the scaffold matrix captured within the staples, the scaffold matrix can expand to apply a compression pressure to the captured tissue also within the staples and, over time, accommodate internal growth. of the tissue in the framework matrix.

In addition to the above, the tubes 22324 of the fabric thickness compensator 22320 can be comprised of a degradable material that can be configured to dissolve and / or bioabsorb. Similar to the above, each tube 22324 can include a sealed inner cavity having the medicament (s) contained therein and, additionally, one or more support legs 22327 that can be configured to degrade and provide a channel or flow path for the liquids reach the medicament stored within the tube 22324. Such degradation of the support legs 22327 may take time and, as a result, the medicament contained within the tubes 22324 may not be released immediately. In a sense, a period of time may be required for a liquid to degrade legs 22327 where, as a result, legs 22327 can serve as a fuse designed to delay the release of medication within tubes 22324. Thus, in various circumstances , legs 22327 having longer lengths and / or thicker cross sections may provide a longer delay while that the legs 22327 having shorter lengths and / or thinner cross sections can provide a shorter delay. The tubes 22324 may be comprised of a material that dissolves rapidly and / or slowly; However, in any case, the degradation of the tubes 22324 may occur for a period of time which may delay the release of the one or more drugs contained within the tubes 22324. In accordance with the invention, a first tube 22324 may be comprised of of a first material that degrades at a first speed and a second tube 22324 may be comprised of a second material that degrades at a second or different speed. In such cases, a first medicament contained within the first tube 22324 can be released before a second medicament contained within the second tube 22324, for example. A first tube 22324 may have a thinner outer wall than a second tube 22324 which may allow the first tube 22324 to degrade faster than the second tube 22324 and allow a medicament contained within the first tube 22334 to be released before a tube 22324 is released. medication in the second tube 22324, for example. As a result of the foregoing a first tube 22324 can be configured to release a first drug at a first point in time, a second tube 22324 can be configured to release a second drug at a second point or later point in time, and a third tube 22324 can be configured to release a third drug at a third point or point even further back in time, for example.

With reference now to Figs. 442 and 443, a fabric thickness compensator 22420 may comprise a body of the compensator 22422 and a sealed container 22424 positioned within the body of the compensator 22422. Similar to the foregoing, the container 22424 may define a longitudinal cavity 22426 and one or more medicaments. 22425 positioned within the longitudinal cavity 22426. The container 22424 can be resilient so that, when the tissue thickness compensator 22420 is compressed, or flattened, as illustrated in Fig. 443, the container 22424 can try to Bounce or retain its original shape not deformed. For example, the container 22424 may comprise an elastic spring member positioned within the body of the compensator 22422. The container 22424 may be configured to change shape without breaking. For example, container 22424 may degrade when exposed to a liquid, for example, as described in the present disclosure.

Referring now to FIG. 444, a fabric thickness compensator 22520 may comprise a compensator body 22522 and a plurality of sealed containers 22524a-22524c. Each of the containers 22524a-22524c can define an outer perimeter that is configured to increase, maximize, and / or optimize the surface area of the container that comes into contact with a liquid, such as blood and / or a saline solution, by example. In various circumstances, containers that have a larger surface area may be exposed to a greater amount of liquids and, as a result, may dissolve and / or bioabsorb at a faster speed. Accordingly, containers having a smaller surface area can be exposed to a smaller amount of liquid and, as a result, can dissolve and / or bioabsorb at a slower rate. The containers 22524a-22524c can be comprised of gelatin, hyaluronic acid, PDS, and / or ORC, for example. Similar to the above, the containers 22524a-22524c can be elastic and can provide a rebound or elastic pressing force. Referring now to Fig. 445, a fabric thickness compensator 22620 may comprise a compensator body 22622 and a plurality of elastic laminated members 22624 positioned within the body of the compensator 22622. Each of the laminated members 22624 may comprise a channel sealed interior that includes one or more medications positioned in this.

Referring now to Fig. 446, an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument may comprise an anvil 21060 and a staple cartridge 22700. The anvil 21060 may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 22770 coupled thereto and the cartridge staples 22700 may comprise a cartridge body 22710 and a fabric thickness compensator 22720. Referring now to FIG. 477, the fabric thickness compensator 22770 may comprise a plurality of layers, wherein the tissue thickness compensator 22720 it may comprise a first layer 22771 and a second layer 22772, although alternatives are contemplated in which a fabric thickness compensator may comprise more than two layers. Optionally, one or more of the layers of the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a woven material. The first layer 22771 can be comprised of a plurality of first strands 22773 composed of a first material and a plurality of second strands 22774 composed of a second or different material. Similarly, the second layer 22772 can be comprised of a plurality of first strands 22773 and a plurality of second strands 22774. The concentrations of the first strands 22773 and the second strands 22774 in the first layer 22771 can be the same as the concentrations of the first strands 22773 and the second strands 22774 in the second layer 22772. The concentrations of the first strands 22773 and the second strands 22774 in the first layer 22771 may be different from the concentrations of the first strands 22773 and the second strands 22774 in the second layer 22772, as described in more detail below.

In addition to the above, the first strands 22773 may be comprised of bioabsorbable polymer, such as PGA, PDS, PCL, and / or PLA, for example, and the second strands 22774 may be comprised of oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. . The first layer 22771 may comprise an outer layer of the fabric thickness compensator 22770 and may include a contact surface with the fabric. The first layer 22771 may comprise more first strands 22773 than the second strands 22774. For example, the first layer 22771 may comprise a ratio of about 80% of the first strands 22773 to about 20% of the second strands 22774, for example. The first layer 22771 may comprise a ratio of about 60% of the first strands 22773 to about 40% of the second strands 22774, a ratio of about 67% of the first strands 22773 to about 33% of the second strands 22774, a ratio of about 70% of the first strands 22773 to about 30% of the second strands 22774, a ratio of about 75% the first strands 22773 to about 25% of the second strands 22774, and / or a ratio of about 90% of the first strands 22773 to about 10% of the second strands 22774, for example.

In addition to the above, the first strands 22773 can be comprised of a material that dissolves, bioabsorbs, and / or changes state at a slower rate than the material comprising the second strands 22774. For example, the second strands 22774 they can be comprised of ORC strands that can change from a solid to a gel when exposed to a liquid, for example, and the ORC strands can react and change from a solid to a gel when exposed to platelets, for example . In such cases, however, the first layer 22773 may be comprised primarily of bioabsorbable polymer strands that can react to the liquids much slower than the ORC strands and, thus, the first layer 22773 may come into contact with the fabric or bodily fluids on multiple occasions without losing their shape and general structure. Said in this way, the ORC fibers in the first layer 22773 they can react when they first come into contact with a liquid and / or tissue; However, the ORC gel can be retained at least partially or mostly within the first layer 22773.

The second layer 22772 may comprise an inner layer of the tissue thickness compensator 22770 and may not include a contact surface with the direct tissue. The second layer 22772 may comprise fewer first strands 22773 than second strands 22774. For example, the second layer 22772 may comprise a ratio of about 20% of the first strands 22773 to about 80% of the second strands 22774, for example. The second layer 22772 may comprise a ratio of about 40% of the first strands 22773 to about 60% of the second strands 22774, a ratio of about 33% of the first strands 22773 to about 67% of the second strands 22774, a ratio from about 30% of the first strands 22773 to about 70% of the second strands 22774, a ratio of about 25% of the first strands 22773 to about 75% of the second strands 22774, and / or a ratio of about 10% of the the first strands 22773 to about 90% of the second strands 22774, for example.

In addition to the above, second layer 22772 may comprise more ORC strands than bioabsorbable polymer strands, for example. The second layer 22772 may comprise more ORC threads than the first layer 22771. Because the second layer 22772 is not a layer outside, the liquids may not immediately contact the second layer 22772 because they would first have to pass through the first layer 22771 before coming into contact with the second layer 22772. In such cases, the second layer 22772 may comprise a greater density of ORC threads since the ORC threads in the second protected 22772 layer do not immediately become a gel. Even if the ORC strands in the second layer 22772 came into contact with a liquid and turned into a gel, the ORC gel could be contained in the fabric thickness compensator 22770 by the first layer 22771 which, as described above, it can maintain its general shape, at least initially, and provide a support mesh to the second layer 22772. While the ORC fibers and bioabsorbable fibers can optionally be used, other suitable materials could be used.

In addition to the foregoing, with reference now to FIGS.450 to 452, the fabric thickness compensator 22770 can be positioned intermediate an anvil 21060 and tissue T, wherein the tissue thickness compensator 22770 can be compressed against the tissue T before staples 21330 are fired from staple cartridge 22700. After staples 21330 have been fired to capture tissue T and fabric thickness compensators 22720 and 22770 therein, anvil 21060 and cartridge body 22710 Staple cartridge 22700 can be moved away from the compensators 22720, 22770 and tissue T and removed from the surgical site. Referring now to FIG. 448, a layer 22871 of a Fabric thickness compensator may comprise woven strands 22873 which may include an elongated or flattened cross section, for example. Referring now to FIG. 449, a layer 22971 of a fabric thickness compensator may comprise woven strands 22973 which may include a round cross section, for example.

Various alternatives are illustrated in Figs. 453 to 456. Referring now to Fig. 454, an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument may include an anvil 21060 and a tissue thickness compensator 22770 'positioned therein. With reference to Fig. 453, the fabric thickness compensator 22270 'may comprise a layer 22771', which may include a plurality of first fibers 22773 'woven with a plurality of second fibers 22774'. For example, the first fibers 22773 'can be configured to dissolve and / or bioabsorb at a faster rate than the second fibers 22774'. The separations, openings, and / or cavities can be defined between the first fibers 22773 'and the second fibers 22773"that can allow liquids to flow through the layer 22771'. Referring now to FIG. 456, an end effector of a surgical stapling instrument may include a tissue thickness compensator 22770"coupled to an anvil 21060. Referring to FIG. 455, the tissue thickness compensator 22770"May comprise a woven layer of strands 22771" which may be embedded and / or coated within a 22772 substrate. The strands 22771"may be exposed while, alternatively, at least a portion of the substrate 22772" may have to be dissolved and / or bioabsorb before the 22771 strands are exposed. " For example, the material comprising the substrate 22772"may be filled within any of the gaps, openings, or cavities defined between the strands 22771".

Referring now to Fig. 461, a staple cartridge 23000 can include a fabric thickness compensator 23020. As described herein, a tissue thickness compensator can be manufactured by using a lyophilization process, by example. A solution comprising PGA and / or PCL, for example, can be poured into a mold where the solution can be allowed to grow in an open cell foam in the presence of a vacuum atmosphere and / or reduced temperature, for example. For example, the PGA material may be present in the solution according to a ratio of approximately 64/36 by weight with respect to the PLA material, for example. With reference to Fig. 457, the fibers and / or filaments 23021, for example, can be mixed in the solution. The PGA fibers, for example, can be dispersed within the solution before being poured into the mold so that the PGA fibers can be distributed evenly or at least substantially uniformly throughout the fabric thickness compensator 23020, for example. example. In other circumstances, the PGA fibers may be placed in the solution, and / or directly in the mold, for example, so that the PGA fibers may precipitate or settle to the bottom of the mold, for example. In other circumstances, PGA fibers could be configured to float to the top of the solution. In any case, a solvent, such as dioxane solvent, for example, can be present in the solution which can help in the lyophilization process. The dioxane solvent may not react, or at least substantially react, with the PGA fibers within the solution.

In addition to the above, fibers 23021 can be coated with one or more drugs before they are mixed in and / or with the solution. With reference to Fig. 459, each fiber 23021 may comprise a substrate 23022 that can be at least partially coated with a coating 23023 by utilizing any suitable manufacturing process.

With reference to Fig. 458 the fibers 23021 can be manufactured by using an extrusion process in which at least one drug coating is placed on a PGA substrate, for example. These can be particularly useful for drugs that can withstand the elevated temperature of an extrusion process. With reference to Fig. 460, the fibers 23021 can be coated and / or impregnated with a drug by the use of a carrier fluid, such as supercritical carbon dioxide, for example. In any case, the drug-coated fibers 23021 can be mixed with the solution so that the fibers 23021 become embedded within the fabric thickness compensator 23020. In various circumstances, as a result, the coatings of the fibers 23021 can begin to dissolve and elude the one or more medications contained in this. The 23021 fibers positioned closer to the perimeter of the thickness compensator fabric 23020 may begin to dissolve before the fibers 23021 positioned closer to the interior of the fabric thickness compensator 23020. In such cases, the dissolved fibers 23021 may leave behind a plurality, or network of cavities within the tissue thickness compensator 23020, wherein such cavities can allow cell or tissue internal growth within the tissue thickness compensator 23020. A tissue thickness compensator can comprise a plurality of first fibers that can be dissolved at a faster rate than a plurality of second fibers. . For example, the first fibers may comprise PGA fibers, for example, which have been irradiated with gamma. Optionally, PGA fibers irradiated with gamma can dissolve faster than PGA fibers not irradiated with gamma, for example.

Optionally, one or more colorants can be added to the solution described above, so that the tissue thickness compensator produced from the solution can have a suitable color. It may be desirable for the tissue thickness compensator to have a color that contrasts with its surrounding environment. For example, the fabric thickness compensator may be green and / or blue, for example.

With reference now to Figs. 462 and 464, a fabric thickness compensator 23120 may comprise a compensator body 23122 and a plurality of drug particles 23121 distributed throughout the body of the compensator 23122. The body of the compensator 23122 may be comprised of a hydrophilic material. For example, the body of the compensator 23122 may be comprised of a material that includes PCL / PGA, for example, wherein the PCL and PGA may be present in the material according to a ratio of 65/35 by weight. Referring now to Fig. 463, the drug particles 23121 may comprise one or more drugs 23123, such as doxyelin, percarbonate, and / or ascorbic acid phosphate, for example, which may be encapsulated by and / or incorporated within a housing or cover 23124 comprising a hydrophilic material, for example. The cover 23124 may be comprised of low molecular weight gelatin, hyaluronic acid, and / or CMC, for example. Drug 23121 can be manufactured as microparticles that can be distributed within a solution and poured into a mold, where the solution can be lyophilized, subsequently, for example, as described above. Once the fabric thickness compensator 23120 has been exposed to a liquid, in use, a fluid 23129 (FIG 465) can enter the body of the compensator 23122 and dissolve and / or absorb the hydrophilic shell 23124 of the particles of drug 23121, for example. Referring now to FIG. 468, a fabric thickness compensator 23220 may comprise a first layer 23222 and a second or outer layer 23224 which, for example, may comprise a plurality of coated drug particles 23221 dispersed therein. Similar to the above, the particles 23221 can dissolve and / or be absorbed from the second layer 23224 and can leave behind the openings or capillary paths 23225, for example, within the second layer 23224, for example. With reference now to Fig. 469, a compensator Fabric thickness 23320 may comprise a compensator body 23322 comprising a plurality of drug particles 23121 and a plurality of fibers 23021 distributed therein, for example.

Referring now to FIGS.470 and 471, a staple cartridge 23400 may include a cartridge body 23410 and a tissue thickness compensator 23420 positioned therein, for example. The tissue thickness compensator 23420 may comprise a plurality of capsules 23421 positioned within the body of the compensator 23422. The capsules 23421 may be manufactured by using the spinning disc process, for example, and, the capsules 23421 may comprise microspheres of the biometrics of solids and / or liquids, for example. The capsules 23421 may include one or more adhesives which, when released from the capsules 23421, may help to secure the tissue seal. Capsules 23421 may include hemostatic agent, for example. In any case, the capsules 23421 can be distributed within the body of the compensator 23422 in any suitable manner. Referring now to Fig. 472, the capsules 23421 can be placed in a mold cavity 21891 defined in a mold 21890, for example, wherein the capsules 23421 can be seated in the bottom 21893 of the mold 21890. With reference to Fig. 473, the mold 21890 can be vibrated so that the capsules 23421 can form a uniform layer or at least substantially uniform layer at the bottom 21893. Referring now to Fig. 474, the material comprising the body of the compensator 23422 can be poured into the mold cavity 21891 with the capsules 23421. Capsules 23421 can be more dense than the material of the compensator body and, as a result, capsules 23421 can remain in bottom 21893 of mold 21890 as illustrated in Fig. 475. For example, with reference to Fig. 477, the lower part 21893 of the mold 21890 can include a plurality of recesses, depressions, and / or dimples 21899 that can be configured to receive the capsules 23421. Alternatively, with reference to Fig. 476, the capsules 23421 can be less dense than the material of the compensator body and can float towards the upper part of the mold 21890. Optionally, as described in more detail below, the density of the capsules 23421 can be selected so that the capsules 23421 can float around the body material of the compensator.

After the mixture comprising the capsules 23421 and the body material of the compensator has been properly poured into the mold 21890, the mixture can be subjected to a lyophilization process, for example, to form the tissue thickness compensator 23420. example, the capsules 23421 can be secured or lyophilized in their position within the body of the compensator 23422. After that, with reference again to FIG. 470, the tissue thickness compensator 23420 can be removed from the mold 21890 and then assembled to the body of the cartridge 23410 of the staple cartridge 23400. As illustrated in FIG. 470, the fabric thickness compensator 23420 can be positioned and positioned so that the capsules 23421 can define, or be positioned adjacent to, a tissue contacting surface. , or coating, 23425 of Fabric thickness compensator 23420. Capsules 23421 can be at least partially comprised of a hydrophilic material, for example, which can dissolve and / or bioabsorb quickly after the fabric thickness compensator 23420 has been positioned against the tissue, for example. example. Each of the capsules 23421 can be comprised of multiple layers of materials that can dissolve and / or bioabsorb with time. For example, an outer layer of a capsule 23421 may comprise a first medicament that can be dissolved and / or bioabsorbed to expose a second or inner layer comprising a second medicament which can then be dissolved and / or bioabsorbed, for example. Some of the capsules 23421 can be positioned so as to be broken by a cutting member, described elsewhere in the present description, as the cutting member is advanced distally to cut the tissue and / or the thickness compensator. fabric 23420. Capsules 23421 can decrease the density of fabric thickness compensator 23420 which can reduce the force or energy needed to advance the cutting member through tissue thickness compensator 23420, for example.

As described above, the fabric thickness compensator 23420 may comprise the capsules 23421 positioned on one or more sides, or liners, in the body of the compensator 23422. As described above, the tissue thickness compensator 23420 may comprise the capsules 23421 dispersed throughout the body of the compensator 23422. For example, the capsules 23421 may have the same material density of the compensator body so that the capsules 23421 can float within the material of the compensator body. The capsules 23421 can be dispersed or homogenized throughout the material of the compensator body, where the mixture can then be cooled before the capsules 23421 settle, or settle at least substantially, on the bottom of the mold.

Referring now to FIG. 478, a fabric thickness compensator 23520 may comprise a cover 23522 and a plurality of movable members 23524 positioned within the cover 23522. The cover 23322 may define an enclosed and / or sealed space, such as cavity 23523, for example, within which movable members 23524 can move. Movable members 23254 may be spherical in shape, for example, and may be configured to slide and / or wind, for example, one relative to the other. The fabric thickness compensator 23520 can be positioned on a cartridge body 21310 of a staple cartridge where the staples 21330 can be fired from the staple cartridge and through the tissue thickness compensator 23520, as illustrated in FIG. 479 In various circumstances, the movable members 23524 can be configured to move to the sides of the staples 21330 that are fired through the tissue thickness compensator 23520 so that the elements 23524 can not break during the firing process. For example, cover 23522 may be comprised of an elastic material that can be configured to flex and / or move for the purpose of accommodate the movement of the mobile elements 23524 and dynamically redistribute the forces generated within. The cover 23522 can enclose a medium. For example, the medium may comprise one or more powders, liquids, gases, fluids, and / or gels, for example, within which moving elements 23524 may move. Movable members 23524 may be comprised of a soluble material and / or bioabsorbable, for example, and one or more medications contained in this. For example, such an arrangement can be configured to provide a delayed and / or sustained release of the one or more drugs. Alternatively, although not illustrated, the fabric thickness compensator 23520 can be positioned between the tissue T and an anvil 21060, for example. In any case, the fabric thickness compensator 23520 may comprise an enclosed "bag of grain" arrangement. The cover 23522 can be configured so as not to break, or at least not substantially break, until a cutting member, such as the cutting member 21380, for example, is passed through it. To such an extent, one or more of the movable elements 23524 could escape from the cover 23522.

Referring now to FIG. 482, a fabric thickness compensator 23620 may comprise a compensator body 23622 and a plurality of capsules 23624 at least partially contained therein. Referring now to Fig.480, a mold 23690 can be used to manufacture the fabric thickness compensator 23620. For example, a plurality of spherical capsules 23624 can be positioned within a cavity 23691 defined in the mold 23690, wherein the movement side of the capsules 23624 within the mold 23690 can be stopped or retained by the side walls 23694 of the mold 23690 and the side seals 23693 extending between the side walls 23694, for example. The side walls 23694 and the side seals 23693 can define a plurality of cavities within which the capsules 23624 can be positioned and contained. The capsules 23624 can be configured to rest on the bottom surface 23699 of the mold 23690. Alternatively, with reference to Figs. 480 and 481, the mold 23690 may further comprise one or more longitudinal supports 23692 that can be configured to suspend the capsules 23624 so that they do not come into contact with the bottom surface 23699 of the mold 23690. For example, the longitudinal supports 23692 can positioning on the bottom surface 23699 while, alternatively, with reference to Fig. 481, the longitudinal supports 23692 can be positioned on the side supports 23693.

With reference again to Figs. 480 and 481, a material comprising the body of the compensator 23622 can be poured into the cavity 23691 of the mold 23690 so that the capsules 23624 are at least substantially surrounded by the material. With reference principally to Fig. 482, the portions of the capsules 23624 may protrude from the compensator body 23622 of a tissue thickness compensator 23620. The side supports 23693 and / or the longitudinal supports 23692 may be removed from the mold 23691 during and / or after the body of the compensator 23622 has been subjected to a lyophilization process, for example.

To such an extent, the capsules 23624 can be suspended within the body of the compensator 23622 without the structural supports. Alternatively, the side supports 23693 and / or the longitudinal supports 23692 can remain in the body of the compensator 23622. For example, the side supports 23693 and / or the longitudinal supports 23692 can be comprised of a bioabsorbable material, for example. The supports 23692 and / or the supports 23693 may comprise the elastic members positioned within the body of the compensator 23622 which may increase the elasticity of the body of the compensator 23622, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 486, a fabric thickness compensator 23720 may comprise a compensator body having the first and second portions, 23722a and 23722b, and at least one capsule 23724 positioned therebetween. The fabric thickness compensator 23720 can be manufactured by using the mold 21890, for example. Referring now to FIG. 483, a first material can be poured into the mold 21890 to form the first portion 23722a of the compensator body. After that, with reference to Fig. 484, the capsule 23724 can be positioned in the first portion 23722a. The capsule 23724 can be positioned in the first portion 23722a after a period of time and / or after the first material has been subjected to a lyophilization process, for example. Referring now to FIG. 485, a second material can be poured into the mold 21890 to form the second portion 23722b of the compensator body. After a period of time and / or after the second material has been subjected to a lyophilization process, for example, the fabric thickness compensator 23720 can be removed from the mold 21890 and used in relation to a staple cartridge 23700 as illustrated in Fig. 487, by example. The second material may be different from the first material while, alternatively, the second material may be the same as the first material. In any case, the first material and / or the second material may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material and the capsule 23724 may be comprised of at least one medicament, for example.

Referring now to Fig. 491, a staple cartridge 23800 may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 23820 which may include a compensator body 23822 and a longitudinal capsule 23824 positioned therein. Referring now to FIGS.488 and 489, a longitudinal opening 23821 may be formed in the body of the compensator 23822 by any suitable process such as by a mechanical drilling process and / or a laser drilling process, for example. Once the longitudinal opening 23821 has been formed, a longitudinal capsule 23824 can be positioned within the longitudinal opening 23821, as illustrated in Fig. 490. Referring now to Fig. 495, a staple cartridge 23900 can comprise a Fabric thickness compensator 23920 which may include a compensator body 23922 and a plurality of transverse capsules 23924 positioned therein. With reference now to Figs. 492 and 493, the transverse openings 23921 can be formed in the body of the compensator 23922 by any suitable process such as by a mechanical drilling process and / or a laser drilling process, for example. Once the transverse openings 23921 have been formed, a plurality of transverse capsules 239824 can be positioned within the transverse openings 23921, as illustrated in Fig. 494.

Figs. 496 to 500 illustrate an alternative method for manufacturing the fabric thickness compensator 23820 by using a vertical mold 24090. Referring mainly to Fig. 496, the mold 24090 can include a cavity 24091 defined by the side walls 24092 and a lower end wall 24093. With reference to Fig. 497, the end wall 24093 may comprise an opening 24094 that can be configured to receive one end of the longitudinal capsule 23824 and hold the capsule 23824 in a vertical position, as illustrated in Fig. 498. After that, with reference now to Fig. 499, the open side of the cavity 24091 can be closed and / or sealed by a cover 24095 so that the material comprising the body of the compensator 23822 can be poured in the cavity 24091 through an open end of the mold 24090. After the material comprising the body of the compensator has been solidified, cured, and / or lyophilized, for example lo, the fabric thickness compensator 23820 can be removed from the 24090 mold.

Referring now to FIG. 501, a staple cartridge 24100 may comprise a cartridge body 24110, a tissue thickness compensator pad 24170 positioned against a surface of cover 24111 of the cartridge body 24110, and a fabric thickness compensator 24120 positioned on the top of the fabric thickness compensator pad 24170. The fabric thickness compensator 24120 and the tissue thickness compensator pad 24170, together or separately, they can compensate for variations in the thickness of the fabric captured within the staples, such as staples 21330 (FIG. 504), eg, fired from staple cartridge 24100. With reference primarily to FIGS. 501 and 502, the pad of the compensator 24170 may comprise a lower surface 24171 configured to abut the cover surface 24111 and, further, a projection or coupling rail 24174 extending from the lower surface 24171 which can be configured to be received in a manner secure within a knife slot 24114 defined in the cartridge body 24110. The pad of the compensator 24170 may further comprise a plurality of packages 24172 which may extend transversely through the pad of the compensator 24170. For example, each of the packs 24172 can be defined along a transverse axis that is transverse to and / or perpendicular to a longitudinal axis defined by the knife slot 24114, as illustrated in Fig. 505. The pad of the compensator 24170 can comprise a plurality of layers between which the packets 24172 can be defined. For example, the layers may be comprised of PDS and / or collagen, for example. Each 24172 package can be configured to storing one or more drugs in this, such as doxlcycline, a coagulant, and / or an antimicrobial material, for example.

Referring again to FIG. 504, the tissue thickness compensator pad 24170 can be positioned relative to the body of the cartridge 24110 so that the packs 24172 overlap the staple pockets 21312 defined in the cartridge body 24110. More particularly, each package 24172 can be positioned and positioned so as to extend between the staple legs 21332 of a staple 21330. The pad of the compensator 24170 can comprise a plurality of openings and / or through holes that can be configured to receive the ends of the stapler. staples 21330, for example. These through holes can be positioned adjacent to the packages 24172, for example. As the staples 21330 move from a non-fired position to a fired position, as illustrated in Fig. 504, the staples 21330 can be configured to capture the packages 24172 therein. For example, staples 21330 and packs 24172 can be configured and positioned so that packs 24172 are not pierced or broken while staples 21330 are fired. In such cases, the packs 24172 can provide an elastic or compressive pressure to the tissue T captured within the staples 21330 and can occupy the gaps between the tissue T and the staples 21330, for example. Referring again to Fig. 505, packages 24172 may be broken by cutting member 21380 as cutting member 21380 is advanced through the cutting member 21380. blade groove 24114 defined in the body of the cartridge 24110, the tissue T, and / or the pad of the compensator 24170. The reader will note that the tissue thickness compensator 24120 is not shown in Figs. 504 and 505. Various embodiments are contemplated in which the staple cartridge 24100 includes the tissue thickness compensator pad 24170 and not the tissue thickness compensator 24120 while, alternatively, with reference now to FIG. 506, the cartridge of staples 24100 may include both the tissue thickness compensator pad 24170 and the tissue thickness compensator 24120, for example.

An alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge is illustrated in Fig. 507. According to the invention, a circular staple cartridge 24200 may comprise a circular cartridge body 24210 that includes a plurality of staple pockets 21312 placed in concentric circles, for example. For example, the staple cartridge 24200 may further comprise a circular weave thickness compensator pad 24270 positioned on the cartridge body 24210, wherein the pad compensator 24270 may comprise the packs 24272 extending radially outwardly, for example. Similar to the above, the packages 24272 may extend in directions that overlap the staple pockets 21312 so that the packages 24272 may extend between the legs of the staples 21330 positioned within the staple pockets 21312. Similar also to the above , staples 21330 can configured to capture the packages 24272 in these when staples 21330 are fired from staple cartridge 24200.

Referring now to FIG. 518, a staple cartridge 24300 may include a cartridge body 24310 and a tissue thickness compensator 24320 that includes a compensator body 24322 and a plurality of tubular members 24324 positioned within the compensator body 24322 For example, the staple cartridge 24300 may further comprise a layer or sheet of the fabric thickness compensator, 24370, for example, positioned intermediate the tissue thickness compensator 24320 and the body of the cartridge 24310. Referring now to Fig. 508, a plurality of staple cartridge 24300 can be manufactured simultaneously by using a mold 24390. The mold 24390 can include a plurality of cavities 24391 which can each be configured to receive a cartridge body 24310 therein, as shown in Figs. illustrated in Fig. 509. After that, one or more large sheets of material comprising the layer thickness compensator layer 24370 can be placed The mold 24390 may include a plurality of upwardly extending support pins or terminals 24392, wherein the sheets 24370 may be positioned against the terminals 24392 and then pushed downward so that the terminals 24392 can pierce the sheets 24370 as illustrated in Figs. 510 and 512. Referring now to Figs. 511 and 513, a tube or elongated tubes 24324 can be wound around and between terminals 24392 so that the tube 24324 passes over each body of the cartridge 24310 at least once. The tube 24324 can be wound around and between the terminals 24392 so that the tube 24324 passes over each body of the cartridge 24310 six times, for example. The tube 24324 can be allowed to rest on the sheets 24370 while, the tube 24324 can be wound tightly around and between the terminals 24392 so that the tube 24324 is tensioned and can be suspended above the sheets 24370. Once the tube 24324 has been properly positioned, with reference mainly to Fig. 514, a material comprising the body of the compensator 24322 can be poured into the mold 24390 at the top of the sheets 24370. The sheets 24370 can be configured to protect or mask the Cartridge bodies 24310 and may prevent the body material of the compensator 24322 from entering the staple pockets 21312 defined in the cartridge bodies 24310, for example. According to the invention, a sufficient amount of body material of the compensator 24322 can be poured into the mold so that the material of the body of the compensator 24322 covers the elongated tube 24322.

In addition to the foregoing, the body material of the compensator 24322 can then be cured, solidified and / or lyophilized, for example, to form fabric thickness compensators 24320 on top of the cartridge bodies 24310. After that, with reference now to Fig. 515, a cutting die 24395 can be used to cut the body material of the compensator 24322, the sheets of the thickness compensator of fabric 24370, and elongated tube 24322. Referring now to Fig. 516, the cutting die 24395 may comprise a plurality of cutting blades 24396 that can be configured to individualize and separate the fabric thickness compensators 24320 and the sheets of the Fabric thickness compensator 24370 with respect to each other. The cutting die 24395 may include a plurality of voids 24397 that can be configured to remove any excess material between the individualized fabric thickness compensators 24320 and the sheets of the fabric thickness compensator 24370, as illustrated in FIG. 517. The cutting die 24935, and / or any other suitable die, may comprise one or more heating elements, for example, which can be configured to seal the ends and / or edges of the fabric thickness compensators 24320. The tube 24324 can Fill with one or more fluids. In such cases, the cutting blades 24396 can be configured to cut the tube 24324 and, at the same time, seal the ends of the tube portions contained within the tissue thickness compensator 24320. After that, the plurality of staple cartridge 24300 can be removed from the mold.

Referring now to FIGS. 519 and 520, a staple cartridge 24400 may comprise a cartridge body 24410 that can be configured to removably store a plurality of staples therein. Additionally, the staple cartridge 24400 may further comprise a fabric thickness compensator 24420. The fabric thickness compensator 24420 may include a composite compensator body of a plurality. of layers 24422, wherein the layers 24422 may be comprised of a cellulose film, for example. As illustrated in Fig. 521a the material 24424 can be positioned between two or more adjacent layers 24422 where the material 24424 can be separated from the adjacent layers 24422 from each other. The material 24424 may comprise a biomedical polyblend extrusion and, the material 24424 may comprise a hemostatic material, an anti-inflammatory material, and / or an antibiotic material, for example. Referring now to Fig. 521, the material 24424 can be applied to a layer 24422 by a dispenser 24490 in a wave pattern, for example, wherein the wave pattern can be configured so that the material 24424 can be positioned on one or more staple cavities defined in the body of the cartridge 24410. In such cases, the material 24424 can be captured within the staples extruded from the staple pockets and provide an elastic pressing force to the tissue also captured within the staples. In any case, one or more of the layers 24422 can be vacuum formed and / or heat sealed, for example, on the material 24424 to create the fabric thickness compensator 24420. The fabric thickness compensator 22420 can then be cut to length. Various embodiments are contemplated in which a fabric thickness compensator 22420 is positioned against the cover surface of a staple cartridge and the other fabric thickness compensator 22420 is positioned against the anvil.

Referring now to Fig. 524, a staple cartridge 24600 may comprise one or more fabric thickness compensators 24620 positioned on a cartridge body 24610. With reference primarily to FIG. 523, each fabric thickness compensator 24620 may comprise a plurality of layers 24622 and a compressible or deployable member 24624 positioned between the layers 24622. The deployable member 24624 may comprise a corrugated member that includes a plurality of cavities defined in this, where one or more medications can be stored inside the cavities. For example, a first medicament may be placed within the cavities in a first side of the corrugated member and a second medicament may be placed within the cavities in a second side of the corrugated member, for example. The fabric thickness compensator 24620 can be formed when the layers 24622 and the compressible member 24624 are compressed together by the rollers 24590, for example. Referring now to Fig. 522, a fabric thickness compensator 24520 can be formed from a tube of material that is rolled into a partially flattened shape by rollers 24590, for example. With reference now to Figs. 525 and 526, the staples 21330 positioned within the body of the cartridge 24610 can be ejected therefrom so that the staples 21330 can capture at least a portion of a tissue thickness compensator 24620 therein. In such cases, the compressible member 24624 can be configured to apply an elastic pressing force against the tissue T that has also been captured within the staples 21330. The layers 24622 of the fabric thickness compensator 24620 can also be configured to apply a force of elastic pressure against tissue T. Staples 21330 they can pierce the cavities of corrugated member 24624 and release the one or more drugs contained therein.

The tissue thickness compensators described above can include substances in these. The substances may include coagulants, medications, and / or anti-inflammatories, for example. The substances may be liquids, but may also take other forms, such as solids and / or gels, for example. For surgical devices that include such tissue thickness compensators, it may be advantageous for the surgical device to include the elements directing the substance out of the tissue thickness compensators. For example, the substance can be directed from the fabric thickness compensators to the broken and stapled tissue. In another example, a first tissue thickness compensator may include a first substance and a second thickness compensator may include a second substance, wherein the first and second substances may be mixed by the surgical device. As another example, the substances can be directed away from one another, toward a staple cartridge, and / or toward an anvil of the surgical device, for example.

Figs. 390 to 391 illustrate a surgical stapling system including a cutting blade 19000 comprising a cutting edge 19016, a staple cartridge 19002, an anvil 19008, a first tissue thickness compensator 19004 positioned in the staple cartridge 19002, and a second fabric thickness compensator 19006 positioned on the anvil 19008. In use, the 19000 cutting blade is moved distally in the direction of arrow D to cut the tissue of patient T and the first and second fabric thickness compensators 19004 and 19006. The first tissue thickness compensator 19004 comprises a substance S contained therein and the second thickness compensator of fabric 19006 comprises a substance S 'contained therein. The first fabric thickness compensator 19004 includes a coating that includes substance S therein. The coating may include a film of material that is opened by the cutting sheet 19000 that cuts the film, where the substance S is released when the film is opened. The second fabric thickness compensator 19006 can include a similar coating, and the second substance S 'can be released when the coating of the second fabric thickness compensator 19006 is opened by the cutting blade 19000. As the knife 19000 moves distally, the guides 19030 and 19022 can direct or displace the substances S and S 'of the first and second tissue thickness compensators 19004 and 19006, respectively. For example, the substances S and S 'can be directed towards the broken tissue T. The blade 19000 can be coupled to a rod 19012, which, in turn, can be connected to a drive mechanism that moves the blade 19000 in the distal direction D and in a proximal direction indicated by the arrow P.

A guide 19030 can direct the substance S of the first fabric thickness compensator 19004 towards the broken tissue T. An exact reflection of the guide 19030 can be positioned on an opposite face of the knife 19000. The guide 19030 can include two protruding portions raised 19032 and 19034 that define a C channel between these. A distal end 19035 of the C-channel can be positioned proximate the first tissue thickness compensator 19004 and a proximal end 19037 of the C-channel can be positioned close to the tissue T when the surgical stapler is positioned against the T-tissue. In use, as the cutting blade 19000 moves in the distal direction D, substance S from the first tissue thickness compensator 19004 enters channel C at distal end 19035, flows through channel C, and exits channel C at the end proximal 19037 next to tissue T.

A guide 19022 can direct the substance S 'from the second tissue thickness compensator 19006 to the broken tissue T. The guide 19022 includes a protrusion 19025 with an inclined surface 19023. As shown in Fig. 390, the protrusion 19025 can piercing or cutting the second tissue thickness compensator 19006 to release substance S '. As the knife 19000 moves distally D, the inclined surface 19025 can direct the substance S 'towards the tissue T.

Substances S and S 'can be mixed as they are directed towards tissue T. Substances S and S' may be different and may react when mixed. For example, substances S and S 'can react chemically when they are mixed to form a new substance S "The new substance S" can be, for example, a medicament, an antibiotic, a coagulant, and / or any other suitable type of substance, after the 19000 blade has been properly advanced in the distal direction D, the blade 19000 can return by the proximal movement P, wherein the proximal movement of the blade 19000 can further mix the substances S and S '.

Alternatively, guides 19022 and 19030 can be configured to direct substances S and S 'away from tissue T. For example, guide 19030 can be configured to direct substance S toward staple cartridge 19002, and guide 19022 can be configured to direct the substance S 'towards the anvil 19008. Such an arrangement can be advantageous, for example, if the first fabric thickness compensator 19004 is fastened to the staple cartridge 19002 by an adhesive in a 19005 joint, for example, and if the second compensator fabric thickness 19906 is fastened to anvil 19008 by an adhesive at a junction 19007, for example. The substances S and S 'can dissolve or neutralize the adhesives, by thus releasing at least partially the first and second fabric thickness compensators 19004 and 19006 of the staple cartridge 19002 and the anvil 19008, respectively.

FIG.392 shows an alternative guide 19030 'in which a channel C' is defined by a depression or groove in the surface of the blade 19014. The channel C 'may comprise a single channel or may comprise multiple channels.

Figs. 393 to 396 illustrate another surgical stapling system including a cutting blade 19060 and a cutting edge 19056, a first tissue thickness compensator 19004, and a second tissue thickness compensator 19006. The blade 19060 may include a first protrusion 19062 on a first side of the blade 19060, where the first protrusion 19062 defines a hole 19064 that passes from the first side of the blade 19060 to a second side of the blade 19060. The first protrusion 19062 and the first hole 19064 can be aligned with the first tissue thickness compensator 19004. In use, as the blade 19060 moves distally, at least a portion of the substance S in the first tissue thickness compensator 19004 can pass through the first hole 19064. Optionally, the contours of the first protrusion 19062 can direct the substance S to a second side of blade 19060 and / or towards tissue T.

The blade 19060 may further include a second protrusion 19066 on the second side of the blade 19060, wherein the second protrusion defines a hole 19068 that passes from the second side of the blade 19060 to the first side of the blade 19060. The second protrusion 19066 and the second hole may be aligned with the second fabric thickness compensator 19006. In use, as the knife 19060 moves distally, at least a portion of the substance S 'in the tissue thickness compensator 19006 may pass through the second orifice 19068. Optionally, the contours of the second protrusion 19066 can direct the substance S 'to the first side of the blade 19060 and / or to the tissue T.

With reference mainly to Figs. 393 and 394, stem 19059 may include surface elements, such as, for example, dimples 19070 which may increase turbulence and / or displacement of substances S and S '. This turbulence and / or increased displacement can cause a greater portion of the substances S and S 'to enter contact one with respect to another, for example. The dimples 19070 can be positioned proximally with respect to the holes 19064 and 19068. When the blade 19000 is advanced distally, the dimples 19070 can be downstream of the holes 19064 and 19068; However, when the blade 19000 retracts proximally, the dimples 19070 may be upstream of the holes 19064 and 19068.

Figs. 397 to 399 illustrate another surgical stapler including a blade 19100 and a cutting edge 19108, a first tissue thickness compensator 19120, and a second tissue thickness compensator 19122. The first tissue thickness compensator 19120 may comprise a first substance S and a second substance S '. For example, the first substance S can be contained in a first coating, described above. The second substance S 'may be transported in a second coating which may be close to and / or surrounding the first coating. The second fabric thickness compensator 19122 may comprise a third substance S ". The second fabric thickness compensator 1922 may comprise a fourth substance S '". The third substance S "and the fourth substance S '" can be transported in the coatings, similar to the coatings described above. The blade 19100 may include a textured surface 19110 on a first side 19102 of the blade 19100, in which the substances S, S ', S ", and S'" may propagate. Another textured surface can be located on a second opposite side (not shown) of the blade 19100. The textured surface 19110 can comprise a series of interrupting elements, such as, for example, grooves that are cut, marked, engraved and / or otherwise formed on the first surface 19102. The interrupting elements may further comprise a series of raised elements, such as protruding portions raised on the first surface 19102, for example. As shown in Figs. 397 to 399, the interruption elements of the textured surface 19110 may include a regular repeating pattern of the interrupting elements. The interruption elements can also be placed in a non-repetition pattern or placed randomly.

The blade 19100 can also include a second surface 19104 which is positioned proximally relative to the first surface 19102. The second surface 19104 may be raised relative to the first surface 19102. A joint between the first surface 19102 and the second surface 19104 may define a third surface 19106, wherein the third The surface 19106 can be positioned at an angle relative to a longitudinal axis of the blade 19100. The movement of the blade 19100 in the distal direction D can result in a first end 19107 of the third surface 19106 being driven further from a second end. 19109 of the third surface 19106. As a result, as shown in Fig. 399, the third surface 19106 may cause the substances S and S 'from the first tissue thickness compensator 19120 to be directed toward the broken tissue T. A surface 19105, similar to second surface 19104, can be located on the second opposite side of blade 19100.

The blade 19100 shown in Figs. 397 to 399 can be used in a surgical device that includes the first and second tissue thickness compensators 19004 and 19006 shown in Figs. 390 to 396. As described above, the textured surface 19110 can distribute the substances S and S 'from the respective fabric thickness compensators 19004 and 19006 on the first surface 19102 of the blade so that they can be mixed and can be positioned near the T. fabric The blade 19100 shown in Figs. 397 to 399 can also be used in a surgical device that includes the first tissue thickness compensator 19120 and the second tissue thickness compensator 19122 shown in Figs. 397 to 399. The first fabric thickness compensator 19120 may include an inner portion 19121 that includes a first substance S. When the first fabric thickness compensator 19120 is cut by the cutting edge 19108 of the knife 19100, the substance S can be released from the inner portion 19121. As the blade 19100 moves relative to the tissue thickness compensator 19120, the substance S can propagate on the textured surface 19110 and the third surface 19106 can direct the substance S towards the tissue T. As described above, the first tissue thickness compensator 19120 can include a second substance S 'outside the portion interior 19121. When the first fabric thickness compensator 19120 is cut by the cutting edge 19108 of the blade 19100, both the first substance S and the second substance S 'can be distributed on the textured surface 19110. distribution on the textured surface 19110 may cause the first substance S and the second substance S 'to mix. When mixed, the first substance S and the second substance S 'can react, such as, for example, react chemically to form a new substance. The third surface 19106 can direct the first substance S and the second substance S 'towards the tissue. As described above, the second fabric thickness compensator 19122 may include a third substance S ". When the second fabric thickness compensator 19122 is cut by the cutting edge 19108 of the knife 19100, the third substance S "can be distributed on the textured surface 19110, where it can be mixed with the first substance S and / or the second substance S 'and directed towards the fabric T. As described above, the second fabric thickness compensator 19122 can include a fourth substance S "\ When the second fabric thickness compensator 19122 is cut by the cutting edge 19108 of the knife 19100, the third substance S "and the fourth substance S" can be distributed on the textured surface 19110, where they can be mixed with the first substance S, the second substance S 'and / or each of the others and can be directed towards the tissue T.

In addition to the above, a fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of a biocompatible material. The biocompatible material, such as a foam, may comprise adhesive agents, surfactants, fillers, crosslinking agents, pigments, dyes, antioxidants and other stabilizers and / or combinations thereof to provide the desired properties to the material. A biocompatible foam may comprise a surfactant. The surfactant can be applied to the surface of the material and / or dispersed within the material. Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, the surfactant applied to the biocompatible material can reduce the surface tension of the fluids that make contact with the material. For example, the surfactant can reduce the surface tension of the water that makes contact with the material to accelerate the penetration of water into the material. Water can act as a catalyst. The surfactant can increase the hydrophilic capacity of the material.

The surfactant may comprise an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant and / or a nonionic surfactant. Surfactant examples include, but are not limited to, polyacrylic acid, metallose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, propylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether, polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, sorbitan monolaurate of polyoxyethylene, polypropylene glycol stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, dialkylphenoxy poly (ethyleneoxy) ethanol, and polyoxamers, and combinations thereof. The surfactant may comprise a copolymer of polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol. The surfactant may comprise a phospholipid surfactant. The phospholipid surfactant can provide antibacterial stabilizing properties and / or disperse other materials in the biocompatible material.

The tissue thickness compensator may comprise at least one medicament. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise one or more of the natural materials, nonsynthetic materials and / or synthetic materials described in the present description. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biocompatible foam comprising gelatin, collagen, hyaluronic acid, regenerated oxidized cellulose, polyglycolic acid, polycaprolactone, polylactic acid, polydioxanone, polyhydroxyalkanoate, polyglecapronate, and combinations thereof. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a film comprising the at least one medicament. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biodegradable film comprising the at least one medicament. The medicament may comprise a liquid, gel, and / or powder. The medicaments may comprise anticancer agents, such as, for example, cisplatin, mitomycin and / or adriamycin.

The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biodegradable material to provide controlled elution of the at least one medicament as the biodegradable material degrades. The biodegradable material can be degraded, it can decompose or it can lose its structural integrity, when the biodegradable material makes contact with an activator, such as, for example, an activating fluid. The activating fluid may comprise saline solution or any other electrolyte solution, for example. The biodegradable material may come into contact with the activating fluid by conventional techniques, including, but not limited to, spraying, dipping, and / or brushing. In use, for example, a surgeon may immerse an end effector and / or a staple cartridge that it comprises the tissue thickness compensator comprising the at least one medicament in an activating fluid comprising a saline solution, such as sodium chloride, calcium chloride and / or potassium chloride. The tissue thickness compensator can release the medication as the tissue thickness compensator degrades. The drug elution of the tissue thickness compensator can be characterized by a rapid initial elution rate and a slower sustained elution rate.

According to the invention, a tissue thickness compensator, for example, may be comprised of a biocompatible material which may comprise an oxidizing agent. The oxidizing agent may be an organic peroxide and / or an inorganic peroxide. Examples of oxidizing agents may include, but are not limited to, hydrogen peroxide, urea peroxide, calcium peroxide and magnesium peroxide, and sodium percarbonate. The oxidizing agent may comprise oxidizing agents based on peroxide compound and hypohalide-based oxidizing agents, such as, for example, hydrogen peroxide, hypochlorous acid, hypochlorites, hypocodites, and percarbonates. The oxidizing agent may comprise alkali metal chlorites, hypochlorites and perborates, such as, for example, sodium chlorite, sodium hypochlorite and sodium perborate. The oxidizing agent may comprise vanadate. The oxidizing agent may comprise ascorbic acid. The oxidizing agent may comprise an active oxygen generator. According to the invention, a tissue frame may comprise the biocompatible material comprising an oxidizing agent.

The biocompatible material may comprise a liquid, gel, and / or powder. The oxidizing agent may comprise microparticles and / or nanoparticles, for example. For example, the oxidizing agent can be ground into microparticles and / or nanoparticles. The oxidizing agent can be incorporated into the biocompatible material by suspending the oxidizing agent in a polymer solution. The oxidizing agent can be incorporated into the biocompatible material during the lyophilization process. After lyophilization, the oxidizing agent can be coupled to the cell walls of the biocompatible material to interact with the tissue upon contacting. The oxidizing agent may not chemically bond to the biocompatible material. A dry percarbonate powder can be incorporated into a biocompatible foam to provide a prolonged biological effect by the slow release of oxygen. A dry percarbonate powder can be incorporated into a polymer fiber in a non-woven structure to provide a prolonged biological effect by the slow release of oxygen. The biocompatible material may comprise an oxidizing agent and a medicament, such as, for example, doxyelin and ascorbic acid.

The biocompatible material may comprise a rapid release oxidizing agent and / or a slower sustained release oxidizing agent. The elution of the oxidizing agent from the biocompatible material can be characterized by a rapid initial elution rate and a slower sustained elution rate. The oxidizing agent can generate oxygen when the oxidizing agent makes contact with the body fluid, such as, for example, example, water. Examples of bodily fluids may include, but are not limited to, blood, plasma, peritoneal fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, lymphatic fluid, synovial fluid, vitreous fluid, saliva, gastrointestinal luminal contents, and / or bile. Without wishing to be bound to any particular theory, the oxidizing agent can reduce cell death, improve tissue viability and / or maintain the mechanical strength of the tissue to the tissue that can be damaged during cutting and / or stapling.

The biocompatible material may comprise at least one microparticle and / or nanoparticle. The biocompatible material may comprise one or more of the natural materials, nonsynthetic materials, and synthetic materials described in the present disclosure. The biocompatible material may comprise particles having an average diameter of about 10 nm to about 100 nm and / or about 10 mm to about 100 mm, such as, for example, 45-50 nm and / or 45-50 pm. The biocompatible material may comprise biocompatible foam comprising at least one microparticle and / or nanoparticle incorporated therein. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle may not chemically bind to the biocompatible material. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle can provide controlled release of the drug. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle may comprise at least one medicament. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle may comprise a hemostatic agent, an antimicrobial agent and / or an oxidizing agent, for example. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a foam biocompatible comprising a hemostatic agent comprising oxidized regenerated cellulose, an antimicrobial agent comprising doxyelin and / or gentamicin, and / or an oxidizing agent comprising a percarbonate. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle can provide controlled release of the drug for up to three days, for example.

The microparticle and / or nanoparticle can be incorporated into the biocompatible material during a manufacturing process. For example, a biocompatible polymer, such as, for example, a PGA / PCL, may come into contact with a solvent, such as, for example, dioxane to form a mixture. The biocompatible polymer can be ground to form the particles. The dried particles, with or without ORC particles, can be contacted with the mixture to form a suspension. The suspension can be lyophilized to form a biocompatible foam comprising PGA / PCL having dry particles and / or ORC particles incorporated therein.

The fabric thickness compensators or layers described in the present description may be comprised of an absorbent polymer, for example. A tissue thickness compensator may be comprised of foam, film, fibrous tissue, non-fibrous PGA tissue, PGA / PCL (poly (glycolic acid-co-caprolactone)), PLA / PCL (poly (lactic acid-co-polycaprolactone) )), PLLA / PCL, PGA / TMC (poly (glycolic acid-co-trimethylene carbonate)), PDS, PEPBO or other absorbable polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polyorthoesters, polyanhydrides, polyesteramides, and / or polyoxaesters, for example. According to the invention, a compensator of Tissue thickness may be comprised of PGA / PLA (poly (glycolic acid-co-lactic acid)) and / or PDS / PLA (poly (p-dioxanone-co-lactic acid)), for example. According to the invention, a fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of an organic material, for example. A tissue thickness compensator may be comprised of carboxymethylcellulose, sodium alginate, cross-linked hyaluronic acid and / or regenerated oxidized cellulose, for example. According to the invention, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a durometer in the ranges of 3-7 Shore A (30-50 Shore 00) with a maximum stiffness of 15 Shore A (65 Shore 00), for example. A fabric thickness compensator can be subjected to a 40% compression under load of 13 N (3 Ibf), compression of 60% under load of 27 N (6 Ibf), and / or compression of 80% under load of 89 N (20 Ibf), for example. One or more gases, such as air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and / or oxygen, for example, can be bubbled through and / or contained within the tissue thickness compensator. A fabric thickness compensator may comprise beads in it comprising between about 50% and about 75% of the stiffness of the material comprising the fabric thickness compensator.

According to the invention, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise hyaluronic acid, nutrients, fibrin, thrombin, platelet-rich plasma, sulfasalazine (Azulfidine®-5ASA + sulfapyridine diazo bond)) - colon prodrug-bacterial (azorreductase), mesalamine (5ASA with different prodrug configurations for delayed release), asacol® (5ASA + Coated Eudragit-S - pH> 7 (coating solution)), Pentasa® (5ASA + coated ethylcellulose - time-dependent / pH-dependent slow release), Mesasal® (5ASA + coated Eudragit-L - pH> 6 ), olsalazine (5ASA + 5ASA -bacterial colon (azorreductase)), balsalazide (5ASA + 4 aminobenzoyl-B-alanine) - bacterial colon (azorreductase)), granulated mesalamine, lialda (retardation and SR formulation of mesalamine), H PL-004 (mixture of herbs that can inhibit TNF-alpha, interleukin-1 beta, and nuclear activation kappa B), CCX282-B (oral chemokine receptor antagonist that interferes with trafficking of T lymphocytes in intestinal mucosa), rifaximin (broad-spectrum antibiotic not absorbed), infliximab, murine chemotherapy (monoclonal antibody directed against TNF-alpha-approved for the reduction of signs / symptoms and maintain clinical remission in adult / pediatric patients with disease moderate / severe luminal and Cr fistulizing ohn that have had an inadequate response to conventional therapy), adalimumab, human beings in total lgG1 (anti-TNF-alpha monoclonal antibody -approved for the reduction of signs / symptoms of Crohn's disease, and for induction and maintenance of clinical remission in adult patients with active moderate / severe Crohn's disease with inadequate response to conventional therapies, or who become intolerant to infliximab), Certolizumab pegoll, antihumanized-TNF FAB '(monoclonal antibody fragment linked to polyethylene glycol -approved for the reduction of signs / symptoms of Crohn's disease and for the induction and maintenance of the response in adult patients moderate / severe disease with inadequate response to conventional therapies), Natalizumab, first inhibitor non-TNF-alpha (biological compound approved for Crohn's disease), humanized monoclonal antibody IgG4 (directed against alpha-4 integrin-approved by the FDA to induce and maintain clinical response and remission in patients with moderate / severe disease with evidence of inflammation and who have had an inadequate response to or are unable to tolerate conventional Crohn's and TNF-alpha inhibitors), concomitant immunomodulators potentially given with Infliximab, azathioprine 6-mercaptopurine (inhibitor) of the synthesis of purine - prodrug), methotrexate (it is coupled enzyme dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) that participates in the synthesis of tetrahydrofolate, inhibits all the purine synthesis), allopurinol and thioprine therapy, PPI, H2 for the suppression of acid to protect the healing line, C-Diff - flagil, vancomycin (fecal translocation treatment; probiotics; blation of normal endoluminal flora), and / or rifaximin (treatment of bacterial overgrowth (particular hepatic encephalopathy); not absorbed in the Gl tract with the action of the intraluminal bacteria), for example.

As described in the present description, a fabric thickness compensator can compensate for variations in the thickness of tissue that is captured within staples ejected from a staple cartridge and / or contained within a staple line, for example. Stated another way, certain staples within a staple line can capture the thick portions of the fabric while the other staples within the staple line can capture the fine portions of the fabric. In such circumstances, the Fabric thickness compensator can assume different heights or thicknesses within the staples and apply a compressive force to the tissue captured within the staples regardless of whether the captured tissue is thick or thin. According to the invention, a fabric thickness compensator can compensate for variations in fabric hardness. For example, certain staples within a staple line can capture the highly compressible portions of the tissue while the other staples within the staple line can capture portions of the tissue that are less compressible. In such circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator can be configured to assume a smaller height within the staples that have captured the fabric having lower compressibility, or greater hardness and, consequently, a larger height within the staples than they have captured the fabric that has a higher compressibility, or lower hardness, for example. In any case, a fabric thickness compensator, regardless of whether the variations in fabric thickness and / or variations in fabric hardness are compensated, for example, may be referred to as a "buffer" and / or as a 'compensator', for example.

The devices described in the present description can be designed to be discarded after a single use, or they can be designed to be used multiple times. In any case, however, the device can be repaired to reuse it at least after use. The repair may include any combination of disassembly steps of the device, followed by cleaning or replacement of particular parts, and its rear assembly. Particularly, the device can be disassembled, and any number of parts or particular parts of the device can be selectively replaced or removed in any combination. After cleaning and / or replacement of particular parts, the device can be reassembled for later use in a reconditioning center, or by a surgical team, immediately before a surgical procedure. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that for the reconditioning of a device a variety of techniques can be used to disassemble, clean / replace, and reassemble. Both the use of such techniques and the reconditioned device are within the scope of the present application.

Preferably, the invention described in the present description will be processed before surgery. First, a new or used instrument is obtained and cleaned, if necessary. The instrument can be sterilized afterwards. In a sterilization technique, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic bag or TYVEK. Then, the container and instrument are placed in a radiation field that can penetrate the container, such as gamma radiation, x-rays or high-energy electrons. The radiation kills the bacteria in the instrument and in the container. The sterilized instrument can then be stored in a sterile container. The sealed container keeps the instrument sterile until it opens at the medical center.

Any patent, publication or other description material, total or partial, which is said to be incorporated herein by reference Description is incorporated in the present description only to the extent that the incorporated materials are not in conflict with the definitions, statements or other existing description material that is set forth in the present description. As such, and to the extent necessary, the description as set forth, explicitly, in the present description replaces any conflicting material incorporated in the present invention as a reference. Any material, or portion thereof, that is incorporated by reference in the present description, but which is in conflict with the definitions, statements, or other embodied disclosed material set forth in this description will only be incorporated to the extent that no conflict arises between that incorporated material and the existing described material.

While it has been described that this invention has illustrative designs, the present invention can be modified further provided that those modifications are within the spirit and scope of the description. Therefore, this application is intended to cover any variation, use or adaptation of the invention provided that they are based on the general principles indicated therein. In addition, this application is intended to cover all deviations of the present invention that may arise within the practice known or customary in the matter to which the present invention pertains.

Claims

NOVELTY OF THE INVENTION CLAIMS

- A disposable loading unit for a surgical stapler, the surgical stapler comprising an anvil, the disposable loading unit comprising: a housing unit; a staple cartridge unit, wherein the staple cartridge unit comprises a staple cartridge body defining a staple cover and a slot, wherein the staple cartridge unit further comprises a tissue thickness compensator disposed adjacent to the staple cartridge unit. to the staple cover, and wherein the tissue thickness compensator comprises a substance therein; a knife unit positioned within the housing unit and arranged to move relative to the staple cartridge unit along the slot, the knife unit comprises: a cutting surface configured to cut the tissue thickness compensator captured between the staple cartridge unit and an anvil of the surgical stapler when the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit; and an interacting surface disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the interaction surface is configured to direct at least a portion of the substance within the tissue thickness compensator as the blade unit moves relative to the cartridge unit.
2. - The disposable loading unit according to claim 1, further characterized in that the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second opposing surface to the first surface, and wherein the first surface comprises the interaction surface.
3. - The disposable loading unit according to claim 2, further characterized in that the interaction surface comprises a raised ridge on the first surface of the blade.
4 - . 4 - The disposable loading unit according to claim 2 or claim 3, further characterized in that the interaction surface comprises a channel in the first surface of the blade.
5 - . 5 - The disposable loading unit according to any of claims 2 to 4, further characterized in that the interaction surface is a first interaction surface; wherein the second surface of the blade unit further comprises a second interaction surface disposed relative to the cutting surface, the second interaction surface is configured to direct at least a portion of the substance within the tissue thickness compensator when the blade unit moves relative to the cartridge unit.
6. - The disposable loading unit according to claim 5, further characterized in that the second surface of interaction comprises a raised ridge on the second surface of the blade.
7. - The disposable loading unit according to claim 5 or claim 6, further characterized in that the second interaction surface comprises a channel in the second surface of the blade.
8. - The disposable loading unit according to any of claims 1 to 4, further characterized in that the tissue thickness compensator is a first tissue thickness compensator, wherein the substance is a first substance, and wherein the surface of interaction is a first interaction surface, and wherein the disposable loading unit further comprises: a second tissue thickness compensator configured to be arranged adjacent to the anvil of the surgical stapler, wherein the second tissue thickness compensator comprises a second substance in this; and a second interaction surface disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the second interaction surface is configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance within the second tissue thickness compensator when the knife unit moves with relation to the cartridge unit.
9. - The disposable loading unit according to claim 8, further characterized in that the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the blade comprises the cutting surface, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second surface opposite the first surface, wherein the first and second interaction surfaces are arranged on the first surface of the blade, and wherein the second surface comprises: a third interaction surface arranged relative to the cutting surface and configured for directing at least a portion of the first substance within the first fabric thickness compensator when the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit; and a fourth interaction surface disposed relative to the cutting surface and configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance into the second tissue thickness compensator when the knife unit moves relative to the cartridge unit.
10. - The disposable loading unit according to claim 8 or claim 9, further characterized in that the first substance is different from the second substance.
11. - The disposable loading unit according to any of the preceding claims, further characterized in that the blade unit additionally comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, and wherein the blade comprises a textured surface.
12. - A surgical stapler, comprising: a handle; a trigger configured to move between a non-driven position and a driven position; a staple cartridge operatively connected to the trigger, wherein the staple cartridge defines a staple cover and one slot; an anvil operatively connected to the handle, wherein the anvil comprises at least one staple forming surface; a tissue thickness compensator disposed relative to the staple cover and the anvil, the tissue thickness compensator comprising a substance within; and a knife unit and arranged to move relative to the staple cartridge along the slot, the knife unit comprises a cutting surface configured to cut the tissue thickness compensator disposed relative to the staple cartridge and the anvil , the blade unit further comprises a guide disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the guide is configured to direct at least a portion of the substance within the tissue thickness compensator when the blade unit moves relative to the blade unit. staple cartridge.
13. - The surgical stapler according to claim 12, further characterized in that the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second surface opposite the blade. first surface, and wherein the first surface comprises the guide.
14. - The surgical stapler according to claim 13, further characterized in that the guide comprises a raised ridge on the first surface of the blade.
15. - The surgical stapler according to claim 13 or claim 14, further characterized in that the guide comprises a channel on the first surface of the blade.
16. - The surgical stapler according to any of claims 13 to 15, further characterized in that the guide is a first guide, and wherein the second surface of the blade unit further comprises: a second guide disposed relative to the cutting surface , wherein the second guide is configured to direct at least a portion of the substance within the tissue thickness compensator when the blade unit moves relative to the cartridge unit.
17. - The surgical stapler according to claim 16, further characterized in that the second guide comprises a raised ridge on the second surface of the blade.
18. - The surgical stapler according to claim 16 or claim 17, further characterized in that the second guide comprises a channel on the second surface of the blade.
19. - The surgical stapler according to any of claims 12 to 15, further characterized in that the tissue thickness compensator is a first tissue thickness compensator disposed relative to the staple cover, wherein the substance is a first substance, wherein the guide is a first guide, the surgical stapler further comprising a second tissue thickness compensator disposed relative to the anvil, the second tissue thickness compensator comprising a second substance therein, and wherein the blade unit further comprises a second guide disposed relative to the cutting surface, wherein the second guide is configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance within the second compensator of tissue thickness.
20. - The surgical stapler according to claim 19, further characterized in that the blade unit further comprises: a blade, wherein the blade defines the cutting surface, wherein the blade defines a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and wherein the first surface comprises the first guide and the second guide, and wherein the second surface comprises: a third guide disposed relative to the cutting surface and configured to direct at least a portion of the first substance within the first fabric thickness compensator when the knife unit moves relative to the staple cartridge; and a fourth guide disposed relative to the cutting surface and configured to direct at least a portion of the second substance into the second tissue thickness compensator when the blade unit moves relative to the staple cartridge.
21. - The surgical stapler according to claim 19 or claim 20, further characterized in that the first substance is different from the second substance.
22. - The surgical stapler according to any of claims 12 to 21, further characterized in that the blade unit further comprises a blade, wherein the cutting surface is defined on the blade, and wherein the blade comprises a textured surface.